FOOD CONVERSION - Exchange

PROJECT MANUAL

For Solicitation

FOOD CONVERSION

FORT BRAGG NORTH POST

BUILDING NO. 85050 FORT BRAGG, NC

AAFES PROJECT NUMBER 0530-17-000013

19 March 2018

PWBA ARCHITECTS, INC. 529 South Perry Street, Suite 15, Montgomery, AL 36104

PWBA 170704

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT DIRECTORY FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 00 01 02 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 00 01 02

PROJECT DIRECTORY

Owner: ARMY AND AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE (AAFES) Mr. T.A. Jones Project Manager, Construction Renovation Branch Real Estate Directorate (RE-CR) Army & Air Force Exchange Service 3911 South Walton Walker Dallas, TX 75236 (214) 312-2313 Office (469) 515-6865 Cell [email protected] Architect: PWBA ARCHITECTS, INC. 529 South Perry Street, Suite 15 Montgomery, AL 36104-4636 (334) 244-4990, ext 226 Mr. Edward M. Brummal, Jr., AIA, CCS, CSI [email protected] Mechanical / McCOY & HOWARD CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC.

Plumbing / 413 Main Street Fire Protection P.O. Box 581 Engineer: Mt. Vernon, IL 62864

(618) 242-0473 Mr. Charlie Calvert, P.E.

[email protected] Electrical McCOY & HOWARD CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC.

Engineer: 413 Main Street P.O. Box 581 Mt. Vernon, IL 62864

(618) 242-0473 Mr. Chip Fox, P.E.

[email protected]

END OF SECTION

mailto:[email protected]

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post TABLE OF CONTENTS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 00 01 10 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 ..............PROJECT TITLE PAGE .................................................................................................................................. 1 00 01 02 ..............PROJECT DIRECTORY .................................................................................................................................. 1 00 01 10 ..............TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................................. 3 00 01 15 ..............LIST OF DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................................... 2 00 04 04 ..............SUBSTITUTIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 1 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 ..............SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................. 6 01 10 17 ..............EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI) ..................................................................... 2 01 10 18 ..............EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) ...................................................... 2 01 10 60 ..............SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 3 01 10 60.1 .................. SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN ........................................................................................................................ 3 01 10 60.2 .................. SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN ............................................................................................. 1 01 13 00 ..............SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODES ............................................................................................................ 6 01 13 00.1 .................. WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................................................... 1 01 14 20 ..............CONSTRUCTION PHASING .......................................................................................................................... 3 01 14 50 ..............CUTTING AND PATCHING ............................................................................................................................ 2 01 22 00 ..............UNIT PRICES .............................................................................................................................................. 1 01 31 00 ..............PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ............................................................................................ 3 01 32 00 ..............CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ............................................................................................. 2 01 33 00 ..............SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................................. 3 01 33 10 ..............WEATHER TABLE ........................................................................................................................................ 1 01 35 43 ..............ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ................................................................................................................... 6 01 40 00 ..............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 3 01 50 00 ..............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................................................................................................... 7 01 58 00 ..............CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGN ......................................................................................................................... 2 01 58 00.1 .................. PREFERRED CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL .......................................................................................... 1 01 58 00.2 .................. ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL............................................................................................ 1 01 59 00 ..............FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS ........................................................................................................................ 2 01 60 00 ..............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 3 01 65 00 ..............STARTING OF SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................................. 2 01 71 00 ..............CLEANING .................................................................................................................................................. 2 01 77 00 ..............PROJECT CLOSEOUT ................................................................................................................................... 4 01 77 00.1 .................. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE INSTRUCTION ........................................................................................... 9 01 77 00.4 .................. DD FORM 1354 EXAMPLE ................................................................................................................... 2 01 78 39 ..............PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................. 3 01 91 13 ..............GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 1

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 16 ..............SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................................. 5 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 ..............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ...................................................................................................................... 12 03 35 36 ..............EXISTING FACILITY POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH ............................................................................. 7 03 35 40 ..............INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT ....................................................... 8 DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 40 00 ..............COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ................................................................................................................ 4 05 50 00 ..............METAL FABRICATIONS ................................................................................................................................ 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post 00 01 10 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ..............ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................................................................................................... 5 06 40 23 ..............INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ..................................................................................................... 3 DIVISION 07 –THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 01 50 ..............MAINTENANCE OF MEMBRANE ROOFING ................................................................................................... 2 07 92 00 ..............JOINT SEALANTS ........................................................................................................................................ 5 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 12 19 ..............STAINLESS STEEL FRAMES ......................................................................................................................... 2 08 31 13 ..............ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 21 16 ..............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................................................... 6 09 30 00 ..............TILING ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 09 51 00 ..............ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ............................................................................................................................... 3 09 65 00 ..............RESILIENT FLOORING ................................................................................................................................. 2 09 78 13 ..............STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANELS AND TRIM ................................................................................................ 2 09 90 00 ..............PAINTING ................................................................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 44 13 ..............FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES .................................................................................................................. 2 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 ..............FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)............................................................................................................. 4 11 40 00.1 .................. FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – BOSTON MARKET ................................................................................. 1

*BOSTON MARKET CUT SHEETS ................................................................................................ 72 11 40 00.2 .................. FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – QDOBA ................................................................................................. 1

*QDOBA CUT SHEETS................................................................................................................ 70 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13 ..............WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 10 ..............GENERAL PROVISIONS – PLUMBING .......................................................................................................... 6 22 05 12 ..............COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ................................................................................................ 5 22 05 23 ..............GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ......................................................................................... 4 22 05 29 ..............HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................... 5 22 07 19 ..............PLUMBING INSULATION ............................................................................................................................. 9 22 11 16 ..............DOMESTIC WATER PIPING .......................................................................................................................... 6 22 13 16 ..............SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING............................................................................................................ 5 22 13 19 ..............SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ....................................................................................................... 3 22 16 13 ..............FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING .................................................................................................................. 9 22 42 13 ..............COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES ........................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 01 00 ..............MECHANICAL – GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................................................................................................... 4 23 05 94 ..............AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING .................................................................................. 4 23 07 00 ..............MECHANICAL INSULATION ......................................................................................................................... 3 23 31 13 ..............METAL DUCTWORK ..................................................................................................................................... 3 23 33 00 ..............DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ......................................................................................................................... 3 23 34 23 ..............FANS ......................................................................................................................................................... 3 23 37 13 ..............AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ........................................................................................................................... 2 23 38 15 ..............FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................... 3 23 74 33 ..............PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, HEATING AND COOLING MAKEUP AIR CONDITIONERS ............................................. 5

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post TABLE OF CONTENTS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 00 01 10 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 60 ..............ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING .............................................................................................. 2 26 05 19 ..............BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE ....................................................................................................................... 4 26 05 26 ..............GROUNDING AND BONDING ....................................................................................................................... 3 26 05 29 ..............SUPPORTING DEVICES ............................................................................................................................... 2 26 05 33 ..............CONDUIT ................................................................................................................................................... 5 26 05 34 ..............BOXES ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 26 05 35 ..............CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES ..................................................................................................................... 2 26 05 53 ..............ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................................................... 2 26 22 00 ..............DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ......................................................................................................................... 4 26 24 16 ..............PANELBOARDS .......................................................................................................................................... 4 26 27 26 ..............WIRING DEVICES ........................................................................................................................................ 3 26 28 13 ..............FUSES ....................................................................................................................................................... 2 26 43 13 ..............SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD’S)......................................................................................................... 5 26 51 00 ..............INTERIOR LUMINAIRES ............................................................................................................................... 4 26 60 00 ..............TESTING ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 ..............FIRE ALARM ............................................................................................................................................. 10

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post LIST OF DRAWINGS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 00 01 15 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWINGS

SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE

GENERAL T001 TITLE SHEET, INDEX, VICINITY & LOCATION MAPS

BOSTON MARKET

ARCHITECTURAL B001 BOSTON MARKET EXISTING / DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN B002 BOSTON MARKET EXISTING / DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

B101 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLAN B102 BOSTON MARKET REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

B301 BOSTON MARKET SECTIONS

B401 BOSTON MARKET FINISH PLAN AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

B601 BOSTON MARKET EQUIPMENT PLAN AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE B602 BOSTON MARKET EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

PLUMBING

BP101 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLANS PLUMBING

FIRE PROTECTION BFP101 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLANS FIRE PROTECTION

MECHANICAL

BM101 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLANS MECHANICAL

ELECTRICAL BE101 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLANS LIGHTING BE201 BOSTON MARKET FLOOR PLANS POWER

QDOBA

ARCHITECTURAL Q001 QDOBA EXISTING / DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN Q002 QDOBA EXISTING / DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

Q101 QDOBA FLOOR PLAN Q102 QDOBA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

Q401 QDOBA FINISH PLAN AND SCHEDULE, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS

Q601 QDOBA EQUIPMENT PLAN AND SCHEDULE

PLUMBING

QP101 QDOBA FLOOR PLANS PLUMBING

FIRE PROTECTION QFP101 QDOBA FLOOR PLANS FIRE PROTECTION

LIST OF DRAWINGS Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post 00 01 15 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE

MECHANICAL QM101 QDOBA FLOOR PLANS MECHANICAL

ELECTRICAL

QE101 QDOBA FLOOR PLANS ELECTRICAL

COMBINED BOSTON MARKET / QDOBA

FIRE ALARM FA101 FOOD COURT FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM

ELECTRICAL

E001 BOSTON MARKET & QDOBA SYMBOLS AND SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL E002 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SUBSTITUTIONSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 00 04 04 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 00 04 04SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 CONTRACTING OFFICER'S APPROVAL

A. The contract is based on materials and methods described in the contract documents.B. The Contracting Officer will consider proposals for substitution of materials, equipment and

methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and allother information required by the Contracting Officer to evaluate the proposed substitution.

C. Do not substitute materials or equipment, unless such substitution has been specificallyapproved for this Work by the Contracting Officer.

D. All substitution requests submitted during solicitation (bid phase) must be received by theContracting Officer no later than 10 days prior to solicitation due date, in which case the Bidderwill not be liable for costs of the Contracting Officer's review.

1.02 “OR EQUAL”A. Where the phrase “or equal” or "or approved equivalent" or “or equal as approved in advance by

the Contracting Officer” occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material andequipment will be approved as equal by the Contracting Officer unless the item has beenspecifically approved for this work by the Contracting Officer.

B. The decision of the Contracting Officer shall be final.1.03 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS

A. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation duringorderly and timely progress of the Work.

B. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, notify the Contracting Officer 10days prior to receipt of proposals.

C. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could havebeen avoided by the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be borne byEXCHANGE.

1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS FOLLOWING AWARD OF CONTRACTA. Substitutions for Cause: Not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review

of submittals. The submittal must include a justification explaining the rationale for therequested substitution.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed after contract award.PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SUMMARYFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 10 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 10 00SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor,equipment, materials and incidentals necessary to perform all operations required to completethe work, all in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject tothe terms and conditions of the contract.

1.02 THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED IS LOCATED AT FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA.A. Principal Features:

1. The work to be performed in connection with this project includes, but is not necessarilylimited to the following:a. Remodeling of the existing North Post Exchange food court to provide a new Boston

Market and Qdoba retail outlets.1) The Boston Market will be located in space currently occupied by Captain D's

Seafood and a vacant space previously occupied by a Church's Chicken.2) The Qdoba will be located in space currently occupied by Anthony's Pizza.

b. Provide required fire suppression, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and fire alarmsystem upgrades and modifications to support new work.

c. Work will include new interior finishes in the Boston Market and Qdoba areas.d. Provide all other work shown on the drawings and/or described in the specifications

and miscellaneous incidental work not shown which is required for the complete workof the project.

B. The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the Contract: Cleaning up; Material and Workmanship; Accident Prevention; Protection of ExistingVegetation, Structures, Utilities and Improvements; Operation and Storage Areas; SiteInvestigation; Permits and Responsibilities. Copies of the General Provisions may be obtainedfrom the Contracting Officer.

1.03 SPECIAL BASE/POST REQUIREMENTSA. Regular business hours during the week for the Department of Public Works are 7:00AM to

4:00PM, Monday through Friday, excluding Federal Holidays. The EXCHANGE normalbusiness hours of operation are from 9:00AM to 7:00PM, Monday through Saturday and10:00AM to 8:00PM on Sundays. On Holidays the EXCHANGE is open from 10:00AM to6:00PM. Due to the unique nature and aggressive schedule of this project, the Contractor maybe required to work 24 hours a day/ 7 days a week. Also, many items of work can only beperformed at night after hours once the EXCHANGE is closed to customers. The EXCHANGEwill be available to the Contractor on a 24/7 basis. A 24 hour advance notice to theEXCHANGE General Manager is required to confirm on site security is available duringnon-operation hours. Failure on the part of the Contractor to give this advance notice mayresult in the facility not being accessible for work. The Contractor shall coordinate this workschedule closely with the EXCHANGE store manager and notify the Installation Military Policeprior to performing work after normal business hours.

B. The Contractor is to be familiar with the requirements for gaining daily access to the base/post. All workers, subcontractors and material deliveries will require permits to gain site entry.

C. Fort Bragg may require special access requirements during times of heightened securitymeasures and/or force protection events requiring the Contractor to adjust schedules andaccess accordingly. Advance notice will be given to the Contractor as soon as possible in theevent of such an occurrence.

1.04 UTILITIES (WATER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)A. Existing water and electricity sources may be used on this project.

SUMMARY Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 10 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA

AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. The Contractor will not be charged for consumption of utilities (water, gas and electricity) duringthis project.

C. The Contractor shall provide and use proper backflow prevention devices. The Contractor shallprovide documentation of proper/current certification of installers.

1.05 LAYING OUT WORKA. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by the Contractor.

Discrepancies between drawings, specifications, and conditions shall be referred to theContracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to makesuch notifications shall place responsibility upon the Contractor to carry out work in asatisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the constructioncontemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural,Civil, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affectthe locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any discrepancy befound, he shall immediately report the same to the Contracting Officer for verifications andadjustment. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on the Contractor'spart to comply with this function shall be done at his sole expense.

D. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate generally the design andarrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the workrequired. The exact location or arrangement of equipment is subject to minor changesnecessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost toEXCHANGE. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site,and the Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory andworkmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.06 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORKA. Carefully check the site where this project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires and

equipment. Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or notshown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground improvements which areshown on the drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect allsuch improvements shown on the drawings.

C. Locations of underground lines, shown on the drawings, are based on the best availablesources, but are to be regarded as approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating andidentifying these lines before excavating in adjacent areas.

1.07 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICESA. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all

utilities. Interruption shall be by approved section of the utility. In some cases, the Contractormay be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utilityservices may be interrupted only when approved by the Contracting Officer. When it isnecessary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer andfacilities engineer in writing at least seven days in advance of the time he desires the existingservice to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. Depending uponthe activities at the facility which require continuous service from the existing utility, aninterruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such casesthe interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for theutility. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility servicesshall be as approved by the Contracting Officer.


1.08 EXCAVATIONA. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit,

from the Facilities Engineers Office. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain thenecessary signatures and coordination for the permit.

1.09 WELDING PERMITA. Prior to beginning any welding, use of open flame device, or any activity that produces sparks,

obtain a “hot work permit” from Fire Emergency Services. The permit shall be renewed eachday welding or open flame devices will be used. Depending on the type and location of hotwork, these permits can be issued for multiple days.

1.10 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICESA. The Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for

Uniform Traffic Control Devices by the State Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at allpoints of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICESA. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment,

electric arc welding, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures aremandatory:1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not

present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of anycompound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present.3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or dispersion of

molten metal.4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets, wetting of

surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backingand portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Installation Fire Department 24 hoursahead of usage.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTIONA. Fire Protection During Construction: The Contractor shall obey all requirements of the Army

Corps of Engineering Manual (EM), EM-385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual;NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; and theBase/Post Fire Regulations.

B. The Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of firedamage. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about thebuilding and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storingflammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammableliquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed fromthe building during unused periods.

D. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is beingperformed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields ofincombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hotmetal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to coverperiods when other workmen are not on the premises.

E. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations ofNFPA No. 10 and 241. However, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall beavailable for each building.

F. Fire Codes: The Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, andBase/Post Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on base/post.



1.13 WORK BY OTHERS (IF APPLICABLE)A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a

part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (NIC).2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the EXCHANGE or AAFES (EF/EI).3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or Concessionaires.

1.14 EXCHANGE-FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (IF APPLICABLE)A. See Specification Section 01 10 17 - Exchange Furnished and Installed Equipment (EF/EI).

1.15 EXCHANGE FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (IF APPLICABLE)A. See Specification Section 01 10 18 - Exchange Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment

(EF/CI).1.16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor,wall, and ceiling and pavement materials that:1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible.2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed

wherever possible. This includes heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc.3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings,

etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, the Contractor shall meet with theContracting Officer to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shallestablish center lines for all trades.

1.17 INTEGRATING WORKA. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall

not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacentproperty.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb ordamage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired,and restored to its original condition at no cost to the EXCHANGE.

1.18 HEADROOM UNDER PIPESA. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from

ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearancebe less than 7'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Where piping or conduitis left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacentwall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.19 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIESA. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or

removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired orreplaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of theContracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction thereof.

1.20 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPINGA. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job

conditions shall not always permit their installation in the location shown. When this situationoccurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer's attention immediately and the relocationdetermined in a joint conference. The Contractor will be held responsible for the relocating ofany items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval. He shall remove andrelocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer.


B. On the project site where work occurs, it is not anticipated that any of the following will beencountered. If encountered, do not disturb these items or similar items:1. Buried tanks.2. Buried piping monitoring wells.3. Oil/water separators.

1.21 OVERLOADINGA. The Contractor shall be responsible for overloading any part or parts of structures beyond their

safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or anyother item thereon. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained theirpermanent and safe strength.

1.22 STANDARDSA. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such

as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similarstandard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendmentor supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type,class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force andeffect as though printed in these specifications. These standards are not furnished to biddersfor the reason that the manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with theirrequirements.1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard, they

refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the UnitedStates Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S.Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition includingamendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, andmethod of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Departmentof Commerce.

4. Where ASTM Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications,standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by theAmerican Society for Testing and Materials.

1.23 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCEA. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are specified or

required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate coveringconformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications andCommercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items. Such certificates shall befurnished to the Contracting Officer for all items so specified.

1.24 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGEA. EXCHANGE shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during and prior to the

absolute completion of the total work. Access shall be allowed at all times to the EXCHANGEand its own Contractors in the endeavor.

B. Contractor shall maintain the means of egress for facility occupants at all times duringdemolition and construction phases.

1.25 TESTS AND REPORTSA. See Specification Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.B. No geotechnical report was prepared for this project. Conditions are not expected to be

materially different from those obtaining when building and site improvements were originallyexecuted.



1.26 REFERENCESA. All references to the word "Government" or “EXCHANGE” in the specifications shall mean Army

and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES).B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be

interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item.2. Base, Post, Installation or Facility: Military facility where the project is being built or

remodeled.3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation of the

concessions such as Beauty Shop, Barber Shop, and Laundry/Dry Cleaners.4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working drawings

and specifications.5. AAFES or EXCHANGE: Army and Air Force Exchange Service.6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by EXCHANGE.

1.27 TOXIC MATERIALSA. Removal or disposal of toxic materials or asbestos is not included in this contract. If the

Contractor encounters such materials, he shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer.B. Abatement of hazardous materials is not part of the work of this Contract. If hazardous

materials are encountered or suspected, the General Contractor shall stop work immediatelyand contact the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer for direction on how to proceed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI)FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 10 17 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 10 17EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI)

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (EF/EI)

A. Certain items of equipment will be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE. See drawingreferences to (EF/EI)

B. The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel installing EXCHANGE furnishedmaterials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.

C. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficialoccupancy by EXCHANGE usage prior to completion of entire project per approved Phasingplans.

D. EXCHANGE will furnish and install equipment as indicated on Fixture and/or Equipment Plansin the drawings.

E. Contractor's Duties:1. Unload, handle, store (on site), and protect EXCHANGE-furnished equipment.2. Provide access for EXCHANGE personnel.3. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the EF/EI equipment so that

installation can be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule.4. Provide mechanical and electrical connections to EF/EI equipment and building systems.5. Provide security for designated areas.6. Schedule equipment delivery dates and installation times to coordinate with the overall

schedule. Provide EXCHANGE advance notice so equipment can be ordered on time.F. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area forinstallation of property.

2. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial occupancy.1.02 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 30days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept deliveryof EXCHANGE furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage andre-delivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractorfail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under thiscontract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basisupon which to file a claim under these conditions.

1.03 EXCHANGE ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:A. Serving Areas & Food Preparation Areas: Schedule date of use and possession of food

preparation serving areas 30 days prior to completion of project.B. Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by EXCHANGE shall be

sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so that EXCHANGE may occupythe area for the use for which it is intended. Comply with Contract Clauses titled Inspection ofConstruction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

1.04 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCYA. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by EXCHANGE of an area for beneficial occupancy, the

Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. A list of deficiencies will beprovided to the Contractor.

B. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete forbeneficial occupancy by EXCHANGE, the area will be accepted in writing with the exception ofthe deficiencies listed. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to finalacceptance at the completion of the project.

EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI) Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 10 17 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


C. Damage: Damage resulting from EXCHANGE'S use will not be considered the Contractor'sresponsibility.

D. Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the EXCHANGE "GeneralProvisions."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USEDPART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 FINAL CONNECTIONS

A. All final electrical connections to EXCHANGE and Vendor furnished and installed equipmentshall be made by the Contractor as part of the construction contract. The GC shall construct allopenings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing,miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secureEXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place. Final hookup of plumbing fixtures is by the GC.

B. The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel installing EXCHANGE-furnishedmaterials and equipment should overlap of work occur.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 10 18 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 10 18EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 EXCHANGE FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI):

A. EXCHANGE furnished/Contractor installed equipment shall be handled in accordance with the"Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "ExchangeFurnished Property."

B. The material noted below will be furnished by the Exchange and shall be installed by theContractor. See drawing references to (EF/CI). The Contractor shall provide for and cooperatewith personnel furnishing the designated material.

C. All food service equipment must be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation, NSFD. Contractor's Duties:

1. Designate required delivery date for each product. Notify the Contracting Officer in writingat least 60 days in advance of the date that EXCHANGE furnished equipment andfurnishings will be needed. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbingand electrical rough-ins will be furnished by EXCHANGE.

2. The equipment will be received at the job site by a representative of EXCHANGE who willjointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities. The representative will theneffect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment to the Contractor.

3. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install, set in final position,align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of equipment. Installationshall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment plans, and schedulesshown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by EXCHANGE.

4. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install allreinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary tosecure EXCHANGE furnished equipment in place.

5. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations.6. Apply finish indicated, if any.7. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electrical hook

ups, and put into good operating condition.E. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Deliver all EXCHANGE furnished items to the job site. Schedule delivery date with supplierin accordance with Progress Chart.

2. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions upon request.3. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and

electrical rough-ins upon request.1.02 DELIVERY

A. Contractor shall unload, handle, store, protect, uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align,join, and level all Exchange-Furnished material, and shall make all utility connections thereto.EXCHANGE will provide supervision for installation of the material.

B. The material will be received at job site by a representative of the local EXCHANGE who,together with the Contractor, will jointly verify conditions and quantities. The representative ofthe local EXCHANGE will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the material to theContractor. Material damaged by or during construction operations shall be replaced at noadditional cost to EXCHANGE.

1.03 FAILURE TO VERIFYA. Failure to execute above required verifications shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility

for proper installation of the material, which shall be installed without additional cost toEXCHANGE.

EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 10 18 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.04 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60

days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept deliveryof EXCHANGE furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage anddelivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor failto submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under thiscontract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basisupon which to file a claim under these conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, andfurnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and boltsnecessary to secure EXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place. All final electrical connectionsto EXCHANGE-furnished equipment shall be made by the Contractor as part of theConstruction Contract.

3.02 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)A. Refer to individual schedules and notes on each sheet.B. Contractor is responsible to provide all MEP connections and final hookups at all EF/EI

equipment and fixtures as required as well as at the EF/CI equipment.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 10 60 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 10 60SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor-required health and safety plan.1. Contractor is responsible for reading the Risk Assessment Plan and following the

directions therein.2. Contractor must maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment: That is, 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a40-hour week

B. Sample Safety Plan: Attached.C. Sample Construction Hazard Plan: Attached.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan,

Emergency Response Plan.B. Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Protection.C. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.

1.03 REFERENCESA. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.1. OSHA 1910 REG - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.1202. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication. – EM 385-1-1: Safety and Health Requirements

Manual (most current version).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for EXCHANGE Approval: The following items shall be submitted for EXCHANGEapproval:1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified

employee, OSHA Trained under 1910.120, responsible for the overall supervision of allaccident prevention activities. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirementsare incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safetymeasures and instructions are actually being applied. This person shall be on site at alltimes that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. All otheremployees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training requirements for their jobcapacity.

B. Submittals for Information Only: The following items shall be Contractor certified:1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at

the Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potentialhazards that could arise during the course of the work.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the

Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whateverprovisions are necessary to conduct the work in accordance with current OSHAstandards.

b. The Safety and Health Plan must specifically address the excavation portion ofconstruction and will be specific to perchloroethylene (tetrachloroethylene) (PCE), andincorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuousvapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibitionagainst the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

c. The following are minimum requirements for the Safety and Health Plan:

SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 10 60 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation productsaddressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situationrequires. Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vaporbarriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor forconstruction areas identified by the installation and/or EXCHANGE as areas ofknown hazards only. These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are theresponsibility of the Contractor. This requirement will be coordinated through theHealth and Safety Program of the Installation by the Contractor.

4) Minimum Requirements for the Safety and Health Plan are as follows:(a) Must be kept on site, and must be written.(b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for each site task and

operation (to be supplied by the Installation).(c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120).(d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by employees for

each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).(e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).(f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring,

environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (theirmaintenance and calibration).

(g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to becoordinated with the installation.

(h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).(i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).(j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or

program equivalent).(k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).(l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all

employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.(m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health

Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 trainingrequirements for supervisors).

(n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and afterconsultation with the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and Installation SafetyOffice.

d. Hazard Response Plan: The unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazardsas transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressedwithin an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by all contractors. This requirement willbe coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation bythe Contractor (sample provided).

e. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materialsin use.

1.05 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGSA. The Installation will schedule subsequent safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor

personnel on a monthly basis. The EXCHANGE and Installation representatives will attendperiodically. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. Concurrence shall be signed by the Inspection Section and the original shall be submitted to theContracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.06 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPINGA. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Installation requirements.

Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after theincident and will be followed by a copy of an Accident Report.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 10 60 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

1.07 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTSA. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this Section during the life of the Contract.

1.08 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)A. All work sites under this Contract are designated Hard Hat Areas. The Contractor shall post the

area and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within thelimits of the work site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

AAFES Project No. ____-__-______ (Project) 10/11 (Location)

Prototype Specification Safety Policies and Procedures 1

SAMPLE

SAFETY PLAN 1. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification and

are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1.1 US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS: EM 385-1-1 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual 1.2 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA): NFPA 70-1993 National Electric Code (NEC) 1.3 SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS (SAE): J 994-85 Alarm, Backup, Electric-Performance, Test, and Application, Recommended Practice. 2. GENERAL: Work safety is of paramount importance. The Contractor shall comply with the

Contract Clause in the Solicitation entitled ACCIDENT PREVENTION, including the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual referred to therein in addition to the provisions of this specification.

3. SAFETY PROGRAM: The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual,

EM 385-1-1, and all subsequent revisions to in the Contract Clause ACCIDENT PREVENTION of this contract, are hereby supplemented as follows:

a. The Contractor shall designate an employee responsible for overall supervision of accident

prevention activities. Such duties shall include:

1. Assuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated in work methods 2. Inspecting the work to ensure that safety measure and instructions are actually applied.

The proposed safety supervisor's name and qualifications shall be submitted in writing for approval

to the Contracting Officer's Representative. This individual must have prior experience as a safety engineer or be able to demonstrate his/her familiarity and understanding of the safety requirements over a prescribed trial period. The safety engineer shall have the authority to act on behalf of the Contractor's general management to take whatever action is necessary to assure compliance with safety requirements. The safety supervisor is required to be on the site when work is being performed.

b. Prior to commencement of any work at a job site, a preconstruction safety meeting shall be held

between the Contractor and the Corps of Engineers Area/Resident Engineer to discuss the Contractor's safety program and in particular to review the following submittals:

1. Contracts Accident Prevention Plan: An acceptable accident prevention plan, written by the

prime contractor for the specific work and implementing in detail the pertinent requirements of EM 385-1-1, shall be submitted for Government approval.



2. Activity Phase Hazard Analysis Plan: Prior to beginning each major phase of work, an

activity hazard analysis (phase plan) shall be prepared by the Contractor for that phase of work and submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval. A phase is defined as an operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous operations or where a new subcontractor or work crew is to perform work. The analysis shall address the hazards for each activity performed in the phase and shall present the procedures and safeguards necessary to eliminate the hazards or reduce the risk of an acceptable level.

c. Subsequent jobsite safety meetings shall be held as follows:

1. A safety meeting shall be held at least once a month for all supervisors on the project to

review past activities, to plan ahead for new or changed operations and to establish safe working procedures to anticipate hazards. An outline report of each monthly meeting shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative.

2. At least one safety meeting shall be conducted weekly, or whenever new crews begin work,

by the appropriate field supervisors or foreman for all workers. An outline report of the meeting giving date, time, attendance, subjects discussed and who conducted it shall be maintained and copies furnished the designated authority on request.

4. ACCIDENTS: Chargeable accidents are to be investigated by both Contractor personnel and the

Contracting Officer. 4.1 ACCIDENT REPORTING, ENG FORM 3394: Section I, paragraph 01.D, of EM 385-1-1 and the

Contract Clause entitled ACCIDENT PREVITION are amended as follows: The prime Contractor shall report on Eng Form 3394, supplied by the Contracting Officer, all injuries to his employees or subcontractors that result in lost time and all damage to property and/or equipment in excess of $2,000 per incident. Verbal notification of such accident shall be made to the Contracting Officer within 72 hours following such accidents. The written report shall include the following:

a. A description of the circumstances leading up to the accident, the cause of the accident, and

corrective measures taken to prevent recurrence. b. A description of the injury and name and location of the medical facility giving examination and

treatment. c. A statement as to whether or not the employee was permitted to return to work after examination

and treatment by the doctor, and if not, an estimate or statement of the number of days lost from work. If there have been days lost from work, state whether or not the employee has been re-examined and declared fit to resume work as of the date of the report.

4.2 OSHA Requirements: 4.2.1 OSHA Log: A copy of the Contractors' OSHA Log of Injuries shall be forwarded monthly to the

Contracting Officer.

A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this section during the life of the contract. 4.2.2 OSHA Inspections: Contractors shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer when an OSHA

Compliance Official (Federal or State Representative) presents his/her credentials and informs the Contractor that the workplace will be inspected for OSHA compliance. Contractors shall also notify the Contracting Officer upon determination that an exit interview will taken place upon completion of an OSHA inspection. (NABSA).



5. SUBMITTALS FOR GOVERNMENT APPROVAL: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. All required submittals of items specified in this section shall be for information only, except for those items including, but not limited to, the following which shall be submitted for Government approval:

a. Written designation of safety representative. b. Written project specific accident prevention plan. c. Written activity phase hazard analysis plan.

END OF SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN



SAMPLE

CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN

TO BE ACCOMPLISHED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION AND POSTED IN ALL CONSTRUCTION TRAILERS

SHOULD AN UNPREDICTED DISCOVERY OF A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL OR CONDITION BE MADE DURING CONSTRUCTION THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE OF ACTIONS IS REQUIRED WHEN THERE IS NO IMMEDIATE THREAT TO LIFE OR PROPERTY

ITEM NOTIFY TELEPHONE #

Transite Pipe 1. BCE2. AAFES Contracting Officer

and/or CME3. AAFES Environmental

Engineer when Unable toContact 1,2

Contaminated Soil Same as above

Buried Munitions Same as above

UST

FIRST ACTION

Cease Activity in area of discovery

Cease Activity in area of discovery cover with plastic

Cease Activity

Same as above Same as above

Other Should there be an immediate threat to life or property, the emergency response plan for the installation, which is to be on file at the construction side, is to be followed in every detail. An example of this procedure is the rupture of a fuel line, liquid or natural gas.

END OF SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 13 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 13 00SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODES

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Reference Standards.B. Licenses and PermitsC. Safety.D. Fire Safety.E. Affirmative Procurement ProgramF. Use of Lasers.G. Ozone Depleting Substances.H. Lead Base Paint.I. Cleaning & Debris ControlJ. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting ActivitiesK. Contaminated SoilL. Suspected Hazardous MaterialsM. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical ComponentsN. Hazardous Waste TestingO. Hazardous Material InventoryP. Spill Response and ReportingQ. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and

Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringentrequirements. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of conflicts.

B. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and HealthRegulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdictionthis Work is being performed.

C. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections. Maintain a copy atthe jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

D. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the morestringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the followingapplicable codes, regulations and standards.1. Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines2. Army Regulations3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers4. Code of Federal Regulations5. Federal Acquisition Regulations6. International Building Code7. International Mechanical Code8. International Plumbing Code9. National Electrical Code10. National Fire Code11. Occupational Safety and Health Act

E. Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the individualspecification Sections.

SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 13 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.03 LICENSES AND PERMITSA. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required

Federal, State and local licenses and permits. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid bythe Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from Installation Security all required vehicle and entry permits.C. Obtain from the Contracting Officer any additional Installation required permits. Current permit

requirements shall be provided to the Contractor at the Pre-Construction Conference.1.04 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the projectsite. In addition, all personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when insidethe power plant, excluding office areas, restrooms, break rooms and other “quiet” areas.

B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR1910.145. Comply with the lock out, tag out procedures in use. Ensure that Contractor’spersonnel on site are trained on the government’s procedures.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on Installation. Governmentwill brief the Contractor on these requirements at the Pre-Construction Conference.

D. Provide safety barriers around openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’sactivities.

E. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities which, in his opinion, areunsafe.

1.05 FIRE SAFETYA. Comply with all fire safety and protection requirements in effect at Installation. Government will

brief the Contractor on these requirements at the Pre-Construction Conference.B. Prior to beginning any welding, use of open flame device, or any activity that produces sparks,

obtain a “hot work permit” from the Installation Fire Department. The permit shall be renewedeach day welding or open flame devices will be used.

C. If the contract work requires numerous days of hot work, the Contractor may elect to have oneof his on-site personnel designated as a Permit Authorizing Individual (PAI). The Contractor’sPAI may issue hot work permits at the work site, thus avoiding the requirement for daily permitsissued by the Fire Department.

D. The Contractor’s PAI shall be the on-site superintendent, a foreman, the Contractor’s SafetyManager, or other individual with sufficient knowledge and experience to recognize unsafe workpractices or conditions and having authority to stop work immediately if such unsafe practices orconditions are observed. To be designated as a PAI, a person must schedule and successfullycomplete PAI certification training offered by the Installation Fire Department. PAI certificationtraining is estimated to last 60 to 90 minutes.

E. Fire Department personnel may periodically visit the site to ensure the Contractor is complyingwith fire safety requirements. A Permit Authorizing Individual’s (PAI) certification may berevoked if the PAI has failed to issue permits on days when hot work is performed, or if unsafepractices or conditions are observed.

F. Questions concerning these requirements may be directed to Installation Fire Department.G. The Contractor shall notify the Fire Department Fire Protection Office a minimum of 48 hours

before, and again immediately prior to, temporarily closing any street or paved building access,interrupting water service to any fire hydrant or interrupting the operation of any fire detection,alarm or suppression system. The Fire Department shall be immediately notified uponreopening closed areas, restoration of water service to any fire hydrant, or reactivation of anydetection, alarm or suppression system. This notification requirement is in addition to othercontract requirements.

H. Provide a 10 lb-capacity, ABC fire extinguisher at all work areas.


I. Report a Fire: Dial 911.1.06 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification,repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of theResource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the governmentstrongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in theEnvironmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products must be considered first before any othermaterials and products will be accepted. Recycled and recovered materials and products mustbe used throughout the project unless they either do not meet the requirements of thisspecification, delay the progress of the work, or are cost prohibitive.

D. Examples of these materials and products are detailed below. These are recommendedquantities and represent minimum compliance. The actual requirement is to use the maximumamount of recycled material possible, while meeting the performance specifications.

1.07 USE OF LASERSA. Submit a written request for approval at least 30 calendar days before commencement of

activities which require the use of a laser.B. Submit request to the Installation's Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) with a courtesy copy to the

Contracting Officer. Request shall include:1. Description/Characteristics:

a. Manufacturer.b. Model.c. Number of same units.d. Serial number(s).



e. Laser medium.f. Mode of operation (i.e. continuous wave (CW), single pulse, multiple pulse).g. Maximum exposure time (train length).h. Ime (sec) & wave length.i. Energy/pulse (J) or CW power (W).j. Pulse repetition frequency.k. Pulse width.l. Beam diameter (at 1/e point).m. Beam divergence (at 1/e point).

2. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done and the inclusive dates ofsuch work.

3. An acknowledgment that the RSO may make initial and periodic checks to ensure theContractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which preventunnecessary exposures to Installation personnel.

1.08 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCESA. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any

capacity on this project unless specifically approved by the HazMat.1.09 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on thisproject unless specifically approved by the HazMat.

1.10 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROLA. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that

are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible. All debris shall beremoved from the site and legally disposed of. The Contractor shall take particular care toeliminate any hazards created by these operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by the debris without additional cost tothe Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during the work at this Project Site a strict windblowndebris control program. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from thework shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parkingarea, road or street.

1.11 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIESA. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as

concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solidwaste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holdingponds or to the ground surface is not permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for anyand all damages resulting from dumping or discharges. Further, the Contractor shall conductactivities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to,suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures asnecessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive Dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces,transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the constructionsite, along haul routes and at staging areas. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessaryto minimize fugitive dust generation.

1.12 CONTAMINATED SOILA. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately

and contact the Contracting officer. Do not resume work until approved by the ContractingOfficer.


1.13 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALSA. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall

immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer’s representative. Work shallnot resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous. Should they be found to be hazardous, the Contractor shall immediately take steps to containthe material, so further damage and contamination does not occur. The Contractor shall thensubmit a proposal for removal.

1.14 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTSA. Notify Installation Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled

electrical equipment (for example: transformers and regulators). All transformers (both PCBand non-PCB-containing) and light ballasts (unless labeled “No PCBs”) shall be disposedthrough the Installation's Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.

1.15 HAZARDOUS WASTE TESTINGA. The Contractor shall subject a representative sample of each type of hazardous waste, or

potentially hazardous waste, generated to TCLP (Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure)testing. Sampling and testing for appropriate metals, and volatile and semi-volatile chemicalsshall be performed by an Independent Testing Agency that is regularly engaged in the samplingand testing of hazardous materials and waste. Provide the test results to Installation'sHazardous Waste Facility before transferring the waste to the facility.

1.16 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORYA. Contractor must submit an inventory of all hazardous materials to be used to include quantities.

Inventory must be updated at completion of the project to indicate quantities used, spilled, anddisposed of, etc.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Hazardous Materials Pharmacy (HazMat) a list and quantity ofall hazardous materials that the Contractor intends to bring onto Government property. TheContractor shall provide the HazMat with copies of all MSDSs and an inventory for eachHazardous chemical listed in OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200intended to be used. Each MSDS shall be on file prior to use of the chemical, and shall bemaintained for all chemicals. Once the hazardous material is used, its quantity of use shall bereported to the HazMat along with the disposition of the container.

C. Submit a completed Hazardous and Related Material Identification Form, and an MSDS for allmaterials listed on the form and brought on Installation, to the Installation Environmental SafetyOffice.

D. If hazardous materials are not in their original container, the container containing the substancemust be labeled.

1.17 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTINGA. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils,

antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported to local, stateand federal agencies and proper clean-up action. Also, report all spills to the Installation FireDepartment by calling 911 at any time, 24/7.

B. The Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediateclean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles orequipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site. Installation DPW will provide formatand required locations prior to construction.

D. The Contractor shall develop a spill plan. The format for the plan will be provided by InstallationDPW prior to construction.

1.18 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONA. The Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State,

local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control



and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the ContractDocuments.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of inaccordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing,marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes. All hazardous wastes shall becollected in Contractor-furnished DOT/UN approved containers and taken to the InstallationHazardous Waste Facility for disposal. Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transportingwastes to the facility to coordinate delivery of the waste materials. The Contractor shall notstore hazardous waste on base/post for more than 30 days.

C. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance ofthe work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.

D. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to bedisposed of on-base/post shall be legally disposed at an off-base/post sanitary landfill.

E. Comply with the requirements of the Installation's Hazardous Waste Management Plan(HWMP).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

04/11

Prototype Specification Waste Disposal 01 13 00.1 - 1

(POST OR BASE) ___________________

WASTE DISPOSAL

The Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved. The Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants. The Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CONSTRUCTION PHASINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 14 20 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 14 20CONSTRUCTION PHASING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coordination of phasing.B. Phasing plan.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Exhibit A - General Conditions of the AAFES Contract for Construction, Article entitled:

"Schedule and Progress."B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.C. Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination.D. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.E. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Construction Progress Schedules.

1.03 GENERALA. The construction phasing shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress.B. In preparing the Construction Progress Schedule, the scheduling of construction shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor.1.04 COORDINATION

A. Construction shall be phased and coordinated with the Contracting Officer in order to keep to aminimum, any disruption of, or interference with, the operation of the existing retail facility. TheContractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, within 15 days of notice to proceed, if anyproblems concerning specified construction phasing occur. Contractor shall submit, inaccordance with Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation, a detailedschedule of work utilizing the priority and sequence of work shown on the ConstructionPhasing Plan. The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer advised of any anticipatedchanges in the work schedule in sufficient time to permit adjustment of store operations, withoutadversely affecting the ability of the Exchange to function as necessary.1. In instances where the Exchange must vacate an area prior to the Contractor initiating

work, sufficient time for the Exchange to move fixtures and merchandise as necessaryshall be identified in the Contractor's prepared Construction Progress Schedule.

B. Schedule: The phasing as shown on the drawings is the required sequence. The Contractormust submit suggested revisions to the schedule, for review, to the Contracting Officer within 15days after execution of a contract. Items specified herein are complementary to work itemsshown on the drawings schedule.

C. Beneficial occupancy inspection (finishes only) will be made at the end of each work item, toallow early access for fixture installations.

D. Phasing: All phases shall be included in the contract performance period.1.05 BARRIERS

A. Building areas adjacent to areas to be renovated will not be vacated by the Exchange; therefore,barriers shall be erected by the Contractor as work progresses. Provide barriers as specified inthe locations indicated, and as required, from floor to ceiling or from floor to underside of roofdeck, to seal operational portions of the retail facility from areas of construction. Security walls,however, shall be secured up to the bottom of roof deck. Temporary barriers exposed tocustomer view shall be painted with two coats of color as approved by the Contracting Officer.1. Dust Barriers: Where dust barriers are required, provide a temporary framework floor to

ceiling, adequately braced, 2" x 4" wood studs or metal studs covered with 6 mil fireproofclear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced film as manufactured by Griffolyn, or equal. Tapeall joints, and anchor framework as required for maximum stability.

CONSTRUCTION PHASING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 14 20 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2. Security Weathertight Barriers: Where security weathertight barriers are required, providea temporary framework adequately braced metal studs with 1/2" plywood on the exteriorside and 1/2" gypsum board or plywood on the interior, attached with screws, not nailed.

3. Doors in Barriers: Provide doors in barriers for the Contractor's access to the work, ofsimilar construction to the barrier in which it occurs. Gates shall be hinged, braced, andprovided with types of locks in accordance with Exchange security. These shall be doublehigh security padlocks.

4. Rope Barriers: Provide temporary barriers consisting of rope, saw horses, and color flagsto control areas as required.

1.06 MATERIALSA. All isolation valves and temporary ductwork used to keep systems on line in occupied phases

for mechanical systems (air-handling units, supply piping, water lines, sprinklers, and othersimilar items) shall be included by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Exchange.

1.07 PHASING PLANA. Refer to Drawings for proposed Phasing Plan.

1. Contractor shall perform all required work within each phase unless specifically identifiedas an Exchange responsibility.a. Mobilization to be accomplished within 15 calendar days from Notice to Proceed.b. Personnel Processing and Badging to be accomplished within 15 days from Notice to

Proceed.1.08 GENERAL NOTES

A. Site Preparation: Site preparation includes but is not limited to the relocation of utilities, thedemolition of existing paved areas, regrading and paving as indicated, and the relocation and/ordemolition of existing utilities as scheduled. Temporary construction barriers for site securitymust generally follow the project limit line.1. Construction and Safety Fence: Enclose the contractor staging area with a 2.5 m (8-foot)

high chain-link construction fence incorporating plastic fabric mesh screening (UV lightresistant, dark brown, similar to tennis court screening) and include associated gate(s). Vinyl inserts are not allowed. The intent is to block construction activities from public view. The construction fence shall be supported and tightly secured to steel posts located onminimum 3 m (10 foot) centers either set in concrete or provided concrete block bases(depending upon anticipated heavy wind conditions). The Contractor shall also providetemporary safety fencing and warning signs at the construction site prior to the start ofwork to protect the public from immediate construction activities deemed hazardous. Thesafety fence will enclose those hazardous areas both within and outside of thevisually-screened construction site. The safety fence, fabricated from high-densitypolyethylene grid (minimum 1.1m (42-inches) high, will meet OSHA and AFOSH colorstandards (typically bright orange for excavated trenches). The Contractor shall removeboth the fence and screening from the work site upon completion of the contract.

B. Architectural Systems:1. Erect barriers as shown:

a. Protective barriers for access to retail sales area.b. Interior barriers.c. Begin demolition work.

C. Air Conditioning and Heating System:1. Install required valves and piping at connection points. Shut down of the air conditioning or

heating system to install valves and duct changes, and cut off shall be accomplished at atime of low air conditioning or heating requirements in the Exchange, and be of minimumduration. Proposed shutdowns of air conditioning or heating system shall be coordinatedwith the Exchange. Install control air compressor at mechanical equipment room, ifrequired.

2. Provide security grilles for existing penetrations through existing roof and walls of retailsales. These security grilles will be temporary until new ducts are installed.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CONSTRUCTION PHASINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 14 20 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

3. Connect new control air lines to existing control air (for pneumatic control for pneumaticthermostats).

4. Install new air handling units, piping, grilles, diffusers, variable air volumes units andelectric cabinet heaters as construction progresses.

D. Electrical Systems:1. Rework electrical systems to allow for continual service to retail area.2. Install electrical distribution and telephone to existing construction.3. All of the above work shall be completed without disruption of store operation during

normal business working hours.E. Plumbing System:

1. Install all required piping and valves at the connection points. Shutdown of the plumbingsystems to make necessary connections and extensions shall be accomplished at a timeso as not to interfere with operation of the Exchange, and shall be of minimum duration. All proposed shutdowns of the plumbing systems shall be coordinated with the Exchangemanagement.

F. Sprinkler Systems:1. Remove existing sprinklers and cap existing lines as required. Rework system as

indicated. Work shall be coordinated with Exchange and fire department personnel.G. Electrical Security Systems:

1. Temporarily modify the alarm system to allow access during working hours to thetemporary entrances.


END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CUTTING AND PATCHINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 14 50 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 14 50CUTTING AND PATCHING


A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.C. Section 02 41 16 - Selective Demolition.D. Section 07 01 50 - Maintenance of Membrane Roofing.E. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section.2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections.3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor.

B. Include in request:1. Identification of Project.2. Location and description of affected Work.3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used.5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.6. Effect on work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor.7. Written permission of affected separate contractor.8. Date and time work will be executed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damageor movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and

methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.03 CUTTINGA. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

CUTTING AND PATCHING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 14 50 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture

resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior

approval.3.04 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate

surfaces to receive patching and finishing.D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant

elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest

intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post UNIT PRICESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 22 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 22 00UNIT PRICES


A. Administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 35 40 - Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement: Unit PriceSchedule to be filled out and included with Proposer's Bid.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. A Unit Price is a price per unit of measurement for materials or services that are added to or

deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if unforeseen conditions causequantities of Work required by the Contract Documents to be increased or decreased.1. A Unit Price Schedule as specified below shall be included with Bidder's bid proposal.2. Each unit price shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, insurance,

applicable taxes, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection,application, or installation of an item of Work; and overhead and profit.

1.04 PROCEDURESA. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices arespecified in those Sections.

B. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves useof established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by anindependent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

C. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included below in Part 3 - EXECUTION. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials describedunder each unit price.

D. Unit prices for application to changes in the Work are not effective unless specifically agreedupon in the Construction Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Item No. 1: Interior Concrete Slab Enhancement, Repair and Joint Filler Replacement:1. Description: Contractor's Bid Proposal shall include a Unit Price Schedule for the interior

concrete slab enhancement, repair, and joint filler replacement items of work indicated inSection 03 35 40.a. Required Unit Price items are listed in the Unit Price Schedule, included in Section 03

35 40.b. Contractor's Bid shall not include any allowances for interior concrete slab

enhancement, repair, or joint filler replacement work, unless specifically indicated onthe drawings.

c. Any repairs required that are "unforeseen" or that are not specifically indicated on thedrawings will be handled by change order, based on the the unit prices included in theUnit Price Schedule.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATIONFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 31 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 31 00PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIS)

A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect and EXCHANGE ProjectManager.

B. Architect's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.C. RFI Log: Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. Submit log weekly.

1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGA. The Contracting Officer and/or Contracting Officer’s representative will schedule and preside at

preconstruction meeting.B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officers and/or Contracting Officer’s representative and other HeadquartersEXCHANGE representatives.

2. Local and regional EXCHANGE representatives.3. Installation representative (Engineering, Fire Marshall, Security, etc.).4. Contractor.5. Major Sub-contractors.

C. Agenda:1. Execution of Notice to Proceed.2. Distribution of Contract Documents.3. Submission of list of sub-contractors.4. Review of EXCHANGE checklist of contract requirements.5. Discussion of Schedule.6. Discussion of critical sequencing.7. Designation of responsible personnel.8. Processing of field decisions and change orders.9. Submission of applications for payment.10. Submittal of shop drawings.11. Procedures for maintaining record documents.12. Fire and safety procedures.13. Security procedures.14. Accident prevention and reports.15. Housekeeping procedures.16. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations.b. Personnel parking.c. Major equipment deliveries.d. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to EXCHANGE, Contractor,and Installation Engineer.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. The contractor shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings.B. The contractor shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for

participants.C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.D. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor's project manager.2. Contractor's superintendent.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 31 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


3. Major sub-contractors and suppliers.4. EXCHANGE representative (EXCHANGE's option).

E. Agenda:1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of work progress.3. Field observations, problems and decisions.4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.7. Maintenance of progress schedule.8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.9. Coordination of projected progress.10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: A/E shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants(including the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer, within three (3) business days of the meeting.

1.04 PROJECT MEETINGSA. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials andinstallations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect ,and EXCHANGE’s Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for theparticular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:a. Contract Documents.b. Options.c. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Purchases.f. Deliveries.g. Submittals.h. Review of mockups.i. Possible conflicts.j. Compatibility requirements.k. Time schedules.l. Weather limitations.m. Manufacturer's written instructions.n. Warranty requirements.o. Compatibility of materials.p. Acceptability of substrates.q. Temporary facilities and controls.r. Space and access limitations.s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.t. Testing and inspecting requirements.u. Installation procedures.v. Coordination with other work.w. Required performance results.x. Protection of adjacent work.y. Protection of construction and personnel.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATIONFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 31 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, includingrequired corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other partiesrequiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of theWork and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for otherpurposes.


END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATIONFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 32 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 32 00CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


A. Format.B. Content.C. Revisions to schedules.D. Submittals.E. Progress photographs.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. General Provisions of the EXCHANGE Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and

Progress."B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.C. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

1.03 GENERALA. The Contractor-prepared progress chart shall serve as a guide in managing the construction

progress.B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor.C. The schedules shall be prepared using the Critical Path Method (CPM).

1.04 FORMATA. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of work or

operation, identifying first workday of each week.B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer to evaluate the reasonableness of

the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule.1.05 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and completion ofeach element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work

completed as of the first day of each month.D. Indicate delivery dates for EXCHANGE furnished products.

1.06 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULESA. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and projected completion date of each

activity.B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other

identifiable changes which could affect the schedule.C. Provide narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous

period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays andimpact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.07 SUBMITTALSA. Submit a preliminary schedule through the Contracting Officer defining the Contractor's

proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date ofNotice to Proceed. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 32 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed beforesubmission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary schedule by the Contracting Officer and within thirty (30)calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete ProgressSchedule.

C. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each monthly Application for Payment.D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires plus four (4) copies

which will be retained by Contracting Officer.1.08 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and otherconcerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated inschedules.

1.09 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHSA. Submit new photographs at least once a month, within 3 days after exposure.B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an

experienced photographer, acceptable to Contracting Officer's Representative.D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:

1. Existing building exteriors and interiors, prior to beginning work, as evidence of existingproject conditions.

2. New interior construction, in progress and upon completion.3. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

E. Views: 1. Consult with Contracting Officer's Representative for instructions on views required.2. Provide factual presentation.3. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of

field, and minimum distortion.4. Point of View Sketch: Provide sketch identifying point of view of each photograph.

F. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1600 by 1200 ("2 megapixel"), in JPGformat; provide files unaltered by photo editing software.1. Delivery Medium: Via email, and with separate project record photo CD.2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic

submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name.4. PDF File: Assemble all JPG photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 1 photo per

page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.5. Photo CD(s): Provide 2 copies including all photos cumulative to date and PDF file(s), with

files organized in separate folders by submittal date.a. Provide 1 Photo CD each to Contracting Officer's Representative and Architect on a

monthly basis.PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SUBMITTALSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 33 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 33 00SUBMITTALS


A. Submittal procedures.B. Construction progress schedules.C. Shop Drawings.D. Samples.E. Product Data.F. Certificates.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.B. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.C. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Transmit each submittal with EXCHANGE Form 4450-48, Shop Drawings and Material Approval

Submittal.B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a

sequential alphabetic suffix.C. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and

specification section number, as appropriate.D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of

products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of informationis in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer.Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may bedetrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Failure to identify such variationswill not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance withthe Contract Documents even though such submittals are approved by the Contracting Officer.

G. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted, the contractor shall include with thesubmittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate ismandatory before approval will be issued.

H. Provide space for Contractor and Contracting Officer review stamps.I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any

inability to comply with requirements.1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Progress Schedule within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.B. Submit complete (final) Progress Schedule within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.C. Submit monthly revisions of Progress Schedule.D. Refer to Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation, for submittal information.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Shop Drawings For Review:

SUBMITTALS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 33 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking forconformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contractdocuments.

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer.3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11".4. After review, and distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above

and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.B. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for the EXCHANGE's benefit during and after project completion.C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location

of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus three (four on

structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies which will be retained byContracting Officer.

1.06 SAMPLESA. Samples For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking forconformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contractdocuments.

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Proceduresarticle above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - ProjectCloseout.

B. Samples For Information:1. Submitted for the Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for

EXCHANGE.C. Samples For Selection:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, or in

custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns forContracting Officer selection.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and forrecord documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integralparts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be

retained by Contracting Officer.G. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification

sections.H. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.07 PRODUCT DATAA. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts,

specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective

shop drawings or samples.1.08 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer,installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantitiesspecified for Product Data.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SUBMITTALSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 33 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submitsupporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must beacceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.09 LIMITATIONS AND CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIESA. Submittals will be reviewed for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the design

concept and the information shown in the drawing and specifications. These reviews shall notinclude review of the accuracy for completeness of details. A review shall not indicate that thereviewer has checked the entire system of which the reviewed item is a component. Thereviewer shall not be required to review partial submissions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post WEATHER TABLEFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 33 10 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 33 10WEATHER TABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 WEATHER TABLE

A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for theContractor's information.

1.02 CONTRACT TIME LIMITA. The Contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the weather table listed

below.1.03 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER

A. This provision specifies the procedure for determination of time extensions for unusually severeweather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract. The following listing defines themonthly anticipated adverse weather days for the contract period and is based on NOAA datafor the geographic location of the project.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC4 3 4 3 3 5 6 5 4 3 3 3

1. The listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line for monthly weathertime evaluations.

2. Throughout the Contract, each month actual adverse weather days will be recorded on acalendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthlyanticipated adverse weather in this listing.

3. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverseweather.

4. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculatedchronologically from the first to the last day in each month.

5. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the Contractor's workday and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project.

6. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated inthe above listing, the Contractor may submit in writing to the Contracting Officer a requestfor a time extension within 30 days of the adverse weather. If not submitted in the 30 dayperiod, the request will not be considered.

7. Based upon the above listing, the Contracting Officer will determine if the time extensionfor the Contractor is warranted.

8. The Contracting Officer will then convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issuea modification in accordance with contract.

9. Any Time extensions granted under this provision will be at no cost to EXCHANGE.PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 35 43 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 35 43ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor materials, and equipment andperforming all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as aresult of construction operations under this contract. These requirements are in addition to anyenvironmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications. For the purpose ofthis specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, orbiological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect humanhealth or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life; affect otherspecies of importance to humans; or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic andrecreational purposes. The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requiresconsideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management andmanagement of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants. Thissection also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the variousEarthwork and Utilities Sections.

1.02 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONSA. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility. All environmental rules

applying to contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all ApplicableFederal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection andpollution control and abatement. These include but are not limited to: the Clean Air Act, CleanWater Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive EnvironmentalResponse, Compensation and Liability Act, Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal InsecticideFungicide and Rodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act,National Historic Preservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning andCommunity Right-to-Know Act, Oil Pollution Act, Archaeological Resources Protection Act, andPollution Prevention Act. Contractor has the duty to determine for itself where such laws andregulations apply. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officerin delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations. Contractor has an independentresponsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.03 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCEA. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against

EXCHANGE or the Installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental lawsor regulations resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees,subcontractors, or agents. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may beassessed against the Contractor for the same conduct. Contractor may either reimburse thesefines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer,the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agenciesconcerned.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGESA. Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify EXCHANGE (which includes the Army, Air

Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages ofany kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’semployees or agents of subcontractors. “Damages” includes but is not limited to personalinjury, property damages (including diminution of value), or death, environmental restoration andresponse costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, andreimbursement or any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’sfailure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 35 43 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.05 CONTACT WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALSA. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental

office of the content of all contacts with federal, state, or local environmental regulators, before,during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.

1.06 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING EXCHANGECONTRACTS.A. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor’s

name and at no additional expense to EXCHANGE, all permits, coordination’s, certificationsother regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by thiscontract under applicable environmental laws and regulations. “Applicable environmental lawsand regulations” includes but is not limited to: the Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, ResourceConservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation andLiability Act, (CERCLA), Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal Insecticide Fungicide andRodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act, National Historicpreservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-KnowAct, Oil Pollution Act, and Pollution Prevention Act and State, County, and Local laws andregulations on the same subjects.

1.07 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION,DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES,EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMSA. Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local permits, coordination, certifications

or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws andregulations as defined in (a) above. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft allapplicable permit applications, coordinations, notices, or other required fillings, together with allsupporting data to the Contracting Officer for review. Permit applications or notifications orother documents that must be submitted by EXCHANGE will be submitted by EXCHANGE, andany documents that must be submitted by the Contractor will be returned after review to theContractor for submission. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceedbefore the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.

PART 2 - MATERIALS2.01 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be to the greatest extent practicable and consistent withfinancial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable. Whereconstruction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will beconsidered.

2.02 ASBESTOSA. Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.

2.03 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS)A. PCBs will not be used or included in this project.

2.04 LEAD-BASED PAINTA. Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.

2.05 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCESA. “Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)(40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited tochlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. “Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II byEPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to, hydrochlorofluorocarbons.

C. As required by 42 USC 7671 (b), (c), and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractorshall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are


manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, orcontainers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances as follows:

WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) ____________________,*(a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone inthe upper atmosphere.

* The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).

D. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of theClean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling and Emission Reduction Program and 7671h,Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

2.06 PESTICIDESA. Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply

pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without specificwritten prior approval of the Contracting Officer.

PART 3 EXECUTION (WORK PRACTICES)3.01 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

A. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation offugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction siteand any temporary roads that may be used for access to it. Water sprinkling may be used tocontrol dust. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that nopollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surfacewaters on or connected to the site.

3.02 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCESA. General: The General Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs

with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes, or other harmfulmaterials or pollutants. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to determine and complywith all applicable federal, state, regional, municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage: The General Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemical, fuels, oils,greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage fromentering public waters. In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all requirednotifications to federal, state, or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officerimmediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water: Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation,and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the stormdrainage system.

3.03 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCESA. General: It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the

limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present conditionor be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural andnot detract from the appearance of the project. The General Contractor shall limit hisconstruction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement: Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, theGeneral Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs withoutspecific written authority. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from eitherexcavation or filling within the root zone. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened orattached to any existing tree for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the ContractingOfficer. The General Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resultingfrom such use.



C. Restoration of Landscape Damage: Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damagedby the General Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible tothe original condition at the General Contractor’s expense. The Contracting Officer will decidewhat method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated andhealed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing. All scarsmade on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment constructionoperations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coatedimmediately with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performedin an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel. Tree trimming with axes shall notbe permitted. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, thatare subsequently damaged by the General Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion ofthe Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree ofthe same species.

3.04 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONSA. Contractor’s actions shall conform to all federal, state, and local requirements for the control of

air emissions during work under this contract. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washedto remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have thelowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating conditionfor the reduction of air emissions. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustionengines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

3.05 POLLUTION PREVENTIONA. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation

of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular. Recycling should be considered andimplemented at every practicable stage of the project.

3.06 WASTE DISPOSALA. Pollution Prevention: The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work

practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal: Work done under this contract is to be

performed on a government facility. According to rules and procedures of the United StatesEnvironmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generatoridentification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to beresponsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, ortransported from the facility. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, usematerials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for allhazardous wastes generated on the site. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes,contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous wastewith the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, throughthe Contracting officer, to installation environmental office. Contractor shall follow this planonce it has been approved by the Contracting Officer. Under no circumstances will Contractorbring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere. All hazardous wastewill be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all federal, state, and localrequirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes: All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result ofthis contract must be disposed of properly, in accordance with all federal, state, and localrequirements. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. Prior to creation of suchwastes, the Contractor will submit to the installation environmental management function,through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the typesof waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shallfollow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer. Suchwastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. Construction Debris:


1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on theInstallation, as designated by the installation authorities.

2. If a location on the Installation is not available, other sections in this contract may requirethe Contractor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of thecontractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered bythis paragraph.) Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with all applicablefederal, state, and local rules. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including butnot limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides. Prior to removal of any constructiondebris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of novalue to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the ContractingOfficer. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by a telecopier or other suitableelectronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to theContracting Officer. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessaryinformation if provided and the document is signed by an authorized installationrepresentative. However, an example is provided at the end of this section of thespecifications, and this form may be used. All construction debris removed from theinstallation must be covered by a certification. The Contractor must arrange withinstallation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or it severalcertifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans: Contractor may, at Contractor’s option submit for approvalas specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is,

consistent with best professional judgment, fee of environmental contamination orpollution. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation,where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completelyknown. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or othermaterials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection ofEXCHANGE, the installation, and the Contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any another clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standardsite work general provisions; no media by-product resulting from site preparation,construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where theconstruction is occurring. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no mediaby-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The Contractor shall: (1) leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosioncontrol; or (2) haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has beendesignated wither in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and (3) ifunforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated, theContractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media from the sitewithout written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

3.07 DEFINITIONSA. Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site.B. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same means and

usage here as they commonly do in the CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCS, CAA, TSCA, and SDWArespectively.

3.08 UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONSA. CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER:

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is,consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination ofpollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise. Contractor or subcontractorpersonnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, eitherbecause of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspiciousconditions. Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer



and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protectworkers, the site, and other personnel.

B. UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS:1. Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this

contract find unexpected historic or archaeological remains, such as bones, arrow points,pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence or previous uses of the site, Contractorwill cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer andinstallation environmental office.

INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVEDFROM EXCHANGE PROJECT SITE

As representative of _______________________________________(insert name ofInstallation), I am authorized to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the constructiondebris to be removed from the EXCHANGE project site at:_____________________________________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, Xinstallation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of allcontamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides.

CERTIFICATION:

Signed: __________________________________________________________Date: _________________________

Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title:____________________________________________________

ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post QUALITY REQUIREMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 40 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 40 00QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The General Contractor (GC) shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficientinspection and tests of all items of work, including that of the subcontractor(s) to insureconformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials,workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance. GC is responsible for the qualityof his work and the work of all the subcontractors. Tests of materials and/or special inspectionswill be made, when required by the specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations inaccordance with respective Sections of the specifications. Where required, the GC shallemploy and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform specific servicesand testing. Examples of such services are tests of fill materials, concrete materials, concretemix design, asphalt concrete laboratory testing of materials proposed and calculations forasphalt concrete mixtures, etc.

B. GC shall arrange and pay for all services and testing which are not specifically indicated to beprovided by EXCHANGE. All testing agencies used shall be approved by the Government.

C. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer may require the supplier tofurnish with each delivery of such material, a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier,stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

D. If any work or material requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered beforetests and inspections are made, or test reports distributed, the GC shall, at his own expense,uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests andinspections have been made and test reports distributed. If work or material so tested andinspected shall not be found to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, itshall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the GC, atits own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Related requirements and tests are specified in Divisions 2 through 28.

1.03 EXCHANGE RESPONSIBILITYA. EXCHANGE will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform

specified quality control testing during construction, as indicated in the various specificationsections.

1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITESA. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer and Independent Testing Agency Laboratory personnel

and provide access to work and to manufacturer's operations.1. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities.2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested; to

obtain and handle samples at the site; to facilitate inspections and tests; and forIndependent Testing Agency Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of testsamples.

3. Notify Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment ofpersonnel and scheduling of tests.

4. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Governmentfor Independent Testing Agency personnel and travel expenses incurred by theGovernment due to the GC's negligence.

B. Provide to the testing agency the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, andother materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.

C. Furnish copies of products test reports as required.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 40 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


D. Employ and pay for the services of the testing agency to perform additional inspection, samplingand testing required:1. For the GC's convenience.2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with Contract Documents.3. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, additional tests or inspections are required

because of the manner in which the GC executes the work. Examples of such tests andinspections are:a. Tests of materials substituted for previously accepted substituted or specified

materials.b. Re-tests made necessary by failure of material to comply with the requirements of the

specifications.c. Load tests made necessary because of portions of the structure not fully meeting

specifications or plan requirements.E. The use of EXCHANGE'S or GC's independent testing services shall in no way relieve the GC

of the responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans andspecifications.

F. The Contractor shall coordinate with both EXCHANGE and his own testing laboratories so thatthe work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements. This coordinationincludes notification of when tests should be taken, easy access to the work, and generalcooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.

G. Upon completion of the project, submit a notarized certificate stating tests for this work weremade in accordance with provisions of these specifications and, further, all such tests andreports made were reported as required. This certificate shall list all tests and dates when workwas completed.

1.05 QUALIFICATION OF TESTING AGENCYA. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329 - "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection

and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction,"latest edition.

B. Authorized to operate in the state in which the project is located.1.06 TESTING AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer and GC; provide qualified personnel after due notice.B. Perform specified instructions, observations, sampling and testing of materials and methods of

construction.1. Comply with specified standards.2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Promptly notify the Contracting Officer and GC of observed irregularities, deficiencies, ornon-conformance of work or products.

D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection. Each report shall include:1. Date issued.2. Project title and number.3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.6. Record of temperature.7. Date of test.8. Identification of product and specification section.9. Location of sample or test in the project.10. Type of inspection or test.11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by the Contracting Officer.

E. Report results of all tests in writing simultaneously to the following:

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post QUALITY REQUIREMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 40 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

1. Contracting Officer or authorized representative: 3 copies2. Site Inspector: 1 copy3. General Contractor: 1 copy4. Architect/Engineer: 1 copy

F. Perform additional tests as required by the Contracting Officer.1. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when

test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not beenattained in the structure, as directed by the Contracting Officer. Testing service mayconduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTMC42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests whenunacceptable concrete is verified.

G. Upon completion of the project, submit a notarized certificate stating tests for this work weremade in accordance with provisions of these Specifications and, further, all such tests andreports made for job were reported as required.

1.07 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING AGENCYA. Agency is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Approve or accept any portion of the work.3. Assume any duties of the GC.4. Stop the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 50 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 50 00TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security andprotection facilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.B. Section 01 59 00 - Field Offices and Sheds.

1.03 USE CHARGESA. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in

the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services andfacilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect,occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system isavailable for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connectionsand extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system isavailable for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connectionsand extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Site Plan: Submit site plan showing locations of field offices, storage sheds, utility hookups,

staging areas, lay-down areas, Conex areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-preventionprogram.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials andconstruction from water absorption and damage.1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption or water damage.2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water

intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from theseoperations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently topermit installation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates thedust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed timeframe for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined tobe inadequate. Include the following:1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.4. Waste handling procedures.5. Other dust-control measures.6. Contractor shall provide any required testing and balancing of the HVAC system(s).

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 50 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect eachtemporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during itsuse as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assignedresponsibilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabricfencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD lineposts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top rails.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-linkfabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch ODline posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails.Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 6 feet high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch rails, withpreservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.

D. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, withflame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

E. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.2.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperaturecontrols, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, andconstruction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in otherDivision 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan

racks, and bookcases.2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide

electrical power service and 120-V AC duplex receptacles, with no fewer than onereceptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-squaretack and marker boards.

3. Coffee machine and supplies; drinking water.4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 76 deg F.5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 50 fc at desk height.6. See Section 01 59 00 - Field Offices and Sheds, for further requirements.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodatematerials and equipment for construction operations.1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.03 EQUIPMENTA. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.


B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location andapplication.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system fortemporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille insystem and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stagefiltration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interferencewith performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of theWork.1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 - Summary.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities areno longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATIONA. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can beinterrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water

service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore thesefacilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use ofconstruction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activitiesfor curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction fromadverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have aharmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from enteringoccupied areas.1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be

performed according to coordination drawings.a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing

occupied areas.b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration

units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuinguntil removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments ondust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portabledust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equippedvacuum equipment.



G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by constructionactivities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed constructionfrom adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect oncompleted installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements toproduce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to

level required to allow installation or application of finishes.H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment

in a condition acceptable to Owner.I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.b. Ambulance service.c. Contractor's home office.d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.e. Architect's office.f. Engineers' offices.g. Owner's office.h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use whenaway from field office.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field officeadequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintainelectronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed.2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.5. Full-size keyboard and mouse.6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, Windows 7 or higher, including Word, Excel, andOutlook.

b. Adobe Reader 10.0 or higher.c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing,and spam protection in a combined application.

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup softwareproviding daily backups.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATIONA. General: Comply with the following:


1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within constructionarea or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completionwill be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas, ifavailable and approved by the Exchange for construction personnel.

D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.1. Identification Signs: Provide construction site signage as specified in Section 01 58 00.2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 -

Construction Waste Management and Disposal.F. Cleaning: Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 71 00 - Cleaning.G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools andequipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATIONA. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to beremoved or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conductconstruction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possibleair, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 - Summary.

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas ofconstruction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated andas required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through oradjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions.Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated onDrawings.1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning

signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions forprotection and safe passage.

3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway for duration of the Work.G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similaractivities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.



1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulatetemporary enclosures.

H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-deck dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migrationand to separate areas occupied by Owner, tenants, or customers from fumes and noise.1. Separating Construction Areas from Occupied Spaces: Construct temporary dustproof

partitions of 2 x 4 fire-retardant-treated wood studs or 3-5/8" metal studs, with 5/8" gypsumwallboard on the occupied side, with joints taped and wall painted; and 1/2"fire-retardant-treated plywood on the construction operations side.a. Insulate partitions to help control noise transmission to occupied areas.b. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and

security locks where openings are required.1) Provide a pair of 3' x 7' doors in temporary partitions at main access points for

construction activities and equipment access.2) Provide single 3' x 7' doors in temporary partitions at other required access

points for construction workers or emergency egress.2. Other Locations: Construct temporary dustproof partitions of 2 x 4 fire-retardant-treated

wood studs or 3-5/8" 20-gage metal studs, with one layer of 10-mil reinforced,fire-retardant polyethylene sheet on one side. Polyethylene shall have closed joints andsealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces.a. Dustproof partition design shall meet the Owner's approval.b. Provide required openings through partitions designed to prevent penetration of dust

and moisture into occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials andequipment.

3. Temporary partitions shall be maintainted to provide positive protection to occupied areasuntil final removal.

4. Construct vestibule and airlock at each exterior entrance through temporary partition withnot less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

5. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required byauthorities having jurisdiction, construct fire-rated assemblies having the required fireresistance.

6. Protect air-handling equipment.7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.8. Rework temporary dust partitions as required during the course of the project to

accommodate project phasing.I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply withNFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at

Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to befollowed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warningsign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVALA. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and toavoid possibility of damage.


C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security andprotection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service hasended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later thanSubstantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that mayhave been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner

reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, removesoil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Removematerials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, andother substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replacestreet paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used duringconstruction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00- Project Closeout.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGNFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 58 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 58 00CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGN


A. Project identification sign.B. Project informational signs.C. Maintenance.D. Removal.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Responsibility to provide signs.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Design sign and structure to withstand American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Standard 7,

120 miles/hr wind velocity @ 3 seconds.B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years.C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of

construction.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Attached sign exemplars are current proposed templates from EXCHANGE. Obtain most recent

sign template from EXCHANGE prior to producing sign layout.C. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure, sizes and grades of

members.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick, 48

inches x 96 inches.C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats, colors as selected.E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, colors as selected.

2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNA. One painted sign of construction, design, and content shown on one of the attachments, at

location designated.B. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Contracting Officer's Representative.

2.03 PROJECT INFORMATIONAL SIGNSA. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as Project Identification sign, or

standard products; size lettering to provide legibility at 100 foot distance.B. Provide at each field office, storage shed. Relocate as Work progress requires.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.B. Erect at designated location.C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind

loadings.

CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGN Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 58 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

3.02 MAINTENANCEA. Maintain signs and supports clean; repair deterioration and damage.

3.03 REMOVALA. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the

area.3.04 ATTACHMENTS

A. Preferred SignB. Alternate Sign

END OF SECTION

Pref

erre

d

1'-3 1/2"4"2"1"2"5 1/2"5"3"5"4"

4'-2"

8'-2"

PR

OJE

CT

NA

ME

AR

CH

ITE

CT

'S N

AM

EC

ITY

, S

TA

TE

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

'S N

AM

EC

ITY

, S

TA

TE

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

LO

CA

TIO

N

Alte

rnat

e

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 59 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 59 00FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS


A. Temporary field offices and sheds.B. Maintenance and cleaning.C. Removal.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose.2.02 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securelyfixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storagespaces. Maintain during progress of Work; remove at completion of Work.

C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible withoccupancy and storage requirements.

D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Contracting Officer.E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted;

resilient floors and bases.F. Lighting for Offices: 50 foot candles at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.G. Fire Extinguishers: One 10 lb. standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each office

and each storage area.H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of

products.2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68 degrees Fheating and 76 degrees F cooling.

B. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance withContract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.04 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIESA. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings. Minimum size: 150

square feet.B. Telephone: The Contractor shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the

Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.C. Internet, E-Mail and Fax: Install, maintain and pay for services for the Contractor's Field Office.D. Furnishings in Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat at least ten persons; racks

and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents.E. Other Furnishings: Contractor's option.F. Equipment: Six (6) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch outdoor weather

thermometer and a weather protected bulletin board for posting information required by thecontract.

FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 59 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2.05 CONTRACTING OFFICER'S FIELD OFFICEA. Separate space for sole use by the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer, with separate entrance

door with new lock and two keys.B. Area: Minimum 150 sq ft, minimum dimension 8 ft.C. Windows: Minimum three minimum total area of 10 percent of floor area, with operable sash

and insect screens. Locate to provide views of construction area.D. Electrical Distribution Panel: Two circuits minimum, 110 volt, single phase service.E. Minimum four 110 volt duplex convenience outlets, one on each wall.F. Telephone: The Contractor shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service to the

Contracting Officer's field office, including an answering device. The Contractor shall pay forbasic service and local calls only, but will not pay for long distance calls.

G. Furnishings:1. One desk 54 x 30 inch, with three drawers.2. One drafting table 36 x 72 inch, with one equipment drawer.3. Plan rack to hold working Drawings, shop drawings, and record documents.4. One standard four-drawer legal size metal filing cabinet with locks and two keys per lock.5. Six linear ft of metal bookshelves.6. Two swivel arm chairs.7. Two straight chairs.8. One drafting table stool.9. One tackboard 36 x 30 inch.10. One waste basket per desk and table.

2.06 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDSA. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly

provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.

3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANINGA. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage

areas.B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.04 REMOVALA. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore

areas.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 60 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 60 00PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements.B. Re-use of existing products.C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.D. Product option requirements.E. Substitution limitations.F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 04 04 - Substitutions.B. Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures: Substitutions made during and after the

Bidding/Negotiation Phase.C. Section 01 10 17 - EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment (EF/EI).D. Section 01 10 18 - EXCHANGE Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment (EF/CI).E. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of

manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy toidentify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.F. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility

outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specificallyrequired or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptlyupon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner.

C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated,reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of theOwner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 60 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2.02 NEW PRODUCTSA. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.3. Containing lead, cadmium, asbestos.

C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.D. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,

and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.E. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for

connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specificationsections.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description.B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified inindividual specification sections.

B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.B. Section 00 04 04 - Substitutions specifies time restrictions and methodology for submitting

requests for substitutions during the bidding period.1. AFTER THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED, NO FURTHER SUBSTITIONS WILL BE

PERMITTED.3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS

A. See Section 01 10 17 - EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment (EF/EI): Schedules ofMaterials and Equipment (EF/EI).

B. See Section 01 10 18 - EXCHANGE Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment (EF/CI):Schedule of Materials and Equipment (EF/CI).

C. Owner's Responsibilities:1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to

Contractor.2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

D. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 60 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoidloss of factory calibration.

B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside ofpackaging.

C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize sitestorage time and potential damage to stored materials.

D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of

surrounding areas.F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection.G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.

H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.I. Do not store products directly on the ground.J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.K. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.L. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.M. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.N. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post STARTING OF SYSTEMSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 65 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 65 00STARTING OF SYSTEMS


A. Starting Systems.B. Demonstration and instructions.C. Testing, adjusting and balancing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers field reports.B. Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra

materials.C. Section 23 05 94 - Air Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: System Commissioning.

1.03 STARTING SYSTEMSA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Notify Contracting Officer seven (7) working days prior to start-up of each item.C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or

Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or systeminstallation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has beenproperly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONSA. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to EXCHANGE and Facility personnel two

weeks prior to date of final inspection.B. Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the

project.C. For equipment of systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with AAFES/Installation personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated location.F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for

additional data becomes apparent during instruction.G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that

specified in individual sections.1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. EXCHANGE will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to performtesting, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 23 05 93.

STARTING OF SYSTEMS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 65 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicatingobservations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with therequirements of the Contract Documents.


END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CLEANINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 71 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 71 00CLEANING


A. Progress Cleaning.B. Final Cleaning.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. General Provisions of the Contract.B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.C. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.D. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.E. Individual Specification Sections - Cleaning Requirements.

1.03 SAFETY REQUIREMENTSA. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General SafetyRequirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Requirements in 29 CFR 1926 and

29 CFR in 1910. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes mayaffect the Contractor in his performance under the contract. It is the Contractor'sresponsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes, and comply with allrequirements.

C. Hazards Control:1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily.2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollutionlaws.1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation.2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or

sanitary drains.3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained freefrom accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private

dumping areas off of Government property.E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue

cleaning to eliminate dust.

CLEANING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 71 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throwmaterials from heights. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaningprocess will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.02 FINAL CLEANINGA. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of

sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials

from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated toshine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.F. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.G. Clean all glass.H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air HVAC units were operated without filters during

construction.J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by EXCHANGE.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT CLOSEOUTFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 77 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 77 00PROJECT CLOSEOUT


A. Substantial Completion.B. Final Inspections.C. Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements.D. Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.E. DD Form 1354 requirements.F. Warranty requirements.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment.B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.C. Section 01 65 00 - Starting of Systems.D. Section 01 71 00 - Cleaning.E. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETIONA. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, provide the

following.1. Contractor's list of incomplete items (punch list).

a. Submit PDF electronic file.b. Submit paper copies.

2. Six copies of all Operation and Maintenance Manuals and all other close-out materials. These items shall be organized in 3-ring binders as described below.

3. A digital copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in PDF format, submitted to theContracting Officer and Architect.

4. A digital copy of the "As-Built" Record Drawings and Specifications in PDF format,submitted to the Contracting Officer and Architect.

5. Warranties, maintenance service agreements, and similar documents.6. Releases, occupancy permits, and operating certificates.7. Tools, spare parts, and extra materials, delivered to Contracting Officer's Representative.8. Final changeover of locks performed.9. Startup testing completed.10. Test/adjust/balance records submitted.11. Temporary facilities removed.12. Owner advised of heat and utility changeover.13. Owner advised of pending insurance changeover.14. Changeover information for use, operation, and maintenance submitted.15. Owner's personnel instructed in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, including demonstration and training videotapes submitted.B. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer that project, or designated portion ofProject, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.C. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be completedor corrected, as determined by the inspection.

PROJECT CLOSEOUT Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 77 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion,containing:a. Date of Substantial Completion.b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer.c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.d. Time and date EXCHANGE will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof.e. Responsibilities of EXCHANGE and Contractor for:

1) Utilities.2) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems.3) Maintenance and cleaning.4) Security.5) Signatures of:

(a) Contracting Officer.(b) Contractor.

3. EXCHANGE occupancy of project or designated portion of project:a. Contractor shall:

1) Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 71 00.2) EXCHANGE will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of

Substantial Completion.4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

E. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to Contracting Officer,

certifying that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete.3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.04 FINAL INSPECTIONA. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed.2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents.3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Facility Representatives and are

operational.5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with

requirements of contract documents, he shall request Contractor to make project closeoutsubmittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:1. He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second

written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete.3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Project Record Documents: Provide as specified in Section 01 78 39.

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic

covers.B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manual," title of project, and

subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT CLOSEOUTFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 77 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized asdescribed below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or systemdescription identified, typed on 24 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor,

Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephonenumbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.c. Catalogue data on plumbing fixtures, valves, water heaters, heating and cooling

equipment, temperature control, fan, electrical panels, service entrance equipmentand light fixtures.

d. Parts list for each component.e. Operating instructions.f. Valve chart.g. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.h. Start-up procedures.i. Emergency procedures.j. Shut-down procedures.k. Manufacturer's name, type, color designation for ceramic tile, resilient flooring,

windows, doors, brick, concrete block, paint, roofing and other materials.l. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and

materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Air and water balance reports.c. Certificates.d. Photocopies of warranties.e. Training Sessions attendance roster.f. Warranties.

E. Submit six (6) hard copies and one PDF digital copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manualsto the Contracting Officer.1. Make any additions or revisions to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as directed by

the Contracting Officer or Architect following Substantial Completion review.1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completelycheck out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings andspecifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility MaintenancePersonnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item. In addition to instructionsgiven at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instructioncourse on operation and maintenance of the systems. Training sessions shall be limited to four(4) continuous hours where practical. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.08 DD FORM 1354A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property": At the

conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Contracting Officercertain costs and quantity data of materials and systems furnished and installed. A list of itemsfor which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor. Suchinformation will be returned to the Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list.1. Form is attached at the end of this Section.

PROJECT CLOSEOUT Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 77 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.09 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIESA. Upon completion of project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of

Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted toContracting Officer. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligationassumed under contract.

B. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year. In addition, where separate guaranteesfor certain portions of work are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall beextended to cover such longer periods.

C. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection andAcceptance by EXCHANGE. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result ofabuse, neglect by EXCHANGE, or its successor(s) in interest.


END OF SECTION

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).

1


ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

2

HQ

Arm

y &

Air

Forc

e Ex

chan

ge S

ervi

ce

D

esig

n C

riter

ia M

anua

l

EX

HIB

IT J

TRAN

SFER

AN

D A

CC

EPTA

NC

E O

F M

ILIT

ARY

REA

L PR

OPE

RTY

PA

GE

OF

PAG

ES

1.

FRO

M: (

Inst

alla

tion/

Activ

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

OPE

RAT

ING

U

NIT

3.

DIS

TR

ICT

CO

DE

4. O

PER

AT

ING

AG

ENC

Y

5. D

ATE

6. J

OB

NU

MBE

R

7. S

ERIA

L N

UM

BER

7.

CO

NTR

ACT

NU

MBE

R

15. T

YPE

OF

TRAN

SAC

TIO

N

1.

FRO

M: (

Inst

alla

tion/

Activ

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

OPE

RAT

ING

U

NIT

11

. D

IS-

TRIC

T C

OD

E

12.

OPE

R

ATIN

G

AGEN

CY

13. A

C

CO

UN

TIN

GN

UM

BER

14. A

C

CO

UN

T-O

FFIC

E N

UM

BER

NEW

CO

NST

R

EXIS

TIN

G F

AC

CAP

ITAL

IM

P O

THER

(SPE

CIF

Y)

BE

NF/

O

PH

YSIC

AL

CO

M

FI

N. C

OM

OTH

ER

(SPE

CIF

Y)

16.

PRO

JEC

T N

UM

BER

ITEM

N

O.

17

CAT

EGO

RTY

C

OD

E

18

FAC

ILIT

Y (c

ateg

ory

desc

riptio

n)

19

NO

. OF

UN

ITS

20

TYPE

21

UN

IT

OF

MEA

S

22

TOTA

L Q

UAN

TITY

23

CO

ST

24

DR

AWIN

G

NU

MBE

RS

25

REM

ARKS

26

41

65

27.

STA

TEM

ENT

OF

CO

MPL

ETIO

N:

The

faci

lites

list

ed h

ereo

n ar

e in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s, dr

awin

gs,

and

spec

ifica

tions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by th

e au

thor

ized

repr

esen

tativ

e of

the

usin

g ag

ency

exc

ept

for t

he d

efic

ienc

ies l

iste

d on

the

reve

rse

side

.

28. A

CC

EPTE

D B

Y (S

igna

ture

) D

ATE

TRAN

SFER

RED

BY

(Sig

natu

re)

Title

(Are

a En

gr./B

ase

Engr

/ DPW

O)

DAT

E TI

TLE

(Pos

t Eng

r./Ba

se E

ngr./

Nav

y R

ep.)

29. P

RO

PER

TY

VO

UC

HER

NU

MBE

R

DD

FO

RM

1 N

0V 6

1 135

4

SUPE

RSE

DES

EN

G F

OR

MS

290

AN

D 2

90B

AN

D N

AV

DO

CK

S FO

RM

231

7

4165.40 (Encl 1) Nov 14, 61

3


30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.

4


ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR

5


ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.

6



CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________

7



ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)

8



ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

9

For

m A

pp

rove

d

TR

AN

SF

ER

AN

D A

CC

EP

TA

NC

E O

F D

oD

RE

AL

PR

OP

ER

TY

O

MB

No.

070

4-01

88

PA

GE

O

F

PA

GE

S

The

piJb

ITC

re

po

rt1

ng

0u

rcfe

nro

rffii

s C

Olfe

ciio

n 6f

1r1f

orm

at10

n IS

eS

lfma

tea

to a

vera

ge-3

0-m

inu

tes

pe

r re

srio

nse

, inC

fU?i

ngtf1

8 t1

me

ror

rev1

ew1n

g lnS!ru~fions,

sear

Cflj

ng e

x1S

lingd

ata

SOU

rCeS

, g

atf

ieri

ng

an

a m

a1nt

a1rn

ng 'if

ie'a

"a a

ne

ed

ed

; an

a co

mP

fet1

ng a

M re

v1ew

1ngt

f1e

colle

ctio

n o

f inf

orm

atio

n.

Se

nd

co

mm

en

ts r

eg

ard

in8

this

bu

rde

n e

stim

ate

or

any

oth

er

asp

ect

of

this

co

lect

ion

of i

nfo

rma

tion

, in

clud

inp,

su

gg

est

ion

s fo

r re

du

cin

g t

he b

urd

en

, to

the

De

pa

rtm

en

t o

f De

fen

se, W

ash

ing

ton

He

ad

qu

art

ers

Se

rvic

es,

Exe

cutiv

e S

erv

ice

s D

ire

cto

rate

, In

form

atio

n M

an

ag

em

en

t D

ivis

ion,

48

0

Ma

rk C

en

ter

Dri

ve, A

lexa

nd

ria

, VA

22

35

0-3

10

0 (

0704

--01

88).

R

esp

on

de

nts

sh

ou

d b

e a

wa

re t

ha

t n

otw

ithst

an

din

g a

ny o

the

r pr

ovis

ion

of l

aw,

no

per

son

shal

l be

su

bje

ct to

an

y pe

nalty

fo

r fa

iling

to

com

ply

with

a

colle

ctio

n o

f in

form

atio

n if

itd

oe

s n

ot d

isp

lay

a cu

rre

ntly

val

id O

MB

con

trol

nu

mb

er.

PL

EA

SE

DO

NO

T R

ET

UR

N Y

OU

R C

OM

PLE

TE

D F

OR

M T

O T

HE

AB

OV

E O

RG

AN

IZA

TIO

N.

1.

FR

OM

(O

rgan

izat

ion

Nam

e)

2.

DA

TE

PR

EP

AR

ED

3.

P

RO

JEC

T/J

OB

4.

S

ER

IAL

NU

MB

ER

8.

T

RA

NS

AC

TIO

N D

ET

AIL

S

(YY

YY

MM

DD

) N

UM

BE

R

a. M

ET

HO

D (

X a

ll th

at a

pply

) b.

W

HE

N/E

VE

NT

(X

one

) ~

AC

QU

ISIT

ION

BY

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

D TO

TA

L A

SS

ET

f-

--1

T

RA

NS

FE

R B

ET

WE

EN

SE

RV

ICE

S

PL

AC

ED

-IN

-SE

RV

ICE

5.

T

O (

Org

aniz

atio

n -

Inst

alla

tion

Cod

e a

nd

Nam

e)

6.

RP

SU

IDIS

ITE

NA

ME

/ 7.

C

ON

TR

AC

T

7a.

PL

AC

ED

-IN

-~

INS

TC

OD

E/IN

ST

NA

ME

N

UM

BE

R(S

) S

ER

VIC

E D

AT

E

CA

PIT

AL

IM

PR

OV

EM

EN

T

D P

AR

TIA

L A

SS

ET

I--

(YY

YY

MM

DD

) IN

VE

NT

OR

Y A

DJU

ST

ME

NT

P

LA

CE

D-I

N-S

ER

VIC

E

c. T

YP

E (

X o

ne)

n D

RA

FT

1

FIN

AL

_C

INT

ER

IM

9.

10a.

1

0b

. 11

. 12

. 13

. 14

. A

RE

A

OT

HE

R

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

ITE

M

FA

CIL

ITY

R

PU

ID

CA

TE

GO

RY

C

AT

CO

DE

T

YP

E

SU

ST

. 15

. 16

. 17

. 18

. C

OS

T

FU

ND

F

UN

D

INT

ER

-IT

EM

D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

C

OD

E

CO

DE

P

RIM

AR

Y

PR

IMA

RY

UM

S

EC

ON

DA

RY

SE

CO

ND

AR

Y U

M

SO

UR

CE

O

RG

E

ST

R

EM

AR

KS

N

O.

NO

. C

OD

E

CO

DE

U

M

QU

AN

TIT

Y

UM

Q

UA

NT

ITY

24.

ST

AT

EM

EN

T O

F C

OM

PLE

TIO

N.

The

fac

ilitie

s lis

ted

here

on a

re in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s,

25a.

A

CC

EP

TE

D B

Y (

Typ

ed N

ame

and

Sig

natu

re)

b. D

AT

E S

IGN

ED

dr

awin

gs,

and

spec

ifica

tions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by t

he a

utho

rized

rep

rese

ntat

ive

of

(YY

YY

MM

DD

) th

e u

sing

age

ncy

exce

pt f

or th

e de

ficie

ncie

s lis

ted

on t

he r

ever

se s

ide

.

a. T

RA

NS

FE

RR

ED

BY

(T

ype

d N

ame

an

d S

igna

ture

) b.

D

A T

E S

IGN

ED

(Y

YY

YM

MD

D)

c.

TIT

LE (

DP

WIR

PA

O)

26.

PR

OP

ER

TY

c. T

ITLE

(A

rea

En

gr.!

Ba

se E

ng

r.ID

PW

/Co

nst

ruct

ion

Age

nt)

VO

UC

HE

R N

UM

BE

R

DD

FO

RM

135

4, A

UG

201

3 P

RE

VIO

US

ED

ITIO

N M

AY

BE

US

ED

: A

do

be

De

sig

ne

r 9.

0

27.

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N D

EF

ICIE

NC

IES

(A

ttac

h b

lan

k sh

ee

t fo

r co

ntin

uatio

ns)

28.

PR

OJE

CT

RE

MA

RK

S (

Att

ach

bla

nk

she

et f

or

cont

inua

tions

)

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

GE

NE

RA

L.

Thi

s fo

rm h

as b

een

desi

gned

and

iss

ued

for

use

in c

onne

ctio

n w

ith t

he t

rans

fer

of

mili

tary

rea

l pr

oper

ty b

etw

een

the

mili

tary

dep

artm

ents

and

to

or fr

om o

ther

go

vern

me

nt

agen

cies

. It

supe

rsed

es E

NG

For

ms

290

and

290B

(fo

rmer

ly u

sed

by t

he A

rmy

and

Air

For

ce)

and

NA

VD

OC

KS

For

m 2

31

7 (

form

erly

use

d b

y th

e N

avy)

. E

xist

ing

inst

ruct

ions

issu

ed b

y th

e m

ilita

ry d

epar

tmen

ts r

elat

ive

to t

he p

repa

ratio

n o

f DD

F

orm

135

4 ar

e ap

plic

able

to t

his

revi

sed

form

to

the

exte

nt t

hat t

he v

ario

us i

tem

s an

d co

lum

ns

on t

he s

uper

sede

d fo

rms

ha

ve b

een

reta

ined

. T

he m

ilita

ry d

epar

tmen

ts m

ay

prom

ulga

te

addi

tiona

l in

stru

ctio

ns,

as a

ppro

pria

te.

Fo

r de

taile

d in

stru

ctio

ns o

n h

ow

to f

ill o

ut t

his

form

, ple

ase

refe

r to

Uni

fied

Fac

ilitie

s C

riter

ia

(UF

C)

1-30

0-08

, da

ted

16

Apr

il 20

09 o

r la

ter.

SP

EC

IFIC

DA

TA

IT

EM

S.

1.

Fro

m.

Na

me

of t

he t

rans

ferr

ing

agen

cy.

2.

Dat

e P

rep

ared

. D

ate

of a

ctua

l pr

epar

atio

n.

Ent

er a

ll da

tes

in Y

YY

YM

MD

D f

orm

at

(Exa

mpl

e:

Mar

ch 3

1, 2

010

= 20

1003

31).

3.

Pro

ject

/Jo

b N

um

ber

. P

roje

ct n

um

be

r on

a D

D F

orm

139

1 or

Ind

ivid

ual J

ob O

rde

r N

umbe

r.

4.

Ser

ial

Nu

mb

er.

Seq

uent

ial s

eria

l n

um

be

r as

sign

ed b

y th

e pr

epar

ing

orga

niza

tion

(e.g

., 20

10-0

001)

.

5.

To

. N

ame

and

addr

ess

of t

he r

ecei

ving

ins

talla

tion,

act

ivity

, an

d S

ervi

ce o

f the

Rea

l P

rope

rty

Acc

ount

able

Off

icer

(R

PA

O).

6.

RP

SU

ID/S

ITE

NA

ME

/INS

TC

OD

E/IN

ST

NA

ME

. S

ite U

niqu

e Id

entif

ier

and

nam

e or

in

stal

latio

n co

de a

nd n

ame

whe

re t

he c

onst

ruct

ed f

acili

ty is

loc

ated

.

7.

Co

ntr

act

Nu

mb

er(s

).

Con

trac

t nu

mbe

r(s)

for

this

pro

ject

.

7a.

Pla

ced

-In

-Ser

vice

Dat

e.

RP

A P

lace

d In

Ser

vice

Dat

e.

Thi

s is

the

dat

e th

e as

set

is

actu

ally

pla

ced-

in-s

ervi

ce.

8.

Tra

nsa

ctio

n D

etai

ls.

a. M

etho

d o

f Tra

nsac

tion.

M

ark

(X)

as m

any

boxe

s as

app

ly.

b. W

hen/

Eve

nt.

Wh

en

or

eve

nt

caus

ing

prep

arat

ion

of D

D F

orm

135

4. X

onl

y on

e bo

x.

c. T

ype

. D

raft,

int

erim

, or

fina

l D

D F

orm

135

4.

X o

nly

one

box

.

9. I

tem

Nu

mb

er.

Use

a s

epar

ate

item

num

ber

for

each

fac

ility

, no

ite

m n

um

be

r fo

r ad

ditio

nal

usag

es.

DD

FO

RM

135

4 (B

AC

K),

AU

G 2

013

10a.

Fac

ility

Nu

mb

er.

Ass

igne

d in

acc

orda

nce

with

the

Ins

talla

tion/

Bas

e M

ast

er

Num

beri

ng P

lan.

10b

. RP

UID

. Id

entif

ied

in R

eal

Pro

pert

y In

vent

ory.

11.

Cat

ego

ry C

od

e.

The

cat

egor

y co

de d

escr

ibes

the

fac

ility

usa

ge.

12. C

atco

de

Des

crip

tio

n.

The

cat

egor

y co

de n

ame

whi

ch d

escr

ibes

the

faci

lity

usag

e.

13. T

ype.

T

ype

of c

onst

ruct

ion

: P

for

Per

man

ent;

S f

or S

emi-

perm

anen

t; T

for

Te

mp

ora

ry.

14. S

ust

ain

abili

ty C

od

e.

Rep

orts

whe

ther

or

not a

n as

set

mee

ts t

he s

usta

inab

ility

gui

delin

es s

et fo

rth

in S

ectio

n 2(

g) o

f Exe

cutiv

e O

rde

r 13

514.

Val

id v

alue

s ar

e: 1

(ass

et m

eets

the

gui

delin

es);

2 (

asse

t d

oe

s no

t m

ee

t the

gui

delin

es);

3 (

asse

t no

t eva

luat

ed);

4 (

asse

t no

t sub

ject

to g

uide

lines

).

15. A

rea

: U

M 1

. A

rea

unit

of m

easu

re;

use

the

unit

of m

easu

re a

ssoc

iate

d w

ith t

he c

ateg

ory

code

se

lect

ed in

11.

16. T

ota

l Q

uan

tity

UM

1.

The

tot

al a

rea

for

the

mea

sure

iden

tifie

d in

Ite

m 1

5.

Use

neg

ativ

e nu

mbe

rs

for

dem

oliti

on.

17.

Oth

er:

UM

2.

Uni

t o

f Mea

sure

2 is

the

cap

acity

or

othe

r m

easu

rem

ent

unit

(e.g

., L

F,

MB

, E

A, e

tc.)

.

18. T

ota

l Q

uan

tity

UM

2.

The

tot

al c

apac

ity/o

ther

for

the

mea

sure

iden

tifie

d in

Ite

m 1

7.

19.

Co

st.

Co

st fo

r ea

ch f

acili

ty;

for

capi

tal

impr

ovem

ents

to e

xist

ing

faci

litie

s, s

ho

w a

mou

nt o

f in

crea

se o

nly.

If t

here

is n

o in

crea

se f

or th

e ca

pita

l im

prov

emen

t, e

nter

NIA

.

20.

Fu

nd

So

urc

e.

Ent

er th

e F

und

Sou

rce

Cod

e fo

r th

is i

tem

.

21.

Fu

nd

ing

Org

aniz

atio

n.

Ent

er th

e co

de f

or th

e or

gani

zatio

n re

spon

sibl

e fo

r ac

quir

ing

this

fac

ility

.

22.

Inte

rest

Co

de.

E

nter

the

code

tha

t re

flect

s g

ove

rnm

en

t in

tere

st o

r ow

ners

hip

in t

he f

acili

ty.

23.

Item

Rem

arks

. R

emar

ks p

erta

inin

g on

ly to

the

item

num

ber

iden

tifie

d in

Ite

m 9

; sh

ow

cos

t sh

arin

g.

24.

Sta

tem

ent

of

Co

mp

leti

on

. T

yped

nam

e, s

igna

ture

, tit

le, a

nd d

ate

of s

igna

ture

by

the

resp

onsi

ble

tran

sfer

ring

ind

ivid

ual

or a

gent

.

25. A

ccep

ted

By.

T

yped

nam

e, s

igna

ture

, tit

le,

and

date

of s

igna

ture

by

the

RP

AO

or

acce

ptin

g of

ficia

l.

26.

Pro

per

ty V

ou

cher

Nu

mb

er.

Nex

t seq

uent

ial n

um

be

r as

sign

ed b

y th

e R

PA

O in

vo

uch

er

reg

iste

r.

27.

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Def

icie

nci

es.

List

con

stru

ctio

n de

ficie

ncie

s in

pro

ject

dur

ing

con

tra

cto

r tu

rno

ver

insp

ectio

n.

28.

Pro

ject

Rem

arks

. P

roje

ct le

vel r

emar

ks a

nd c

ontin

uatio

n o

f blo

cks.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 78 39 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 78 39PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.1.02 RECORD FIELD DATA

A. General: Maintain at job site, two complete sets of Contract Documents. During construction,both sets shall be marked to show all deviations in actual construction from the ContractDocuments.1. Red Markers: Indicate all additions.2. Green Markers: Indicate all deletions.

B. Record Documents: The drawings shall show, but no be limited to, the following information:1. Locations and description of any utility lines and other installations of any kind or

description known to exist within the construction area. Include dimensions and/or surveycoordinates to permanent features.

2. Locations and dimensions of any changes within the building or structure and the accuratelocation and dimension of all underground utilities and facilities.

3. Correct grade or alignment of roads, structures and utilities if any changes were madefrom Contract Drawings.

4. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading.5. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from shop drawings

prepared or furnished by the Contractor including, but not limited to:a. Fabrication erectionb. Installation and placing detailsc. Pipe sizesd. Insulation materialse. Equipment pad dimensions

6. Topography and grades of all drainage.7. All changes or modifications from the original design.8. Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option actually used in

the construction shall be shown on the Record Drawings. The option not used shall bedeleted.

C. Record Field Data: All deviations shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in theContract Documents. Marking of the documents shall continue throughout construction to keepthe documents up to date.1. Additional Data: The Contractor shall maintain the following:

a. Full size marked-up drawings.b. Survey notesc. Sketchesd. Nameplate datae. Pricing informationf. Description and serial number of all equipment

2. Record field data shall be available for inspection by the Contracting Officer wheneverrequested and shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the ContractingOfficer and Contractor. Failure to keep record field data current shall be sufficientjustification to withhold a retained percentage from the monthly Application for Payment.

D. Submittal of Record Field Data:1. Submit two sets to the Contracting Officer a minimum of 20 calendar days prior to the date

of final inspection.2. The Contractor shall make all corrections identified during Contractor Officer review and

resubmit corrected data within ten (10) calendar days of receipt.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post01 78 39 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


3. When data is accepted as complete, one set of documents will be returned to theContractor for completion of the Record Documents.

1.03 RECORD ELECTRONIC FILE DOCUMENTSA. Electronic File Format: No earlier than 30 days after award, the Contracting Officer will provide

one set of AutoCAD electronic file format contract drawings to be used for preparation ofRecord Drawings.1. Media: ISO – 9660 CD2. The Contractor shall verify usability of AutoCAD files and notify the Contracting Officer of

any discrepancies within 30 calendar days of receipt. Any discrepancies will be correctedand files returned to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall incorporate all deviations from the original Contract Documents asrecorded in the approved “Record Field Data” as indicated in Paragraph 1.2.C above.

4. The Contractor shall also incorporate all written modifications to the Contract Documentswhich were issued by amendment or contract modification.

5. All revisions and changes shall be incorporated:a. Items marked deleted shall be deleted.b. Clouds around new items shall be removed.

B. Electronic File Submittal: Submit a complete set of Record Drawings in AutoCAD electronic fileformat no later than 30 days after final acceptance. The Record Drawings shall be done inequal quality to the originals, including line work, line weights, lettering and symbols. Identifyeach drawing with the word “RECORD” in block letters at least 3/8” high above the title block. The date of completion and the words “Revised Record” shall be placed in the revision blockabove the latest revision notation.1. Format: AutoCAD Release 2005 ‘DWG’ format. All support files required to display or plot

the files in the same manner as they were developed shall be delivered along with the files,including but not limited to:a. Font filesb. Menu filesc. Plotter setupd. Referenced files

2. Layering: Conform to AIA Standard Document, “CAD Layer Guidelines,” latest version. An explanatory list of which layer is used at which drawing and an explanatory list of alllayers which do not conform to the standard AIA CAD Layer Guidelines including any userdefinable fields permitted by the guidelines shall be provided with each submittal.

3. Electronic File Deliverable Media: ISO 9660 Format CD-ROM. Submit three (3) completesets of disks and one complete set of full size reproducible prints taken from the disks. Each disk shall have a clearly marked label stating the Contractor’s firm name, projectname and location, submittal type (record) and date. Each submittal shall be accompaniedby a hard copy transmittal sheet that contains the above information along with tabulatedinformation about each file as shown below:Electronic File Name Plate Number Drawing Titlea. Include electronic version of the table.

4. Submit one copy of the CD-Rom and one set of full-size Mylar reproducibles of thedrawings to Building Records staff person at the facility.

1.04 SUBMITTAL OF FINAL RECORD DRAWINGSA. Complete and return the final record documents and the approved preliminary record

documents to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of final acceptance.1. All drawings from the original contract documents shall be included, including drawings

where no changes were made.2. The drawings will be returned to the Contractor if corrections are necessary.3. The Contractor shall make all corrections and shall return the drawings to the Contracting

Officer within seven (7) calendar days of receipt.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 78 39 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT COSTA. All costs incurred by the Contractor in the proportion and furnishing of record documents,

including electronic file format, shall be included in the contract price and no separate paymentwill be made for this work.1. Approval and acceptance of the final record documents shall be accomplished before final

payment is made to the Contractor.1.06 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Provide one set of marked-up record drawings at the time of system acceptance testing. Theserecord drawings shall be in addition to the submittal of marked-up record drawings specifiedelsewhere in the contract.


END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 01 91 13 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 01 91 13GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Commissioning Team:1. Members representing contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors,

installers, suppliers, and specialists.2. Members representing Owner, including Commissioning Authority (CxA), facility user and

operation and maintenance personnel, and Architect and engineering designprofessionals.

B. EXCHANGE Responsibilities:1. Provide Operating (OPR) and Basis of Design (BoD) documentation.2. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them for commissioning

activities.C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Assign personnel and schedule them for commissioning

activities.D. CxA's Responsibilities:

1. Organize and lead commissioning team.2. Provide commissioning plan.3. Convene commissioning team meetings.4. Provide Project-specific checklists and test procedures.5. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling.6. Prepare and maintain Issues Log.7. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.8. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.9. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual

and commissioning process report.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 02 41 16 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 02 41 16SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building.B. Removal of selected interior finishes in areas to be modernized.C. Patching and repairs.D. Salvage existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Use of the building and phasing requirements.B. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.C. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.D. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary utilities, temporary

construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, andenvironmental protection measures for selective demolition operations.

E. Section 07 01 50 - Maintenance of Membrane Roofing.F. Division 21 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating Fire Sprinkler items.G. Division 22 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating Plumbing items.H. Division 23 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating HVAC items.I. Division 26 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating Electrical items.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,

salvaged, or to remain EXCHANGE property.B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain EXCHANGE

property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contentsof containers and deliver to EXCHANGE's designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them forreuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locationsindicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling duringselective demolition. When permitted by the Contracting Officer, items may be removed to asuitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalledin their original locations.

1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIPA. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain EXCHANGE property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor'sproperty and shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of off Installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and endingdates for each activity.

2. Interruption of utility services.3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted

progress of EXCHANGE's on-site operations.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post02 41 16 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


5. Coordination of EXCHANGE's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and ofEXCHANGE's partial occupancy of completed Work.

6. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolitionoperations.1. Refer to Section 01 32 00 for further requirements.

D. Record drawings at Project close-out according to Section 01 78 39 - Project RecordDocuments.1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or

mechanical conditions.1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. EXCHANGE will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolitionarea. Conduct selective demolition so that EXCHANGE's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to EXCHANGE of activities that will affect EXCHANGE'soperations.

B. EXCHANGE assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectivelydemolished.1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

EXCHANGE as far as practical.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of theconflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting Officer.

D. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result instructural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structuresduring selective demolition.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolitionactivities.

3.02 UTILITY SERVICESA. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during

selective demolition operations.1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when

authorized in writing by EXCHANGE and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporaryservices during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to EXCHANGE and togoverning authorities.a. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to EXCHANGE if shutdown of service is

required during changeover.


B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility servicesserving building to be selectively demolished.1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.2. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building beforeproceeding with selective demolition.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and sealthe remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 Sections for shutting off,disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selectivedemolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified inwriting.

3.03 PREPARATIONA. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,

flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolitionoperations.

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without

permission from EXCHANGE and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routesaround closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings andfacilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered

passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line

of groups of trees to remain.4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of

existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no waterleakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.

5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and areexposed during selective demolition operations.

6. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration

and to separate areas from fumes and noise.1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum

wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on thedemolition side.

2. Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas.3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.4. Protect air-handling equipment.5. Weatherstrip openings.

E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preservestability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLSA. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust

and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or

objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post02 41 16 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces andareas.1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level.C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selectivedemolition.

3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONA. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and

as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governingregulations and as follows:1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed forsawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marringexisting finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealedspaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden spacebefore starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices duringflame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free

fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.7. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and

materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed

items is prohibited.9. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of

selective demolition operations.B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with

construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-drivenimpact tools.

C. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.D. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient

Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of ResilientFloor Coverings" and Addendum.1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the

methods recommended by RFCI.E. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.06 PATCHING AND REPAIRSA. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by

selective demolition operations.B. Patching is specified in Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new

materials.D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining

construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.


E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitionsextend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color andappearance.1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances.3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken

surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to

achieve uniform color and appearance.5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.

F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface ofuniform appearance.

G. Patch and repair roof decks and roof membrane systems caused by selective demolitionoperations.1. Refer to Section 07 01 50 - Maintenance of Membrane Roofing, regarding protection of

and modifications to existing roofing systems.3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials toaccumulate on-site.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off EXCHANGE's property and legally dispose of

them. Dispose all contaminated materials to an approved disposal site.3.08 CLEANING

A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 03 30 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 03 30 00CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,placement procedures, and finishes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.B. Section 03 35 36 - Existing Facility Polished Concrete Floor Finish.C. Section 03 35 40 - Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: For proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming

accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, underslab vaporbarriers, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by ContractingOfficer.

C. Shop drawings for reinforcement for fabrication, bending, and placement of concretereinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual", showing bar schedules,stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Includespecial reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. All wall reinforcementmust be shown in elevation.

D. Samples of materials as requested by Contracting Officer, including names, sources, anddescriptions.

E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.F. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Contracting

Officer. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying thateach material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification fromadmixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and

standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."3. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."

B. EXCHANGE will engage and pay a testing lab to control testing during construction.C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of

work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or otheracceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint systemshown on drawings. Provide panel with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure ofnewly-placed concrete without how or deflection.1. Use exterior grade plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 Medium Density

Overlay, Class 1 or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed.2. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post03 30 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


3. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with amaximum VOC of 350 mg/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concretesurfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

4. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form tiesdesigned to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface.a. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch diameter in

concrete surface.2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed for #4 and larger bars. ASTM A615,Grade 40, deformed for #3 bars.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain, cold-drawn steel.C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. Furnish in flat sheets not rolls.D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-typesupports complying with CRSI specifications.1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base

material will not support chair legs.E. Rebar Dowel Anchoring Epoxy: Quikrete High Strength Anchoring Epoxy: www.quikrete.com;

or approved equivalent.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II.1. Use one brand of cement throughout project.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from asingle source for exposed concrete.1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing

spalling-causing deleterious substances.2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but that special tests or actual service

have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used whenacceptable to Contracting Officer.

C. Water: Potable.D. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent

chloride ions. Calcium chloride is not acceptable. Provide admixture manufacturer's writtencertification that chlorideion content complies with specific requirements.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with otherrequired admixtures.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "Air-Tite", Cormix.b. "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air", Euclid Chemical Co.c. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair", W.R. Grace & Co.d. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air", Master Builders, Inc.e. "Sealtight AEA", W.R. Meadows, Inc.f. "Sika AER", Sika Corp.

F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "Chemtard", ChemMasters Corp.b. "PSI N", Cormix.c. "Eucon WR-75", Euclid Chemical Co.d. "WRDA", W.R. Grace & Co.e. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed", Master Builders, Inc.f. "Prokrete-N", Prokrete Industries.


g. "Plastocrete 161", Sika Corp.G. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a. "Super P", Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.b. "PSI Super", Cormix.c. "Eucon 37", Euclid Chemical Co.d. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem", W.R. Grace & Co.e. "Rheobuild", Master Builders, Inc.f. "PSP", Prokrete Industries.g. "Sikament 300", Sika Corp.

H. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "Q-Set", Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co.b. "Gilco Accelerator", Cormix.c. "Accelguard 80", Euclid Chemical Co.d. "Daraset", W.R. Grace & Co.e. "Pozzutec 20", Master Builders, Inc.

I. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "PSI-R Plus", Cormix.b. "Eucon Retarder 75", Euclid Chemical Co.c. "Daratard-17", W.R. Grace & Co.d. "Pozzolith R", Master Builders, Inc.e. "Protard", Prokrete Industries.f. "Plastiment", Sika Corporation.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALSA. Granular (Porous) Fill: Pea Gravel (beneath concrete floor slabs): Natural stone, free draining,

washed, free of clay, shale, and organic matter.1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136, within the following limits:

a. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch.b. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.

B. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethyleneor equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable forinstallation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single plypolyethylene is prohibited.1. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,

prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.2. Products:

a. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper VaporCheck II 15-mil (Class A): www.insulationsolutions.com.

b. Poly-America, L.P.; Husky Yellow Guard 15-mil (Class A): www.yellowguard.com.c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15-mil (Class A):

www.stegoindustries.com.d. W.R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Florprufe 120 (Class A - 21 mils):

www.graceconstructionproducts.com.e. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR 15 mils: www.wrmeadows.com.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171.1. Waterproof paper.2. Polyethylene film.3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

D. Cure and Seal Compound: Typical concrete slab liquid membrane forming curing compound tobe "Ashford Formula", Concrete Distribution, Inc., 1203 W. Spring Creek Place, Springville UT



84663 (801-489-5663) approximately 200 square feet per gallon in locations not receivingpolished concrete floor finish.

2.05 BONDING PRODUCTSA. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific

application.1. Locations for Use:

a. Bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.2. Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation: Slow Set Bonding Agent: www.daytonsuperior.com.b. SpecChem LLC; SpecPoxy 1000, SpecPoxy 2000, SpecPoxy 3000, or SpecPoxy

3000FS: www.specchemllc.com.c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, or Rezi-Weld

1000: www.wrmeadows.com.2.06 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch orfield experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use anindependent testing facility acceptable to Contracting Officer for preparing and reportingproposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality controltesting.

B. Slabs on Grade: It is the intent of the design that slabs on grade receive special attention formix design. The submitted slab mix design is to incorporate proportioning to minimize pastecontent (minimize total water content) and provide a well-graded aggregate with maximumaggregate size (1-inch preferred). Gap graded mixes with primarily 3/4-inch aggregate and sandwill not be allowed.

C. Submit written reports to Contracting Officer for each proposed mix for each class of concreteat least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mixdesigns have been reviewed by Contracting Officer.

D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete properties as follows, except where higherstrength is noted on the drawings or in the specifications:1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM

C39/C39M at 28 days.2. Water/Cement Ratio: Maximum 50 percent by weight.3. Total Air Content: 2 to 4 percent typical, except 5 to 7 percent for concrete exposed to

freeze-thaw cycles, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.4. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.

E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor whencharacteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstanceswarrant, as accepted by Contracting Officer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design andstrength results must be submitted to and accepted by Contracting Officer before using in Work.

2.07 ADMIXTURESA. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in

concrete, as required, for placement and workability.B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures

below 50 deg F.C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial

slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, andconcrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50.

D. Use air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point ofplacement having total air content within ranges indicated.

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer'sdirections.


2.08 CONCRETE MIXINGA. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery timefrom 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reducemixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.09 REPAIR MATERIALSA. Repair Underlayment Beneath Floor Finishes: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling

product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8-inch and that can be feathered at edges tomatch adjacent floor elevations.1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement

as defined in ASTM C219.2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8- to 1/4-inch or coarse sand as recommended

by underlayment manufacturer.4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM

C 109/C109M.B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that

can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4-inch.1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement

as defined in ASTM C219.2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions and

application.3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8- to 1/4-inch or coarse sand as recommended

by topping manufacturer.4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM

C109/C109M.2.10 CONCRETE TYPES (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SLABS):

A. As indicated, provide concrete of specified strengths and mix designs with the followingappearance characteristics:1. Portland cement, hard trowel, interior.2. Portland cement, broom finish, exterior.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and underslab vapor barriers with placement offorms and reinforcing steel.

3.02 FORMSA. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral,

static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accuratealignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings,offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking,screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Useselected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints toprevent leakage of cement paste.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom



forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easyremoval.

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, forinspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely bracetemporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locatetemporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamferstrips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work ofother trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from tradesproviding such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retightenforms and bracing before concrete placement, as required, to prevent mortar leaks andmaintain proper alignment.

3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENTA. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing

Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and asherein specified.1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing underslab vapor barrier during reinforcement placement and

concreting operations.B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or

destroy bond with concrete.C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved byContracting Officer.

D. Place reinforcement to maintain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concreteplacement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposedconcrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one fullmesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps ineither direction.

F. Rebar Dowels: When repairing concrete slabs that have been trenched, or where new concreteslabs abut existing concrete slabs, dowel existing concrete slabs to new concrete. Drillminimum 4 inch deep holes into edges of existing concrete slabs at 16 inches on centermaximum, and anchor #3 rebar dowels in holes with epoxy adhesive.

3.04 JOINTSA. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the structural

drawings or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure,as acceptable to Contracting Officer.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2-inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs andbetween walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used forslabs.

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement acrossconstruction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sidesof strip placements.

D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.


E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at points ofcontact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundationwalls, grade beams, and elsewhere, as indicated.1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct contraction joints inslabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8-inch wide by one-fourthslab depth.1. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as

possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. JointsMUST be made within 6 hours of finishing floors, and in no case shall cuts be made laterthan 12 hours from placement.

2. Apply joint sealant to all exposed contraction joints. Color selected to match adjacentsurface. Joint sealant material is specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMSA. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for

other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtainrequired elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to supportscreed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.06 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIERA. Slabs on Grade: Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade and elsewhere as indicated.

Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight withmanufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repairdamaged vapor barrier before covering.1. Vapor Barrier Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor

barrier as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand.2. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.

3.07 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACESA. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating

compound before placing reinforcement.B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with

in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliancewith manufacturer's instructions. Clean reused forms of concrete residue, repair and patch asrequired to return forms to acceptable surface condition.

C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork isnot acceptable.

3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENTA. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing

steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of theirwork; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed onconcrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Depositconcrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists ofseveral layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.



1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented byhand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation ofconcrete in accordance with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibratorsvertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of themachine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches intopreceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun toset. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concreteand complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causingsegregation of mix.

E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or

darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior tobeginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.F. Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and

strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement

below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to controltemperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steeltemperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment inconcrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,

or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Contracting Officer.G. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete

work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,or low temperatures.1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not lessthan 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.a. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.b. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.3.09 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish Work orconcealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted byform-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins andother projections exceeding 1/4-inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth-Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with acoating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete,such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. Thisis an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in anorderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areaswith fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfacesoccurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching


adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformlyacross adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHESA. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other

finishes as hereinafter specified:1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready

for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water hasdisappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-drivenfloats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area issmall or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances ofoverall minimum Ff 35-FI 25 with local minimum Ff 21-Fl 15. Cut down high spots and filllow spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surfaceto a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slabsurfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thinfilm-finish coating system.1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff20 - FI 17. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor coveringsystem, including edge curling at joints.

C. For polished interior concrete finish, refer to Section 03 35 36 - Existing Facility PolishedConcrete Floor Finish.

3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTIONA. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss beforeand during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating andtroweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placingand finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing,by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:

a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.b. Use continuous water-fog spray.c. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover

with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage ofconcrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

d. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:1) Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,

placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inchesand sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes ortears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

e. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs,walks, and curbs as follows:1) Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final

finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheenhas disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray orroller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected toheavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coatingand repair damage during curing period.



2) Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered withfinish materials applied directly to concrete.

D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curingperiod or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specifiedabove, as applicable.

E. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and otherflat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.

F. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use ofmoisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

3.12 REMOVAL OF FORMSA. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,

and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degF for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damagedby form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

3.13 REUSE OF FORMSA. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Applynew form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoidoffsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable toContracting Officer.

3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMSA. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other

trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place,and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide othermiscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still greenand steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminationsslightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations,as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correctelevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machinesand equipment. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated using specified non-shrinkgrout. Use non-metallic grout for exposed conditions.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRSA. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately

after removal of forms, when acceptable to Contracting Officer.1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by

tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Makeedges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen withwater, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patchingmortar before bonding compound has dried.

2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cementso that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas atinconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defectscannot be repaired to satisfaction of Contracting Officer. Surface defects, as such, include colorand texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other


projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured inplace with bonding agent.1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the

concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for

smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain fortrueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect the concrete's durability.

Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide or thatpenetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless ofwidth, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14days.

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surfacefinishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finishrepaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds maybe used when acceptable to Contracting Officer.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch indiameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas tosound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inchclearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete andapply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete ofsame type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacentfinished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

5. Correct low areas in existing slab by scarifying surface, priming and finishing with patchingcompound blended into adjacent concrete.

D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method.Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and looseparticles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-packconsisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 meshsieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack beforebonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacentconcrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Contracting Officer for method and procedure,using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Contracting Officer.3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: EXCHANGE will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit testreports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, asdirected by Contracting Officer.

C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94.1. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of

concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.2. Air Content: ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;

ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of eachtype of air-entrained concrete.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below, when 80deg F and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made.



4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for eachcompressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders forlaboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; at least one set for each day's pour, or not lessthan once for each 150 cubic yards of concrete, or not less than once for each 5,000 SF ofsurface area for slabs or walls; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class

of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from eachbatch if fewer than five are used.

b. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companionlaboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide correctiveprocedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

c. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of threeconsecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, andno individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by morethan 500 psi.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Contracting Officer, Structural Engineer, ready-mixproducer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength testsshall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name ofconcrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, designcompressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressivebreaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may bepermitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when testresults indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained inthe structure, as directed by Contracting Officer. Testing service may conduct tests todetermine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by othermethods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete isverified.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post EXISTING FACILITY POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 03 35 36 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 03 35 36EXISTING FACILITY POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH


A. Installation of polished concrete floor system for existing interior concrete floors by dry grinding,application of concrete densifier, and polishing with various size grit metal-bonded andresin-bonded diamonds to the scheduled specified minimum local and overall gloss values.

B. Removal of existing epoxy, ceramic, carpet, and/or vinyl composite tile floor finish, and allunderlayment products where shown on drawings.

C. Application of chemical dye and complementary edge band treatment.1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 03 35 40 - Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement.C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

1.03 REFERENCESA. ACI 310 - A Guide to Decorative Concrete.B. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer's equipment product data sheets for:a. Planetary grinder polishing equipment.b. Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment.c. Hand tools.d. Hand tool dust collection equipment.e. Diamond tooling.f. High speed propane burnisher.g. Polyurea pump.h. Joint cutting saw.

2. Manufacturer’s chemical and product data sheets for:a. Liquid reactive surface densifier.b. Liquid stain guard treatment.c. Joint filler.d. Crack and spall repair product.e. Polishable overlay product.f. Grout coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment.g. Acrylic Sealer if required.

C. Installer’s Certification:1. Provide list of 5 projects performed within last three years of similar type, size and

complexity. Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for eachproject. General Contractor is to validate references and polisher’s capabilities prior tosubmitting bid to EXCHANGE.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from each of the followingmanufacturers of products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator is acertified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and installationmethods as required by the manufacturer.a. Planetary grinder system.b. Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment.c. Joint filler, crack and spall repair products.

EXISTING FACILITY POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post03 35 36 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


D. Pre-Certified Installers1. All bidding contractors must have completed our in house certification for this project.

Below is a list of pre-approved applicators.COMPANY NAME NUMBER

a. American Concrete Inc. 877-775-0030b. Budget Maintenance Concrete 610-323-7702c. Diama-Shield 888-730-4075d. Industrial Restoration & Coatings 801-866-9896e. Jeffco Concrete Contractors 800-226-2668f. K & J Concrete Polishing 865-971-1760g. Pacific Decorative Concrete 888-776-1111h. Perfect Polish Inc. 877-917-4463i. Preferred Global 800-317-2450j. Premier Concrete Construction 603-654-2471

2. **Refer to Specifications Division 00 for substitution qualifications. Any potentialContractor substitution must have their complete submittal package submitted in writingthrough a General Contractor a minimum of 10 days prior to bid date to the EXCHANGEContracting Officer for review and approval.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans withDisabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; FinalGuidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces.

2. Environmental Requirements: Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air qualityregulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavymetals. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impactfood quality.

B. Pre-installation Meeting:1. General contractor shall schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting at the project

site before start of installation of polished concrete floor system.2. Meeting to occur only after review and approval of required Sub-contractor submittals and

completion of test panel mock-up, including specified grinding, polishing and dye, jointfilling, spall and crack repairs, and specified overall gloss values.

3. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including:a. EXCHANGE Project Manager.b. EXCHANGE Store Manager or Assistant Manager.c. Project Architect.d. Owner’s Polished Concrete Consultant.e. General Contractor.f. Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman.

4. Meeting agenda to include (but not limited to): Review of existing conditions, surfacepreparation, system installations, field quality control, protection, environmentalrequirements, coordination with other work, controls to limit damage from dust and fieldquality control methods and reporting.

1.06 MOCK-UPA. Provide polished concrete floor finish mock-up, a minimum of 250 square feet, illustrating

completed finish including dye (if required), all specified liquid surface treatments and specifiedgloss levels.1. Mock-up will include proper joint treatment in any color for the purpose of judging

workmanship. The specific joint color to be used on the project will be selected based onthe color of the completed polished concrete sample.

2. Half of the sample area should include completed stain protection application and halfshould be without stain protection for testing purposes.


3. The sample should also be placed along a wall to allow the sample to include edgefinishing treatments for the purpose of review per specifications.

B. Locate mock-up where directed by EXCHANGE Project Manager.C. Accepted mock-up will serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed

polished concrete floor finish.D. Accepted mock-up shall remain as part of finished product.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that

would be damaging to the completed polished concrete finish.B. Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in writing

by manufacturer.C. Polished Concrete should be sequenced to complete after final lighting is in operation to allow

for a proper installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT2.01 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION

A. Floor Grinder:1. Machinery manufacturer will be HTC, SASE, Concrete Polishing Solutions, Diamatic or

PrepMaster.2. Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed floor

grinders.3. Weight: 850 pounds or more.4. Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.

B. Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing:1. Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing

large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction withmanufacturer recommended pre-separator:a. HTC 80ID.b. Pullman-Ermator S36.c. SASE Bull.d. Substitutions by Approval Only.

C. Diamond Tooling for Coating Removal, Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for Polishing: Tooling manufacturer subject to submittal review prior to approval.1. Metal Bonded Diamonds.

a. a. Grit Size: 40, 80, and 150.b. Reference Section 3.03.C.

D. Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:1. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds.

a. Grit Size: 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or equivalent.E. Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges:

1. Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000.F. Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.G. Joint cutting saw with dust extraction attachment:

1. The Mongoose, by Engrave-a-Crete.2. Dust Buggy, by US Saws.3. Hump Back, by Joe Due.4. Substitutions by Approval Only.

H. Self-propelled shaver/leveler for slab surface demolition and leveling:1. SuperShaver, by CPS.2. BMC 335 Shaver, by Diamatic.



3. Substitutions by Approval Only.I. High speed propane burnisher:

1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 2,500 RPM or higher.J. Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads in 800 grit size only:

1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads.2. Diamond Polishing Pads, by Norton.3. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads, by CPS.4. Substitutions by Approval Only.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive silicate based:

1. Consolideck LS, by Prosoco.2. RetroPlate 99 by Advanced Floor Products.3. FGS Permashine by L&M Construction Chemicals.4. 3DHS Densifier by Ameripolish.5. Substitutions by Approval Only.

B. Protective Surface Treatment (Stain Guard):1. Consolideck LS Guard, by Prosoco.2. RetroGuard by Advanced Floor Products.3. FGS Stain Protection by L&M Construction Chemicals.4. SR2 Stain Protector by Ameripolish.5. Substitutions by Approval Only.

C. Solvent Based Dye (where needed for repairs or per plans):1. AmeriPolish Acetone Solvent Based Dye.2. Prosoco GemTone Dye (Applied with Acetone ONLY).3. No Substitutions.

D. Joint Filler:1. SL/65 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by VersaFlex

Incorporated.2. RS65 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by Metzger McGuire.3. HT-PE65 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by Hi-Tech

Systems.4. Colors to be matched as closely as possible using a chip set match provided by the

Owner's Polished Concrete Consultant. Manufacturer to produce product to match thiscolor selection.

E. Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair:1. Rapid Refloor in complementary matching color, by Metzger McGuire.2. Quick-Mender in complementary matching color, by VersaFlex Incorporated.3. Substitutions by Approval Only.4. Colors to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Manager or Owner's Polished

Concrete Consultant in mock-up.F. Wide Area Surface Repairs:

1. PC-5614 Polished Overlay by Diamatic.2. UltraTop PC by Mapei.3. Color of the overlay after application of Specified Dye to be reviewed and approved by

EXCHANGE Project Manager or Owner's Polished Concrete Consultant in mock-upG. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:

1. GM 3000, by Husqvarna Construction Products.2. RSG, by Diamatic Inc.3. Versa-Grout, by Versaflex.4. Spall TX3 by Hi-Tech.5. Substitutions by Approval Only.


6. Color after application to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Project Manager orOwner's Polished Concrete Consultant in mock-up.

H. Acrylic Sealer (Where required):1. CSS Emulsion (25% solids) by Elite Crete.2. H&C Clear Solvent Based Acrylic (25% solids) by Sherwin-Williams.3. Substitutions by Approval Only.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor system.B. Notify the Project Manager of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent

use prior to commencement of polishing.C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following:

1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing.2. Contact with overspray of penetrating hardener / densifier.3. Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment (stain guard).4. Contact with joint filler, crack or spall repair materials.

B. Completely remove existing flooring, mastics, adhesives, self-leveling underlayment fillers andother foreign matter.

C. Remove the top 1/2 of an inch of existing joint material and replace with approval joint filler andcrack repair products.

D. Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint,coatings, and other surface contaminants which adversely affect installation of polishedconcrete floor system.

E. Fill concrete joints in accordance with Section 07 92 00.F. Repair all slab defects and joints in accordance with Section 03 35 40.G. For areas to be prepped and sealed per plans perform one 40 grit grind to remove all glue,

mastic or underlayments on the surface. Clean the surface well prior to installation of sealer.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions atlocations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Aggregate Exposure:1. Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.

C. Polished Concrete Floor System1. Open Slab Surface:

a. As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor coatings,begin grinding with 40 or 80-grit metal bond. Bids shall be based on starting initial cutwith 40-grit metal diamonds. Expose coarse concrete aggregate when required toreach lows spots within floor surface.

b. Review condition of floor with EXCHANGE Project Manager. Obtain approval fromEXCHANGE Project Manager if large coarse aggregate is required to be exposed toremove existing coatings, floor underlayment or slab deficiencies. Variations to theprecise grinding, densifying, polishing and stain guard application are anticipated, butmust be discussed and approved in writing by the EXCHANGE Project Manager priorto executing the work.

c. Progressive edge grinding will be necessary within ½” of all vertical abutments,including walls, cases, columns, posts and racking systems.



d. Joint filler shall be flush with surface after grinding and polishing steps. Additionalpasses along curled joints may be necessary to even the surfaces and remove jointfiller chatter.

2. Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finermetal-bonded diamonds, up to metal bond 150-grit.

3. Apply densifier:a. Apply to the point of rejection to ensure complete acceptance of the densifier product

at the recommended step per manufacturer’s recommendations.4. Floor Polishing:

a. Remove 150-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with a transitionaldiamond per manufacturers recommendation

b. Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-gritresin-bonded diamonds.

c. Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-gritresin-bonded diamonds.

d. Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-gritresin-bonded diamonds.

e. Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-gritresin-bonded diamonds.

f. Remove 800-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 1500-gritresin-bonded diamonds.

5. Apply stain guard:a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.b. Apply first coat per manufacturer’s recommendation (DO NOT OVER APPLY).c. Use applicator pad, pre-wetted with stain guard, to pull material out to create a thin

film prior to drying.d. Remove product completely from areas of over application, as evidenced by surface

streaking, and replace with unused stain guard.e. Apply second coat of stain guard at all high traffic areas identified on the drawings per

manufacturers instructions.6. High speed burnish:

a. After each application of stain guard is dry, burnish surface.b. Burnish using approved pads, at a slow movement pace using high speed machine

with 800 grit diamond impregnated pads as required to achieve specified glossrequirements.

c. Burnish with several passes. Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees fromprevious pass.

d. Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to develop aminimum floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F directly below the burnishing padas continuously measured by the operator during installation.

7. Clean & Seal:a. In areas designated per plans to be clean and seal only, remove all surface glue,

mastics and any underlayments. Fill joints and then seal the floor using two coats ofan acrylic solvent based sealer with 25% solids. Insure that there are no roller marksor patterns in the sealer placement. Contact the Architect or the Owner's PolishedConcrete Consultant if you have any additional questions.

D. Penetrating Dye:1. Mix dye in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for use in blending and matching

patches.E. Exchange Logo:

1. Where indicated on drawings install a dyed Exchange logo. Colors are to be as follows:a. Blue area is to be AmeriPolish Classic Patriot Blue.b. Red 1 is to be AmeriPolish Classic Sepia.


c. Red 2 is to be sprayed with two colors. First is a 20% strength AmeriPolish ClassicBlack. The second color is to be 100% strength AmerPolish Classic Sepia.

2. The logo is to be laid out using a stencil to allow for color change without the use ofdecorative score lines.a. Approved stencil manufacturer is FloorMap Stencil Design.

3. All color transitions are to be installed with clean lines and no bleed.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the Concrete Consultant, Contractor, andInstaller.

B. Review procedures with Contracting Officer to correct unacceptable areas of completedpolished concrete floor system.

C. Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D523:1. Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall Gloss

Value (SOGV) > 50 prior to applying protective surface treatment, SOGV > 60 afterapplying protective surface treatment, Minimum Local Gloss Value (MLGV) > 40 afterapplying protective surface treatment as measured using a Horiba IG-320 60 DegreeGloss Checker.

2. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflectionwhen light hits the concrete floor surface. Gloss measurements will be taken independentof ambient lighting and will be taken within a sealed measurement window located beneaththe test unit.

3. Collect 12 readings minimum, throw out low and high measurements and averageremaining measurements. Average shall exceed SOGV. No single measurement shall beless than MLGV.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion.

1. Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor.2. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor.3. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab.4. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip

oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids.5. No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface.6. Prohibit pipe cutting or threading using machinery on concrete slab.7. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.8. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces.9. Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during painting. If

paint is spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately.10. Protect slab surface from standing moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of

surface treatment prior to cureB. Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other

surface contaminants which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system.C. Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of

Contracting Officer.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 03 35 40 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 03 35 40 INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Joint filler removal and replacement, with or without metal keyway. B. Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than 3/4”). C. Spalled joint repair, joint with metal keyway or self-leveling compound removal (great than 3/4”). D. Crack repair. E. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls, and gouges. F. Surface embed repair, including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes. G. Large area surface repair, existing underlayment removal/replacement and delamination repair. H. Grout coat surface enhancement, including air voids, micro-pin holes, pitting and other shallow surface

deficiencies. I. Full Grind, Densify and Polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings. J. Unit Price Schedule: Provide unit prices as indicated for any repairs required that are “unforeseen” or

that are not specifically indicated on the drawings. Such repairs will be handled by change order.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 22 00 – Unit Prices. B. Section 03 35 36 – Existing Facility Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Joint Filler Installer Qualification Certification:

1. Submit letter of certification, identifying specific individuals that are currently certified installers of the specified materials and are familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the specified product manufacturers.

C. Product data for: 1. All products used for repair of existing concrete slab defects.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EXCHANGE reserves the right to engage the services of a Concrete Consultant to review, observe and

inspect the work in progress.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and installation of all

Work. B. Limit and control damage from moisture. C. All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 21 calendar days prior to joint filler installation. D. Concrete repair area shall be closed to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as recommended

by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS and EQUIPMENT

2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content,

Shore hardness 60 - 65, compatible with construction materials in contact. 1. SL/60 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by VersaFlex

Incorporated. 2. RS65 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by Metzger/McGuire. 3. HT-PE65 Polyurea in complementary color to match Polished Concrete, by Hi-Tech Systems 4. Colors to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Project Manager or Owner’s Concrete

Consultant in mock-up.

INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post 03 35 40 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. Joint Filler Stain Preventing Film: 1. SPF by Metzger/McGuire.

C. Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair: 1. Quick-Mender in complementary matching color, by VersaFlex Incorporated. 2. Rapid ReFloor in complementary matching color, by Metzger/McGuire. 3. Colors to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Project Manager or Owner’s Concrete

Consultant in mock-up. D. Wide Area Surface Repairs:

1. PC-5614 Polishable Overlay by Diamatic. 2. UltraTop PC by Mapei. 3. No Substitutions. 4. Color after installation to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Project Manager or

Owner’s Concrete Consultant in mock-up. E. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:

1. RSG, by Diamatic Inc. 2. GM 3000, by Husqvarna Construction Products. 3. Spall TX3 by Hi-Tech. 4. Versa-Grout, by VersaFlex. 5. Pit-Grout by Metzger McGuire. 6. Color after application to be reviewed and approved by EXCHANGE Project Manager or

Owner’s Concrete Consultant in mock-up.

2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Dust extraction system for grinding/sawing:

1. HEPA filtration vacuum, designed for use with all hand tools when grinding or sawing concrete (minimum 125CFM air flow).

2. Provide one of the following: a. 80ID, by HTC. b. S36, by Pullman-Ermator. c. Bull 50, by SASE Company, Inc. d. Approved equal.

B. Joint Filler Removal, Crack Repair and Preparation: 1. The Mongoose, by Engrave-a-Crete. 2. Humpback Cutter Complete, by Joe Due. 3. Dust Buggy, by U.S. Saws. 4. Approved equal.

C. Surface Grinder: Handheld 4”-7” electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. 1. Dust Avenger, by Joe Due. 2. SawTec Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 3. Approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. An evaluation of the existing floor slab shall be conducted, identifying all defects. Scope of repairs shall

be confirmed by the EXCHANGE Project Manager, Architect of Record, or Owner’s Concrete Consultant prior to commencement of work. Identify scope of work on Floor Polishing Plan specified in other section(s) of Division 3 – Concrete.

B. Repairs are not to be conducted until Unit Prices in attached Unit Price Schedule have been reviewed and approved by the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer.

C. Repairs exceeding the Estimated Scope of Repairs developed in the attached Worksheet and included in the Base Bid must be approved by the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer prior to executing the work in any new Phase.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair.


3.3 JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT

A. If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf, mill top 1/2" of material and refill with specified Polyurea joint filler.

1. Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint.

2. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface after the grinding process has been completed.

3. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.

3.4 FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT

A. If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove all filler material from joint and refill.

1. Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove all filler material, debris, and laitance.

2. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process.

3. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.

Before After

1/2" min.new filler

Orginal materialbearing onsaw cut shelf

Before After

Fill to Bottomof Original

Saw Cut

Note: if shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4" on either side of joint, minimum required filler depth is 2" placed over compressibel backer rod or bagged silica sand.

Saw cut shelf


3.5 NARROW SPALLED JOINT REPAIR OR JOINT WITH METAL KEYWAY (LESS THAN 3/4”) Existing Joint

Various Stages of Joint Breakdown

As Reqd., 3/4" Max.

Sawcut & Remove Concrete

3/4" Depth

A. For joints that are spalled, are constructed with metal keys or have radius tooled edges not exceeding 3/4” in width at slab surface.

1. Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall (or top of radius) along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint.

2. Clean joint of loose concrete, metal key fragments, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod, etc.

3. Joints must be free of all visible moisture. 4. Ensure filler penetrates the irregular aggregate interlock portion of the sawn contraction joint as

shown below, re-establishing the aggregate interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of reinforcement.

5. Fill joint cavity with specified Polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface after the grinding process has been completed.

3.6 WIDE SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN 3/4”)

A. For joints that are spalled, contain metal key or self leveling floor material where the damage exceeds

3/4” in width at slab surface. 1. Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped

shaver/leveler allowing removal of the widest spall or non-linear keyway along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 inch in 10 feet.

2. Overfill repair cavity with overlay material per manufacturer’s instructions and grind flush to slab surface.


3. After repair has cured, and prior to any traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab joint(s) 1/2” in depth to honor joint and fill full depth with Polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7 CRACK REPAIR

A. Crack width less than 1/32” without surface spalling:

1. Do not repair. 2. Grout coat may be used to fill thin hairline deficiencies.

B. Cracks from 1/32” to 1/4” in width: 1. Clean crack cavity. 2. Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with

twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2'” minimum depth, insuring crack sidewall is clean. 3. Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool. 4. Use methods that will not widen existing crack. 5. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. 6. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 7. Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor. 8. Install low viscosity crack and spall repair material in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. 9. Repeat until all voids are filled and material crowns slab surface.

a. Do not flood area around crack. b. Watch for bubble formation and out gassing. c. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material.

10. Shave or grind material flush to surface as stipulated by manufacturer.

3.8 SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR

A. For slab surface that is chipped and spalled, where the deficiency is 1/2" in length or width up to 3” in

length or width, by 1/2" in depth.

FLOOR JOINT

SLAB SURFACE SPALL


1. Route edge of spall to provide 1/8” deep square edge or 30° edge (consult manufacturer’s data sheet for specific surface preparation instructions).

2. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5” diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment.

3. Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface. 4. Clean and prep spalled cavity. 5. Wire brush spalled surface to remove all dirt and laitance. 6. Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape. 7. Install Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair material. 8. Polish over repair area with diamond disks to blend surface. 9. Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 10. With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to blend with

adjacent floor surface. a. NOTE: For inconsistent, varying spalled joints that comply with the measurements in this

section, a form material may be needed to temporarily form and support the vertical face of spalled joint edge. Ensure that the repair material will not adhere to the form and the rigid repair material does not fuse the joint together.

11. For cleanouts, in-floor electric outlets and Walker Duct access plates, over-core around perimeter of existing embed by 1/2" in width and depth, then install Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair Material.

3.9 BOLT HOLE, CONDUIT REPAIR A. For slab surfaces containing surface or sub-surface bolts, bolt-hole voids, conduit or subsurface conduit.

1. Recess steel bolt or conduit a minimum of 1/2” below finish floor by either punching or cutting. a. Check with General Contractor prior to cutting into active electrical or communication

conduit. 2. For spall fractured edges less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 1/8” depth with

either a drill bit, chisel or edge grinder. 3. Clean cavity of all debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel. Vacuum hole to

remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. 4. Dispense Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair at moderate pace using steady pressure.

Dispense material into void, refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. 5. Grind material flush to slab surface per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.10 LARGE SURFACE REPAIR, UNDERLAYMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. For slab surfaces containing wide-area irregular rough surfaces greater than 3” in width and length such

as irregular coarse aggregate surfaces, surfaces with existing tile or carpet underlayments > 1/2" in thickness, or surface delaminations.

1. Define edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel or shaver/leveler to produce sharp edge, at least 1/2” deep. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for specific depth.

2. For delaminations test to determine the extent of the delaminated area. From the current edge extend repair 6” in all directions. Define a square or rectangular repair area and create an edge perimeter. Do not overcut into surrounding surface.

3. Roughen base surface using shaver/leveler to ICRI CSP Level 3 and vacuum clean. 4. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again. 5. Mix and install overlay material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Place repair material in floor surface defect, float level or leave slightly proud of existing floor. 7. Grind, color, densify and polish to match adjacent concrete. 8. Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re-filling with

Polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic.

B. For large areas over 50 square feet with existing fill where the depth after removal is greater than 1”, the following manufacturer approved process shall be used in conjunction with #16-20 dry sand to fill depressions to 1/2” below final floor level. The standard mix and installation shall occur above this sub-base fill.


1. Mix the cementitious overlay topping according to the technical data sheet. The drill should be equipped with a box style paddle, and should run at a minimum speed of 800-1200 RPM. The material shall be mixed for a minimum time of 3 – 3.5 minutes. The sand fill may be added up to 30% by volume or 25 pounds per bag maximum.

2. Sands may be pre-wetted to reduce the water demand. 3. Be sure that a calibrated container is used for measuring the mix water. Using 4.5 to 5.0 quarts.

The water amount will vary based on the amount of sand added. 4. Using a screed or rake spread the material over the primed surface. Be sure to fill any holes or

low areas in the surface during the installation. This material after mixing will not exhibit self-leveling properties. The material may be smoothed using a standard overlay stainless smoothing tool or trowel.

5. Any smoothing or finishing should be done within 15 minutes of the application. After 20 minutes the surface should not be touched.

6. Allow the material to dry for a minimum of 24 hours before installing the second primer application. The Sub Base fill layer must be primed before the application of the overlay system. Refer to the manufacturer polishing specification for installation details.

7. Large Batch Mixing: For large batch mixing, place the measured amount of water in the mixer for all of the bags first. Hold back a small amount of the water to add during mixing. Add all of the bags to the mixer and the sand with the mixer running. Add the retained water during mixing. The material should mix for 6-7 minutes until a smooth and even consistency has been reached. Discharge the hopper directly into the pump for placement.

3.11 SMALL SURFACE PITTING, PINHOLE REPAIR, GROUT COAT

A. For surfaces consisting of micro-deficiencies, pin holes, hairline cracks and other surface clutter that

impedes the achievement of the specified overall gloss values 1. Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to remove all

dirt/laitance. Wheel should be run over defect in multiple directions to ensure proper cleaning. 2. Vacuum prepared pitted sections. 3. Install and disperse grout coat using approved product in accordance with manufacturer’s

directions. 4. Ensure a thin, uniform layer of repair material covers the pitted areas. Refill any low spots as

needed. 5. Grind or polish flush with metal or resin-bond diamonds, ensuring repair material is flush with

slab surface. 6. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. 7. Apply required applications and polish smooth to meet specified overall gloss values.

3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces of finished floor. B. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner.

SLAB SURFACE PITTING


UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE

INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB ENHANCEMENT, REPAIR AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT (To Be Included in the Bid)

Contractor’s Bid shall not include any allowances for interior concrete slab enhancement, repair, or joint filler replacement work, unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Any repairs required that are “unforeseen” or that are not specifically indicated on the drawings will be handled by change order, based upon the following unit prices.

ITEM UNIT RATE

1. Joint Filler Removal and Replacement $________ / LF

2. Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than 3/4”) $________ / LF

3. Spalled joint repair, joint with metal keyway or self-leveling compound removal (greater than 3/4”)

$________ / LF

4. Crack repair $________ / LF

5a. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls, and gouges 3/4 – 1-1/2” DIA $_______ / EA

5b. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls, and gouges 1-1/2 - 3” DIA $_______ / EA

6. Surface embed repair, including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes.

$_______ / EA

7. Large surface repair, existing underlayment removal and replacement with 1/2" Polished Overlay.

$________ / SF

8. Grout coat surface enhancement, including micro-pin holes, pitting and other shallow surface deficiencies

$________ / SF

9. Full Grind, Densify, Dye and Polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings.

$________ / SF

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 05 40 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 05 40 00COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING


A. Heavy-gage formed steel stud interior wall and bulkhead framing (18 gage and heavier).1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud

framing (20 gage and lighter) and gypsum drywall.C. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Productsand Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.

E. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2011a.

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.G. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.

2004).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framingsystem, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, andfirestopping.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,

product criteria, limitations.C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,

welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.1. Indicate stud layout.2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for welded or screwed framing

connections.3. Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiringspecial attention .

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Framing:

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post05 40 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. MarinoWARE: www.marinoware.com.3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.4. Super Stud Building Products, Inc: www.buysuperstud.com.5. Super Stud Building Products South, LLC: www.superstudsouth.com.6. Telling Industries: www.tellingindustries.com.

B. Framing Connectors and Accessories:1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.2. Simpson Strong Tie: www.strongtie.com.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMA. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,

fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:

1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing membersaccording to AISI S100-12.

2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specifieddesign loads for project conditions within required limits.

3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in verticaldeflection.

5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, unduestress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclicday/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,and clearances of intended openings.

C. Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.D. Deliver to site in largest practical sections.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALSA. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.B. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched

web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and Depth: As indicated on the drawings. Provide heavier gage if required to meet

specified performance levels. Minimum thicknesses shall be as follows:a. 18 Gage: 43 mils, 0.0428 inch.b. 16 Gage: 54 mils, 0.0538 inch.c. 14 Gage: 68 mils, 0.0677 inch.d. 12 Gage: 97 mils, 0.0966 inch.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90/Z275 coating.

C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped

galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gage, 0.1345 inch, and factorypunched holes and slots.

2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicablecode, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.

3. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodatemovement using slotted holes, shouldered screws or screws and anti-friction or steppedbushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movementconnections where indicated on drawings.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 05 40 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

a. Where continuous studs bypass structural supports, connect stud to support inmanner allowing vertical movement of support without affecting studs; allow forminimum movement of 1/2 inch.

b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs tostructure in manner allowing vertical movement of structure without affecting studs;allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

c. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacingindicated on drawings; minimum track length of 10 feet.

4. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation,floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

5. Wall Stud Bridging Connections: Provide mechanical load-transferring devices thataccommodate wind load torsion and weak axis buckling induced by axial compressionloads. Provide bridging connections where indicated on the drawings.

6. Products: Equivalent to the following:a. Simpson Strong Tie, Load Rated Steel Stud Connectors; LSSC6.25:

www.strongtie.com.b. Simpson Strong Tie, Load Rated Steel Stud Framing Connectors; SFC6.25:

www.strongtie.com.c. Simpson Strong Tie, Load Rated Moment-Resisting Kneewall Connectors;

MSSC6.25KW: www.strongtie.com.d. Simpson Strong Tie, Load Rated Steel Joist and Kicker Connectors; SJC10.25:

www.strongtie.com.e. Simpson Strong Tie, Bridging Connectors; MSUBH 3.25: www.strongtie.com.f. Simpson Strong Tie, Fixed Connectors; FCB, size as required: www.strongtie.com.g. Simpson Strong Tie, By-Pass Movement Connectors; SCB, size as required:

www.strongtie.com.h. Simpson Strong Tie, By-Pass Strut Movement Connectors; SSB 3.518 Bypass

Framing Strut: www.strongtie.com.i. Simpson Strong Tie, Head of Wall Movement Connectors; SCW 5.5 Head-of-Wall

Clip: www.strongtie.com.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditionsencountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying withVOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.05 FASTENERSA. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM

A153/A153M.1. Products:

a. ITW Commercial Construction North America; ITW CCNA-Buildex Teks SelectSeries: www.ITWBuildex.com; or approved equivalent.

B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


A. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work.B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDSA. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007

requirements.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A153/A153M













COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post05 40 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum16 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

C. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.D. Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side

of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method.1. Locate and install mechanical fasteners according to Shop Drawings, complying with

requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.E. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door

and window jambs.F. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.G. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design

requirements.H. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.I. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.J. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load

bearing framing.K. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent

stud rotation.M. Install horizontal bridging in stud walls at maximum spacing of 48 inches o.c.N. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION





























Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post METAL FABRICATIONSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 05 50 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 05 50 00METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Shop fabricated steel items.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking.D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Paint finish for steel items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.F. ASTM A1085/A1085M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow

Structural Sections (HSS); 2015.G. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and

Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum TensileStrength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

H. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.I. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.

2004).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, finishes, profiles and sizes. Include erection drawings,

elevations, and details where applicable.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A1085, cold-formed welded hollow structural sections (HSS) tubing.C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, hot-dip galvanized finish.E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M[], galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where

connecting galvanized components.F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

METAL FABRICATIONS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post05 50 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying withVOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.03 FINISHES - STEELA. Prime paint all steel items, except as follows:

1. Galvanize items specified for galvanized finish.2. Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.3. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is

required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.C. Prime Painting: One coat.D. Galvanizing of Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

Provide minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into

concrete.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, free from defects.B. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection.C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.F. After erection, prime abrasions of galvanized steel surfaces.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post METAL FABRICATIONSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 05 50 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post ROUGH CARPENTRYFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 06 10 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Roof-mounted curbs.B. Roofing nailers.C. Fire retardant treated wood materials.D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.E. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.F. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Heavy-gage stud wall and bulkhead framing.C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for

wood framing.D. Section 06 40 23 - Interior Architectural Woodwork: Interior woodwork specially fabricated for

this Project.E. Section 07 01 50 - Maintenance of Membrane Roofing.F. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Light-gage metal stud framing, mold and

moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard, coated glass-mat-faced gypsum backing board.G. Division 23 - HVAC: Roof curbs for rooftop-mounted equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.F. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.H. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on FRTW materials.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or

exceed specified requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All interior wood (including inside exterior wall and roof construction) is to be fire-retardanttreated (FRTW).

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation.

ROUGH CARPENTRY Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post06 10 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood (FRTW): Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping,storage, or installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,

American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearancecharacteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONSA. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density

fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 orless, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Miscellaneous Panels:1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C

Plugged or better, Exterior grade, 5/8-inch thickness unless otherwise indicated.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity

and preservative-treated wood locations, corrosion-resistant coated steel elsewhere.2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length to achieve full

penetration of sheathing substrate.3. Anchors: Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

B. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 10 gage,0.1345 inch): Self-drilling flat head wood-to-metal screws.1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti <http://us.hilti.com/>, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-6000.b. ITW Buildex <http://www.itwbuildex.com/>, Itasca, IL (800) 323-0720.

2. Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick:a. Hilti: S-WD 8-18 x 1-15/16 PFH #3 Black Phosphated.b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point.c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch or use heavier fastener

specified below.3. Wood less than or equal to 1-1/8 inch thickness to 18 Gage (0.0478 inch) and 20 Gage

(0.0359 inch) Metal:a. Hilti: S-WD 10-24 x 1-1/2 PWH #3 wafer head screw.b. ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point.c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch.

4. Wood less than or equal to 1-3/4 inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and HeavierMetal (less than or equal to 0.232 inches):


a. Hilti: S-WW 12-24 x 2-1/2 PFH #4 Wings.b. ITW: Traxx 12-24 #4 Point with Wings.

5. Wood less than or equal to 2-inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and heavier metal (less than or equal to 1/4 inch):a. Hilti: S-WW 1/4-20 x 2-3/4 PFH #4 Wings.

C. Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors, size andlength as indicated on Drawings.1. Anchor adhesive: Cartridge type two-component adhesive for embedding anchors.

a. HIT HY-70 by Hilti Corp.b. Epcon System, Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset/Red Headc. Epoxy-Tie SET by Simpson Strong Tie Co., Inc. <http://www.strongtie.com/>

Pleasanton, CA (800) 925-5099.d. Substitutions: Not permitted.

D. Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: Masonry screw anchor with Phillipsor Torx flat head, size and length as shown on the drawings.1. Hilti: Kwik-Con II fastener.2. ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor.

E. Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry.F. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and

concrete.G. Powder Actuated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel.

2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTA. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood (FRTW): Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp

indicating compliance with specified requirements.2. All interior wood (including inside exterior wall and roof construction) is to be fire-retardant

treated.B. Fire Retardant Treatment:

1. Manufacturers:a. Lonza Group; "Dricon": www.wolmanizedwood.com.b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc; "Pyro-Guard": www.frtw.com.c. Koppers Performance Chemicals, Inc; "FirePRO":

www.koppersperformancechemicals.com.2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low

temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance withASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for anadditional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated, including blocking

and nailers in exterior wall and roof construction.c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84













ROUGH CARPENTRY Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post06 10 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediatelyafter installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

C. Lumber: Cutting and drilling of FRTW is allowable; however, do not rip or mill FRTW.D. Plywood: Cutting, drilling, and ripping of FRTW is allowable.E. Field treatment of cuts and drilled holes is not required to maintain flame spread rating of

FRTW.3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that wouldlower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient tomaintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection andinstallation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and

spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AWC (WFCM) WoodFrame Construction Manual.

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches ofbearing at each end.

F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.1. All wood blocking, nailers and supports shall be fire-retardant treated.

B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings foranchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.

D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

E. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Chalkboards and marker boards.8. Wall paneling and trim.9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRYA. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and

roofing assembly installation.B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and

where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.C. Wood Nailers: Provide wood nailers at all perimeters and other locations where indicated on

the drawings, of total height matching the total thickness of insulation being used.1. All wood nailers and blocking shall be fire-retardant treated.





















































2. Install with 1/8 inch gap between each length and at each change of direction.3. Mechanically fasten to deck to resist force of 250 lbf per linear foot.4. Provide screw fasteners recommended by manufacturer for conditions encountered.

Minimum fastener requirements for each wood nailer are as follows:a. Space screws 18 inches o.c., maximum, with a minimum 1 inch thread embedment.b. Use three anchors per length of wood nailer minimum.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. All construction panels shall be fire-retardant treated.B. Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing

and staggered, using screws.C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and intostuds in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs.3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum.

3.08 CLEANINGA. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION





























Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 06 40 23 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 06 40 23INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK


A. Front counter.B. Solid surfacing material for countertops (EF/CI).C. Counter support legs (CF/CI).

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing and plywood sheathing at Front

Counter.B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Glass mat faced gypsum board tile substrate at

Front Counter.C. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tile finish at Front Counter.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product data on stainless steel counter support legs.C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to thatindicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well assufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural

Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes,and other requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,

and deterioration.B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or

deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored inother than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meetrequirements specified in "Project Conditions."

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,

wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature andrelative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, checkactual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, andshow recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule withconstruction progress to avoid delaying the Work.1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support

woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurementson final shop drawings.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post06 40 23 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.07 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can besupported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for eachtype of woodwork and quality grade indicated.

B. Solid-Surfacing Material (EF/CI): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complyingwith material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without aprecoated finish.1. Products: See Finishes Legend.

C. Counter Support Legs (CF/CI): ASTM A167, Type 304 commercial grade stainless steel, No. 4finish, adjustable height, with nylon button feet.

2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALSA. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME

B18.6.1 for applicable requirements.1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing

manufacturer.B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105

for applicable requirements.C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure

anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside faceof exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel orlead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERALA. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality

standard and of the following grade:1. Grade: Custom.

B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment

to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary forshipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance forscribing, trimming, and fitting.

D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbingfixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates orroughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges ofcutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with awater-resistant coating.

E. Provide adjustable height stainless steel legs with nylon button feet. Fasten legs to countersecurely and rigidly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas beforeinstalling.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion andcomplete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 06 40 23 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade

specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with

concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level (includingtops).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finishat cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure togrounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing asrequired for complete installation.

E. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Support on 3/4-inch exterior grade plywood substrate.1. Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator andInstaller that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time ofSubstantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post MAINTENANCE OF MEMBRANE ROOFINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 07 01 50 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 07 01 50MAINTENANCE OF MEMBRANE ROOFING


A. Protection of and modifications to existing roofing system, as required, to accommodateperformance of new work as indicated.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching: Protection of existing work to remain; cutting and

patching.B. Section 02 41 16 - Selective Demolition.C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roofing nailers for roof curbs.D. Division 23 - HVAC: Roof curbs for rooftop-mounted equipment.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate with affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. The existing Exchange roof is covered under existing roof warranties.

1. The Contractor shall obtain information about existing warranties from the Owner, andshall conduct his work in a manner that protects existing roof surfaces and maintainsexisting warranties.

B. To maintain the existing warranty, the Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's instructions tomodify and/or repair the roof as necessary to accomplish any new work required.1. Warranties typically require that any repairs, modifications or additions to the roofing

system be approved in writing in advance.C. All modifications and/or repairs must be done in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.D. Roofing modifications and/or repairs to any roof currently under warranty must be performed by

a roofing contractor approved by the roofing manufacturer.E. Manufacturer Approval: Provide written approval from the roofing manufacturer, including the

following:1. Approval of the installing Roofing Contractor.2. Approved installation details.3. Verification that the existing warranty will remain in effect.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not remove existing rooftop equipment or roofing membrane when weather conditions

threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy.B. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during performance of any new work and

installation of any required roofing system modifications .PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials used in modifications and/or repairs to existing roofing system shall be asapproved by the manufacturer of the existing warranted roof system.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL

A. Modifications to Existing Roof Membrane: The Roofing Contractor shall be responsible formaking modifications to the existing roof as necessary to tie into new construction.1. Any work shall be approved by the roofing manufacturer in writing in advance.

MAINTENANCE OF MEMBRANE ROOFING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post07 01 50 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2. A weathertight and leak-free roof shall be provided.3. Work shall be done in accordance with roof manufacturer's recommendations.4. Modifications shall be included under the existing warranty.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer's Field Reports: If manufacturer's technical representative is required to make

any site visits before, during, or after performance of roofing modifications, provide copies ofany field reports to Architect and Contracting Officer.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post JOINT SEALANTSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 07 92 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS


A. Joint sealants for the following locations:1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:

a. Control joints in masonry walls.b. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.c. Perimeter joints between adjacent materials and frames of doors and windows.d. Other joints as indicated.

2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b. Other joints as indicated.

3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.c. Tile control and expansion joints.d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.e. Perimeter joints of plumbing fixtures.f. Other joints as indicated.

4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b. Control and expansion joints in tile floors.c. Other joints as indicated.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 35 36 - Existing Facility Polished Concrete Floor Finish.B. Section 03 35 40 - Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement.C. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealing tile joints.D. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical

ceilings.E. Section 09 78 13 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels and Trim: Installation adhesive for SS wall

panels and trim.1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and tomaintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of jointsubstrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establishand maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining ordeterioration of joint substrates.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.C. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required

for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organiccompounds.

D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples,consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each productexposed to view.

JOINT SEALANTS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post07 92 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply withspecification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

F. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance withrequirements specified.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a

single manufacturer for each different product required.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicatingmanufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curingtime, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent theirdeterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or othercauses.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following

conditions:1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by

joint sealant manufacturer.2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths areless than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminantscapable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULINGA. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after

completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatiblewith one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, asdemonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:1. Provide selections made by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range of standard

colors for products of type indicated.2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomericsealants that comply with ASTM C 920, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

B. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces.1. One-Part Nonsag Silicone Sealant: Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses NT, A, G, M, O;

neutral curing, non-staining, fugus-resistant, non-bleeding.2. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Grade NS, Class 25; Type M; Uses NT, M, A, and

as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.C. Exterior and interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant: Grade P, Class 25; Type M; Uses T, M, G, A, andas applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:


1. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Grade NS, Class 25; Type S; Uses NT, G, A,and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide;intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-serviceexposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which maybe incorporated in the Work included, but are not limited to, the following:1. One-Part Nonsag Silicone Sealant:

a. "790 Silicone Building Sealant," Dow Corning Corp.b. "890 Architectural Silicone Sealant," Pecora Corp.c. "Spectrem 1 Ultra Low Modulus Silicone Sealant," Tremco, Inc.

2. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant:a. "Dow-Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp.b. "Pecora 898NST," Pecora Corp.c. "Tremsil 200," Tremco Corp.

3. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT:a. "Dualthane," W.R. Meadows.b. "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp.c. "MasterSeal NP 2," BASF Corp.d. "Dymeric," Tremco Inc.

4. Multi-Part, Pourable, Urethane Sealant for Use T:a. "Pourthane," W.R. Meadows, Inc.b. "Urexpan NR-200," Pecora Corp.c. "MasterSeal SL 2," BASF Corp.d. "THC-900," Tremco Inc.

2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTSA. Interior joints in gypsum wall board and woodwork.B. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex

sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior andprotected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint widthexisting at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively.

C. Siliconized Acrylic Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834, Type OP, thataccommodates joint movement of not less than 5 percent in both extension and compressionfor a total of at least 10 percent.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Siliconized Acrylic Sealant:

a. "AC-20+Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound," Pecora Corp.b. "950A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk," Sherwin-Williams.c. "Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant," Tremco, Inc.

2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKINGA. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applicationsindicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, anddensity to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealantperformance:1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in

unruptured state.3. Any material indicated above.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealantmanufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint

JOINT SEALANTS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post07 92 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provideself-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substratetests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealantsand sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining orharming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated topromote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfacesadjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactoryconditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint

sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested andapproved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old jointsealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous jointsubstrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or acombination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developingoptimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaningoperations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other

nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harmsubstrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealantmanufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Applyprimer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areasof joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoiningsurfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or bycleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after toolingwithout disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTSA. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following

requirements:


1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and atposition required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealantsrelative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and

replace with dry material.2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between

sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly

contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each jointconfiguration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widthsthat allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealantbackings are installed.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning orcuring begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, toeliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents thatdiscolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methodsand with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products inwhich joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are withoutdeterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damageor deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediatelyso that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post STAINLESS STEEL FRAMESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 08 12 19 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 08 12 19STAINLESS STEEL FRAMES


A. Stainless steel hollow metal frames for cased openings.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud framing and gypsum drywall.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

B. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doorsand Frames; 2007.

C. NAAMM HMMA 866 - Guide Specifications for Stainless Steel Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, anchorage and fastening

methods, and finishes.C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations and frame profiles.D. Samples: Submit one sample of frame metal, 2 inch by 2 inch, showing factory finishes.E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation

instructions relating to this project.F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with not less than three years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in accordance with applicable requirements and in compliance with standards and/orcustom guidelines as indicated.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Stainless Steel Hollow Metal Frames:1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.2. De La Fontaine Inc: www.delafontaine.com.3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com.

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL HOLLOW METAL CASED OPENING FRAMESA. Stainless Steel Interior Cased Opening Frames: Stainless steel frame, Type 304, in compliance

with ASTM A666. Face welded type. 1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: Conform to guidelines of NAAMM HMMA

866 for stainless steel framesa. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

2. Stainless Steel Finish: No.4 - Brushed satin finish.

http://www.naamm.org



STAINLESS STEEL FRAMES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post08 12 19 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of

specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.C. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to

corner.END OF SECTION




















Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 08 31 13 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 08 31 13ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

D. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.E. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,

locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.2. J. L. Industries, Inc; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.3. Karp Associates, Inc.4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.5. Milcor Inc.6. Nystrom, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from singlemanufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.1. Locations: Provide access doors in walls and ceilings as required to provide convenient

access to concealed work requiring access.2. Material and Finish:

a. Restrooms, Kitchens, and Food Service Areas: Stainless steel with a No. 4 brushedfinish.

b. Other Locations: Galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard primer and powdercoat or baked enamel finish.1) Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door: Flush panel, minimum 16 gage (0.060-inch-thick) sheet metal.4. Frame: Minimum 16 gage (0.060-inch-thick) sheet metal with 1-inch wide,

surface-mounted trim.5. Automatic Closer: Spring type.6. Latch (At secure locations or in rooms not accessible to public): Self-latching bolt

operated by flush screwdriver.7. Lock (At locations accessible to the public): Manufacturer’s standard key lock.8. Minimum Sizes:

a. Gypsum Board Ceilings: 18 x 18 inch.b. Washroom Walls Above Urinal Valves: 12 x 12 inch.c. Access doors mounted in wall for human access, 24 inches wide x 36 inches high.d. Other Locations: As required to provide convenient access.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post08 31 13 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2.02 FABRICATIONA. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seammarks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnishattachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supportsindicated.1. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.2. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane whenclosed.1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.03 FINISHESA. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of

another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work.B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in

accordance with project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 21 16 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 21 16GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Metal stud interior wall framing.B. Metal channel ceiling framing.C. Mold and moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard.D. Coated glass-mat-faced gypsum backing board.E. Joint treatment and accessories.F. Level 5 primer-surfacer coating.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Metal stud framing heavier than 20 gage.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.C. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Cementitious backer board for wall tile finishes at "Wet Walls."D. Section 09 78 13 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels and Trim: Stainless steel wall panels and trim.E. Section 09 90 00 - Painting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

H. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

I. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant GypsumBacking Panel; 2013.

J. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.K. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.L. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.M. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board,

accessories, joint finishing system, and Level 5 primer-surfacer coating.

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 21 16 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showingcompliance with requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and

finishing, with minimum 3 years of experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. MarinoWARE: www.marinoware.com.3. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com.4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.5. Super Stud Building Products, Inc: www.buysuperstud.com.6. Super Stud Building Products South, LLC: www.superstudsouth.com.7. Telling Industries: www.tellingindustries.com.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing as follows:1. Maximum Deflection:

a. Typical Drywall Partitions: L/240 at 5 psf, unless otherwise indicated.1) All interior metal studs shall be minimum 20 gage (33 mils), 3-5/8 inches deep,

unless otherwise indicated.b. Veneer Assemblies: L/360 at 5 psf.

1) Veneer assemblies include drywall partitions with ceramic tile, porcelain tile,veneer plaster, or other applied hard finishes.

2) All interior gypsum drywall partitions to receive an applied veneer finish such asceramic or porcelain tile shall be framed of minimum 20 gage, 3-5/8 inch deep,33 mils thick (0.0329 inch) cold-formed metal studs. Heavier gage studs, ifrequired to meet deflection requirements, are specified in Section 05 40 00.

2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs, with knurled faces, and minimum 1.625-inchflanges with flange return lips.a. Provide 20 gage (33 mils) or heavier studs at all locations. Do not use any 22 or 25

gage studs.1) Studs heavier than 20 gage are specified in Section 05 40 00.

3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.6. Drywall Grid Hanging and Framing Systems: Equivalent to Armstrong "Drywall Grid

System," with HD8906 main beams (flange width: 1-1/2 inches; web height: 1-11/16inches).

C. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 40 00. D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that

accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventingrotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped

galvanized coating.3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems

of fire rating and movement required.4. Deflection and Firestop Track:


a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodatedeflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.

5. Products:a. Basis of Design: The Steel Network, Inc; Product "VertiClip": www.steelnetwork.com.b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc; Product "SCW Head-of-Wall Slide-Clip

Connector": www.strongtie.com.6. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing

indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.2.02 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined inASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for interior vertical surfaces and ceilings to receive a painted finish.

a. Coated glass-mat-faced gypsum board shall be used beneath tile and stainless steelpanel finishes, unless otherwise indicated.

b. At "Wet Walls," cementitious backer board as specified in Section 09 30 00 shall beused beneath tile finishes.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.a. Moisture and mold-resistant board is required at all locations, except beneath tile and

stainless steel panel finishes.3. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

4. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Paper Faced Products: Type X, with moisture andmold-resistant core and surfaces.a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc Type X.b. CertainTeed Corp; M2Tech Type X Gypsum Board.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard.d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board.e. USG Corp; USG Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Panels Firecode X.

C. Coated Glass-Mat-Faced Gypsum Backing Board For Wet Areas: 1. Application:

a. Wall surfaces to receive tile base or wall tile, except at "Wet Walls."1) At "Wet Walls," cementitious backer board as specified in Section 09 30 00 shall

be used beneath tile finishes.b. Wall surfaces to receive stainless steel wall panels.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Coated Glass-Mat-Faced Board: Coated glass-mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel

as defined in ASTM C 1178.a. Thickness:

1) Walls: 5/8 inch.b. Products:

1) Georgia-Pacific; Product "DensShield Tile Backer."2) National Gypsum; Product "Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer."3) USG; Product "Durock Brand Glass-Mat Tile Backer Board."

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1396/C1396M


































GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 21 16 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated,

with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges, and beaded for concealment of flangesin joint compound.1. Types: Provide corner beads, L-type edge-trim beads, LC-type edge-trim beads, and

one-piece control joint beads.2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead

at exposed panel edges.3. Products:

a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners.

a. Product: Equivalent to USG Sheetrock Brand Joint Paper Tape.2. Chemical hardening type joint compound, for use at all locations.

a. Product: Equivalent to USG Sheetrock Brand "Durabond" or "Easy Sand" JointCompounds.

C. Level 5 High-Build Drywall Primer/Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray or rollerapplication, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achievingLevel 5 finish.1. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corp; CertainTeed M2Tech Level V Primer/Surfacer.b. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG SPEEDHIDE MaxBuild High Build Drywall Surfacer:

www.ppgpaints.com.c. TWI; NUCOAT Roll-On Level 5 Primer/Surfacer: www.twiproducts.com.d. USG Corp; USG Sheetrock Brand Tuff-Hide Primer Surfacer.

D. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

E. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suitapplication; to rigidly secure materials in place.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 16 inches on center.

1. Level ceiling systems to a tolerance of 1/600.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.1. Extend partition framing to structure where possible or where indicated, and to 12 inches

above ceiling at other locations.a. At partitions not extending to structure, diagonally brace tops of partitions at 16 inches

on center.2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanicaldevices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of studconnections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using notless than double studs at jambs.

E. Blocking: Install wood blocking as specified in Section 06 10 00 for support of:























































1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Wall mounted door hardware.5. Miscellaneous equipment.

3.03 BOARD INSTALLATIONA. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end

joints, especially in highly visible locations.B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and

edges occurring over firm bearing.C. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Use moisture and mold-resistant gypsum board

and all locations to receive a painted finishD. Coated Glass-Mat-Faced Gypsum Board: Use coated glass-mat-faced gypsum board beneath

tile and stainless steel panel finishes, unless otherwise indicated.1. At "Wet Walls," use cementitious backer board as specified in Section 09 30 00 beneath

tile finishes.E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.F. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Control Joints: Place control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, consistent with

lines of building spaces and as follows:1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or

semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.1. Install "L" bead where work is tightly abutted to other construction.2. Install "LC" bead where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including

expansion joints).3. Semi-finishing edge trim will not be allowed.

3.05 JOINT TREATMENTA. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with chemical hardening type joint

compound and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.B. Coated Glass-Mat-Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with chemical

hardening type joint compound and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.2. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.

D. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings in all public areas or visible from public areas, walls and

ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.a. Apply a Level 4 finish to drywall indicated to receive a Level 5 finish, followed by

application of a Level 5 primer/surfacer in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations to achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings in back-of-house areas; walls to receive stainless steel wallpanel finish

3. Level 2: Behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction.E. Priming and painting of finished surfaces is specified in Section 09 90 00.






















































GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 21 16 - 6 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

3.06 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction.END OF SECTION








Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post TILINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 30 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 30 00TILING


A. Tile for interior floor, base, and wall applications.B. Crack isolation sheet membrane at interior floors.C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate for "Wet Walls."D. Ceramic trim.E. Non-ceramic trim.F. Setting and grouting materials.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Heavy gage studs, if required, for partitions to

receive applied tile finishes.C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction

and fixtures.D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightgage metal framing; coated

glass-mat-faced gypsum backing board as wall tile substrate for non-wet walls to receive tilefinish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1.B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of

Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).C. ANSI A108.17 - American National Standard for Installation of Crack Isolation Membrane.D. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water

Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;2013 (Revised).

E. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specificationsfor Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).

F. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes forThin-set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.

G. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-SetCement Mortar; 2012.

H. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1.I. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2011.J. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity,

and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products, Ceramic Tiles, and Glass Tiles;2014a.

K. ASTM C627 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation SystemsUsing the Robinson-Type Floor Tester; 2010e1.

L. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a.M. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious

Backer Units; 2017a.N. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.

TILING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 30 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


O. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

P. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of ConcreteSubfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.

Q. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete FloorSlabs Using in situ Probes; 2016b.

R. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2016.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF): For level interior surfaces expected to be walked on

when wet, tile shall have the following minimum wet DCOF AcuTest value, in accordance withANSI A137.1:1. Level Interior Spaces: 0.42 or greater.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, crack isolation

membrane, cementitious backer board, and accessories. Include instructions for using groutsand adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate crack isolation membrane layout, tile layouts, patterns, colorarrangements, cementitious backer board, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilarmaterials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic and non-ceramic accessories, andsetting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in sizeillustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.F. Master Grade Certificate: Submit for each type of tile, signed by the tile manufacturer and tile

installer.G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain

removal methods.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of

five years of documented experience.1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer.


B. Products: As indicated on drawings.1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Ceramic tile shall meet requirements of ANSI A137.1, standard grade.D. Moisture Absorption: As tested in accordance with ASTM C373:

1. Porcelain Tile and Glass Tile: 0 to 0.5 percent.2. Quarry Tile: Less than 3.0 percent.3. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: Less than 20 percent.

E. Sizes and Shapes: As indicated on drawings.F. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.G. Trim Units: As indicated on drawings.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. General:

1. Provide ceramic trim where indicated.2. Provide non-ceramic trim where indicated.3. Provide non-ceramic trim where ceramic trim is not indicated or not available.

B. Ceramic Trim: Matching surface bullnose shapes in sizes indicated.1. Applications:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose.b. Inside and Outside Corners: Coved.c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.

2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel or satin clear anodized aluminum, style and

dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.1. Manufacturer: Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com; or approved equivalent.2. Applications:

a. Open edges of wall tile: Schluter QUADEC (stainless steel or aluminum).b. Wall corners, outside: Schluter QUADEC (stainless steel or aluminum).c. Wall corners, inside: Schluter DILEX-HKU (stainless steel) or DILEX-AHK

(aluminum).d. Floor to wall joints (cove base at floor tile): Schluter DILEX-HKU (stainless steel) or

DILEX-AHK (aluminum).e. Floor decorative transition (between existing and new tile): Schluter DECO (stainless

steel or aluminum).f. Floor ramp transition, aluminum (between tile and concrete slab): Schluter

RENO-RAMP (new tile) or RENO-RAMP-K (existing tile).3. Accessories: Provide outside and inside corners, connectors, end caps, and other

miscellaneous trim as required, coordinated with trim pieces specified.2.03 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.15.1. Applications:

a. Interior floor, base, and wall tile installations.2. This type of mortar is suitable for thin-setting tiles of all sizes in floor and wall applications.3. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; MegaLite Ultimate Crack Prevention Large Format TileMortar: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

b. LATICRETE International, Inc; Tri-Lite: www.laticrete.com.c. Mapei Corporation; Ultraflex 3: www.mapei.com.

2.04 GROUTSA. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.

1. Applications: Interior floor, base, and wall tile installations.

TILING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 30 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


2. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.3. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; CEG-IG 100% Solids Industrial Grade Epoxy Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout: www.laticrete.com.

c. Mapei Corporation; Kerapoxy IEG CQ Epoxy Grout with Color-Coated Quartz: www.mapei.com.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Thin-Set Crack Isolation Sheet Membranes: Composite sheet membranes manufactured from

Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE), with non-woven polyester laminated to both sides.1. Basis of Design: Products manufactured by The Noble Company:

www.noblecompany.com; or approved equivalent.a. Crack Isolation at Interior Locations: "NobleSeal CIS Crack Isolation" sheet

membrane.1) Thickness: 0.8 mm (.030 inch) nominal.

2. Application Type: Full coverage (floors).3. Crack Isolation/Joint Bridging: "High Performance" rating per the "System Crack

Resistance" portion of ANSI A118.12.4. Service Requirements: ASTM C627 "Extra Heavy."5. Accessories: As recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer, equivalent to the

following:a. Bonding Adhesive: "NobleBond EXT," high-strength, fast-cure, water-resistant

adhesive.b. Seam Sealant: "NobleSealant 150," waterproof.c. Perimeter Sealant: ASTM C920, construction sealant.

B. Cement Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1325; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 5/8 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for jointsand corners.1. Products:

a. National Gypsum; PermaBase Brand Cement Board: www.permabase.com.b. USG Corp; USG Durock Brand Cement Board: www.usg.com.

2. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): Score of 10.3. Fasteners: 1-1/4 inch screw with large wafer-type head, strip-out prevention ribs, #8-gage

wire size threading, and self-drilling point (for attachment of cement board to 14- to20-gage steel framing).a. Screws shall have corrosion-resistant coating compatible with concrete, designed to

resist 1500+ hours of salt-spray testing before developing 5% red rust (per ASTMB117).1) Product: USG; "Durock Brand Tile Backer Screws": www.usg.com; or approved

equivalent.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.1. Surface Tolerance:

a. Large and Heavy Tile (LHT): Maximum variation from plane of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.1) Large Tiles: Tiles with at least one side greater than 15 inches long.2) Heavy Tiles: Tiles that are 5 lbs/sf or heavier.

b. Non-LHT: Maximum variation from plane of 3/16 inch in 10 feet.B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,

are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.


C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofsetting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:1. Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 4 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours, tested in

accordance with ASTM F1869.2. Relative Humidity: 85 percent maximum, tested in accordance with ASTM F2170.3. Alkalinity (pH): Verify pH range of 7 to 9, test in accordance with ASTM F710.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.F. Verify that metal studs to receive cementitious backer board have a maximum deflection of

L/360 at 5 psf; coordinate with Section 09 21 16.1. Verify that minimum 20 gage (33 mils), 3-5/8 inch deep cold-formed metal studs at 16

inches on center have been provided. Heavier gage studs, if required to meet deflectionrequirements, are specified in Section 05 40 00.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. D. Cementitious Backer Board Installation: At surfaces to receive tile base or wall tile, install

cementitious tile backer board in strict accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer'sinstructions, using corrosion-resistant large wafer-type-head screws installed flush with panelsurface. Fill joints with improved modified dry-set cement mortar and immediately embedalkali-resistant fiberglass mesh joint tape. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints andcorners with material used to set tiles, and cover with skim coat of setting material to a featheredge.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Install crack isolation membrane at floors in accordance with ANSI A108.17, manufacturer's

instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.B. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI

A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.C. Lay tile to patterns indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.F. Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnosed.G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H. Install thresholds where indicated.I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.J. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.L. Grout tile joints.M. Movement Joints: At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control or expansion joints, use tile

sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to preventthree-sided bonding.1. Expansion Joints: Comply with TCNA (HB) Detail EJ171 or Detail EJ171D.2. Contraction Joints: Comply with TCNA (HB) Detail EJ171B.3. Perimeter Joints: Comply with TCNA (HB) Detail EJ171G.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136



















TILING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 30 00 - 6 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

4. Generic Movement Joints: Comply with TCNA (HB) Detail EJ171F and Detail EJ171J.3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over all interior concrete substrates, provide crack isolation membrane installed in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations and TCNA (HB) Method F125-Full, using an improvedmodified dry-set cement mortar.

B. Interior Floors: Install tile over crack isolation membrane in accordance with TCNA (HB)Method F115, using an improved modified dry-set cement mortar and an epoxy grout.

C. Coordinate sealing of movement joints with Section 07 92 00.3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244C.1. Install tile using an improved modified dry-set cement mortar and an epoxy grout.2. Coordinate sealing of movement joints with Section 07 92 00.

B. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) MethodW245.1. Install tile using an improved modified dry-set cement mortar and an epoxy grout.2. Coordinate sealing of movement joints with Section 07 92 00.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

























Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 51 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 51 00ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.C. Samples: Submit two samples at least 4 x 8 inch in size illustrating material and finish of

acoustical units.D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross

runner, and perimeter molding.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percentprior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 1 case of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in maintenance of project.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. USG Interiors, Inc: www.usg.com.

B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 51 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


C. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1: Vinyl faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type X, with thefollowing characteristics:1. Location: For use at Food Service areas; see Finish Schedule on drawings.2. Size: 24 x 48 inches.3. Thickness: 5/8 inches.4. Composition: Wet felted.5. Light Reflectance: 79 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.7. Edge: Square.8. Surface Color: White.9. Surface Pattern: Smooth, embossed, non-perforated.10. Basis of Design: 56091 "Clean Room ClimaPlus" by USG Interiors, Inc.11. Suspension System: Exposed grid, Type "Donn DXLA".

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Rockfon: www.rockfon.com.4. USG Interiors, Inc: www.usg.com.

B. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlockingcomponents, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips asrequired.

C. Exposed Suspension System: Formed hot-dipped galvanized steel, commercial quality coldrolled; intermediate-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: White painted.4. Product:

a. Aluminum Cap: Basis of Design: "Donn DXLA" manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.1) Location: For use at Food Service areas; see Finish Schedule on drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Hot-dipped Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application

and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

C. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use inconjunction with suspended ceiling system.

D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and

manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 51 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with otherwork.

E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Wherecarrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearestaffected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead loadto exceed deflection capability.

H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, orsupport components independently.

I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant.2. Use longest practical lengths.3. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.

G. Where round obstructions and bullnose concrete block corners occur, provide preformedclosures to match perimeter molding.

H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 10 ft of an exterior door.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post RESILIENT FLOORINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 65 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 65 00RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient base.B. Installation accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).C. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Contracting

Officer's Representative's initial selection.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and thecorrect style, color, quantity and run numbers.

B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring: www.burkeflooring.com.b. Basis of Design: Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.

2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.

3. Height: As indicated.4. Thickness: 0.125 inch.5. Finish: Satin.6. Length: Roll.7. Color: As indicated on drawings.8. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.9. Product/Manufacturer: As required to match existing.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; low-VOC types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

RESILIENT FLOORING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 65 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


B. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate.B. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances

that cannot be removed. 3.03 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use

premolded units.C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANELS AND TRIMFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 78 13 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 78 13STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANELS AND TRIM


A. Stainless steel wall panels and trim.B. Stainless steel toe kicks and trim.C. Stainless steel corner guards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for stainless steel wall panels, toe

kicks, and corner guards.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's printed product data for stainless steel wall panel

system, toe kicks, and corner guards.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate mounting details with the appropriate adhesives for specific project

substrates.D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and surface finish of

panels.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's printed installation instructions

for stainless steel wall panels, toe kicks, and corner guards.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Stainless steel panel system must be installed in an interior climate-controlled environment.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in unopened factory packaging.B. Inspect materials at delivery to ensure that specified products have been received.C. Store materials in original packaging under cover and elevated above grade, in a

climate-controlled location away from direct sunlight.1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL SYSTEM AND CORNER GUARDS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Stainless Supply: www.stainlesssupply.com.1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Stainless Steel Wall Panels:1. Product: Stainless Supply; "D4B - Diamond 4" Beveled" panels and associated trim

moldings, or approved equivalent.a. Panel Material: Type 304 stainless steel, 22 gage, with #4 brushed satin finish.b. Panels shall have a diagonal diamond pattern bevel, with opposite corners of the

diamonds at 4 inches on center.c. Bevels shall be a 9/16-inch wide V-shaped lines.d. Panels shall be modular, so that the diamond pattern aligns on adjacent full sheets.e. Provide protective PVC on finished side, to be removed upon panel installation.

2. Panel Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard edge, divide, inside corner, and outsidecorner trim molding fabricated of 24 gage, type 304 stainless steel with #4 brushed satinfinish.

3. Panel Height: Provide panels up to 10' height with no horizontal joints.

STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANELS AND TRIM Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 78 13 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


4. Panel Width: Provide panels up to 4' width; minimize number of vertical joints.5. Attachment: Adhered with field-applied heavy-duty adhesive.

C. Stainless Steel Corner Guards:1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, 16 gage, with #4 brushed satin finish.2. Size: 2 x 2 inch; "Hugger" style with tapered edges.3. Attachment: Adhered with field-applied heavy-duty adhesive and foam tape.

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL TOE KICKSA. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Stainlesstoekick.com: www.stainlesstoekick.com.

1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.B. Stainless Steel Toe Kicks:

1. Provide stainless steel toe kick system that includes toe kick panels, outside corners, andinside corners.

2. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, with a #4 brushed satin finish.3. Panel Height: Provide panel height(s) indicated.4. Panel Width: Provide panel widths as indicated.5. Attachment: Adhered with field-applied foam tape.

C. Stainless Steel Outside and Inside Corners:1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, with a #4 brushed satin finish.2. Size: Approximately 1" x 1" x height to match toe kick.3. Attachment: Adhered with field-applied foam tape.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesives and Foam Tapes: Types recommended by manufacturer for required substrates.B. Sealant: Type recommended by manufacturer, aluminum-color to match wall panels.


A. Examine areas and conditions in which wall panel, corner guard, and toe kick systems will beinstalled.

B. Verify that all finishing operations, including painting, are complete before beginning installationof wall panel, toe kick, and corner guard system materials.

C. Wall surfaces shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, and loose paint.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installation, clean substrates to removed dust, debris, and loose particles.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Locate wall panels, toe kicks, and corner guards as indicated on approved shop drawings.C. Install wall panels level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings.D. Complete installation with inside and outside corners.E. Apply a bead of color-matched sealant to any exposed panel or trim edges on the installation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. At completion of installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's clean-up and

maintenance instructions.END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PAINTINGFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 09 90 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 09 90 00PAINTING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated, including the following:1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.3. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.4. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products havingfactory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.

2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.7. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.8. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.9. Ceramic and other tiles.10. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.11. Glass.12. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.13. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching.B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Level 5 high-build drywall primer/sealer for

surfaces to receive a Level 5 finish.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards forArchitectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;2014.

C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood andWood-Base Materials; 2007.

D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints and Coatings; 2013.

PAINTING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 90 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples illustrating range of colors available for each surface

finishing product scheduled.D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited

chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shallconstitute acceptable certification.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrateconditions requiring special attention.

G. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where eachproduct/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and coatedsurfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum three years experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F

for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,

unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the samemanufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extentpossible.

C. Paints and Transparent Finishes:1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.3. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com.


D. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.E. Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERALA. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily anduniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.

3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-halfshade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedureis specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, useprimer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum.4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum.

b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:1. Intentionally added methylene chloride or perchloroethylene.2. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).3. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di

(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylenechloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.F. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected

later by Contracting Officer's Representative from the manufacturer's full line.G. Colors: As indicated on drawings

1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as thewall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIORA. Ferrous, Galvanized, and Aluminum Metals: Opaque, 100% Acrylic:

1. Primer for Ferrous Surfaces: S-W "Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl" Universal Metal Primer,B66-310 Series.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

PAINTING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 90 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of S-W "Sher-Cryl HPA (B66-350), applied to achieve a wet-filmthickness of 6.0 - 10.0 mils per coat.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Wood: Opaque, Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel:

1. One coat of latex primer: S-W "Premium Wall & Wood Primer."2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of S-W "Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel,"

applied to achieve a wet-film thickness of 4.0 - 5.0 mils per coat.B. Ferrous Metals, Galvanized Metals, and Aluminum: Opaque, Waterbased Alkyd Urethane

Enamel:1. Primer: One coat of S-W "Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer."2. Semi Gloss: Two coats of S-W "Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel,"

applied to achieve a wet-film thickness of 4.0 - 5.0 mils per coat.C. Gypsum Board and Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Opaque, Waterbased Alkyd Urethane

Enamel:1. Primer: One coat of S-W "ProMar 200" Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer.

a. Note: Omit primer at walls that receive Level 5 high-build drywall primer/surfacer.2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of S-W "Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel,"

applied to achieve a wet-film thickness of 4.0 - 5.0 mils per coat.2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sandingmaterials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specificallyindicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Contracting Officer's

Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov


G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot primedefects after repair.1. Where existing paper or vinyl wallcoverings are encountered on walls to be painted,

remove wallcovering and skim coat wall to achieve a Level 5 finish prior to painting.H. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure

water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediatelyfollowing cleaning.

I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash withsolvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

J. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand toolcleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).

K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weldsplatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wirebrushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acidsolution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface;spot prime after repairs.

L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primerand rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces withsolvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer hasdried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

N. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime and paint metal door top and bottom edge surfaces to matchface of door.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and instructions carefully regarding product application

so as to provide the best quality work.B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide.H. Number of coats indicated is the minimum number of coats to be provided. Full coverage is

required for each coat. Provide additional coats as necessary to provide full coverage or dryfilm thicknesses indicated.

I. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.J. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

PAINTING Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post09 90 00 - 6 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

B. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removedprior to finishing.

3.05 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION OF FIRE WALLSA. Where there is an accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic space, fire walls, fire barriers,

fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protectedopenings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stencilingin the concealed space. Such identification shall:1. Be located within 15 feet of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet

measured horizontally along the wall or partition.2. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8-inch stroke in a

contrasting color incorporating the suggested wording, "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER- PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or similar wording.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESFORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 10 44 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 10 44 00FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and shims.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.B. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.C. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, extinguisher ratings and

classifications, color and finish, anchorage details, and installation instructions.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of individual fire extinquishers, mounting measurements for

wall bracket, and accessories required for complete installation.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher

ingredients.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers:1. Amerex Corporation: www.amerex-fire.com2. Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com.3. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.4. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.5. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) or FM (AG) for purpose specified and as

indicated.B. Type K Wet Chemical Extinguishers: Stainless steel container, with pressure gage, equivalent

to J.L Industries Saturn 15 Wet Chemical Fire Extinguisher.1. Class: K.2. Nominal Capacity: 1.6 gallons.3. Mounting: Bracket-mounted.4. Locations: Adjacent to exhaust hoods in Kitchen areas, and elsewhere as indicated.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished.B. Graphic Identification: Provide code-compliant identifying signage at each fire extinguisher

location.

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post10 44 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA



A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure rigidly in place.C. Where no wall cabinet is indicated, place extinguisher on wall-mounted bracket.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 11 40 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 11 40 00FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)


A. Built in food equipment, walk-in refrigeration, hoods.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 10 17 - Exchange Furnished and Installed Equipment (EF/EI).B. Section 01 10 18 - Exchange Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment (EF/CI).C. Section 09 78 13 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels and Trim.D. Division 22 Section - Plumbing Piping.E. Division 23 Section - Food Service Ventilation Systems.F. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.03 REFERENCESA. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-resisting Chromium-nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.B. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural

(Physical) Quality.D. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.E. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.F. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.G. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: Appliances.H. NFPA 96 - Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking

Equipment.I. NGA - National Gas Association: Appliances.J. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation: Appliances.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Load Supporting Components: Reinforced frame support system and surfaces where indicated

so that surfaces may safely support a load of 200 lbs concentrated on one square foot in anyarea on the component surface, with no indentation showing on surface, and with permanentset not exceeding 0.005 inches.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate in large scale detail, fabricated equipment showing construction

methods, type and gage of metal, hardware and fittings, plan front elevation, a minimum of onecross-section, and utility requirements as to types and sizes and locations. Illustratecomplicated parts of typical items in cut-away perspective. For control systems, indicate serviceconnections, characteristics, and wiring diagrams.

C. Product Data: Provide data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,locations, and utility connections and locations.

D. Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 6" x 6" inch in size illustrating equipment and finish.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed UL and specified

requirements.

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post11 40 00 - 2 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00.B. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment.C. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work as follows:

1. Cooler and Freezer Units: Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) standards.2. Electrical Wiring and Components and Self-contained Refrigeration Systems: Conform to

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc (UL) standards.3. Exhaust Hoods: NFPA 96.4. Fabricated Equipment: Shall be installed in accordance with the following codes: NFPA -

National Fire Protection Association requirements, NGA - National Gas Associationrequirements, NSF - National Sanitation Foundation requirements.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONSA. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5)

years experience.1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for utility requirements.B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories,

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 3100.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.B. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage.C. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation.

1.12 SCHEDULINGA. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01 31 00.B. Schedule Work to immediately follow installation of utilities and precede installation of room

finishes.1.13 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics ofutilities with requirements of food service equipment.

1.14 WARRANTYA. Provide five (5) year warranty under provisions of Section 01 77 00.B. Warranty: Include replacement or repair of scheduled equipment, refrigerant and compressors,

including disconnection of defective unit, and connection of replacement unit.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Equipment Schedule: Refer to Drawings.B. Equipment Cut Sheets: Attached to end of this Section.C. Provide rough-in hardware, supports and connections, attachment devices, closure trim, and

accessories.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 11 40 00 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

2.02 MATERIALSA. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 commercial grade, No. 4 finish.C. Sealants: Silicone, bacteria-resistant type.

2.03 FABRICATION - GENERALA. Fabricate sheet material for work surfaces, facings, shelves, and drain boards of straight

lengths in one continuous sheet when less than 12 ft in length. Fit and attach integral sinks. Weld metal joints for lengths over 12 ft.

B. Weld and form edges, ends, and joints smooth. Grind welds of stainless steel smooth andflush; polish to match adjacent surfaces.

C. Cut and drill components for service outlets and fixtures.D. Fix leg mounted units by dowelling to floor with 1/4 inch stainless steel pins, where vibration or

oscillation is anticipated.E. Provide stainless steel legs with adjustable feet. Fasten legs to equipment securely and rigidly.F. Install nylon button feet on bearing surface of any item positioned on a finished surface.G. Isolate rotating or reciprocating machinery to prevent noise and vibration.H. Provide indirect drain piping from equipment to terminate over nearest waste receptor.I. Accommodate site installation of other services or equipment.J. Shop assemble work where possible.K. Stainless Steel Fastenings and Fittings: Bolt and screw with countersunk flat heads at visible or

accessible surfaces. Use concealed fastenings where possible.2.04 FINISHES

A. All Components: Shop pre-finish.B. Metal (Except Stainless Steel): Degrease and phosphate etch, prime and apply minimum two

coats factory baked epoxy enamel, color as selected.C. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish.D. Bituminous Paint: Sound deaden internal surfaces of metal work and underside of metal

counters.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location.B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.C. Weld and grind joints in steel work tight, without open seams, where necessary due to

limitations of sheet sizes or installation requirements.D. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility

connections are achieved.E. Cut, fit, and patch where necessary. Provide cutting and patching of items of this section

required for installation or services of equipment.F. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings.G. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage.

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) Food Converstion - Fort Bragg North Post11 40 00 - 4 FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA


H. Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abuttingcomponents.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 65 00.B. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions.C. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean work under provisions of 01 71 00.B. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.C. Wash and clean equipment.D. Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings.

3.05 DEMONSTRATIONA. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01 65 00.B. Test equipment prior to demonstration.C. At completion of work, provide qualified and trained personnel to demonstrate operation of each

item of equipment and instruct Owner in operating procedures and maintenance.D. Individual Performing Demonstration: Fully knowledgeable of all operating and service aspects

of equipment.3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work.B. Remove protective coverings from pre-finished work.

3.07 EQUIPMENT CUT SHEETS - ATTACHEDA. Boston Market Food Service Cut Sheets: See Attachment 11 40 00.1.B. Qdoba Food Service Cut Sheets: See Attachment 11 40 00.2.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – BOSTON MARKET FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 11 40 00.1 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 11 40 00.1

FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – BOSTON MARKET

The attached food service cut sheets apply to Boston Market (72 pages).

END OF SECTION

Project: The Exchange BostonMarket Prototype

From: Concept ServicesLana Sierra12521 Amherst Dr.Austin, TX 78727‐4011(512) 343‐3100 [email protected] Manager

To: Army & Air Force ExchangeChristian Villamin214‐312‐6987 (Contact)[email protected] Team Leader

03/24/2017

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙1

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙3

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙5

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙6

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙10

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙12

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙14

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙16

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙18

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙20

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙22

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙24

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙25

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙27

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙29

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙31

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙33

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙35

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙36

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙40

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙42

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙44

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙45

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙47

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙49

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙53

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙55

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙57

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙58

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙59

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙61

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙62

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙63

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙64

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙65

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙66

∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙67

Table of Contents

OVEN, ELECTRIC, ROTISSERIE ‐ HENNY PENNY SCR16.0 (ITEM 1140)

CONVECTION OVEN, GAS ‐ BLODGETT OVEN DFG‐50 DBL (ITEM 3040)

TIMER, ELECTRONIC ‐ NATIONAL CONTROLS TNC‐T9026‐BO08 (ITEM 3303)

HOT WATER DISPENSER ‐ BUNN‐O‐MATIC 43600.0002 (ITEM 3309)

PLANETARY MIXER ‐ GLOBE SP25 (ITEM 3336)

MOBILE HEATED CABINET ‐ ALTO‐SHAAM 1000‐UP (ITEM 3503)

HEATED LOW TEMP HOLDING CABINET ‐ ALTO‐SHAAM 750‐S (ITEM 3506)

RETHERMALIZER, WATER TANK, GAS ‐ PITCO FRIALATOR SRTG14 (ITEM 3800)FOOD PAN WARMER/RETHERMALIZER, COUNTERTOP ‐ APW WYOTT CW‐3A (ITEM3890)

MICROWAVE OVEN ‐ ACP MRC30S2 (ITEM 3891)

EQUIPMENT STAND, FOR MIXER / SLICER ‐ EAGLE GROUP MMT3030S (ITEM 4271)WORK TABLE, 36" ‐ 38", STAINLESS STEEL TOP ‐ EAGLE GROUP YBM‐SPITT‐019‐00(ITEM 4272)

CUSTOM ‐ EAGLE GROUP YBM‐SPIT‐022‐00 (ITEM 4423)

CUSTOM ‐ EAGLE GROUP YBM‐WMSPIT‐0001‐00 (ITEM 4460)

ONE (1) COMPARTMENT SINK ‐ EAGLE GROUP 314‐16‐1‐18L (ITEM 4516)

WALL / SPLASH MOUNT FAUCET ‐ T&S BRASS B‐2414 (ITEM 4502)

DRAIN, LEVER / TWIST WASTE ‐ T&S BRASS B‐3952 (ITEM 4503)

HAND SINK ‐ EAGLE GROUP HSA‐10‐F‐LRS (ITEM 4550)

SERVING COUNTER, HOT FOOD, ELECTRIC ‐ EAGLE GROUP SHT3‐208‐3 (ITEM 4721)

WORK TABLE, POLY TOP ‐ EAGLE GROUP CHT2436S (ITEM 4746)

ROLL‐IN REFRIGERATOR ‐ DELFIELD CSRRI2P‐S (ITEM 5270)

CUSTOM ‐ EAGLE GROUP RACK FOR ROLL IN REFRIGERATOR (ITEM 5272)

REACH‐IN REFRIGERATOR ‐ DELFIELD GBR1P‐S (ITEM 5279)

REACH‐IN FREEZER ‐ DELFIELD GBF1P‐S (ITEM 5290)MEGA TOP SANDWICH / SALAD PREPARATION REFRIGERATOR ‐ DELFIELD 4427N‐12M(ITEM 5349)

WORKTOP FREEZER ‐ TURBO AIR TWF‐48SD (ITEM 5390)

REFRIGERATED WORK TOP ‐ TURBO AIR TWR‐48SD (ITEM 5391)WORK TABLE, 36" ‐ 38", STAINLESS STEEL TOP ‐ EAGLE GROUP YBM‐T3648‐0005‐00(ITEM 6455)

SNEEZE GUARD, STATIONARY ‐ ENGLISH MANUFACTURING CUSTOM (ITEM 8372)

WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM ‐ 3M PURIFICATION 5624301 (ITEM 9939)

SHELVING, WIRE ‐ EAGLE GROUP CUSTOM (ITEM S101, S102)

SHELVING, SOLID ‐ EAGLE GROUP CUSTOM (ITEM S103)

SHELVING UNIT, WIRE ‐ EAGLE GROUP CUSTOM (ITEM S104, S105, S106)

SHELVING, WALL‐MOUNTED ‐ EAGLE GROUP WAL‐2‐1836 (ITEM WS102)

SHELVING, WALL GRID ACCESSORIES ‐ EAGLE GROUP WM1836 (ITEM WS104)

SHELVING ACCESSORIES ‐ EAGLE GROUP HOOKS (ITEM WS105)

SIGN, WALL‐MOUNTED ‐ CUSTOM SIGNAGE (ITEM B100, B101)

SCR 8 8-spitCountertop SCR 16 16-spit Stacked

Standard Features • THERMA-VEC® Even Heat

Process cooks full loads quickly and evenly: Gentle, cross-flow convection for

even cooking throughout cabinet Radiant heat for uniform

browning and crisp texture • Easy-to-use touch key controls with

large LED simultaneous time and temperature display

• 9 programmable cook cycles for each cabinet, 18 total for SCR 16

• Programmable browning and texture control

• Food temperature probe • Tempered clear glass doors with

black matrix shaded borders

• Rotation stops automatically when doors open

• Spit rotation switch for easy loading • Interchangeable spits, racks or

baskets • Simple three-piece drive tube and

rotor assembly • Drive assembly, drip trays and

drain pans disassemble easily for quick cleanup

• Coated spits and interiors for easy cleaning

• Stainless steel construction for easy cleaning and long life

© 2006 Henny Penny Corporation, Eaton, OH 45320 USA Revised 08/04/2014

Rotisserie

PROJECT QUANTITY ITEM NO

The sight, smell and taste of rotisserie chicken can add significant impact and sales to your store. With such a powerful appeal to the senses, choosing your equipment is critical.

But why choose Henny Penny rotisseries? You’ll get more of those delicious whole birds, ribs, pork roasts and other center-of-the plate items every day because the Henny Penny rotisserie simply cooks faster.

THERMA-VEC® Even Heat Process combines cross-flow convection cooking with radiant heat. The result is thorough, even cooking with uniform browning in a lot less time than other rotisseries.

The single cabinet SCR 8 countertop rotisserie saves on floor space while cooking up to 40 whole birds in a single load! The stacked SCR 16 doubles that production—a massive 80 whole birds per load—from the same footprint, while providing the flexibility of two independently operated rotisseries.

With 9 available cook cycles (per cabinet) and choice of browning level, chefs can dial up just the right color and crispness for seasoned and marinated meats, fish and poultry… every time!

Easy-to-use controls feature LED displays and probe cooking. Units can be configured with various features on control side and customer side.

Spits, rotor disks, drive tube and drip trays remove easily for cleaning and are made with coated surfaces for easy cleanup.

Henny Penny offers a host of accessories including mobile loading stands, product display units, and merchandising bases that increase productivity and impulse sales.

SCR 16 stacked 16-spit rotisserie

Please choose configuration 8 or 16 angled spits OR 8 or 16 piercing spits OR 8 or 16 solid bottom baskets OR 8 or 16 wire baskets Cabinet style Solid back Pass-through Customer side door handle with without Customer side rotation switch with without 4 casters 3 in (76 mm) SCR 16 low profile caster mounting Adjustable leveling legs SCR 8 no casters or leveling legs

NOTE: Each cabinet in a stacked unit must be configured identically. Stacking Kit 02665 shipped with order.

APPROVED APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT

AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE DATE

SCR 8 countertop 8-spit rotisserie

Henny Penny SCR16.0 Item #1140

The Exchange Boston Market Prototype Concept Services Page: 1

Lower overall height:77.00 in (1956 mm)

SCR 8 8-spitCountertop SCR 16 16-spit Stacked

Heating Electric convection and radiant heat

Lighting 4 tungsten halogen lamps 150 W

Required clearances Left 2 in (50 mm) air flow Right 20 in (500 mm) service, power cord Back 2 in (50 mm) air flow 3 in (76 mm) when stacked 28 in (711 mm) pass-through door open Front 28 in (711 mm) door open

© 2006 Henny Penny Corporation, Eaton, OH 45320 USA Revised 08/04/2014

PROJECT ITEM NO

Continuing product improvement may subject specifications to change without notice.

Henny Penny CorporationPO Box 60 Eaton OH 45320 USA

+1 937 456.8400 800 417.8417 +1 937 456.8434 Fax 800 417.8434 Fax

www.hennypenny.com

24 Hour Technical Support: Henny Penny Technical Service 800.417.8405 [email protected]

Rotisserie

Laboratory certifications

40.63 in (1032 mm) 29.88 in (759 mm)

Separate power cords required for each cabinet.

80.25 in (2039 mm)

Height includes casters

38.25 in (972 mm)

SCR 8 SCR 16 Stacked

Dimensions Height 38.25 in (972 mm) 80.25 in (2039 mm) Width 40.63 in (1032 mm) 40.63 in (1032 mm) Depth 29.88 in (759 mm) 29.88 in (759 mm)

Crated Length 48 in (1220 mm) Depth 37 in (940 mm) 2 crates SCR 8 Height 48 in (1220 mm) Volume 49.3 ft3 (1.40 m3) 98.6 ft3 (2.80 m3) Weight 471 lb (214 kg) 942 lb (428 kg)

Capacity 2.5 lb (1.1 kg) whole chickens 8 spits 16 spits Angled spits 32 chickens 4 per spit 64 chickens 4 per spit Piercing spits 40 chickens 5 per spit 80 chickens 5 per spit Basket 32 chickens 4 per spit 64 chickens 4 per spit

Bidding Specifications Provide Henny Penny electric rotisserie model SCR 8 countertop with 8 spit capacity or SCR 16 stacked with 16 spit capacity. When stacked to form SCR 16 both SCR 8 cabinets must be configured alike.

Unit shall incorporate: • THERMA-VEC® Even Heat Process combines cross-

flow convection heat with radiant heat • Programmable cooking programs with

programmable browning and texture settings • Large LED displays for time and temperature • Food probe and probe cooking capability • Pass-through or solid back design • Removable coated spits, rotor disks, drive tube, drip tray • High-quality stainless steel and tempered glass • Choice of handle and rotation switch for customer

side and service side • Choice of 8 angled or piercing spits, or baskets for

each cabinet • Choice of casters or leveling legs for single or

bottom unit, or low profile casters for SCR 16

Electrical Volts Phase Hertz kW Amps Wire

208 1 50/60 11.1 50.5 2+G

240 1 50/60 11.1 46.0 2+G

208 3 50/60 11.1 33.6 3+G

240 3 50/60 11.1 29.1 3+G

400 3 50 11.1 19.3 3NG

Power cord and plug included with 3 phase 208 V and 240 V units for USA and Canada

NEMA 15-50P G

XZ

Y

SCR 8

SCR 16 40.63 in (1032 mm)

50.88 in (1293 mm) 33.88 in (857 mm)

Low profile caster mounting for SCR 16

Henny Penny SCR16.0 Item #1140


BLODGETT OVEN COMPANYwww.blodgett.com • 44 Lakeside Avenue, Burlington, VT 05401 • Phone: (802) 658-6600 • Fax: (802) 864-0183

EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION � Full angle-iron frame � Stainless steel front, top, sides and back � Dual pane thermal glass window encased in stainless steel door frame � Single chrome plated door handle � Tilt-down modular front control panel � Solid mineral fiber insulation at top, back, sides and bottom

INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION � Double-sided porcelainized baking compartment liner (14 gauge) � Aluminized steel combustion chamber � Dual inlet blower wheel � Five chrome-plated racks, nine rack positions with a minimum of 15/8” (41mm)

spacing

OPERATION � Dual Flow Gas system combines direct and indirect heat � Electronic spark ignition control system � Removable dual tube burner � Pressure regulator and manual gas service cut-off valve located in front control

area � Air mixers with adjustable air shutters � Solid state thermostat with temperature control range of 200°F (93°C) to

500°F (260°C) � Single speed fan motor � 1/2 horsepower blower motor with automatic thermal overload protection � One control area cooling fan

STANDARD FEATURES � Solid state manual with separate dials to control thermostat and timer � Cord set (domestic only) � Draft diverter or draft hood for venting (select one) � Three year oven parts and two year labor warranty* � Five year limited oven door warranty*

* For all international markets, contact your local distributor.

OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES (AT ADDITIONAL CHARGE)

� Legs/casters: � 4” (102mm) legs (not for use with stands) � 6” (152mm) casters

� Stands: � 5-3/4” (146mm) stainless steel stand � 7” (178mm) stainless steel stand � 11” (279mm) stainless steel stand � 16” (406mm) stainless steel stand � 19” (483mm) stainless steel stand with shelf � 24” (610mm) stainless steel stand with shelf � 33” (838mm) stainless steel stand with shelf

� Solid State digital control with LED display, cook and hold, and PulsePlus®

� Stainless steel oven liner � Extra oven racks

OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES (AT NO CHARGE)

� Solid stainless steel doors � Right hand hinged door

MODEL DFG-50Half-Size Dual Flow Gas Convection Oven

DFG

-50Project

Item No.

Quantity

Standard depth baking compartment - accepts 13” x 18” standard half-size baking pans and/or 12” x 20” hotel pans in front-to-back-position.All data is shown per oven section, unless otherwise indicated.

Refer to operator manual specification chart for listed model names.

Blodge Oven DFG‐50 DBL Item #3040


BLODGETT OVEN COMPANYwww.blodgett.com • 44 Lakeside Avenue, Burlington, VT 05401 • Phone: (802) 658-6600 • Fax: (802) 864-0183

DFG-50

Printed in U.S.A. NOTE: FOR COMMERCIAL USE ONLY

NOTE: The company reserves the right to make substitutions of components without prior notice

APPROVAL/STAMP

P/N 35018 Rev U (3/16)

SHORT FORM SPECIFICATIONS: Provide Blodgett half-size convection oven model DFG-50, (single/double) compartment. Each compartment shall have (porcelainized/stainless) steel liner and shall accept five 13” x 18” standard half-size bake pans. Stainless steel front, top, back and sides. Doors shall (be solid stainless steel have dual pane thermal glass windows) with single chrome plated door handle. Unit shall have an electronic spark ignition control system and removable dual tube burner with air mixers and adjustable air shutters. Dual Flow Gas system combines direct and indirect heat and has a 1/2 horsepower blower motor with automatic thermal overload protection and dual inlet blower wheels. Each chamber shall be fitted with five chrome-plated removable racks, and have nine rack positions. Control panel shall be recessed with Cook/Cool Down mode selector, solid state (manual/digital) infinite thermostat (200° - 500°F), and 60 minute timer. Provide options and accessories as indicated.

POWER SUPPLY:Domestic: 2-wire w/grd., 5 Amp, 115 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz. 1/3 H.P., 1 speed motor, 1710 RPM International:2-wire w/grd., 6 Amp, 220/240VAC, 1 phase, 50 Hz. 1/3 H.P., 1 speed motor, 1440 RPM6’ (1.8m) electric cord set furnished on 115 VAC ovens only.Blodgett recommends a Pass & Seymour, model 2095, GFCI for this oven.

MINIMUM ENTRY CLEARANCE:Uncrated 28” (711mm)Crated 32-1/2” (914mm)

SHIPPING INFORMATION:Approx. Weight:Single 335 lbs. (151 kg)Double 760 lbs. (344 kg) Crate sizes:32-1/2” (826mm) x 36” (914mm) x 34-1/2“ (645mm)

DIMENSIONS: Floor space 30-1/4” (782mm) W x 25-1/8” (638mm) DProduct clearance 6” from combustible and non-combustible constructionInterior 15-3/8” (390mm) W x 20” (508mm) H x 21” (533mm) D

GAS SUPPLY:3/4” NPT Single/DoubleManifold Pressure:Natural 3.5” W.CPropane 10” W.C.Inlet Pressure:Natural 7.0” W.C. min. – 10.5” W.C. max.Propane 11.0” W.C. min. – 13.0” W.C. max.

MAXIMUM INPUT:Single 27,500 BTU/hr (8.1 Kw)Double 55,000 BTU/hr (16.2 Kw)

SINGLE

DRAFT DIVERTER35.8 (764)

28.56 (725)

15.56 (395)

5.75 (146)0 (0)

4 (102)

30.13(765)

8.63(219) DOUBLE

DRAFT HOOD

0 (0)7 (178)

16.81 (427)

29.81 (757)37.06 (941)

60.88 (1546)

47.88 (1216)

67.13 (1705)

61-7/16”(1561mm)

31.38(797)

10.75(273)

39.93(1014)

9.88(251)

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)

TOP VIEW

4 (101)2.88 (73)

1.75 (44)

25.13(638)

20(508)

30.25 (768)

3.25(83)

Blodge Oven DFG‐50 DBL Item #3040


NatlCntr TNC‐T9026‐BO08 Item #3303


BUNN® reserves the right to change specifications and product design without notice. Such revisions do not entitle

the buyer to corresponding changes, improvements, additions or replacements for previously purchased equipment.

For most current specifications and other info visit bunn.com.

Created on:

11/30/2016

H5X Element SST

28.5" x 17.6" x 7.4"

(72.4cm x 44.7cm x 18.8cm)

Servers and airpots sold separately

LED display provides simple temperature adjustment

Thinsulate® tank insulation provides increased energy efficiency

Programmable “Energy Saver Mode” reduces operating cost during idle periods

The perfect tool for added control over quality coffee and tea

Contemporary, space-saving design

Digital thermostat provides constant and accurate temperatures of 60°- 212°F (15.6°-100°C)

Agency:

Specifications Additional Features 43600.0002Product #:

PlumbedWater Access:

StainlessFinish:

UpperFaucet:

212°F (100.000°C)Temp. Setting:

Electrical & CapacityVolts Amps Watts Cord

Attached Plug Type 8oz cups/hr 236ml cups/hr

Input H²O Temp. Phase # Wires

plus Ground Hertz

208 19.5 4050 No - - 60°F (15.5°C) 1 2 60

Plumbing Requirements CAD DrawingsPSI kPa Fitting Supplied Water Flow Required (GPM)

20-90 138-621 1/4" Male Flare Fitting -

2D Revit KLC

•

Bunn 43600.0002 Item #3309





Created on:

11/30/2016

Unit Shipping

Width Height Depth Width Height Depth Weight Volume

English 7.4 in. 28.5 in. 17.6 in. - - - 32.500 lbs 3.670 ft³

Metric 18.8 cm 72.4 cm 44.7 cm - - - 14.742 kgs 0.104 m³

Bunn 43600.0002 Item #3309





Created on:

11/30/2016

H5X Element SST(43600.0002)Related Products & Accessories:

DRIP TRAY KIT (2.5"HT-HW2)

02497.0000 Product #:

DRIP TRAY

02545.0000 Product #:

COVER, DRIP TRAY-PERFORATED

02546.0000 Product #:

FOOT, RUBBER

02547.0000 Product #:

WATER FILTER, EQHP-10L

39000.0001 Product #:

WATER FILTER, EQHP-10

39000.0004 Product #:

Bunn 43600.0002 Item #3309





Created on:

11/30/2016

H5X Element SST(43600.0002)Serving & Holding Options:*Serving and Holding selections are currently unavailable. Please contact your sales representative to find out more information.*

Bunn 43600.0002 Item #3309


2153 Dryden Rd., Dayton, OH 45439 | 937-299-5493 | 800-347-5423 | Fax: 937-299-4147 | www.globefoodequip.com

GLO

BE

FO

OD

EQ

UIP

ME

NT C

OM

PAN

Y Project Name: AIA#:

Model #: Location:

SIS#: Item #: Quantity:

09-2016 Printed in the U.S. © Globe Food Equipment Company Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Approved by: Date:

Globe

® 25 Quart P

lanetary Bench M

ixerS

P25

Modelo SP25

Standard Features• Powerful 3/4 HP custom built motor• Gear-driven, high-torque transmission• Heat-treated hardened steel alloy gears & shafts• Three fixed speeds• Permanently lubricated transmission• Thermal overload protection• Front-mounted touch pad controls with 60-

minute digital timer and last-batch recall• Removable stainless steel, interlocking bowl

guard with built-in fully welded ingredient chute• Interlocked bowl lift• Rigid cast iron body• Industry standard #12 attachment hub• NSF approved enamel gray paint• 6-foot cord and ground plug

Standard Accessories/Attachments• 25 qt stainless steel bowl (#304 series)• Aluminum flat beater• Stainless steel wire whip• Aluminum spiral dough hook• Non-slip rubber feet

Warranty• Two year parts and labor

Optional Accessories• Slicer/shredder/grater for #12 hub• Meat grinder for #12 hub• Stainless steel flat beater• Stainless steel spiral dough hook • 10 qt adapter kit• Mixer table with undershelf• Extended warranty

To select options, see complete list on back

The Perfect Mix of Value, Performance & Durability

Features front mounted touch pad control panel with 60-minute digital timer!

25 Quart Planetary Bench Mixer

Globe SP25 Item #3336


2153 Dryden Rd., Dayton, OH 45439 | 937-299-5493 | 800-347-5423 | Fax: 937-299-4147 | www.globefoodequip.com

09-2016 Printed in the U.S. © Globe Food Equipment Company Specifications are subject to change without notice.

25 Quart Planetary Bench Mixer SP25

Drawings available through KCL at www.kclcad.com.

DIMENSIONS | SHIPPING INFORMATION Carton reinforced for shipping. The weight and dimensions of this reinforced carton are included below and may vary from shipment to shipment. This product ships on a pallet. Freight class 85.

Model Base Foot Print Overall Dimensions Net Weight Shipping Dimensions Shipping Weight

SP25 19" w x 18.45'' d(48 cm x 47 cm)

24" w x 23'' d x 36.25'' h (61 cm x 58 cm x 92 cm)

264 lbs (120 kg)

32" w x 40'' d x 49'' h(81 cm x 102 cm x 125 cm)

325 lbs (147 kg)

SPECIFICATIONS

Model Motor Volts AmpsTransmission

Type Capacity Controls 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd

SP25 3/4 HP 115/60/1 11 Gear 25 qt 24 liter

Front-mounted digital controls & timer 101 185 355 57 105 202

Agitator Speeds (RPMs) Attachment Speeds (RPMs)

Cord & Plug: Attached 6-foot flexible 3-wire cord with molded plug fits a grounded receptacle. NEMA 5-15P

OPTIONAL MIXER ACCESSORIES AND HUB ATTACHMENTSMIXER:

XXBOWL-25 25 qt stainless steel (S/S) bowl

XXBEAT-25 Alum. flat beater XXBEAT-25SS S/S flat beater XXHOOK-25 Alum. dough hook XXHOOK-25SS S/S dough hook XXWHIP-25 S/S wire whip XXHDWHIP25-4 Heavy-duty 4 mm S/S wire whip

XXACC10-25 Adapter kit - 10 qt bowl, hook, beater and whip

XTable S/S countertop mixer table with under shelf (30'' W x 24'' D x 24'' H)

HUB:

XVSGH 9" Slicer/Shredder/Grater housing only (no plates included-must select from plates listed on this sheet)

XASP Adjustable slicing plate(for vegetables only)

XPH Plate holder -*only 1 requiredShredding Plates:

XSP332* 3/32" (2.3 mm) XSP316* 3/16" (4.7 mm) XSP14* 1/4" (6.3 mm) XSP516* 5/16" (7.9 mm) XSP12* 1/2" (12.7 mm) XGP* Grating plate

XMCA-SS Meat grinder assembly (Polished stainless steel cylinder, worm gear, ring, and s/s pan. Includes knife, 3/16" plate, and pusher.)

XXCK Chopper knife for XMCA-SS

Chopper Plate Sizes Available: CP02-12 1/16" (2 mm) CP04-12 5/32" (4 mm) CP05-12 3/16" (5 mm) CP06-12 1/4" (6 mm) CP08-12 5/16" (8 mm) CP10-12 3/8" (10 mm) CP12-12 1/2" (12 mm) CP14-12 9/16" (14 mm)

CP16-12 5/8" (16 mm) CP18-12 11/16" (18 mm) CP00-12 Stuffing plate XST12 1/2" Stuffing tube (mutton) XST34 3/4" Stuffing tube (pork)

FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION: XXCORR-25 Correctional package, includes tamper resistant external fasteners.

EXTENDED WARRANTY SP-XD2530 Extended warranty for SP25 mixer, extends factory warranty to 3 years. Available only at time of purchase.

Mixer is constructed of a rigid cast iron body with front-mounted controls and a digital 60-minute timer with last-batch recall. Mixer has a 3/4 HP custom built motor with overload protection and gear-driven, high torque permanently lubricated transmission consisting of heat-treated hardened steel alloy gears and shafts. Mixer comes with 25 qt. stainless steel bowl, aluminum flat beater, stainless steel wire whip, and aluminum dough hook and non-slip rubber feet. Interlocked, removable stainless steel bowl guard with fully welded on ingredient chute. Mixer has #12 attachment hub and interlocked bowl lift. Mixer is NSF and ETL listed. Two year parts and labor warranty.

8.5 (22)

19.0 (48)

24.0 (61) 23.0 (58)

18.5 (47)

18.5 (47)

27.5 (70)

36.25 (92)

15.0 (38)

24.0 (61)

18.5 (47)

15.69 (40)

12.12 (31)15.0 (38)15.87 (40)

72.0 (183)

3.0 (8)

Globe SP25 Item #3336


1000-UP SeriesLow Temperature

Hot Food Holding Cabinets

Alto-Shaam double compartment 1000-UP hot food holding cabinet is constructed with a stainless steel exterior and stainless steel doors with magnetic latch. Each compartment has a Simple control with on/off power switch; up and down arrow buttons with a temperature range of 60°F to 200°F (16°C to 93°C); heat indicator light; temperature display buttons, and digital display. Included are four (4) chrome plated side racks spaced at 2-15/16" (75mm) centers, and one (1) set of 5" (127mm) heavy duty casters – 2 rigid and 2 swivel with brake.

# 3 8 - 1 0 / 1 6

Item no. _______________________

W164 N9221 Water Street • P.O. Box 450 • Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53052-0450 • U.S.A.Phone: 262.251.3800 800.558.8744 U.S.A./CANADA Fax: 262.251.7067 800.329.8744 U.S.A. only

www.alto-shaam.com

Due to ongoing product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.Printed in the U.S.A.

Factory-Installed Options

• Electrical Choices 120V

208-240V 230V

• Cabinet Choices Reach-In, standard Pass-Through, optional

• Door Choices Solid Door, standard

Window Door, optional

Note: Window standard on proofing cabinet

• Door Swing Choices Right-hand swing, standard Left-hand swing, optional

Note: Pass-through cabinets cannot have all doors hinged on the same side.

l Halo Heat…a controlled, uniform heat source that gently surrounds food for better appearance, taste, and longer holding life.

l Holds hot food hot...meat, poultry, fish, potatoes, casseroles, vegetables, rolls, etc.l Dual purpose — both a holding cabinet and dough proofer.l Close temperature tolerance and even heat application maintain ideal serving

temperatures throughout the cabinet.l Two individually controlled, insulated warming compartments give the benefit of

holding at two different temperatures.l Stainless steel interior resists corrosion.l Available in reach-in or pass-through design.l Casters provide easy mobility.l Antimicrobial handle retards the growth of illness-causing pathogens.l Digital control senses temperature drops faster, providing quick heat recovery time. l Door venting holds crispy food better.

Deluxe Control Option Solid state electronic control option simplifies temperature setting and has

a clear, easy-to-read LED display and includes our patented SureTemp™ heat recovery system. SureTemp™ reacts immediately to compensate for any loss of heat whenever the door is opened.

Deluxe control is also available with six independent multiple timers for each compartment to facilitate “first-in, first-out” concept.

Deluxe control with internal temperature probe.

IP X4

Model 1000-UP Double cavity hot food holding cabinet Model 1000-UP/P Double cavity proofing cabinet with window doors

Short Form Spec

Alto‐Shaam 1000‐UP Item #3503


Accessories

Bumper, Full Perimeter 5009767

Casters, Stem - 2 rigid, 2 swivel w/brake

3-1/2" (89mm) 5008017

Door Lock with Key (each handle) LK-22567

Drip Pan with Drain, 1-11/16" (43mm) deep 5005616

Drip Pan without Drain, 1-7/8" (48mm) deep 11906

Legs, 6" (152mm), Flanged - set of four 5011149

Pan Grid, Wire, Chrome Plated PN-2115

Pan Insert 18" x 26" (457mm x 660mm x 25mm)

Security Panel with Lock 5013934

Shelf, Stainless Steel, Reach-In SH-2325

Shelf, Stainless Steel, Pass-Through SH-2346

Water Reservoir Pan* 1775

Water Reservoir Pan Cover* 1774

* Included with proofing cabinet

34-1

/2"

(876

mm

)

75-1

3/16

" (1

924m

m)

with

5" (

127m

m)

cast

ers*

23-3/8" (593mm)

22-9/16" (572mm)

23-15/16" (608mm)

20-1/2"(521mm)

34-3/16" (867mm)17-1/16" (433mm)

72-1

/2"

(184

0mm

)

ElectricalConnection

Pass-ThroughOption

24-1/8" (613mm)

6-13

/16"

(17

3mm

)

*74-1/16" (1881mm) - with optional 3-1/2" (89mm) casters*75-5/8" (1921mm) - with optional 6" (152mm) legs

25-1/16" (636mm)

53-9

/16"

(13

60m

m)

72-5

/8"

(184

4mm

)

Pass-ThroughOptionElectrical

Connection

Shown with Optional Bumper


51-9

/16"

(13

09m

m)

32-11/16" (804mm)

Cord Length:120V - 9' (2743mm)208-240V - 8' (2438mm)230V - 8' (2438mm) Dimensions: H x W x D

Exterior:75-13/16" x 23-15/16" x 32-11/16" (1924mm x 608mm x 804mm)

Pass-Through Exterior (Option):75-13/16" x 23-15/16" x 34-3/16" (1924mm x 608mm x 867mm)

Interior (each compartment): 26-7/8" x 18-7/8" x 26-1/2" (682mm x 479mm x 673mm)

Product\Pan Capacity (per compartment)

120 lbs (54kg) maximum Volume maximum: 60 qts (76 liters)

Full-Size Pans: Gastronorm 1/1: Four (4) 20" x 12" x 2-1/2" 530mm x 325mm x 65mm on optional wire shelves only

Full-Size Sheet Pans: Eight (8) 18" x 26" x 1"

1000-UP SeriesLow Temperature Hot Food Holding Cabinets

# 3 8 - 1 0 / 1 6

W164 N9221 Water Street • P.O. Box 450 • Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53052-0450 • U.S.A.Phone: 262.251.3800 800.558.8744 U.S.A./Canada Fax: 262.251.7067 800.329.8744 U.S.A. only

www.alto-shaam.com

Due to ongoing product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A.

Weight Net: 282 lb (128g) Ship: (est.) 360 lb (163 kg) Carton Dimensions: (L x W x H)

35" x 35" x 82" (889mm x 889mm x 2083mm)

Clearance RequirementsBack 3" (76mm)Top 2" (51mm)

Right Side, Left Side 1" (25mm)

Installation Requirements— Appliance must be installed level.

— The appliance must not be installed in any area where it may be affected by steam, grease, dripping water, extreme temperatures, or any other severely adverse conditions.

— Appliances with casters and no cord or plug must be secured to the building structure with a flexible connector. Not factory supplied.

Electrical V Ph Hz A kW 120 1 60 16.0 1.9 NEMA 5-20P, 20A-125V Plug

208 1 60 7.0 1.4 NEMA 6-15P, 240 1 60 8.0 1.9 15A-250V Plug (U.S.A. only)

230 1 50/60 7.7 1.8 Plugs rated 250V

CH2-16P BS 1363 AS/NZS 3112 CEE 7/7

Alto‐Shaam 1000‐UP Item #3503


750-S seriesLOW TeMPerATUre

HOT FOOD HOLDiNG CABiNeTs

#32 - 05/16

Short Form Spec

Alto-Shaam single compartment 750-S hot food holding cabinet is constructed with a stainless steel exterior and stainless steel door with magnetic latch. The Simple control consists of an on/off power switch; up and down arrow buttons with a temperature range of 60°F to 200°F (16°C to 93°C); heat indicator light; temperature display button, and digital display. Included are two (2) chrome plated side racks with eleven (11) pan positions spaced at 1-3/8" (35mm) centers, three (3) chrome plated wire shelves, and one (1) set of 2-1/2" (64mm) heavy duty casters – 2 rigid and 2 swivel with brake.

MODEL 750-S Hot food holding cabinet

l HALO HEAT…a controlled, uniform heat source that gently surrounds food for better appearance, taste, and longer holding life.

l Holds hot food hot...meat, poultry, fish, potatoes, casseroles, vegetables, rolls, etc.

l Close temperature tolerance and even heat application maintain ideal serving temperatures throughout the cabinet.

l Stainless steel interior resists corrosion.l Available in reach-in or pass-through design.l Casters provide easy mobility.l Can be stacked with an identical unit or cook/hold oven to save space.l Antimicrobial handle retards the growth of illness-causing pathogens.l Digital control senses temperature drops faster, providing quick heat

recovery time. l Door venting holds crispy food better.

W164 n9221 Water street • p.o. Box 450 • Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53052-0450 • u.s.a. PHONE: 262.251.3800 800.558.8744 U.S.A./CANADA FAX: 262.251.7067 800.329.8744 U.S.A. ONLY

www.alto-shaam.comD U E T O O N G O I N G P R O D U C T I M P R O V E M E N T , S P E C I F I C A T I O N S A R E S U B J E C T T O C H A N G E W I T H O U T N O T I C E .P R I N T E D I N U . S . A .

ITEM NO. _______________________

Factory-installed options• Electrical Choices 120V

208-240V 230V

• Cabinet Choices Reach-In, standard Pass-Through, optional

• Door Choices Solid Door, standard

Window Door, optional

• Door Swing Choices Right-hand swing, standard Left-hand swing, optional

Note: Pass-through cabinets cannot have all doors hinged on the same side.

• Stackable design Stackable with 750 or 767

Series single compartment ovens and holding cabinets, XL-300 Xcelerate® or CTX4-10 Combitherm®. Order appropriate stacking hardware.

additional Features

deluxe control option Solid state electronic control option simplifies temperature setting

and has a clear, easy-to-read LED display and includes our patented SureTemp™ heat recovery system. SureTemp™ reacts immediately to compensate for any loss of heat whenever the door is opened.

Deluxe control is also available with six independent multiple timers for each compartment to facilitate “first-in, first-out” concept.

Deluxe control with internal temperature probe.

IP X3

Alto‐Shaam 750‐S Item #3506


#32 - 05/16

750-S seriesLOW TeMPerATUre HOT FOOD HOLDiNG CABiNeTs

56-7

/8" (

1444

mm

)Pass-Through

Option


79" (

2006

mm

)

26-3/4" (679mm)

23-5/8" (600mm)26-5/8" (676mm)

25-5/8" (651mm)

24-1/8" (612mm)

28-1

3/16

" (73

2mm

)

31-7

/8" (

809m

m)

with

2-1

/2" (

64m

m) c

aste

rs*

3-5/

8" (9

1mm

)

31-3/8" (797mm)

Electrical Connection

Pass-ThroughOption

Cord Length:120V - 5' (1524mm)208-240V - 8' (2438mm)230V - 8' (2438mm)

*33-3/8" (848mm) - with optional 3-1/2" (89mm) casters*35-1/4" (894mm) - with optional 5" (127mm) casters*33-3/4" (857mm) - with optional 6" (152mm) legs

17" (432mm)

34" (864mm)31-5/8" (802mm)

34-7

/8" (

886m

m)

54-1

/8" (

1373

mm

)

28-9/16" (726mm)


Shown with optional bumper

product\pan capacity120 lbs (54 kg) maximum

volume maximum: 100 quarts (95 liters)full-size pans: gastronorm 1/1:

Ten (10) 20" x 12" x 2-1/2" 530mm x 325mm x 65mm Six (6) 20" x 12" x 4" 530mm x 325mm x 100mm Four (4) 20" x 12" x 6" 530mm x 325mm x 150mm

full-size sheet pans (on wire shelves only): Up to Six (6) 18" x 26" x 1" – with additional wire shelves

optionS & accESSoriES Bumper, Full Perimeter

(not available with 2-1/2" casters) 5010371 Handle, Push/Pull 55662

Carving Holder Prime Rib HL-2635 Steamship (Cafeteria) Round 4459

Casters, Stem - 2 rigid, 2 swivel w/brake 5" (127mm) 5004862 3-1/2" (89mm) 5008017 Door Lock with Key LK-22567 Drip Pan, with Drain, 1-11/16" (43mm) deep 14831 Drip Pan, without Drain, 1-5/8" (41mm) deep 1014684 Drip Tray - External 5010391

Legs, 6" (152mm), Flanged (set of four) 5011149 Pan Grid, Wire - 18" x 26" pan insert PN-2115 Security Panel with Lock 5013936

Shelves Chrome Wire, reach-in SH-2105 Chrome Wire, pass-through SH-2327 Stainless Steel, Flat Wire, reach-in SH-2324 Stainless Steel, Rib Rack SH-2743

Stacking Hardware Over or under TH, SK, S-Series 5004864 Under XL-300 Xcelerate® 5019677 Under XL-400 Xcelerate® 5019678 Under CTX4-10 Combitherm® 5019679

W164 n9221 Water street • p.o. Box 450 • Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53052-0450 • u.s.a. PHONE: 262.251.3800 800.558.8744 U.S.A./CANADA FAX: 262.251.7067 800.329.8744 U.S.A. ONLY

www.alto-shaam.comD U E T O O N G O I N G P R O D U C T I M P R O V E M E N T , S P E C I F I C A T I O N S A R E S U B J E C T T O C H A N G E W I T H O U T N O T I C E . P R I N T E D I N U . S . A .

dimEnSionS: H x W x Dexterior:

31-7/8" x 26-5/8" x 31-3/8" (809mm x 676mm x 797mm)pass-through:

31-7/8" x 26-3/4" x 33-13/16" (809mm x 679mm x 858mm)interior:

20" x 21-15/16" x 26-1/2" (507mm x 556mm x 673mm)

inStaLLation rEQuirEmEntS — Appliance must be installed level. — The appliance must not be installed in any area

where it may be affected by steam, grease, dripping water, extreme temperatures, or any other severely adverse conditions.

— Appliances with casters and no cord or plug must be secured to the building structure with a flexible connector.

wEight net: 157 lb (71 kg) ship: (est.) 228 lb (103 kg) carton dimensions: (l x w x h)

35" x 35" x 41" (889mm x 889mm x 1041mm)

cLEarancE rEQuirEmEntSrear 3" (76mm)

top 2" (51mm)each side 1" (25mm)

ELEctricaL voltage phase cycle/hz amps kW cord & plug 120 1 60 9.0 1.1 nema 5-15p, 15a-125v plug

208 1 60 3.9 .81 nema 6-15p, 240 1 60 4.5 1.1 15a-250v plug (u.s.a. only) 230 1 50/60 4.3 1.0 plugs rated 250v

ch2-16p bs 1363 as/nzs 3112 cee 7/7

Alto‐Shaam 750‐S Item #3506


Project_________________________

Item No._________________________

Quantity_________________________

Pitco Frialator, Inc • P.O. Box 501, Concord, NH 03302-0501 • 509 Route 3A, Bow, NH 03304603-225-6684 • FAX: 603-225-8497 • www.pitco.comL10-239 Rev 4 02/07 Printed in the USA

Model SRTG14 and SRTG14-2Gas Rethermalizer

STANDARD FEATURES Digital Controller with Timers Tank rack Automatic water fill with bypass switch Matchless Ignition Drain Valve Interlock Common drain outlet Single gas connection Cleaning Brush Adjustable 6” (15.2cm) Legs Hinged Cover

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES(AT ADDITIONAL COST)

Computer I-8 with 8 product timers Adjustable 6” (15.2cm) Swivel Casters Food rack (see charts) Suitcase / Basket (see charts) Gas Hose with quick disconnect 1/3 Pan rails

Set of 2 for single tank Set of 3 for dual tank

Water Hose with quick disconnect Stainless steel cabinet sides Stainless steel cabinet back

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONSCONSTRUCTION Solstice Burner Technology provides dependable

higher efficiency heat transfer without the need forcomplex power blowers.

Up to 50% more production over past models Stainless steel tank Welded tank with an extra smooth peened finish

ensures easy cleaning. Tank overfill protection, safely diverts water to

common drain outlet. Long lasting high temperature alloy heat baffles. 1” NPT full port (2.54 cm) drain, for quick draining. Stainless steel hinged cover saves energy by

keeping heated water vapors in the tank. Cabinet: polished stainless steel front, door and

splash back. Aluminized steel sides and back. Heavy Duty 3/16” (.48 cm) door hinge

CONTROLS Digital temperature display with 2 product timers.

Optional: Computer with 8 product timers. Matchless ignition gives you an instant pilot light

for cooking and saves you money during off times. Automatic water fill system with in-line strainer,

maintains the correct water level for ease of use. Level control safely prevents a heat cycle unless

tank water level is in operating range. Integrated gas control valve acts as a manual and

pilot valve, gas filter, pressure regulator, andautomatic main valve.

Temperature limit switch safely shuts off all gasflow if the appliance temperature exceeds theupper limit.

Model SR

TG14 and SR

TG14-2 G

as Retherm

alizer

SRTG14

SRTG14-2

Inside Product Opening (W x H x D)

Qty Per Tank

Product Per Rack

5 1/4" x 12" x 15" 2 ---2 7/8" x 11"x 15 1/2" 3 ---1 1/4" x 9 5/8"x 13" 8 ---5/8" x 9 5/8" x 13" 9 ---

1 1/4" x 13"x 9" 12 ---5/8" x 13" x 9" 12 ---

1 7/8" wide 1 82" wide 1 82" wide 2 6

88

12

------

------

B4509402B4513001

Description

Basket, WideBasket, Narrow

Suitcase, NarrowSuitcase, Wide

Rack, VerticalRack, Taco 8Rack, Taco 6

B4511501

B4511101B4511102

B4511001

B4513301B4513302

Optional Rack / Basket Chart

Part No.

B4511601

Total Product Capacity

Suitcase, Tall wideSuitcase, Tall narrow

------

Pitco SRTG14 Item #3800


Model SRTG14 and SRTG14-2 Gas Rethermalizer

Pitco Frialator, Inc • P.O. Box 501, Concord, NH 03302-0501 • 509 Route 3A, Bow, NH 03304 603-225-6684 • FAX: 603-225-8497 • www.pitco.com L10-239 Rev 4 02/07 Printed in the USA

We reserve the right to change specifications without notice and without incurring any obligation for equipment previously or subsequently sold.

Mod

el S

RTG

14 a

nd S

RTG

14-2

Gas

Ret

herm

aliz

er

16 1/8 [41.0]

32 1/4 [81.9]

14 9/16 [37.0]

27/32 [2.1]

12 3/16 [30.9]

65 7/32 [165.6]

5 23/32 [14.5]

5 3/16 [13.2]

2 7/32 [5.6]

7 1/8 [18.1]

19 31/32 [50.7]

8 15/16 [22.7]

9 13/16 [24.9]

DIGITALTEMPERATURECONTROLLER 8 9/16 [21.8]

7 1/8 [18.1]

2 7/32 [5.6]

46 1/16 [117.0]

36 [91.4]

3 1/2 [8.9]

IN (CM)

G = 3 4" NPT GAS CONNECTIOND = 1" NPT DRAINW = 12" NPT WATER INLETP = 6' FOOT (183 CM) POWER CORD (NEMA 5-15P PLUG)

D

FILL ONLYSWITCH

5/8 [1.6]

BACKBACK

GWW

G

D

SRTGVIEW

SRTG-2VIEW

D

B4511501B4511601B4513302WITH

OU

T S

UITC

AS

ES

WITH

OU

T S

UITC

AS

ES

35 7/32 [89.4]

49 1/2 [125.7]

B4511102WIDE

WITH

S

UITC

AS

ES TALL WIDE

WITH

S

UITC

AS

ES

B4513301

MUST BE USED WITH RACK

CAN BE USED WITH OR WITHOUT RACK

SUITCASES8 PRODUCT CAPACITY

B4511101NARROW

P

NOT SHOWNTANK COVER

B4511001 B4509402

RACKS BASKETS12 PRODUCT CAPACITY



B4513001 TALL NARROW

RACK SUITCASES

55,000 BTUs (16kW) (58MJ)

17 1/2 gal ( 66.2 liters)

LPNat10" W.C.

(25 bars/2.5kPa)

11-1/4 in (28.6 cm)

14 1/8 x 19 1/2 in (35.6 x 49.5 cm)

INDIVIDUAL RETHERMALIZER SPECIFICATIONSModels Cooking Area Cook Depth Water Capacity Gas Input Rate / Hr Burner Pressure

3.5" W.C. (8.7 bars/.87kPa)

Shipping Cube27 ft3 (0.8 m3 )

INSTALLATION INFORMATION53 ft3 (1.5 m3 )

Shipping Crate Size H x W x LModels WeightsRETHERMALIZER SHIPPING INFORMATION (Approximate)

6" (15.2cm)Do not block / restrict flue gases from flowing into hood or install vent hood drains over the flue.

CLEARANCES

115V 60Hz 208 / 220-240V 50-60 hz13" W.C.

(32.4 mbars/ 3.25 kPa)

Total Gas Load / Hr SRTGSRTG-2

SRTG14 (per Tank)

Front min. Floor min. Combustible material

LP Gas

Supply Pressure * 7" W.C. (17.4 mbars/1.75 kPa)

* Check plumbing / gas codes for proper gas supply line sizing to sustain burner pressure when all gas appliances are full on.

Natural Gas

Rethermalizing a wide variety of precooked prepackaged products such as soups, vegetables, meat, entrees, sauces, etc.

SHORT FORM SPECIFICATIONProvide Pitco Model SRTG tube fired gas Rethermalizer. Each Rethermalizer unit shall have a Blower Free burner system combined with two

stainless steel heat tubes utilizing high temperature alloy steel baffles. Each Rethermalizer shall have a digital controller with timers, matchless ignition, automatic water fill, hinged cover. Provide accessories as follows:

TYPICAL APPLICATION

0" 0"30"

(76.2 cm)6"

(15.25 cm)

Sides min. Rear min.

6" (15.2cm)

Non-Combustible materialSides min. Rear min.

Fryer Flue Area

SRTG-14 58 x 22 x 44 in (147 x 57 x 113 cm)57 x 36 x 47 in (144.8 x 91.4 x 119.4 cm)

215 Lbs (97.5 Kg)

1.0 0.5

2.0

SRTG14-2 430 lbs (195 Kg)

AMPSSRTG

Power CordGAS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ELECTRIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1.055,000 BTUs (16kW) (58MJ)

110,000 BTUs (33kW) (119MJ)SRTG-2

Pitco SRTG14 Item #3800


Classic Countertop12” x 27” Cooker & Warmer

Models CW-3A CW-3A CE W-43V W-43V CE

PRODUCT: QUANTITY: ITEM:

Designed Smart• Utilizes counter display space more efficiently.• CW-3A and the W-43V have 35% more display

capacity with extended 27 inch length vs. standard 20 inch models.

• Both modes have unique “serpentine shaped”

heating elements that evenly distribute heat throughout the unit.

• Provided with insulation to protect interior parts and countertops from heat build-up.

• Able to utilize W-43V warmer in wet or dry applications. CW-3A should be ran wet.

• CW-3A is ideal for thawing frozen soup and then holding thawed soup at NSF safe serving temperatures.

• CW-3A includes a knob guard.• Steel “element support” stabilizes heating

elements and reflects heat toward food.• Interior liner formed out of tough stainless steel

APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company * 1307 N Watters Rd. Suite 180, Allen, TX 75013

(800) 527-2100 * (972)908-6100 * Fax (214) 565-0976 * www.apwwyott.com

Rev111716cp

*Warranty does not include rock grates, cooking grates, burners shields or fireboxes.

Model CW-3A Countertop Cooker

Reliability backed by APW Wyott’s Warranty

These APW Wyott Warming Equipment is backed by a 1-year Parts and Labor warranty, including our “Enhanced Warranty” service that replaces new units

with certain product issues through the convenience of direct factory shipments.

•Certified by the following agencies:

APW Wyott Design Features

See reverse side for product specifications.

W-43V (Warmer)• 28.5 quart capacity• Element configuration provides even heat

distribution.• Heavy-duty stainless steel for long life.• Easy to clean.• Infinite control with a Bimetal thermostat backup.• Great for buffets, serving lines, back bars or back-

of-the-house.• Knob guards.

CW-3A (Cook & Serve)• Wet usage 100°F to 212°F (38°C to 100°C);

recommended.• Heavy-duty stainless steel for long life.• Thermostatically controlled.

OptionsAdapter Plates2 holes for two 11 qt. insets (56639)3 holes for three 7 qt. insets (56638)4 holes for four 4 qt. insets (56640)* 230V model only

56638 56640

APW Wyo CW‐3A Item #3890


http://www.apwwyott.com/

Classic Countertop12” x 27” Cooker & Warmers

Models CW-3A W-43V W-43VCE

PRODUCT: QUANTITY: ITEM:

APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company * 1307 N Watters Rd. Suite 180, Allen, TX 75013 (800) 527-2100 *

(972)908-6100 * Fax (214) 565-0976 * www.apwwyott.com

Rev111716cp

*APW Wyott reserves the right to modify specifications or discontinue models without incurring obligation.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONSConstruction:Stainless steel housing; stainless steel liner, fiberglass insulation.

Electrical Information:Each unit is equipped with a 60”, three wire grounded power

cord which terminates with a standard three pronged male plug. The 120V unit uses a NEMA 5-15P plug. The 230V unit uses a 10 Amp Euro plug. The 208V and 240V units use a NEMA 6-15P plug.

Electrical Specification:W-43V 120V, 1500W, 12.5AmpsW-43V CE 230V, 1375W , 6AmpsW-43V 240V, 1500W, 6.25AmpsCW-3A 120V, 1800W, 15AmpsCW-3A CE 230V, 1375W, 6AmpsCW-3A 208V, 1800W, 15Amps

Overall Dimensions:W-43V: 9 1/8” H x 14 11/16” W x 29 5/8” D

(23.2 cm x 37.3 cm x 75.2 cm)CW-3A: 10 1/2” H x 14 11/16 W x 29 5/8” D

(25.7 cm x 37.3 cm x 75.2 cm)

Capacity:W-43V 28.5 qts. (26.9L)CW-3A 28.5 qts. (26.9L)Both accept (1) 12” x 20” x 6: deep pan and one 1/3 size pan or (2) 2/3 size pans for four 1/3 size pans.

Shipping Weight:StandardW-43V 30 lbs. (13.6kg)CW-3A 30 lbs. (13.6 kg)

F.O.B. Allen, TX 75013

CW-3AW-43V

APW Wyo CW‐3A Item #3890


http://www.apwwyott.com/

225 49th Ave. Dr. SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 U.S.A. | 800-233-2366 | 319-368-8120 | Fax: 319-368-8198 | www.acpsolutions.com

Item #:

Project #:A

IA File #:

Specification #:

Heavy Volume Menumaster Commercial Microwave Model MRC30S2

Model MRC30S2 shown

Power Outputl 3000 watts of power.

l 11 power levels for consistent, delicious results for frozen, refrigerated and fresh foods - from the freezer to table in minutes.

l Unique method of energy distribution provides superior even heating throughout the cavity.

Easy to Use l Up to 100 programmable menu items simplifies cooking and ensures consistent results.

l Four stage cooking option with one-touch programming. Reduces prep time, labor and food waste while providing consistent results.

l Controls are user friendly and require minimal training.

l Multiple quantity pad calculates the proper cook times for up to 8 items.

l Automatic voltage sensor for easy installation.

l See-through door and lighted interior for monitoring without opening the door.

l Ample 1.0 cubic ft. (28 liter) capacity accommodates two standard 4” (102mm) deep half-sized pans.

l Interior ceramic shelf is sealed and recessed to reduce plate-to-shelf edge impact and keep spills contained.

Easy to Maintain l Stainless steel exterior and interior for easy cleaning and a professional look.

l Constructed to withstand the foodservice environment.

l Removable, cleanable air filter and clean filter reminder protect oven components.

l Backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComServ Support Center, 866-426-2621.

l ETL Listed.

Heavy VolumeThis category of microwave is ideal for...

Applications: - Casual dining- Country clubs- Healthcare/Nurses stations

Through put potential: - 8 oz. portions of frozen mixed vegetable, 30+ portions per hour - 8 oz. portions of fresh asparagus, 50+ portions per hour - 4 oz. portion of scrambled eggs, 50+ portions per hour

Defrost: - Defrosts most frozen food products

All ACP, Inc. commercial ovens are backed by our Culinary Center. Call us with any question regarding food preparation,menu development and cooking times.866-426-2621.

ACP MRC30S2 Item #3891


Form #MCO0961 ACP commitment to quality may mean a change in specification without notice. Product of the U.S.A. © 2012 ACP Inc.™ Printed in the U.S.A.

AIA

File

#:

Spec

ifica

tion

#:

18-1/8”(460)

17-1/2”(445)

19-1/4”(489)

1-1/2”(38)

9-1/4”(235)

39-1/2”(1003)

25-1/2”(648)

1-3/8”(35)

20-3/4”(527)

225 49th Ave. Dr. SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 U.S.A. | 800-233-2366 | 319-368-8120 | Fax: 319-368-8198 | www.acpsolutions.com

Menumaster Commercial Microwave Model MRC30S2 | Heavy Volume

SpecificationsCommercial microwave 10 touch pad control panel shall be programmable with the ability to program up to 100 menu items and shall have automatic cooking capability for up to eight portions. Cooking timer shall be 60 minute, countdown style with a time entry option and an adjustable end of cycle audible signal. LED display shall be a backlit. There shall be 11 power levels, 4 cooking stages and defrost mode at 20% power. Microwave output shall be 3000 watts distributed by three magnetrons each with a rotating antenna to provide superior even heating throughout the cavity. An automatic voltage sensor shall accommodate both 208 and 240 volts. Heavy duty door shall have a tempered glass window and a grab and pull handle with a 90o + opening for easy access. An interior light shall facilitate monitoring without opening the door. The large 1.0 cubic ft. (28 liter) cavity shall accom-modate two standard 4” (102 mm) deep half-sized pans. Interior ceramic shelf shall be sealed and recessed to reduce plate-to-shelf edge impact. Oven shall have a stainless steel interior and exterior and be stackable to save counter and shelf space. Oven shall have a removable, cleanable splatter shield. Air filter shall be easily accessible and removable from the front of the oven and have a “clean filter” reminder feature. A “call service alert” shall appear on display when service is needed. Microwave oven shall comply with standards set by the U.S Department of Health and Human Services, ETL for safety and sanitation.

WarrantyWarranty Certificate for this product can be found on the ACP, Inc. website at: www.acpsolutions.com/warranty

ServiceAll products are backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComServ Support Center.

SpecificationsModel MRC30S2 UPC Code 728028020687Configuration CountertopControl System Touch Programmable Control Pads 10Settings Programmable 100Max. Cooking Time 60:00Power Levels 11Defrost Yes, power level 2Time Entry Option Yes, 3Microwave Distribution Triple rotating antenna, top and bottomMagnetrons 3Display LEDStage Cooking Yes, 4Interior Light YesDoor Opening Lift and pull handleSignal Adjustable, end of cycleAir Filter Yes, removable, with clean filter reminderCall Service Alert YesAutomatic Voltage Sensor YesMultiple Portion Setting Yes, up to 8 itemsExterior Dimensions H 18 1/8” (460) W 19 1/4” (489) D** 25 1/2” (648)Cavity Dimensions H 8 1/2” (216) W 13” (330) D 15” (381)Door Depth 40” (1016mm), 90o+ door openUsable Cavity Space 1.0 cubic ft. (28 liter) Exterior Finish Stainless steel Interior Finish Stainless steel with sealed-in ceramic shelf Power Consumption 4400 W, 21.2 APower Output* 3000 W* Microwave Power Source 208 - 240V, 60 Hz, 30 A single phase

Plug Configuration / Cord NEMA 6-30 5 ft. (1.5m)

Frequency 2450 MHz

Product Weight 115 lbs. (52 kg.)

Ship weight (approx.) 123 lbs. (56 Kg.)Shipping Carton Size L 28 1/4” (718) W 21 3/4” (553) H 21 1/2” (546)

Measurements in ( ) are millimeters* IEC 60705 Tested** Includes handle

ACP MRC30S2 Item #3891


Foodservice Division: Phone 800-441-8440MHC/Retail Display Divisions: Phone 800-637-5100

EG10.26B Rev. 05/15

Catalog Specification Sheet No.

Mobile M

ixer/Equipment Stands

EAGLE GROUP100 Industrial Boulevard, Clayton, DE 19938-8903 USAPhone: 302-653-3000 • Fax: 302-653-2065www.eaglegrp.com

Eagle Foodservice Equipment, Eagle MHC, SpecFAB®, and Retail Display are divisions of Eagle Group. ©2015 by the Eagle Group

Item No.:Project No.:

S.I.S. No.:

Specification Sheet

Spec sheets available for viewing, printing or downloading from our online literature library at www.eaglegrp.com

For custom configuration or fabrication needs, contact our SpecFAB® Division.Phone: 302-653-3000 • Fax: 302-653-2065 • e-mail: [email protected]

Mobile Mixer/Equipment StandsMODELS:

Options / AccessoriesDrawers

MMT3030GMMT3030S

MMT3036GMMT3036S

MET2430S

Mobile Mixer Stands• Uni-lok® gusset system (patent #5,165,349): gusset is

recessed into hat channel underside tabletop, reducinglateral movement.

• Highly-polished 14 gauge 300 series stainless steel top withno-drip countertop edge.

• Stainless steel crossbracing on three sides. • 15⁄8˝ (41mm)-diameter legs with four 4˝ (102mm) casters,

two with brake. • Pan rack slides hold six 18˝ x 26˝ (457 x 660mm) pans. • 400 lb. (181.4 kg) total weight capacity - evenly distributed

static load.

Mobile Equipment Stand• Uni-lok® gusset system (patent #5,165,349): gusset is

recessed into hat channel underside tabletop, reducinglateral movement.

• Highly-polished 14 gauge 300 series stainless steel top withno-drip countertop edge.

• Stainless steel undershelf. • 15⁄8˝ (41mm)-diameter legs with two 4˝ (102mm) casters

with brake. • 1˝ (25mm)-diameter stainless steel handle is welded to

heavy duty brackets and stand.

mobile equipment stand

Short Form Specifications

Eagle Mobile Mixer Stand, model__________________. Topto be 14 gauge 300 series stainless steel with no-drip countertop edge. Constructed with uni-lok® patented gusset system,with the gussets recessed into the hat channels to reducelateral movement. Stainless steel pan rack slides hold six 18˝ x26˝ bun pans. Galvanized or stainless steel tubular base: 15⁄8˝O.D. tubular legs with 11⁄4˝ O.D. tubular cross rails, and 4˝swivel casters—two with brake.

Eagle Mobile Equipment Stand, model MET2430S. Top to be14 gauge 300 series stainless steel with no-drip counter topedge. Constructed with uni-lok® patented gusset system, withthe gussets recessed into the hat channels to reduce lateralmovement. Heavy gauge stainless steel adjustable undershelf,1˝ diameter stainless steel handle welded to brackets andstand. 15⁄8˝ O.D. stainless steel tubular legs and two 4˝ casterswith brake.

mobile mixer standPatented uni-lok® System

(Patent No. 5,165,349)

EG10.26B

Eagle Group MMT3030S Item #4271


Spec sheets available for viewing, printing or downloading from our online literature library at www.eaglegrp.comAlthough every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information provided, we cannot be held responsible for

typographical or printing errors. Information and specifications are subject to change without notice. Please confirm at time of order.

Cata

log

Spec

ifica

tion

Shee

t No.

EG10

.26B

Mob

ile M

ixer

/Equ

ipm

ent S

tand

sItem No.:

Project No.:S.I.S. No.:

Rev. 05/15

Printed in U.S.A.©2015 by Eagle GroupFoodservice Division: Phone 800-441-8440

MHC/Retail Display Divisions: Phone 800-637-5100


Mobile Equipment Stand

galvanized stainless steel weight width lengthmodel # model # lbs. kg in. mm in. mm

MMT3030G MMT3030S 55 24.9 30˝ 762 30˝ 762MMT3036G MMT3036S 60 27.2 30˝ 762 36˝ 914

weight width lengthmodel # lbs. kg in. mm in. mmMET2430S 47 21.3 24˝ 610 30˝ 762

Mobile Mixer Stands

Mobile Mixer/Equipment Stands

Eagle Group MMT3030S Item #4271


CUSTOMER:

PROJ

ECT

NAME

:

QUOTE#

CONTROL #

MFG. DWG. NO. YTX49892-01

ITEM #

QTY:

MODEL #:

SHT. OF

NOTICE: EAGLE GROUP CLAIMS PROPRIETY RIGHTS IN THE MATERIAL DISCLOSED ON

THIS DRAWING. IT IS ISSUED IN CONFIDENCE

FOR ENGINEERING INFORMATION ONLY

AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED TO MANUFACTURE ANYTHING SHOWN HEREON W

ITHOUT DIRECT WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM EAGLE

GROUP TO THE USER.

ITEMS ARE NSF, UL, WHERE APPLICABLE

100 INDUSTRIAL BLVD., CLAYTON, DE.

19938

PH: 800-441-8440 FAX: 302-659-

3091

REVISION

DATE

BY

SCALE:

0.050

DESCRIPTION

MFG. DRW NO. YTX49892-01

MFG. SHT

DRAWN BY:

DATE

:

CUSTOMER APPROVAL

APPROVED

APPROVED AS NOTED

(NO

RESU

BMIT

TAL

REQ'

D)

REJECTED

(REV

ISE

AND

RESU

BMIT

)

MODEL #:

DATE

CHECKED:

RNSF R

Spec

FAB

Divi

sion

TM

Qual

ity

Stai

nles

s & Millwork Fabrication

LEVEL

1 2

36

30

34-3/847-3/8

13

ADJ

10

14-May-14

1 2

GENERAL NOTES

MATERIALS

TOP: 14/304 S/S

GUSSETS: S/S

LEGS: 1-5/8" DIA S/S

CASTERS: CAH4-SB 5" POLY

2 W/ BRAKE

X-BRACING: 1.25" S/S

FEATURES

EDGES: RAISED ROLLED EDGE

SPLASH: 12" HIGH

YBM-SPITT-019-00

SPIT TABLE 30X36

BOSTON MARKET

YBM-SPITT-019-00

Eagl

e G

roup

YBM

‐SPI

TT‐0

19‐0

0Ite

m #

4272

The

Exch

ange

Bos

ton

Mar

ket P

roto

type

Conc

ept S

ervi

ces

Page

: 24

Eagle Group YBM‐SPIT‐022‐00 Item #4423


SH

EE

T

OF

BLA

NK

SIZ

E

DIM

EN

SIO

NS

AR

E IN

INC

HE

S E

XC

EP

T A

S N

OTE

D

TH

IRD

AN

GLE

PR

OJE

CTI

ON

T

OLE

RA

NC

E .

XX

X =

0

.031

" A

NG

LE =

1

/2 U

NLE

SS

NO

TED

NO

TIC

E: E

AG

LE G

RO

UP

CLA

IMS

PR

OP

RIE

TAR

Y R

IGH

TS IN

TH

E M

ATE

RIA

L D

ISC

LOS

ED

ON

TH

IS D

RA

WIN

G.

IT IS

ISS

UE

D IN

CO

NFI

DE

NC

E F

OR

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G IN

FOR

MA

TIO

N

ON

LY A

ND

MA

Y N

OT

BE

RE

PR

OD

UC

ED

OR

US

ED

TO

MA

NU

FAC

TUR

E A

NY

THIN

G S

HO

WN

HE

RE

ON

WIT

HO

UT

DIR

EC

T W

RIT

TEN

PE

RM

ISS

ION

FR

OM

EA

GLE

GR

OU

P T

O T

HE

US

ER

.

Prof

it fr

om th

e Ea

gle

Adv

anta

ge

R86.0

°

2.65

62.

500

9.18

7

20.0

6220

.126

19.4

37

.625

14.0

63

.312

MO

UN

TIN

GH

OLE

S

.448

15.3

51

14.0

63

60.8

75

15.3

82 4.06

2 6.62

46.

624

6.37

44.

374

TYP

8

1.06

3

1.02

8

5.59

36.

874

6.74

9

5.62

44.

624

TYP

72.

031

.250

1.50

0

1.06

3

DW

N: S

hane

R.

DA

TE:

Aug

-09-

16

MA

TL:

DW

G: Y

JX87

62-0

1S

CA

LE=

0.07

5D

O N

OT

SC

ALE

DR

AW

ING

DW

G: Y

JX87

62-0

1

RE

VD

ES

CR

IPTI

ON

DA

TEB

Y

1

2

SE

E B

OM

GE

NE

RA

L N

OTE

S*

14 G

AU

GE

304

S/S

BO

DY

* M

OU

NTI

NG

SC

RE

WS

PR

OV

IDE

D B

Y O

THE

RS

* E

IGH

T (8

) 5/1

6" D

IAM

ETE

R M

OU

NTI

NG

HO

LES

PR

OV

IDE

D*

TWE

LVE

(12)

3/8

" DIA

S/S

RO

DS

PLU

G W

ELD

ED

TO

BO

DY

* O

PTI

ON

AL

TAC

K A

S R

EQ

UIR

ED

TO F

IT U

P P

AR

TSY

BM

-WM

SP

IT-0

001-

00S

PIT

RA

CK

HO

LDE

R

SE

E D

ETA

IL A

0.50

0S

CA

LE

DE

TAIL

A

Eagl

e G

roup

YBM

‐WM

SPIT

‐000

1‐00

Item

#44

60

The

Exch

ange

Bos

ton

Mar

ket P

roto

type

Conc

ept S

ervi

ces

Page

: 27

SH

EE

T

OF

BLA

NK

SIZ

E

DIM

EN

SIO

NS

AR

E IN

INC

HE

S E

XC

EP

T A

S N

OTE

D

TH

IRD

AN

GLE

PR

OJE

CTI

ON

T

OLE

RA

NC

E .

XX

X =

0

.031

" A

NG

LE =

1

/2 U

NLE

SS

NO

TED

NO

TIC

E: E

AG

LE G

RO

UP

CLA

IMS

PR

OP

RIE

TAR

Y R

IGH

TS IN

TH

E M

ATE

RIA

L D

ISC

LOS

ED

ON

TH

IS D

RA

WIN

G.

IT IS

ISS

UE

D IN

CO

NFI

DE

NC

E F

OR

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G IN

FOR

MA

TIO

N

ON

LY A

ND

MA

Y N

OT

BE

RE

PR

OD

UC

ED

OR

US

ED

TO

MA

NU

FAC

TUR

E A

NY

THIN

G S

HO

WN

HE

RE

ON

WIT

HO

UT

DIR

EC

T W

RIT

TEN

PE

RM

ISS

ION

FR

OM

EA

GLE

GR

OU

P T

O T

HE

US

ER

.

Prof

it fr

om th

e Ea

gle

Adv

anta

ge

R

DW

N: S

hane

R.

DA

TE:

Aug

-09-

16

MA

TL:

DW

G: Y

JX87

62-0

1S

CA

LE=

0.15

0D

O N

OT

SC

ALE

DR

AW

ING

DW

G: Y

JX87

62-0

1

RE

VD

ES

CR

IPTI

ON

DA

TEB

Y

YB

M-W

MS

PIT

-000

1-00

2

2

SP

IT R

AC

K H

OLD

ER

Eagl

e G

roup

YBM

‐WM

SPIT

‐000

1‐00

Item

#44

60

The

Exch

ange

Bos

ton

Mar

ket P

roto

type

Conc

ept S

ervi

ces

Page

: 28


EG20.27 Rev. 10/12


EG20.27

314 Series Coved Corner One-Com

partment Sinks


Certifications / Approvals

Materials• Sink bowl: Heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel. • Top: Drainboards, backsplash and euro-style edging areheavy gauge type 304 stainless steel.

• Legs: 15⁄8˝ (41mm)-diameter heavy-gauge galvanized tubingwith plated 12-gauge gussets and high-impact cor ro sionresistant fully adjustable bullet feet - crossbracing is 1˝ (25mm)-diameter heavy-gauge galvanized tubing.

Design and Construction Features• Bowl features deep-drawn one-piece seamless construction,using state-of-the-art hydraulic presses.

• Sink bowl has generous radius with a minimum dimensionof 3˝ (76mm) and are rectangular for maximum capac i ty.

• New 20˝ x 16˝ (508 x 406mm) bowl design, with enhancedpolishing techniques.

• 131⁄2˝ (343mm) water level is standard. • Swirl-away drainage. • Leg gusset assemblies welded adjacent to sink bowl formaximum weight support and stability.

• 91⁄2˝ (241mm) standard backsplash includes 1˝ (25mm)upturn and tile edge for easy installation and feathering towall/splash surface.

• “V” creased drainboards for positive drainage.

Mechanical: • Water supply is 1⁄2˝ (13mm) IPS for hot and cold lines. • Faucet holes are 11⁄8˝ (29mm) punched on 8˝ (203mm)centers.

• Basket-type waste drain included fits sink bowl’s 31⁄2˝ (89mm) opening and features 11⁄2˝ (38mm) outlet.

Options / AccessoriesStainless steel legsStainless steel bullet feetLever drainsTwist handle drainsTwist drain brackets


Item No.:Project No.:S.I.S. No.:

314 Series Coved Corner One-Compartment Sinks

Specification Sheet

MODELS:


FaucetsSink coversWaste outletsSink kitsOverflow hole


314-16-1314-16-1-18314-16-1-18L314-16-1-18R314-16-1-24314-16-1-24L314-16-1-24R

314-18-1314-18-1-18314-18-1-18L314-18-1-18R314-18-1-24314-18-1-24L314-18-1-24R

314-24-1314-24-1-18314-24-1-18L314-24-1-18R314-24-1-24314-24-1-24L314-24-1-24R

314-22-1314-22-1-18314-22-1-18L314-22-1-18R314-22-1-24314-22-1-24L314-22-1-24R

FEATURING 2˝-WIDE

EURO-STYLEEDGING

Short Form SpecificationsEagle One-Compartment Sink, model____________, with 2˝-wide “Euro-Style” edging on front and sides. Unitconstructed of heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel top andsink bowls. Sinks to be deep-drawn, seamless, and have allcorners coved. Drainboards, when required, shall be “V”creased for positive drainage. 91⁄2˝ high backsplash with 1˝upturn and tile edge. Legs to be 15⁄8˝ O.D. galvanized tubingwith front-to-back crossbracing, and 1˝ high impact plasticadjustable bullet feet.

Eagle Group 314‐16‐1‐18L Item #4516




Bowl Dimensions DrAinBoArD overAll Dimensions

314 Se

ries Coved Corner One-Com

partment S

inks


Rev. 10/12

Printed in U.S.A.©2012 by Eagle Group

314 Series Coved Corner One-Compartment Sinks



bowl size Dimension Bin. mm in. mm

20˝ x 16˝ 508 x 406 14˝ 357

24˝ x 18˝ 610 x 457 16˝ 406

22˝ x 22˝ 559 x 559 15˝ 381

24˝ x 24˝ 610 x 610 16˝ 406

Drain location for rough-in

bowl size Dimension Ain. mm in. mm

20˝ x 16˝ 508 x 406 271⁄2˝ 699

24˝ x 18˝ 610 x 457 313⁄4˝ 807

22˝ x 22˝ 559 x 559 293⁄4˝ 756

24˝ x 24˝ 610 x 610 313⁄4˝ 807

Overall widths

mitered corner ofeuro-style edging(overhead view)

euro-style edging (side view)

Please note the pair of legs located under the OUTER area of drainboard(only on one-compartment sinks with one drainboard)

width length length width length weightmodel # in. mm in. mm quantity in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kg

314-16-1 20˝ 508 16˝ 406 0 - 271⁄2˝ 699 231⁄4˝ 591 40 18.1

314-16-1-18R or L 20˝ 508 16˝ 406 1 18˝ 457 271⁄2˝ 699 387⁄8˝ 987 59 26.8

314-16-1-18 20˝ 508 16˝ 406 2 18˝ 457 271⁄2˝ 699 541⁄2˝ 1384 78 35.4

314-16-1-24R or L 20˝ 508 16˝ 406 1 24˝ 610 271⁄2˝ 699 447⁄8˝ 1140 65 29.5

314-16-1-24 20˝ 508 16˝ 406 2 24˝ 610 271⁄2˝ 699 661⁄2˝ 1689 90 40.8

314-18-1 24˝ 610 18˝ 457 0 - 313⁄4˝ 807 251⁄2˝ 648 45 20.4

314-18-1-18R or L 24˝ 610 18˝ 457 1 18˝ 457 313⁄4˝ 807 403⁄4˝ 1035 64 29.0

314-18-1-18 24˝ 610 18˝ 457 2 18˝ 457 313⁄4˝ 807 56˝ 1422 83 37.6

314-18-1-24R or L 24˝ 610 18˝ 457 1 24˝ 610 313⁄4˝ 807 463⁄4˝ 1188 70 31.8

314-18-1-24 24˝ 610 18˝ 457 2 24˝ 610 313⁄4˝ 807 68˝ 1727 95 43.1

314-22-1 22˝ 559 22˝ 559 0 - 293⁄4˝ 756 291⁄2˝ 749 55 24.9

314-22-1-18R or L 22˝ 559 22˝ 559 1 18˝ 457 293⁄4˝ 756 45˝ 1143 74 33.6

314-22-1-18 22˝ 559 22˝ 559 2 18˝ 457 293⁄4˝ 756 601⁄2˝ 1537 93 42.2

314-22-1-24R or L 22˝ 559 22˝ 559 1 24˝ 610 293⁄4˝ 756 51˝ 1295 80 36.3

314-22-1-24 22˝ 559 22˝ 559 2 24˝ 610 293⁄4˝ 756 721⁄2˝ 1842 105 47.6

314-24-1 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 0 - 313⁄4˝ 807 311⁄2˝ 800 60 27.2

314-24-1-18R or L 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 1 18˝ 457 313⁄4˝ 807 463⁄4˝ 1188 79 35.8

314-24-1-18 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 2 18˝ 457 313⁄4˝ 807 62˝ 1575 98 44.5

314-24-1-24R or L 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 1 24˝ 610 313⁄4˝ 807 523⁄4˝ 1340 85 38.6

314-24-1-24 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 2 24˝ 610 313⁄4˝ 807 74˝ 1880 110 49.9

Cata

log

Spec

ifica

tion

Shee

t No.

EG20.27

Eagle Group 314‐16‐1‐18L Item #4516


156mm6 1/8"

203mm

8"

3 7/16"87mm

2 3/8"61mm

2 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088

Contractor_______________________________________

__________________________Date_________

Product Specifications:

Scale:

Model No.

Item No.

T&S BRASS AND BRONZE WORKS, INC.

04/11/14JRM 2

B-2414

8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, Eterna Cartridges, Lever Handles,

Travelers Rest, SC 29690

Model Specified_____________________ Quantity______

Customer/Wholesaler______________________________

8" Swing Nozzle & 1/2" NPT Female Inlets

of1Sheet:

Travelers Rest, SC: 800-476-4103 • Simi Valley, CA: 800-423-0150 • Fax: 864-834-3518 • www.tsbrass.com

Date: 1:4

Architect/Engineer_________________________________

Checked:Drawn: Approved:DHL JHB

This Space for Architect/Engineer Approval

Job Name

Product Compliance:

ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1NSF 61 - Section 9NSF 372 (Low Lead Content)ANSI A117.1 (ADA)

Color Coded Indexes

1/2" NPTFemale Inlets

Flanges w/2" [51mm]

Eterna Cartridges &Lever Handles w/

Swivel Joint

203mm 8"

3 5/8"92mm

12 7/16"315mm

Outlet

7 3/4" to 8 1/4"[197mm to 210mm]

Mounting Surface

Adjustable From

060X8" Swing Nozzle w/ Stream Regulator

T&S Brass B‐2414 Item #4502


ITEM NO. SALES NO. DESCRIPTION

1 B-PT Stream Regulator Outlet2 001048-45 Nozzle Tip Washer3 060X 8" Swing Nozzle 4 009538-45 Swivel Washer5 011429-45 Swivel Sleeves (2)6 001074-45 O-Ring7 001661-45 Red Index-HW8 002714-40 Eterna Cartridge, RTC w/ Lever

Handle, Index & Screw9 005960-40 Eterna Cartridge, RTC

10 000922-45 Lever Handle Screw11 001660-45 Blue Index-CW12 001638-45 Lever Handle13 002713-40 Eterna Cartridge, LTC w/ Lever

Handle, Index & Screw14 00AA 1/2" NPT Female Eccentric Flange15 001019-45 Coupling Nut Washer 16 005959-40 Eterna Cartridge, LTC

Scale:

Model No.

Item No.



B-2414

04/11/14


NTS


JRM

8" Swing Nozzle & 1/2" NPT Female InletsNSF 372 (Low Lead Content)ANSI A117.1 (ADA)

2of2Sheet:JHBDHL Approved:Drawn: Checked: Date:

Product Compliance:

ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1NSF 61 - Section 9

8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, Eterna Cartridges, Lever Handles,Product Specifications:

14

10

12 13

16

6

43

2

1

7 9

11

8

5

15



[312mm]1/4"12 1/4"

2 11/16"68mm

60°180°


Contractor_______________________________________


Scale:

Model No.

Item No.


06/30/14 JRM

B-3952

2

Rotary Waste Valve w/ Twist Handle, 3 1/2" Sink Opening, 2" NPT Male


Date:

Thread & 1 1/2" Female Thread Outlet

of1Sheet:


JHBDHL 1:4


Checked:Drawn: Approved:


Job Name__________________________Date_________



Product Compliance:

ASME A112.18.2 / CSA B125.2

4 1/2"115mm

CLOSED

LOCKED

OPENED

HANDLE ORIENTATION

2" NPT Male Thread,1 1/2" NPT Female Thread Outlet

Snap-In StrainerRemovable

Twist Handle w/Heat ResistantPlastic Grip (Shown in Open Position)

4 7/16"113mm




1 010389-45 O-Ring, Plunger 2 010390-45 Ferrule, Coupling Nut3 010391-45 Nut, Coupling For Twist Drain4 010382-45 Gasket, 3 1/2" Face Flange5 010384-45 Flange, 3 1/2" Face6 010386-45 Strainer, 3 1/2" Snap-in Removable7 010388-45 Plunger, Lever and Twist Drain8 010393-45 Rotary Waste Valve Twist Handle

Scale:

Model No.

Item No.



B-3952

06/30/14


NTS


ASME A112.18.2 / CSA B125.2

2of2Sheet:JHBDHL Approved:Drawn: Checked: Date:

Product Compliance:

Thread & 1 1/2" Female Thread Outlet

JRM

Rotary Waste Valve w/ Twist Handle, 3 1/2" Sink Opening, 2" NPT Male Product Specifications:

Parts Kit B-39KGaskets are included in

Washers, O-Rings &

3

Waste Drain Overflow Capw/ Sealing Washer

(Included)

8

1

7

4

5

6

012640-45

2




EG20.56 Rev. 03/13


EG20.56

Hand Sinks w

ith Side Splashes




S.I.S. No.:

Hand Sinks with Side SplashesSpecification Sheet



MODELS:

HSA-10-F-LRSHSAN-10-F-LRSHSA-10-FTWS-LRSHSA-10-FDPE-LRS


Hand Sinks• Heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel all-welded

construction. • Inverted “V” edge rim retards spillage.• Unique deep-drawn positive-drain bowl assures

complete drainage to meet the most stringent health code requirements.

• Water inlet: 1⁄2˝ (13mm) NPS. • Drain outlet: 11⁄2˝ (38mm) NPS.

Side Splashes• Side splashes are factory-installed on both sides of sink. • 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel. • Tapered and rounded for safety.

bowl size overall sizewidth x length x depth width x length x height weight

model # includes in. mm in. mm lbs. kg

HSA-10-F-LRS faucet, basket drain 93⁄4˝ x 131⁄2˝ x 63⁄4˝ 248 x 343 x 173 143⁄4˝ x 187⁄8˝ x 123⁄4˝ 376 x 480 x 324 14 6.4and side splashes

HSAN-10-F-LRS 12˝ side-to-side, faucet, 131⁄2˝ x 93⁄4˝ x 63⁄4˝ 343 x 248 x 173 18˝ x 12˝ x 141⁄4˝ 457 x 305 x 362 13 5.9basket drain, side splashesfaucet, p-trap, tubular wall

HSA-10-FTWS-LRS brackets, basket drain, 93⁄4˝ x 131⁄2˝ x 63⁄4˝ 248 x 343 x 173 143⁄4˝ x 187⁄8˝ x 123⁄4˝ 376 x 480 x 324 21 9.5side splasheselectronic-eye faucet,

HSA-10-FDPE-LRS towel/soap dispenser, 93⁄4˝ x 131⁄2˝ x 63⁄4˝ 248 x 343 x 173 143⁄4˝ x 191⁄4˝ x 281⁄4˝ 376 x 489 x 718 31 14.1basket drain, side splashes

HSAN-10-F-LRS

HSA-10-FDPE-LRSHSA-10-FTWS-LRS

Short Form SpecificationsEagle Hand Sinks with Side Splashes, model ____________.Constructed of all-welded type 304 stainless steel, with deep-drawn positive drain sink bowl, inverted “V” edge to preventspillage, drain, splash-mounted faucet, and factory-installedside splash on both sides. Offered are the following hand sinks: • Model #HSA-10-F-LRS. • Model #HSAN-10-F-LRS. 12˝ side-to-side. • Model #HSA-10-FDPE-LRS. Includes paper towel dispenser,

soap dispenser, and electronic-eye sensor-beam faucet with12-volt adaptor – 120/60/1.

• Model #HSA-10-FTWS-LRS. Includes tubular wall support.

HSA-10-F-LRS

Eagle Group HSA‐10‐F‐LRS Item #4550



EG30.19 Rev. 10/15


EG30.19

Sealed Well H

ot Food Tables



Options / AccessoriesOvershelves*Tray slideTray shelfRolltop cover



Sealed Well Hot Food TablesSpecification Sheet

MODELS:


Bolted-in undershelfFood pans/insetsDish shelfAutoFill® water fill system


SHT2-120SHT2-208*SHT2-240*SHT3-120SHT3-208*SHT3-240*

* Available in three-phase. See chart on back page.

SHT4-120SHT4-208*SHT4-240*SHT5-208*SHT5-240*

SPHT2-120SPHT2-208*SPHT2-240*SPHT3-120SPHT3-208*SPHT3-240*

SPHT4-120SPHT4-208*SPHT4-240*SPHT5-208*SPHT5-240*

Short Form SpecificationsEagle Hot Food Tables, open base design, model______________. Top and body are heavy gauge type 430stainless steel. Heat compartments are one-piece deep-drawn type 304 stainless steel, with all corners fullycoved, and insulated on all sides with 1˝ fiberglass or equal. 3⁄4˝-diameter drain with strainers in each well, and attached to acommon copper manifold. Recessed control panel, withindividual infinite controls, offer high and low settings. Eachcompartment—fitted with 120-volt/750-watt, 208-volt/712-watt, or 240-volt/950-watt heating element—is secured tounderside of each well. 6́ cord & plug extends from the bottomright hand side of the unit. Furnished with polycarbonatecutting board, stainless steel dish shelf, stainless steeladjustable undershelf, 15⁄8˝ O.D. 16/304 stainless steel tubular legs, stainless steel gussets, and 1˝ adjustable bullet feet (stationary units) or 4˝-diameters swivel casters (portable units).

* See Catalog Sheet #EG30.18 for more information on Flex-Master® overshelves

Construction• Table body and top are constructed of highly polished 20 gauge 430 series stain less steel.

• An adjustable heavy gauge type 430 stainless steelundershelf with gussets, stainless steel 8˝ (203mm)-widedish shelf, and a removable 73⁄4˝ (197mm)-wide poly cuttingboard are provided.

• Legs are 15⁄8˝ (41mm) diameter, type 304 stainless steel withstainless steel gussets.

• Stationary units feature non-marking stainless steeladjustable bullet feet, which adjust unit height from 341⁄2˝ to 351⁄2˝.

• Portable units include 4˝-diameter NSF-approved ball-bearing swivel casters (two with brake), and push barattached to end panel at operator’s right. 34˝ height.

Controls• Individual infinite controls offer high and low selectionsalong with eight other temperature settings.

• Indicator light remains on continuously while control is in“ON” position.

Heat compartments• One-piece deep-drawn 304 stainless steel with all cornersfully coved.

• A 3⁄4˝ (19mm) diameter drain with strainers is located ineach well and attached to a common copper manifold forease of draining or filling wells.

Heating element• A 120-volt/750-watt, 208-volt/712-watt, or 240-volt/950-watt tubular heating element is secured to theunderside of each well.

Electrical• 6́ (1829mm) cord with plug extends from the bottom of therighthand control side as standard equipment.

New York MEA 376-84-E

three-compartment stationary

sealed well hot food table

Eagle Group SHT3‐208‐3 Item #4721


TOP VIEW

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW



Catalog Sp

ecification Sh

eet N

o.EG

30.19

Sealed W

ell H

ot Food Tables


Rev. 10/15

Printed in U.S.A.©2015 by Eagle Group

Sealed Well Hot Food Tables



FLEX-MASTER® Overshelf KitsBoth kits include two 16/304 overshelves andfour 30˝ (762mm) posts. Add suffix specified toorder kit (ex: SHT3-120-FMU), or design yourown using standard components from EG30.18.

adddescription suffix10˝ (254mm) overshelves -FM

15˝ (381mm) overshelves, -FMU

plus one ladle rack

Receptacle configurations requiredSee above chart for applicable NEMA plug.

15A 120V 15A 240V 20A 240V 30A 120V 30A 240V 50A 120Vfurnished withNEMA 5-15 plug

furnished withNEMA 6-15 plug






20A 3Ø 240V

* Single-Phase 5-well units, and all Three-Phase units, available in 208V and 240V only.

Single-PhaSe Three-PhaSe *

STaTiOnarY UniTS POrTaBle UniTS STaTiOnarY UniTS POrTaBle UniTS

# of top weight neMa length length neMa length lengthopenings lbs. kg volts watts amps plug in. kg model # in. kg model # amps plug in. kg model # in. kg model #

2 101 45.8 120V 1500W 12.5A 5-15P 33˝ 838 SHT2-120 351⁄2˝ 838 SPHT2-120 - - n/a n/a

2 101 45.8 208V 1428W 6.9A 6-15P 33˝ 838 SHT2-208 351⁄2˝ 838 SPHT2-208 6.0A 15-20P 33˝ 838 SHT2-208-3 351⁄2˝ 838 SPHT2-208-3


3 129 58.5 120V 2250W 18.8A 5-30P 48˝ 1219 SHT3-120 501⁄2˝ 1283 SPHT3-120 - - n/a



4 162 73.5 120V 3000W 25.0A 5-50P 631⁄2˝ 1613 SHT4-120 66˝ 1676 SPHT4-120 - - n/a

4 162 73.5 208V 2856W 13.7A 6-20P 631⁄2˝ 1613 SHT4-208 66˝ 1676 SPHT4-208 9.1A 15-20P 631⁄2˝ 1613 SHT4-208-3 66˝ 1676 SPHT4-208-3

4 162 73.5 240V 3800W 15.8A 6-20P 631⁄2˝ 1613 SHT4-240 66˝ 1676 SPHT4-240 10.5A 15-20P 631⁄2˝ 1613 SHT4-240-3 66˝ 1676 SPHT4-240-3

5* 199 90.3 208V 3570W 17.2A 6-30P 79˝ 2007 SHT5-208 811⁄2˝ 2070 SPHT5-208 11.9A 15-20P 79˝ 2007 SHT5-208-3 811⁄2˝ 2070 SPHT5-208-3

5* 199 90.3 240V 4750W 19.8A 6-30P 79˝ 2007 SHT5-240 811⁄2˝ 2070 SPHT5-240 13.7A 15-20P 79˝ 2007 SHT5-240-3 811⁄2˝ 2070 SPHT5-240-3

Eagle Group SHT3‐208‐3 Item #4721



EG10.59 Rev. 05/11


EG10.59

Table Accessories




S.I.S. No.:

Specification Sheet



Table AccessoriesMODELS:

24*GADJUS24*SADJUS*30*GADJUS30*SADJUS*

CA*-SBPS*SB-1WTSA30

Casters — chart on back page • Offered in sets of four, six, and eight casters. • Available in zinc with resilient or poly tread, or polymer cart

washable with polymer tread.

zinc casters

Spice Bin• Designed for either overshelf or wall shelf applications. • 22 gauge stainless steel with fully coved deep-drawn

con struc tion. • Complete with label holders.

* Must allow 73⁄4˝ (197mm) space. Bin slides on stainless steel anglesupports secured to underside of shelf.

** Stabilizer Bars and Extra Undershelves will not work together.

* See charts for complete model numbers.

spice bin

stabilizer bars

Extra Undershelves** — chart on back page • For tables with uni-lok® hat channel frame. • Designed for storage of shorter, smaller items under

worktable where only one undershelf might not suffice. • Adjustable, available in galvanized or stainless steel.

worktable with extra undershelf

width length height* weightmodel # in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kgSB-1 61⁄2˝ 165 51⁄2˝ 140 6˝ 156 1.5 0.7

Power Strips for Stainless Steel Tables with Backsplash• Mounts onto backsplash via two stainless steel clips—

no tools required. • Brushed aluminum finish. • 15́ (4572mm)-long cord and plug. • ON-OFF toggle switch and reset button.

length numbermodel # in. mm of outletsPS2408 24˝ 610 8PS3612 36˝ 914 12PS4816 48˝ 1219 16PS6020 60˝ 1524 20

Stabilizer Bars (pair)**• Fits standard 30˝ and 36˝ (762 and 914mm)-wide worktables. • Positioned at an angle to add maximum stability to table. • 12 gauge Valu-Master® epoxy coated gussets welded onto

ends of each 12 gauge galvanized angle bar. • Stands 191⁄2˝ (495mm) when mounted to table.

model # (pair): WTSA30

power strip

Eagle Group CA4‐SB Item #4721




Cata

log

Spec

ifica

tion

Shee

t No.

EG10

.59

Tabl

e Ac

cess

orie

sItem No.:

Project No.:S.I.S. No.:

Rev. 05/11




Table Accessories

Extra UndershelvesNote: When ordering an extra or replacement undershelf, please order per the size of your tabletop. Please notethe “for table size” column in chart below. GALVANIZED STAINLESS STEEL for table size *

width length weightmodel # model # model # in. mm in. mm lbs. kg2424GADJUS 2424SADJUS-18/4 2424SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 15 6.62430GADJUS 2430SADJUS-18/4 2430SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 30˝ 762 18 8.22436GADJUS 2436SADJUS-18/4 2436SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 36˝ 914 21 9.62448GADJUS 2448SADJUS-18/4 2448SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 48˝ 1219 27 12.22460GADJUS 2460SADJUS-18/4 2460SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 60˝ 1524 33 15.02472GADJUS 2472SADJUS-18/4 2472SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 72˝ 1829 39 17.62484GADJUS 2484SADJUS-18/4 2484SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 84˝ 2134 45 20.42496GADJUS 2496SADJUS-18/4 2496SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 96˝ 2438 51 23.124108GADJUS 24108SADJUS-18/4 24108SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 108˝ 2743 57 25.924120GADJUS 24120SADJUS-18/4 24120SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 120˝ 3048 63 28.624132GADJUS 24132SADJUS-18/4 24132SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 132˝ 3353 69 31.324144GADJUS 24144SADJUS-18/4 24144SADJUS-18/3 24˝ 610 144˝ 3658 75 34.03024GADJUS 3024SADJUS-18/4 3024SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 24˝ 610 17 7.53030GADJUS 3030SADJUS-18/4 3030SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 30˝ 762 21 9.53036GADJUS 3036SADJUS-18/4 3036SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 36˝ 914 24 10.73048GADJUS 3048SADJUS-18/4 3048SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 48˝ 1219 30 13.63060GADJUS 3060SADJUS-18/4 3060SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 60˝ 1524 36 16.33072GADJUS 3072SADJUS-18/4 3072SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 72˝ 1829 42 19.13084GADJUS 3084SADJUS-18/4 3084SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 84˝ 2134 48 21.83096GADJUS 3096SADJUS-18/4 3096SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 96˝ 2438 54 24.530108GADJUS 30108SADJUS-18/4 30108SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 108˝ 2743 60 27.230120GADJUS 30120SADJUS-18/4 30120SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 120˝ 3048 66 29.930132GADJUS 30132SADJUS-18/4 30132SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 132˝ 3353 72 32.730144GADJUS 30144SADJUS-18/4 30144SADJUS-18/3 30˝ 762 144˝ 3658 78 35.4

* Undershelves for 30˝ (762mm)-wide tables listed above also fit 36˝ (915mm)-wide tables.

Casters

caster wt. cap. wt. cap. wt. cap.diameter per caster per caster per caster

set of in. mm model # lbs. kg model # lbs. kg model # lbs. kg4 swivel (2 with brake) 4˝ 102 CA4-SB 115 52.2 n/a n/a6 swivel (3 with brake) 4˝ 102 CA6-SB 115 52.2 n/a n/a8 swivel (4 with brake) 4˝ 102 CA8-SB 115 52.2 n/a n/a4 swivel (2 with brake) 5˝ 127 CAH4-SB 200 90.7 CAHP4-SB 250 113.4 CAHW4-SB 250 113.46 swivel (3 with brake) 5˝ 127 CAH6-SB 200 90.7 CAHP6-SB 250 113.4 CAHW6-SB 250 113.48 swivel (4 with brake) 5˝ 127 CAH8-SB 200 90.7 CAHP8-SB 250 113.4 CAHW8-SB 250 113.4

ZINC WITH RESILIENT TREAD

ZINC WITH POLY TREAD

POLY CART WASHABLE WITH POLY TREAD

Eagle Group CA4‐SB Item #4721



EG10.11 Rev. 01/17


EG10.11

Chopping Tables




S.I.S. No.:

Specification Sheet




Chopping Tables

CHT2424SCHT2430SCHT2436SCHT2448SCHT3030SCHT3036SCHT3048S

MODELS:

Tabletop• Double-thick poly top, 1˝ (25mm) total thickness. • 11⁄2˝ (38mm) square stainless steel tubular frame. • Tabs, along perimeter of tabletop frame, lock poly top in

place and are virtually self-cleaning.

Crossbracing• Heavy gauge stainless steel. • 11⁄4˝ (32mm)-diameter. • Adjustable. • Runs left-to-right at rear and front-to-back at both ends.

Legs• Heavy gauge stainless steel.• 15⁄8˝ (41mm)-diameter. • Adjustable metal feet.

chopping table

Short Form SpecificationsEagle Chopping Table, model _____________. Top to be 11⁄2˝ square stainless steel tubular frame all-welded with twolayers of ½˝ thick removable polymer. Unit to conform to USDAand NSF requirements. 15⁄8˝ O.D. stainless steel tubular legswith stainless steel crossrails, and adjustable bullet feet.

Options / AccessoriesCasters*Stainless steel bullet feetUndershelf **All-welded construction ***Boat rackDrawer assemblies**** / Drawer support angles ***** For optional 4˝ resilient-tread casters, add suffix “-CA”. Example: CHT3030S-CA

For optional 5˝ resilient-tread casters, add suffix “-CAH”. Example: CHT2448S-CAH** For optional stainless steel undershelf, add suffix “-US”. Example: CHT3048S-US

*** For optional all-welded construction, add suffix “-AW”. Example: CHT2436S-AWZ**** See spec sheet #EG10.13 for Drawer Assemblies available.

For optional Drawer Assemblies, Drawer Support Angles are required: - For 24˝-wide tables with flat top, order model #609542 drawer supports. - For 24˝-wide tables with backsplash, order model #609541 drawer supports. - For 30˝-wide tables with flat top, order model #609540 drawer supports. - For 30˝-wide tables with backsplash, order model #609539 drawer supports.

Eagle Group CHT2436S Item #4746




Cata

log

Spec

ifica

tion

Shee

t No.

EG10

.11

Chop

ping

Tab

les


S.I.S. No.:

Rev. 01/17




Chopping Tables

width length weightmodel # in. mm in. mm lbs. kgCHT2424S 24˝ 610 24˝ 610 110 49.9CHT2430S 24˝ 610 30˝ 762 118 53.5CHT2436S 24˝ 610 36˝ 914 126 57.2CHT2448S 24˝ 610 48˝ 1219 142 64.4CHT3030S 30˝ 762 30˝ 762 126 57.2CHT3036S 30˝ 762 36˝ 914 134 60.8CHT3048S 30˝ 762 48˝ 1219 150 68.0

Tabs lock poly top in place and are

virtually self-clean ing.

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

Eagle Group CHT2436S Item #4746


Project __________________________________

Item ____________________________________

Quantity ________________________________

CSI Section 11400

Approved _______________________________

Date ____________________________________

980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858

Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com

Refrigeration system: All components are mounted to the top cabinet ceiling, outside the food zone and are assembled as one piece and can be removed as one piece. Environmentally friendly R290 refrigerant is used. System has the capability of maintaining between 33˚F and 40˚F in heavy use food service operations. Refrigerant is metered using a highly responsive thermostatic expansion valve. System is controlled using an electronic temperature control, which provides improved pull down times, reducing compressor cycling and longer compressor life with lower energy consumption. Control system uses adaptive defrost to assure evaporator coil is free of ice and operating at optimum efficiency. Evaporator condensate is eliminated using an energy efficient hot gas system.

Units are completely insulated with high density foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane.

Specifications

Standard Features Options

CSRRIP Roll-InsCoolscapes™ Roll-In Refrigerators

CSRRIP Roll-Ins

CSRRI1P-S

Models

CSRRI1P-S CSRRI2P-S

• GreenGenius™ R290 top mount refrigeration system featuring TXV expansion valve and hot gas condensate removal

• Digital exterior temperature display with high/low temp visual alarms

• Energy saving LED interior light• Removable side louver• Raised ABS interior door liner• Smart door hinge that auto closes up to 90˚

and stays open past 90˚• Energy efficient door gasket – removable

without tools• Door locks• 10’ cord and plug attached• Stainless steel exterior front, sides & interior• 115V / 60C / 1 P Standard

• S/S finish door liner • Stainless steel back • Laminate – front, ends, shroud• Heat shield end – max temp 400 degrees• Trim strips

Delfield CSRRI2P‐S Item #5270



Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619www.delfield.com

Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice.

TYPICAL END

GBSXRI1P-S GBSXRI2P-S

33.95in [86.23cm]

37.80in

[96.02cm]

INTERIOR61.08in

[155.15cm][73.84cm]

29.69in [75.40cm]

89.01in

[226.09cm]

33.99in

[86.34cm]

66.04in

[167.74cm]

1.09in [2.77cm]

72.79in

[184.88cm]

Printed in the U.S.A.6251_DEL_CSRRIP-S03/17

CSR

RIP

Roll-

Ins

Coo

lsca

pes™

Rol

l-In

Refr

iger

ator

s

Specifications

Model V/Hz/Ph Amps Volume Cu. Ft.

SHELF CAPACITY SQ. FT.

No. of Shelves

Unit H.P.

Btu/Hr System

Cap

Ship Weight

Nema Plug

CSRRI1P-S 115/60/1 6 37 N/A N/A 0.35 2385 5-15P

CSRRI2P-S 115/60/1 6.5 76.5 N/A N/A 0.38 3320 5-15P

PLAN VIEW ALL 1 SECTION MODELS

ELEVATION VIEW ALL 1 SECTION MODELS

SIDE VIEW ALL MODELS



Delfield CSRRI2P‐S Item #5270


Eagle Group RACK FOR ROLL IN REFRIGERATOR Item #5272


Delfieldwww.delfield.com

Tel: 1.800.733.8948

Coolscapes™ Reach-In Refrigerator GCR1P-S GBR1P-S GBSR1P-S GCR2P-S GBR2P-S GBSR2P-S

GCR1P-SH GBR1P-SH GBSR1P-SH GCR2P-SH GBR2P-SH GBSR2P-SH

GCR3P-S GBR3P-S GBSR3P-S GCR3P-SH GBR3P-SH GBSR3P-SH



• Energy saving LED interior light• Removable side louver• Accommodates full size sheet

pans• Raised ABS interior door liner• Gray epoxy coated shelves (3 per

section) with shelf bridge• Smart door hinge that auto

closes up to 90˚ and stays open past 90˚

• Integral door handle• 180° door opening• Energy efficient door gasket –

removable without tools• Locking doors• 5” locking casters shipped loose

for field installation• 10’ cord and plug attached

Standard Features of Series GC:• Stainless steel exterior front• Mill finish aluminum exterior

sides• Gray coated aluminum interior• Anodized aluminum interior

floor• 5 position pin shelf supportStandard Features of Series GB/GBS:• Stainless steel exterior front• Stainless steel exterior sides• Gray coated aluminum interior

(Series GB)• 200 series stainless steel interior

(Series GBS)• Stainless steel interior floor• Field rehingable doors - full

height doors only• Stainless steel pilaster with shelf

clips• Vapor lock relief valve

Refrigeration system: All components are mounted to the top cabinet ceiling, outside the food zone and are assembled as one piece and can be removed as one piece. Environmentally friendly R290 refrigerant is used. System has the capability of maintaining between 33˚F and 40˚F in heavy use food service operations. Refrigerant is metered using a highly responsive thermostatic expansion valve. System is controlled using an electronic temperature control, which provides improved pull down times, reducing compressor cycling and longer compressor life with lower energy consumption. Control system uses adaptive defrost to assure evaporator coil is free of ice and operating at optimum efficiency. Evaporator condensate is eliminated using an energy efficient hot gas system.


MODELS LISTED

ON BACK

GCR1P-SH

Delfield GBR1P‐S Item #5279



Tel: 1.800.733.8948

6171A_GCRP-S 12/16

©2016 MANITOWOC FOODSERVICE, INC.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.

• AVAILABLE WITH FULL OR HALF STAINLESS STEEL DOORS.• AVAILABLE WITH ALUMINUM OR STAINLESS STEEL EXTERIOR SIDES.

Cool

scap

es™

Rea

ch-In

Ref

riger

ator

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm




DOOR SWING ALL MODELS





Specifications

Description Model V/Hz/ph Amps

# of Shelves Volume H.P.

Nema Plug

1-section Refrigerator

GBSR1P-S(H)115/60/1 4.2 3 21ft3/595L .22 5-15P

351lbs/159kg

GBR1P-S(H) 312lbs/142kg

GCR1P-S(H) 282lbs/128kg


GBSR2P-S(H)115/60/1 6.0 6 46ft3/1303L .33 5-15P

495lbs/225kg




GBSR3P-S(H)115/60/1 6.5 9 71ft3/2010L .355 5-15P

767lbs/348kg



ENERGY STAR® RATED MODELS

Model Energy kWh

GC, GB, GBS R1P-S 1.85GC, GB, GBS R1P-SH 1.70GC, GB, GBS R2P-S 2.71

GC, GB, GBS R2P-SH 2.49GC, GB, GBS R3P-S 3.59

GC, GB, GBS R3P-SH 3.54

Delfield GBR1P‐S Item #5279



Tel: 1.800.733.8948

Coolscapes™ Reach-In Freezer GCF1P-S GBF1P-S GBSF1P-S GCF2P-S GBF2P-S GBSF2P-S

GCF1P-SH GBF1P-SH GBSF1P-SH GCF2P-SH GBF2P-SH GBSF2P-SH

GCF3P-S GBF3P-S GBSF3P-S GCF3P-SH GBF3P-SH GBSF3P-SH

GCF1P-SH


• Replaceable door opening perimeter heater


• Energy saving LED interior light

• Removable side louver

• Accommodates full

size sheet pans• Raised ABS interior door liner• Gray epoxy coated shelves (3

per section) with shelf bridge• Smart door hinge that

auto closes up to 90˚ and stays open past 90˚

• Integral door handle• 180° door opening• Energy efficient door gasket

– removable without tools• Locking doors• 5” locking casters shipped

loose for field installation• 10’ cord and plug attached

Standard Features of the Series GC:• Stainless steel exterior front• Mill finish aluminum

exterior sides• Gray coated aluminum interior• Anodized aluminum

interior floor• 5 position pin shelf supportStandard Features of the Series GB/GBS:• Stainless steel exterior front• Stainless steel exterior sides• Gray coated aluminum

interior (Series GB)• 200 series stainless steel

interior (Series GBS)• Stainless steel interior floor• Field rehingable doors -

full height doors only• Stainless steel pilaster

with shelf clips• Vapor lock relief valve

Refrigeration system: All components are mounted to the top cabinet ceiling, outside the food zone and are assembled as one piece and can be removed as one piece. Environmentally friendly R290 refrigerant is used. System has the capability of maintaining between -5˚F and 0˚F in heavy use food service operations. Refrigerant is metered using a highly responsive thermostatic expansion valve. System is controlled using an electronic temperature control, which provides improved pull down times, reducing compressor cycling and longer compressor life with lower energy consumption. Control system uses adaptive defrost to assure evaporator coil is free of ice and operating at optimum efficiency. Evaporator condensate is eliminated using an energy efficient hot gas system.


MODELS LISTED

ON BACK

Delfield GBF1P‐S Item #5290



Tel: 1.800.733.8948

• AVAILABLE WITH FULL OR HALF STAINLESS STEEL DOORS.• AVAILABLE WITH ALUMINUM OR STAINLESS STEEL EXTERIOR SIDES.

Cool

scap

es™

Rea

ch-In

Fre

ezer

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm

23.44”59.54 cm

51.26”130.19 cm

79.07”200.84 cm




DOOR SWING ALL MODELS





Specifications

Description Model V/Hz/ph Amps

# of Shelves Volume H.P.

Nema Plug

1-section Freezer

GBSF1P-S(H)115/60/1 7.2 3 21ft3/595L .55 5-15P

354lbs/161kg

GBF1P-S(H) 336lbs/152kg

GCF1P-S(H) 299lbs/136kg

2-section Freezer

GBSF2P-S(H)115/60/1 10.0 6 46ft3/1303L .68 5-15P

495lbs/225kg



3-section Freezer

GBSF3P-S(H)115/60/1 14.7 9 71ft3/2010L .55(2) 5-20P

772lbs/350kg



6173A_GCFP-S 12/16

©2016 MANITOWOC FOODSERVICE, INC.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.

ENERGY STAR® RATED MODELS

Model Energy kWh

GC, GB, GBS F1P-S 5.78GC, GB, GBS F1P-SH 5.59GC, GB, GBS F2P-S 10.65

GC, GB, GBS F2P-SH 9.69GC, GB, GBS F3P-S 10.50

GC, GB, GBS F3P-SH 12.20

Delfield GBF1P‐S Item #5290


• 4427N-9M Singlesectionwithdoors,ninepancapacity• D4427N-9M Singlesectionwithdrawers,ninepancapacity• 4427N-12M Singlesectionwithdoors,twelvepancapacity• D4427N-12M Singlesectionwithdrawers,twelvepancapacity

4427N-9M

4427N Mega TopFront-Breathing Self-Contained Mega Top Refrigerated Bases

Front-Breathing Self-Contained Mega Top Refrigerated Bases

Project ______________________________________

Item ________________________________________

Quantity _____________________________________

CSI Section 11400

Approved ___________________________________

Date ________________________________________


Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com

• Patented air screen ensures product stays cold

without drying it out

• All 4400 Series units are 100% front breathing,

which allows the unit to be pushed against a wall

or built into a cabinet or an existing line up

• Durable, rugged stainless steel sides, top and front

• Features Delfield’s exclusive ABS interior (on sides).

ABS is extremely durable - it won’t dent, chip or

corrode and is backed by a limited lifetime warranty

• Delfield supplies 1/6 size pans and positive

placement adapter bars for top opening

• Dual level pan brackets allow the pans to be

lowered an additional inch in the unit without tools

to provide additional pan temperature holding

performance. Not available for twelve pan capacity

models

• Mega top refrigerators are standard with 8” wide,

dishwasher safe polyethylene cutting board treated

• Flat lift off cover

• 18” wide single tier overshelf

(9M models only)

• Stainless steel finish on back

• Plastic laminate on front

• Additional wire shelves

• 3” casters, 3.75” ride height

• Door lock

• Exterior thermometer

• 220V/50Hz electrical system*

* Inclusion of this option will alter

electrical specifications of the unit

with antimicrobial agent

• “D” prefix models feature Delfield’s new drawer

system. Drawers are backed by a 10-year warranty

on the track assembly

• Environmentally friendly R404A refrigerant

• High density foamed in place environmentally

friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP

(Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global

Warming Potential) polyurethane keeps energy

costs low

• Black recessed quick grip handle

• Standard on 5” casters for easy cleaning and

installation

• 6’ cord and plug supplied

• One epoxy coated wire shelf standard, installed per

door section

• ACT solid state electronic control

• Three year parts and labor warranty and an

additional two year compressor parts warranty

4427N M

ega Top:

Options & Accessories

Standard Features

Models

Delfield 4427N‐12M Item #5349


4427N-9M

D4427N-9M

TO EDGE OF DRAWER NOSE OF UNIT

19.60" [49.77]

31.50" [80.01]

33.59" [85.31]

36.00" [91.40]

2.50" [6.30]

4.00" OR 6.00" DEEP PANS ON TOP 4.00" DEEP PANS ONLY ON BOTTOM

3.88 [9.87] 2.15 [5.47] 2.15 [5.47]

27.13" [68.91]

8.54 [21.69] 4.50” [11.4]8.50”

[22cm]

14.33“[36cm]

13.632.422.42 13.632.24 21.632.24 21.63 13.6326.251.69

64.13

12.96

13.63

2.05

13.63

21.632.42

12.96

16.9612.9612.96

13.63

2.75

FRONT

12.96

21.63

27.13

48.13

60.13

64.13

33.08

1.39

28.63

28.63

60.13

48.13

1.39

13.63

1.75 21.63

21.63

13.63

12.96

3.13

1.39

2.54

13.63

3.13

13.63

12.9612.36

25.25

28.632.42

13.63

16.41 12.96

1.39 12.96

13.63

28.37

64.13

2.04

2.42 28.63

12.96

13.63

60.13

64.13

13.632.74

13.633.13

2.24

21.63

4.96

4.96

1.75

2.75

4.96

60.13

1.39

13.63

4.96

3.13

21.63

4.96

13.46

21.63

64.13

21.63

13.632.74

4.96

1.39

21.63

1.31

17.73

21.63

4.96

4.96

21.63

1.39

19.63

FRONT

6.96

21.63

1.39

27.13

21.63

32.13

13.63

60.13

64.13

32.75

1.39

48.13

13.63

28.351.39

4.96

26.25

21.63

3.12

26.04

1.39

1.39

13.632.74

21.63

4.96

1.39

4.96

21.63

1.39 11.03

STANDARD PAN CONFIGURATIONS72.1372.13 72.1372.13 72.13

4427N-9M Pan Cutout Configuration 4427N-9M ISO View

4427N-9M Elevation View 4427N-9M Right Side View

D4427N-9M ISO View

D4427N-9M Elevation View D4427N-9M Right Side View

25.67" [65.20]

TO EDGE OF DOOR NOSE OF UNIT

33.59" [85.31]

36.00" [91.40]

2.50" [6.30]

INSIDE DIMENSION 22.75" [57.79]

23.79" [60.43]

17.35" [44.08]

7.53" [19.10]

12.98" [33.00]

6.11" [15.52]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

21.94" [55.73] 26.86" [68.22]

20.75" [52.70]

3.88” [9.87]

31.50" [80.01]

2.15 [5.47] 2.15 [5.47]

27.13" [68.91]

8.54 [21.69] 4.50” [11.4]8.50”

[22cm]

14.33“[36cm]

25.67" [65.20]


33.59" [85.31]

36.00" [91.40]

2.50" [6.30]


23.79" [60.43]

17.35" [44.08]

7.53" [19.10]

12.98" [33.00]

6.11" [15.52]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

21.94" [55.73] 26.86" [68.22]

20.75" [52.70]

3.88” [9.87]

31.50" [80.01]

2.15 [5.47] 2.15 [5.47]

27.13" [68.91]

8.54 [21.69] 4.50” [11.4]8.50”

[22cm]

14.33“[36cm]

25.67" [65.20]


33.59" [85.31]

36.00" [91.40]

2.50" [6.30]


23.79" [60.43]

17.35" [44.08]

7.53" [19.10]

12.98" [33.00]

6.11" [15.52]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

21.94" [55.73] 26.86" [68.22]

20.75" [52.70]

3.88” [9.87]

31.50" [80.01]

2.15 [5.47] 2.15 [5.47]

27.13" [68.91]

8.54 [21.69] 4.50” [11.4]8.50”

[22cm]

14.33“[36cm]

13.632.422.42 13.632.24 21.632.24 21.63 13.6326.251.69

64.13

12.96

13.63

2.05

13.63

21.632.42

12.96

16.9612.9612.96

13.63

2.75

FRONT

12.96

21.63

27.13

48.13

60.13

64.13

33.08

1.39

28.63

28.63

60.13

48.13

1.39

13.63

1.75 21.63

21.63

13.63

12.96

3.13

1.39

2.54

13.63

3.13

13.63

12.9612.36

25.25

28.632.42

13.63

16.41 12.96

1.39 12.96

13.63

28.37

64.13

2.04

2.42 28.63

12.96

13.63

60.13

64.13

13.632.74

13.633.13

2.24

21.63

4.96

4.96

1.75

2.75

4.96

60.13

1.39

13.63

4.96

3.13

21.63

4.96

13.46

21.63

64.13

21.63

13.632.74

4.96

1.39

21.63

1.31

17.73

21.63

4.96

4.96

21.63

1.39

19.63

FRONT

6.96

21.63

1.39

27.13

21.63

32.13

13.63

60.13

64.13

32.75

1.39

48.13

13.63

28.351.39

4.96

26.25

21.63

3.12

26.04

1.39

1.39

13.632.74

21.63

4.96

1.39

4.96

21.63

1.39 11.03

STANDARD PAN CONFIGURATIONS72.1372.13 72.1372.13 72.13

D4427N-9M Pan Cutout Configuration

TO EDGE OF DRAWER NOSE OF UNIT

19.60" [49.77]

31.50" [80.01]

33.59" [85.31]

36.00" [91.40]

2.50" [6.30]

4.00" OR 6.00" DEEP PANS ON TOP 4.00" DEEP PANS ONLY ON BOTTOM

3.88 [9.87] 2.15 [5.47] 2.15 [5.47]

27.13" [68.91]

8.54 [21.69] 4.50” [11.4]8.50”

[22cm]

14.33“[36cm]



4427N Mega Top

4427N-12M D4427N-12M

INSTALLATION NOTE:Refrigerationsystemisdesignedsothatairwillflowundertheunit,throughthecompressorareaandoutthefrontoftheunit.Anyrestrictiontothisairflowpathwillvoidthewarranties.

PLEASE NOTE:Airflowthroughthelouveronthebackoftheunitisnotnecessaryforoperation,however,anyairwhichpassesthroughthelouverisbeneficial.

Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice.

Specifications

Model 1/6SizePanCap.

#ofShelves

ShelfArea Volume h.P. V/hz/Ph Amps Nema

plug ShipWeight

4427N-9M 9 1 3.17ft2 8.20ft3 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15p 223lbs/101kg

D4427N-9M 9 NA NA 8.20ft3 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15p 245lbs/111kg

4427N-12M 12 1 3.17ft2 8.20ft3 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15p 223lbs/101kg

D4427N-12M 12 NA NA 8.20ft3 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15p 245lbs/111kg

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]

4.00" Or 6.00" Deep Pans On Top4.00" Deep Pans Only On Bottom

31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"

4427N-12M Front View

4427N-12M Isometric View

D4427N-12M Front View

D4427N-12M Isometric View

To Edge Of DoorNose Of Unit

Nose Of UnitTo Edge Of Drawer

4427N-12M Right Interior View

D4427N-12M Right View Pan Cutout Configuration

4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]


31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"









4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]


31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"









4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]


31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"









4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]


31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"









4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]

25.67" [65.20]

36.12" [91.75]

33.59" [85.31]

Interior Dimension

22.75" [57.79]

33.59" [85.31]

36.12" [91.75]

19.60" [49.77]

SHELF

ALT. SHELF

3.88 [9.87]

17.35" [44.08]

23.79" [60.43]

20.75" [52.70]26.86" [68.22]

21.9

4" [5

5.73

]

31.50" [80.01]

3.14 [7.97]


31.50" [80.01]

3.88 [9.87] 3.14 [7.97]

27.14" [68.93]

8.50" [29.59]

27.13" [68.91]

27.57" [70.03]

8.50" [29.59]

12.98" [33.00]

7.53" [19.10]6.11" [15.52]

4.96"

21.63"

27.13"









4.50” [11.4]

4.50” [11.4]

27.57" [70.03]



Exterior top is one-piece, 22-gauge stainless steel withintegral 2.12” (5.4cm) square nosing on the front.Top ofdrawer unit has openings to accept nine or twelve 1/6-size 4” (10cm) deep pans.Top of door unit has openingstoacceptnineor twelve1/6-size4”or6” (10cmor15cm)deep pans. Adapter bars and 1/6 size pans are suppliedbyDelfield.Lidisconstructedof20-gaugestainlesssteel.Temperatureintopopeningtomaintain33°F(1°C)to41°F(5°C), with pans recessed 2.5” (6.4cm) at 86°F ambientroomtemperature,meetingNSF7 requirements.One27”x8”x .5” (68.6cmx20.3cmx1.3cm)polyethylenecuttingboardtreatedwithantimicrobialagentismountedonthetopatthefrontedge.

Dual level pan brackets allow the pans to be loweredan additional inch in the unit without tools to provideadditional pan temperature holding performance. Notavailablefortwelvepancapacitymodels.

Exterior back and bottom are two-piece 24-gaugegalvanizedsteel.Exteriorendsarestainlesssteel.

Interior sidesarethermoformedABSplasticwithintegralshelf supports. Base is fully insulated with high-densityfoamed inplaceenvironmentally friendly,KyotoProtocolCompliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), NonGWP(GlobalWarmingPotential)polyurethane.

Refrigeration system uses hFC-404A refrigerant.Compressor is 1/5 h.P., with condenser coil and hot gascondensate evaporator mounted on rear of the cabinet.Evaporator coil is locatedon the interior rearwall of thecabinet.Refrigerantflowiscontrolledbyacapillarytube.Cabinetmaintainsaninteriorcabinettemperatureof36°Fto40°F(2°Cto4°C).

ACT control:ACTelectronic,solidstatecontrol,mountedontheexteriorrearofthecabinet,allowsunittomaintainprecisetemperaturesinheavydutyconditions.

Specifications

4427N Mega TopFront-Breathing Self-Contained Mega Top Refrigerated Bases

Electrical connection is115volt,60hertz, singlephase.Unit has a 6’ (1.8m) longelectrical cord andNEMA5-15Pplug.

Casters: Equipment is mounted on 5” (13cm) diameterplatecasterswithfronttwolocking.Equipmentclearanceabovetheflooris2.5”(6cm).

Doors have a 22-gauge stainless steel exterior, withthermoformedABSplastic interior liner. Cabinet has oneadjustableepoxy-coatedwireshelf.

Drawers have 22-gauge stainless steel exterior withthermoformed ABS plastic interior liner. Drawer framesare 12-gauge stainless steel. Drawer slides are 11-gaugestainlesssteelwithDelrinbearings.Topdrawerholdsonefull size12”x20”,4”-6" (30.5cmx50.8cmx10.2cm)deeppan, and three 1/6 size pans. Bottom drawer holds onefullsize12x20"andthree1/6size4"deeppans.Pansaresuppliedbyothers.


Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619www.delfield.com

Printed in the U.S.A.DS4427N-M11/13



Worktop FreezerWorktop FreezerModel : TWF-48SD

TWF-48SD 2 12 2 1/2 8.3 258 481/4 x 30 x 331/2

ModelSwingDoor CU./FT.

#ofShelves HP AMPS

CratedWeight (lbs.)

L x D x H(inches)

* †

Project :

Model # :

Item # : Qty :

Available W/H :

Approval :

4184 E. Conant St.Long Beach, CA 90808Tel. 310-900-1000Fax. 310-900-1077www.turboairinc.com

WorktopsSuper Deluxe Series

Ver.201701 * Depth does not include 1” for rear spacers. † Height does not include 5” for caster height.

Maintenance-free, Self-Cleaning Condenser (patented)The accumulation of dust in the condenser causes the failure or breakdown of refrigerators. Refrigerators run normally until they reach a certain level of accumulation. At some point, when they are over the limit, their performance drops quickly resulting in damage to, or disposal of the stored products in refrigerators. The self-cleaning condenser device keeps the condenser clean and prevents system failure by automatically brushing daily.

Stainless steel cabinet constructionThe Turbo Air Super Deluxe model boasts a stainless steel interior and exterior (galvanized steel back & bottom). It guarantees the utmost in cleanliness and long product life. The Super Deluxe can add a touch of style to the most refined setting.

Sturdy, clean stainless steel shelving

Shelves are the most important part of cleanliness as they come in direct contact with food. After a while, PVC coated wire shelves may peel, rust and lead to unsanitary conditions. Only the Turbo Air Super Deluxe series uniquely provides stainless steel shelving.

Efficient refrigeration systemTurbo Air’s solid door freezers are designed with oversized and balanced (CFC Free R-134A) refrigeration systems. These include efficient evaporators and condensers for faster freezing and greater efficiency.

High-density polyurethane insulationThe entire cabinet structure and solid doors are foamed-in-place using high density, CFC free polyurethane insulation.

Ergonomically designed doorsCustomers’ fatigue fades away with easy grip handles and doors that open effortlessly. These features along with self-closing doors make this the ultimate choice in customer convenience. ABS sheet door liners resist water condensation with thermal efficiency.

LED interior lighting

Magnetic door gasketsMagnetic door gaskets are of one piece construction, removable without tools for ease of cleaning and replacement.

Freezer holds -10°F ~ 0°F for the best in frozen food preservation

FEATURES & BENEFITS

Only at Turbo Air

Only Turbo Air models

FEATURES & BENEFITS

more durable, efficient, beautiful

This product is equipped with a fine mesh filter to the front of the condenser to catch dust, and a rotating brush that moves up and down daily to remove excess buildup outward and away.

Patented Self-Cleaning Condenser

5 YEARCompressor

WARRANTY(U.S.A only)

3 YEAR

Turbo Air TWF‐48SD Item #5390


Turbo Air : 800-627-0032Warranty : 800-381-7770

GK : 800-500-3519AC : 888-900-1002

Ver.201701

481/4 (1226mm)

30 (7

62m

m)

517/

8 (1

316m

m)

237/

8 (6

07m

m)

443/8 (1128mm)

193/4 (503mm) 193/4 (503mm)

PLAN VIEW

Worktop FreezerWorktop FreezerModel : TWF-48SD

115/60/1

NEMA 5-15P

8.3

1/2

9

R-134A

12

481/4 (1226mm)

30 (762mm)

331/2 (851mm)

2

2

235

258

21 x 17

(unit : inch)

PLAN VIEW


ELECTRICAL DATA

DIMENSIONAL DATA

Voltage

Plug Type

Full Load Amperes

Compressor HP

Cord Length (ft.)

Refrigerant

Net Capacity (cu. ft.)

Ext. Length Overall (in.)

Ext. Depth Overall (in.)

Ext. Height Overall (in.)

# of Doors

# of Shelves

Net Weight (lbs.)

Gross Weight (lbs.)

Shelf Size (in.)

*

†

30 (762mm)31/2

SIDE VIEW

331/

2 (8

51m

m)

161/

2 (4

19m

m)

253/8 (645mm)

145/8 (372mm)

263/

4 (6

78m

m)

101/

4(2

59m

m)24

(611

mm

)

5 (127mm)3/4 (19mm)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES :2.5” caster, ½” diameter & 13 TPI: 30265H0100 (non-brake), 30265H0200 (w/ brake)5” caster, ½” diameter & 13 TPI: M726500100 (non-brake), M726500200 (w/ brake)6” ABS plastic leg: 30221M02006” stainless steel leg: 30221M0600Additional stainless steel shelf: M727800100

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.Actual shipping weight may differ due to extra packing materials for product protection. * Depth does not include 1” for rear spacers. † Height does not include 5” for caster height.

3 Year Parts and Labor WarrantyAdditional 2 Year Warranty on Compressor

Self-contained systemStandard 4” dia. swivel casters with locks on the front set2.5” caster available (optional)Legs available (optional)

Door lock: extra lead time will apply, please call factory formore details to orderExternal digital thermometer: extra lead time will apply, please call factory for more details to order

5 YEARCompressor


3 YEAR

Turbo Air TWF‐48SD Item #5390


Worktop RefrigeratorWorktop RefrigeratorModel : TWR-48SD

TWR-48SD 2 12 2 1/3 6.5 258 481/4 x 30 x 331/2

ModelSwingDoor CU./FT.

#ofShelves HP AMPS

CratedWeight (lbs.)

L x D x H(inches)

* †

Project :

Model # :

Item # : Qty :

Available W/H :

Approval :

4184 E. Conant St.Long Beach, CA 90808Tel. 310-900-1000Fax. 310-900-1077www.turboairinc.com


* Depth does not include 1” for rear spacers. † Height does not include 5” for caster height.

Maintenance-free, Self-Cleaning Condenser (patented)The accumulation of dust in the condenser causes the failure or breakdown of refrigerators. Refrigerators run normally until they reach a certain level of accumulation. At some point, when they are over the limit, their performance drops quickly resulting in damage to, or disposal of the stored products in refrigerators. The self-cleaning condenser device keeps the condenser clean and prevents system failure by automatically brushing daily.

Stainless steel cabinet constructionThe Turbo Air Super Deluxe model boasts a stainless steel interior and exterior (galvanized steel back & bottom). It guarantees the utmost in cleanliness and long product life. The Super Deluxe canadd a touch of style to the most refined setting.

Sturdy, clean stainless steel shelving

Shelves are the most important part of cleanliness as they come in direct contact with food. After a while, PVC coated wire shelves may peel, rust and lead to unsanitary conditions. Only the Turbo Air Super Deluxe series uniquely provides stainless steel shelving.

Efficient refrigeration systemTurbo Air’s solid door refrigerators are designed with oversized and balanced (CFC Free R-134A) refrigeration systems. These include efficient evaporators and condensers for faster cooling and greater efficiency.

High-density CFC free polyurethaneinsulationErgonomically designed doorsCustomers’ fatigue fades away with easy grip handles and doors that open effortlessly. These features along with self-closing doors make this the ultimate choice in customer convenience. ABS sheet door liners resist water condensation with thermal efficiency.

Magnetic door gasketsMagnetic door gaskets are of one piece construction, removable without tools for ease of cleaning and replacement.

Refrigerator holds 33°F ~ 38°F for the best in food preservation

FEATURES & BENEFITS

Only at Turbo Air

Only Turbo Air models

Ver.201701

more durable, efficient, beautiful

This product is equipped with a fine mesh filter to the front of the condenser to catch dust, and a rotating brush that moves up and down daily to remove excess buildup outward and away.

Patented Self-Cleaning Condenser

5 YEARCompressor


3 YEAR

Turbo Air TWR‐48SD Item #5391


Turbo Air : 800-627-0032Warranty : 800-381-7770

GK : 800-500-3519AC : 888-900-1002

Ver.201701

481/4 (1226mm)

30 (7

62m

m)

517/

8 (1

316m

m)

237/

8 (6

07m

m)

443/8 (1128mm)

191/2 (496mm) 191/2 (496mm)

PLAN VIEW

PLAN VIEW

Worktop RefrigeratorWorktop RefrigeratorModel : TWR-48SD

115/60/1

NEMA 5-15P

6.5

1/3

9

R-134A

12

481/4 (1226mm)

30 (762mm)

331/2 (851mm)

2

2

235

258

21 x 17

(unit : inch)


ELECTRICAL DATA

DIMENSIONAL DATA

Voltage

Plug Type

Full Load Amperes

Compressor HP

Cord Length (ft.)

Refrigerant

Net Capacity (cu. ft.)

Ext. Length Overall (in.)

Ext. Depth Overall (in.)

Ext. Height Overall (in.)

# of Doors

# of Shelves

Net Weight (lbs.)

Gross Weight (lbs.)

Shelf Size (in.)

*

†

30 (762mm)31/2

SIDE VIEW

331/

2 (8

51m

m)

161/

2 (4

19m

m)

253/8 (645mm)

145/8 (372mm)

263/

4 (6

78m

m)

101/

4(2

59m

m)24

(611

mm

)

5 (127mm)3/4 (19mm)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES :2.5” caster, ½” diameter & 13 TPI: 30265H0100 (non-brake), 30265H0200 (w/ brake)5” caster, ½” diameter & 13 TPI: M726500100 (non-brake), M726500200 (w/ brake)6” ABS plastic leg: 30221M02006” stainless steel leg: 30221M0600Additional stainless steel shelf: M727800100

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.Actual shipping weight may differ due to extra packing materials for product protection. * Depth does not include 1” for rear spacers. † Height does not include 5” for caster height.

3 Year Parts and Labor WarrantyAdditional 2 Year Warranty on Compressor

Self-contained systemStandard 4” dia. swivel casters with locks on the front set2.5” caster available (optional)Legs available (optional)

Door lock: extra lead time will apply, please call factory formore details to orderExternal digital thermometer: extra lead time will apply, please call factory for more details to order

5 YEARCompressor


3 YEAR

Turbo Air TWR‐48SD Item #5391


Eagle Group YBM‐T3648‐0005‐00 Item #6455


��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!

��

��!

��!

��

��

��!

��

��

��!

��

��

�"�

��

��!

��

��!

��#$!

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�%��

��

��

��%��

��#��%��

��

��

��

#��%

��#

&�� &��

��

��

��

��

%��

��%��%

��

��

��

��

#��%

��#

&�� &��

%��

&

��

��

��'

��

�� %� ��

��

�� ()*�

�%!�

��

� �

��

+!� ��

��

� �

�,,,&-./

01234

5/&674

��!

��!

��%!

��

��!

�#��

�#��

��

��

��

��!

%��!

� ��

��

� �

��

��'�

��

�

��

��

�

��8��

$*��

�%

��

��

��

��

�*

��

�!��

��

#��

��

#��

��

��%

��#�%

�%� '�

�

9��

��

8*(�(��8

��8

�

��*8

*(�(��8

��8

�

��

8*(��8

��8

�

*��*8

*(��8

��8

�

(��

8��

8��8

�

��*8

��8

��8

�

)� '��

��

��*8

�

��8

�

��8

*(� *8��

��8�

�

�� 8� �

�)8�

�

*)� *8� �

�(8��

� 8�

�

*)� �8� �

�*( �8� �

*(� �8��

��( �8��

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

� �

��

��

9��!��:;

��!�:��

��

��;

�

��!�:��

�%��

��

��;

��

&��<��

��:;��

� ��

��#

��

��

��%

��#�&

��

&��

��:;��

� ��

��

%��

�#��

��

��

��%

��#��

��&

�)

� *

( �

�

� �

Sam

ple

dwg

of B

M S

neez

egua

rd

English CUSTOM Item #8372


3M™ Water Filtration ProductsSPEC#

QUANTITY

application: MULTIPLE EQUIPMENTmodels:

DP190/DP195

PRODUCT BENEFITS

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

3M Purificaton Inc. Water Filtration Products Models DP190 & DP195 dual port water filtration systems help provide consistent high quality water for the multiple applications of cold beverages, ice and coffee at a combined flow rate of up to 5 gpm (18.9 lpm). Two separate streams exit the manifold. Both streams have reduced sediment and chlorine taste and odor. One stream has added scale inhibition media from a dedicated cartridge to help reduce the ability of calcium and magnesium to precipitate as hard scale on the evaporator plates of an ice machine and/or the heating coils of a coffee brewer. The second stream supplies cold beverage dispensers and includes no added scale inhibitor.

The DP190 filters combine chlorine taste and odor reduction with cyst, bacteria and sediment reduction to 0.2 micron. The DP195 filters combine chlorine taste and odor reduction with sediment reduction to 3 micron for more turbid water.

• Onesystemwithdualoutletconnectionssimultaneouslysuppliescoldbeveragedispensers and ice machines/coffee brewers.

• Upto5gpm(18.9lpm)totalflowofwaterespeciallytreatedforconsistentgreattast-ing cold beverages, clearer and consistent ice and the perfect cup of coffee or tea.

• RevolutionaryIntegrated Membrane Pre-Activated Carbon Technology (“IMPACT”) dual-zone media cartridge construction combines a membrane in series with premium activated carbon to provide superior throughput and cartridge life.

• Reductionofupto99.99%ofcommonwater-borneheterotrophicbacteriabymem-brane filtration as tested by 3M Purification (HF90 replacement cartridge).

• NSFand/orFDACFR-21compliantmaterials.

• Built-inbacteriainhibitorintendedtoreducefoulingofmedia(HF90replacementcartridge).

• Reductionofscalebuild-uponevaporatorplatesandheatingcoilsfromacontrolledforced-feed orifice addition of scale inhibitor, as tested by 3M Purification.

• SanitaryQuickChange(SQC)encapsulatedcartridgedesignallowsforfastandeasycartridge change-outs with a 1/4 turn.

• 3/4”NPThorizontalinletandoutletportsallowdirectoreasilyadaptableconnectionstoexisting plumbing lines.

• Expansionkitavailabletoservehighercapacitiesandflowrates.

•Manifoldincludesoutletcheckvalves.

ENHANCED

1Includes oocysts of cryptosporidium and toxoplasma and cysts of giardia and entamueba2AstestedwithE.ColiATCC(11229)

ModelNumber

PartNumber

ReductionClaims

Nominal MicronRating

CapacityService

Flow RateApplication

ReplacementCartridge

Sizing

DP190 56243-01Cysts1, Bacteria2,Sediment,ChlorineTasteandOdor,Scale

0.2

54,000 gallons (204,412 liters)

5.0 gpm(18.9 lpm)

MostNormalWater

DP190CARTPAK56138-01

(HF90&HF8-S)

For simultaneous operation of

carbonators, coffee machines and ice machinesDP195 56243-02

Sediment,ChlorineTasteandOdor,Scale

3Higher

Turbidity Water

DP195CARTPAK56138-04

(HF95&HF8-S)

3M Purifica on 5624301 Item #9939


3M Purification Inc. Water Filtration Products

DP190/DP195SPEC#

QUANTITY

MODEL NUMBER

PART NUMBERPHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

LIMITED WARRANTY

• Systemincludesasinglecartridgemanifoldwithbuilt-inpressuregauge,inletwatershut-offvalve,outletcheckvalves,mountingbrackets,asinglecartridgefilterandadedicated external scale inhibition cartridge.

• Inletandoutletplumbingconnectionsare3/4”NPT(choiceofmaleorfemaleisincluded).

• Filtercartridgeiso-ringsealtype.

• Systemmaximumoperatingpressureof125psi(862kPa)andoperatingtemperatureof100°F(37.8°C).

• Recommendedcombinedserviceflowrateisupto5gpm(18.9lpm).

• Filtercartridgeincorporatesabacteriostaticcarbonblockfiltrationmedium(HF90replacementcartridge).Secondcartridgeincludesascaleinhibitionmedium(HF8-S).

• SystemmaterialsareNSFand/orFDACFR-21compliant.

• Cartridgesaresanitaryindesign,requiringnocontactwiththefiltermediaduringcartridge change-out.

• Filtercartridgesrequirenopre-activation.

• Shippingweight:15lbs.(6.8kg).

• Operatingweight:16.5lbs.(7.5kg).

These installation tips are for informational purposes only and are not intended to be used as actual installation instructions. CAUTION: To reduce the risk associated with property damage due to water leakage:•Read and followUseInstructionsbeforeinstallationanduseofthissystem.•InstallationanduseMUST comply with all state and local plumbing codes.

•Protect from freezing, remove filter cartridge when temperatures are expected to drop below40°F(4.4°C).

•Do not install on hot water supply lines. The maximum operating water temperature ofthisfiltersystemis100°F(37.8°C).

•Do not install ifwater pressure exceeds125psi (862 kPa). If yourwater pressureexceeds80psi(552kPa),youmustinstallapressurelimitingvalve.Contactaplumbingprofessionalifyouareuncertainhowtocheckyourwaterpressure.

•Do not install where water hammer conditions may occur. If water hammer conditions existyoumustinstallawaterhammerarrester.Contactaplumbingprofessionalifyouareuncertainhowtocheckforthiscondition.

•ThedisposablefiltercartridgeMUST be replaced every 12 months, at the rated capacity or if a noticeable reduction in flow rate occurs.

3M Purification Inc. warrants this Product will be free from defects in material and manufacture for five (5) years from the date of purchase: The filter cartridge or filter membrane is warranted to be free from defects in material and manufacture for one (1) year. This warranty does not cover failures resulting from abuse, misuse, alteration or damage not caused by 3M Purification Inc. or failure to follow installation and use instructions. No warranty is given as to the service life of any filter cartridge or membrane as it will vary with local water conditions and water consumption. 3M PURIFICATION INC. MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION ARISING OUT OF A COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOMER OR USAGE OF TRADE. If the Product fails to satisfy this Limited Warranty during the warranty period, 3M Purification Inc. will replace the Product or refund your Product purchase price. This warranty does not cover labor. The remedy stated in this paragraph is Customer’s sole remedy and 3M Purification Inc.’s exclusive obligation. For additional information, see the entire Limited Warranty located in the product Installation and Operating Instruction Manual.

Limitation of Liability: 3M Purification Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage arising from this 3M Purification Inc. product, whether direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential, regardless of the legal theory asserted, including warranty, contract, negligence or strict liability. Some states and countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

WARNING: To reduce the risk associated with the ingestion of contaminants:• Do not use with water that is microbiologically unsafe or of

unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the system. Systemscertifiedforcystreductionmaybeusedondisinfectedwaterthatmaycontainfilterablecysts.EPAEstablishment#070595-CT-001

3M Purification Inc. recommends regularly scheduled maintenance and replacement of the filter cartridge(s) in order for the product to perform as advertised/sold. 3M Purification shall not be liable for system failures due to improper maintenance.

3Misatrademarkof3MCompany.©20113MCompany.Allrightsreserved.

LITFS2950811B70-0201-9421-6

Pleaserecycle.PrintedinU.S.A.

IMPORTANT: INSTALLATION TIPS

3M Purification Inc. 400ResearchParkwayMeriden,CT06450U.S.A.TollFree:1.800.243.6894Worldwide:203.237.5541Fax:203.630.4530www.3Mpurification.com

2 5/16" (5.9 cm) MINDISTANCE REQUIRED

TO REMOVE CARTRIDGE

24 1/16"(61.1 cm)

17 1/4"(43.8 cm)

3M Purifica on 5624301 Item #9939


Eagle Group CUSTOM Item #S101, S102


Eagle Group CUSTOM Item #S103


Eagle Group CUSTOM Item #S104, S105, S106


Eagle Group WAL‐2‐1836 Item #WS102


Eagle Group WM1836 Item #WS104


Eagle Group HOOKS Item #WS105


Custom SIGNAGE Item #B100, B101


Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – QDOBA FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 11 40 00.2 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 11 40 00.2

FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS – QDOBA

The attached food service cut sheets apply to Qdoba (70 pages).

END OF SECTION

Basic Frying At Its Best -- Designed For All-Purpose Usage

Fry a wide variety of products with Dean’s Super Runner fryers which easily accommodate items from French fries to main entree menu selections. The fryers are available in three oil capacities utilizing 43 lbs., 50 lbs. and 75 lbs. of oil.

Make the most of your energy dollars with Dean’s exclusive Thermo-Tube design. The heat-ing tubes provide a large oil contact surface. Flow-tube baffles control the transfer of heat into the oil. Dean’s wide cold zone frypot pro-tects oil integrity by trapping debris under the cooking area, preventing carbonization of par-ticles and wasteful oil deterioration.

Dean’s durable temperature probe assures prompt recovery which reduces time lost between loads and requires no electrical hookup.

Dean’s Super Runner gas fryers achieve dependability through simplicity of design, durable stainless steel baffles and rugged cast iron burners.

Specifications

Standard Features

SR42G SR52G SR62G

Models

Super Runner Value Gas Fryers


Project

Item

Quantity

CSI Section 11400

Approval

Date

Options &Accessories

• Tube-type frypot design• Oil capacity

SR42G -- 43 lb. (21 liter) SR52G -- 50 lb. (25 liter) SR62G -- 75-lb. (37 liter)

• Btu/hr. input SR42G -- 105,000 (26,481 kcal) (30.8 kw) (3-tube) SR52G -- 120,000 (30,600 kcal) (35.2 kw) (4-tube) SR62G -- 150,000 (37,783 kcal) (44 kw) (5-tube)

• Frying area SR42G 14” x 14” x 3-7/8” (35 x 35 x 9.8 cm) SR52G 14” x 14” x 3-1/2” (35 x 35 x 8.5 cm) SR62G 18” x 18” x 3-3/4” (46 x 46 x 9.5 cm)

• Durable temperature probe

Stainless-steel sides Casters -- set of 4 Frypot covers Natural and LP gas

5489 Campus Drive

Shreveport, LA 71129

USA

Tel: 318-865-1711

Tel: 1-800-221-4583

Fax: 318-868-5987

E-mail: [email protected]

www.frymaster.com

Bulletin No. 830-0117

Revised 8/16/13

Litho in U.S.A. ©Frymaster

SR62GShown with optional casters.

• Millivolt control system - requires no electrical hookup

• Thermo-tube design• Wide cold zone• Stainless steel frypot, front, door,

and backsplash/flue cover, aluminized sides

• Wire form basket hanger and two fry baskets• 6” (15 cm) adjustable steel legs• 3/4” (1.9 cm) NPT gas connection

SR42 and SR62 Approved for

Australia


Mod

el #_______________C

SI Section 11400

5489 Campus Drive

Shreveport, LA 71129

USA

Tel: 318-865-1711

Tel: 1-800-221-4583

Fax: 318-868-5987

E-mail: [email protected]

www.frymaster.com

Bulletin No. 830-0117

Revised 8/16/13

Litho in U.S.A. ©Frymaster

moDel oIl CAPACIty

overAll SIze (cm) DrAIn vAlve

heIght(cm)

no. of

tubeS

APProxImAte ShIPPIng DImenSIonS

wIDth DePth heIght weIght ClASS Cu. ft. DImenSIonS(cm)

SR42G 43 lbs.(21 liter)

15-1/2”(39.4)

29-1/4”(74.3)

45”(114.3)

18-3/8”(46.7)

3 150(68 kg)

85 22 W20-1/2”(52.1)

D36”

(91.4)

H48-1/2”(123.2)


15-1/2”(39.4)

29-1/4”(74.3)

45”(114.3)

17-1/2”(44.5)

4 180(82 kg)

85 22 20-1/2”(52.1)

36”(91.4)

48-1/2”(123.2)


20” (50.8)

35-1/2”(90.2)

45”(114.3)

19-3/4”(50.1)

5 255(116 kg)

85 22 20-1/2”(52.1)

36”(91.4)

48-1/2”(123.2)

DIMeNSIONS

POWeR RequIReMeNTS

HOW TO SPeCIFYThe following description will assist with ordering the features desired for this equipment:

SR42 43-lb (21-liter) tube-type gas fryer with millivolt controller, and durable temperature probe

SR52 50-lb (25-liter) tube-type gas fryer with millivolt controller and durable temperature probe

SR62 75-lb (37-liter) tube-type gas fryer with millivolt controller and durable temperature probe

ORDeRING DATAPlease specify: Natural or propane gas Altitude -- if above 2000 ft. (610 m)

NOTe:DO NOT CuRB MOuNT.*SuPPLY PReSSuRe: DO NOT exCeeD 14” W.C. or 1/2 PSI.No warranty for mobile kitchen applications.

TOP VIEW

FRONT VIEW

(51)2.00

SIDE VIEW

7.20(183)

35.00(889)

7.62(194)

47.00(1194)

CONNECTIONw/ 3/4" NPT PIPE(36)

1.4 GAS LINE

(mm)INCHES

35.5(902)

45.00(1143)

DEAN

A

We reserve the right to change specifications appearing in this bulletin without incurring any obligation for equipment previously or subsequently sold.Check www.frymaster.com for updates.

moDel nAturAl or lP gAS InPut rAtIng

gASConneCtIon

eleCtrICAlreQuIrement

SR42G 105,000 Btu/hr. (26,481 kcal) (30.8 kw) 3/4” N.P.T.Regulator not required for manifold pressure.

See note*.

NONe

SR52G 120,000 Btu/hr. (30,600 kcal) (35 kw)

SR62G 150,000 Btu/hr. (37,783 kcal/hr.) (44 kw)

Swivel MAX® Multi-planeRotation Fitting

The Dormont Blue Hose® Stainless Steel ConstructionStainless Steel Braid Blue Antimicrobial PVC Coating

(Cutaway shown)

Features

Swivel MAX® Multi-plane Fitting ................. Aluminum body, plated steel fitting Movement ............................. 360° rotational end fitting

SnapFast® One-Handed Quick-Disconnect Quick-Disconnect ................... Brass body, aluminum collar Thermal Shut-off .................... Shuts off gas when internal temperatures exceed 350°F (177ºC)

SpecificationsThe Dormont Blue Hose®

Tubing ................................. Annealed, 304 stainless steel Braiding ................................. Multi-strand, stainless steel wire Coating ................................. Blue antimicrobial PVC, melts at 350ºF (177ºC), coating will not hold a flame End Fittings ............................ Carbon steel; zinc trivalent chromate Stress Guard® ........................ 360º rotational end fitting at both ends

Additional Components Restraining Device ................. PVC-coated, steel multi-strand cable and mounting hardware Valve ................................. Full port, brass body Elbow ................................. Malleable iron, 1 included

Approvals & CertificationsNSF/ANSI 169 – Special-purpose food equipment and devicesANSI Z21.69/CSA 6.16 – Connectors for moveable gas appliancesANSI Z21.41/CSA 6.9 – Quick-disconnect devices for use with gas fuel appliancesANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1 – Manually operated gas valves for appliances, appliance connectorUL 567 – Pipe connectors for flammable and combustible liquids and LP gas Meets requirements of ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code.Refer to the catalog for additional approvals and certifications or go to www.dormont.com.Not for use in temperatures less than 32°F (0°C). For indoor use only. Maximum operating pressure 1/2 psi.A restraining device is required for all moveable gas equipment.

Stress Guard®

Rotation Technology Reduces Stress at Both Ends of the Hose

SnapFast® One-handedQuick-Disconnect

Job Name _______________________________________Job Location ______________________________________Engineer ________________________________________Approval _________________________________

Contractor _______________________________________Approval ________________________________________Contractor's P.O. No. _______________________________Representative ____________________________________SKU _____________________________________________

For Commercial Applications

Single Swivel MAX®/SnapFast® Quick-Disconnect AssembliesSizes: ½" to 1¼" (15 to 32mm)Single Swivel MAX®/SnapFast® Quick-Disconnect Assemblies feature flexible movement and the one-handed, quick-disconnect fitting with a unique thermal shut-off design that automatically shuts off the gas when the internal temperature exceeds 350°F (177°C). The 360° movement of Swivel MAX adds extra protection to the life of the connector and increases kitchen aisle space by allowing the appliance to be closer to the wall.

The Dormont Safety System™ is the first and only complete gas equipment connection system specifically engineered for the commercial kitchen. The Safety System consists of the famous Dormont Blue Hose and a variety of accesso-ries designed for improved safety and performance in commercial kitchens. Because they

are manufactured in the USA under an ISO qualified production process and to multiple design certifications, you can Connect with Confidence with the Dormont Safety System.

Stress Guard®

Rotation Technology Reduces Stress at Both Ends of the Hose

Single Swivel MAX® with SnapFast® Quick-Disconnect Deluxe Kit Assembly

LENGTH

Configuration Size I.D. 24" (607mm) 36" (914mm) 48" (1,219mm) 60" (1,524mm) 72" (1,829mm)

Deluxe Kit* 1650KITS24 1650KITS36 1650KITS48 1650KITS60 1650KITS72Basic Kit** ½" (15mm) 1650BPQSR24 1650BPQSR36 1650BPQSR48 1650BPQSR60 1650BPQSR72 Hose Assembly*** 1650BPQS24 1650BPQS36 1650BPQS48 1650BPQS60 1650BPQS72

Deluxe Kit* 1675KITS24 1675KITS36 1675KITS48 1675KITS60 1675KITS72Basic Kit** ¾" (20mm) 1675BPQSR24 1675BPQSR36 1675BPQSR48 1675BPQSR60 1675BPQSR272Hose Assembly*** 1675BPQS24 1675BPQS36 1675BPQS48 1675BPQS60 1675BPQS72

Deluxe Kit* 16100KITS24 16100KITS36 16100KITS48 16100KITS60 16100KITS72Basic Kit** 1" (25mm) 16100BPQSR24 16100BPQSR36 16100BPQSR48 16100BPQSR60 16100BPQSR72Hose Assembly*** 16100BPQS24 16100BPQS36 16100BPQS48 16100BPQS60 16100BPQS72

Deluxe Kit* 16125KITS24 16125KITS36 16125KITS48 16125KITS60 16125KITS72Basic Kit** 1¼" (32mm) 16125BPQSR24 16125BPQSR36 16125BPQSR48 16125BPQSR60 16125BPQSR72Hose Assembly*** 16125BPQS24 16125BPQS36 16125BPQS48 16125BPQS60 16125BPQS72

LENGTH

Model Size I.D. 24" (607mm) 36" (914mm) 48" (1,219mm) 60" (1,524mm) 72" (1,829mm)

1650BPQS ½" (15mm) 81,000 72,000 63,000 56,000 51,000

1675BPQS ¾" (20mm) 216,000 203,000 167,000 147,000 130,000

16100BPQS 1" (25mm) 385,000 353,000 310,000 274,000 260,000

16125BPQS 1¼" (32mm) 535,000 491,000 482,000 463,000 460,000

BTU/hr Flow Capacity Natural Gas (Flow rating BTU/hr 0.64 SP. GR. @ 0.5 inch WC pressure drop)

The Dormont Blue Hose®

The Dormont Blue Hose is a commercial, moveable-grade gas connector designed for use with moveable equipment.

Moveable equipment is defined in ANSI Standard Z21.69/CSA 6.16 as gas utilization equipment that may be mounted on casters or otherwise be subject to movement.

We guarantee our commercial gas connectors for the life of the original appliance to which it is connected.

• Reduces stress on connector• Increases kitchen aisle space by allowing connector to be positioned closer to the wall

• One-handed quick-disconnect fitting• Thermal shut-off when internal temperature exceeds 350°F (177°C)

Typical Installation

USA: Export, PA • Tel. (724) 733-4800 • Fax: (724) 733-4808 • www.dormont.comA Watts Water Technologies Company

ES-D-SwivelSnapFast 1306 © 2013 Dormont

Restraining Device• ANSI Z21.69 Standard section 1.7.4 states: Connectors when used on caster-mounted equipment shall be installed with a restraining device, which prevents transmission of the strain to the connector

*Deluxe Kits include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast, restraining device, full port valve, street elbow and display box**Basic Kits include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast, restraining device and street elbow***Hose Assemblies include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast and street elbow

Ordering Information

Kitchen Brains © 2012 | www.KitchenBrains.com | 229-51284 G

This document contains confidential information. The dissemination, publication, copying, or duplication of this document or the software described herein without prior written authorization is strictly prohibited.

Food Quality Whether keeping product in a holding cabinet or chute, or grilling multiple products simultaneously, even the most well-trained staff is challenged to deliver consistent food product to your customers. The TRACKER™ meets this challenge by precisely timing any combination of products throughout the kitchen, and prompting action with an audible tone and flashing display.

Timing CyclesUp to three separate timing cycles per product key can be started, allowing you the flexibility to time up to 36 products. The 3 status LEDs illuminate to let you know the progress of each timing cycle.

Food SafetyProduct that is undercooked, or held too long in the Danger Zone (40°-140°F/5°-60°C) can potentially expose your customers and crew to dangerous food-borne illness. Bacteria multiplication can be prevented by controlling the time a product is cooked and/or held. The TRACKER helps operators avoid food safety dangers by automatically monitoring these cook and hold times.

Easy To UseSetting the TRACKER is as simple as an alarm clock. Each of the independent product keys can be programmed to count up or down in minutes and seconds or hours and minutes (up to 99 hours, 59 minutes per cycle)—eliminating human error, and automatically maintaining a higher level of control.

Across-the-Kitchen MonitoringThe large easy-to-read green LED displays, each with three status LEDs, make checking the progress of any food product from across the kitchen a cinch. Labor costs are reduced, while food quality is insured.

Peer to Peer CommunicationsTRACKERS with optional communication ports (CP) have the ability to automatically transfer time from one TRACKER to another with Master and Satellite pairing.

Display Time or Product Names It’s your choice. The TRACKER can easily be programmed to display cycle time or product names. Names can be derived from a preloaded library or you can program your own.

Unique Alarm SoundsEach TRACKER can be programmed with one of six (6) different alarm sounds, making it easy for the crew to know which unit is sounding.

Volume ControlThe TRACKER comes standard with three programmable volume levels—low, medium and high. Use the TRACKER in the front or rear of the store without disturbing customers.

Use It AnywhereThe TRACKER comes complete with mounting brackets to attach the unit to equipment, holding stations, or walls.

Future FlexibilityThe TRACKER is Smart Commercial Kitchen® network ready and is NAFEM Data Protocol Compliant.

After the Sale SupportAs with all Kitchen Brains™ products, the TRACKER Timer comes with 24-hour programming assistance via toll-free phone.

Insures consistent food quality and enhances food safety by precisely timing multiple products during cooking, holding, grilling and more.

Easy to Use• Intuitive programming prompts

• Program unique words for product name and action alarm message

• Across-the-kitchen monitoring— 12 independent, easy-to-read green LED displays

• 3 status LEDs per product key

• Displays can show time or product names

• Flexible mounting—tilt to see from any angle

• Uses 90-240 volt power

• Count up or down option

• 6 unique alarm sounds

• 3 volume levels

Food Quality Improvements• 5 stages per product key—time, name,

cancel mode, alarm time and beep sound

• Flexibility with action alarms

• Individual hold alarms

• Precision and durability with electronics

• Power loss protection

Model 26 (12 displays)Multi-Display Timer

SPECIFICATIONSMECHANICAL

• 20 ga. (.036”) stainless steel enclosure• Polyester face with back-printed text• Faceplate: polyester with back-printed

text and removable menu strip• Maximum ambient temperature: 158°F

/ 70°C, 90% max. RH non-condensing

ELECTRICAL• Power Input: 90-240VAC, 50/60 Hz,

Current less than 0.5 amp.• 12 Four-Digit Displays: .625”H,

14-segment green LED• Action Alarms: 1 per stage• Indicators: green LED• Power Cord: Removable 90-degree

angle, 6-ft. oil-resistant neoprene, grounded

• Audio Output: 78 db @ 6 feet• Solid-state integrated circuit design• Switch life rating: 10 million cycles• Status indicators rated life: 50,000

hours• Noise spike protection: 4000 Volt

Minimum (on timers and all properly installed controls)

SHIPPING WEIGHT• Approx. 10 lbs. (4.53 Kg)

BOTTOM MOUNT

SCK Link® is a registered trademark of Technology Licensing Corporation and use is subject to the appropriate license agreement.

ORDER INFO

Part Number Description

TRACK2X6 TRACKER Model 26, standard

TRACK2X6CP TRACKER Model 26 with communication port

TRACK2X6CPM ‘Master’ Tracker Model 26 with comm. port for peer to peer function

TRACK2X6CPS ‘Satellite’ Tracker Model 26 with comm. port for peer to peer function

NOTE: When ordering, indicate voltage and type of line cord required.

5.29"[134.33]

24.55" [623.67]

23.36" [593.45]

WALL MOUNT

Kitchen Brains © 2012 | www.KitchenBrains.com | 229-51284 G

This document contains confidential information. The dissemination, publication, copying, or duplication of this document or the software described herein without prior written authorization is strictly prohibited.

WARRANTYKitchen Brains warrants all new timers, computers, and controllers for 1 year from the date of purchase including computers, controllers, and timers. Kitchen Brains warrants all other items for a period of 90 days unless otherwise stated at the time of purchase.

PATENTSThe products manufactured by Kitchen Brains

are protected under one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,331,575 5,539,671 5,711,606 5,723,846 5,726,424 5,875,430 6,142,666 6,339,930 6,401,467 6,581,391 7,015,433 7,650,833 7,877,291 8,060,408 Plus foreign patents and patents pending. Plus licensed patent 5,973,297

International offices are located in the United Kingdom, China and Singapore:

Europe, Middle East, Africa, South Asia 31 Saffron Court Southfields Business Park Basildon, Essex SS15 6SS ENGLAND Phone: +44 0 1268544000

Asia Pacific 1803, 18F, No 922 Hengshan Rd Shanghai 200030, CHINA Phone: +8613916 854 613

15-101, Block 290G, Bukit Batok St. 24 SINGAPORE 65629 Phone: +65 98315927

Food Automation - Service Techniques, Inc. 905 Honeyspot Road, Stratford, CT 06615-7147 USA

Phone: +1-203-377-4414

Sales: 1-800-FASTRON Fax: +1-203-377-8187 International Callers: +1-203-378-6860

www.KitchenBrains.com Toll-free technical support 24/7 from the U.S., Canada, and Caribbean: 1-800-243-9271

Tracker™ Timer Model 26 (12 displays)Multi-Display Timer

Pro-M

axA

luminum

Two-S

ided Grills

Phone: (314) 678-6303 - FAX: (314) 781-3636 - www.star-mfg.com

Star Manufacturing International Inc. - 10 Sunnen Drive - P.O. Box 430129 - St. Louis, MO 63143-3800

PRO-MAX® 2.0 ALUMINUM GROOVED & SMOOTH TWO-SIDED GRILLS Models PST14, PST14E, PST14T, PGT14, PGT14E & PGT14T

Model PGT14E

S11114/1054

Features/Benefits

★ Expand your menu with Star’s Pro-Max two sided grill. Prepare “Panini” sandwiches, chicken breasts, hamburgers, steaks, wrapsvegetables and many other menu items quickly and easily while maximizing space.

★ NEW lower profile and aesthetics.★ NEW optional electronic control is rated from 175°F (79°C) to 550°F

(302°C) and has 4 countdown timers.★ Standard dial thermostat is rated from 175°F (79°C) to 550°F (302°C)

and provides accurate sensing of temperature.★ Heavy-duty aluminum platens provide long life and superior

performance for high volume operations.★ A heavy-duty commercial hinge system and handle provides safe and

effortless operation of the top platen.★ Two-sided cooking heats your menu items in half the time, sealing

in flavor.★ The bottom platen has a patented splash guard to help keep

products and grease in their place.★ Ergonomically designed control panel provides easy access and

visibility to controls and grease drawer.★ Heavy gauge, water resistant flexible plastic conduit protects

electrical connections.★ Electronic controls with multi channel countdown display.★ Removable grease drawer in the front of unit for easy clean-up.★ Top platen leveling system lifts top platen parallel to bottom platen for

a full 3 inches before rotating up, providing even cooking of thin tortillas to thick panini sandwiches and burritos.

Application:

Star’s Two-Sided Grills can prepare sandwiches, chicken breasts, wraps,hamburgers and a variety of other menu items in your restaurant, cafe,concession stand, bar, or wherever you need high performance cooking.Grills are compact and portable providing flexibility in your operation.

Quality Construction:

Star’s Two-Sided Grills are constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel. Unitsavailable with aluminum grooved or smooth platens. Star’s heavy-dutyhinge mechanism is constructed of hardened aluminum for strength anddurability. Metal tubular elements are standard. The lead-in cord is resist-ant to water and oil to protect wiring. Furnished with a 6’ cord and stan-dard NEMA plug. Other plugs available upon request.

Warranty:

Star’s Two-Sided Grills are covered by Star’s two year parts and labor warranty. Plus, lifetime warranty on elements.

®

S t a r M a n u f a c t u r i n g

Model PST14

Model Voltage Wattage Amps NEMA Shipping InstalledNo. (kg) (kg)

PST14 120 1800 15 5-15P

PST14T

PST14E 120 1800 15 5-20P* 73 (33.1) 63 (28.6)

PGT14

PGT14T 208/240 1350/1800 6.5/7.5 6-15

PGT14E

Pro

-Max

Alu

min

um T

wo-

Sid

ed G

rills

Phone: (314) 678-6303 - FAX: (314) 781-3636 - www.star-mfg.com

Star Manufacturing International Inc. - 10 Sunnen Drive - P.O. Box 430129 - St. Louis, MO 63143-3800

Two-Sided Grills are constructed with an 18 gauge stainless steel body. Aluminum platens are standard. A hinge mechanism provides easyoperation for the top platen. Grilling height between platens is up to 3”. Metal sheathed tubular elements shall be provided as standard.Non-skid feet shall be standard. Unit shall be provided with six foot power cord with Nema rated plug (see specifications above). Units carryapproval of UL, UL Sanitation or UL Canada Standards. Printed in the U.S.A.

Typical Specifications

Model and Specifications

Due to periodic changes in designs, methods, procedures, policies and regulations, the specifications contained in this sheet are subject to change without notice. While StarManufacturing exercises good faith efforts to provide information that is accurate, we are not responsible for errors or omissions in information provided or conclusions reached asa result of using the specifications. By using the information provided, the user assumes all risks in connection with such use.

®

S t a r M a n u f a c t u r i n g

PRO-MAX® 2.0 ALUMINUM GROOVED & SMOOTH TWO-SIDED GRILLS Models PST14, PST14E, PST14T, PGT14, PGT14E & PGT14T

EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS - ALL MODELS

*CANADIAN REQUIREMENT

1055 Mendell Davis Drive, Jackson, MS 39272888-994-7636, unifiedbrands.netInformation contained in this document is known to be current and accurate at the time of printing/creation. Unified Brands recommends referencing our product line websites, unifiedbrands.net, for the most updated product information and specifications.

Hot Food Table Electric Individual Sealed Well models 3600

model 3613 shown with optional casters

Standard Features:• Die stamped, raised sanitary rim pan openings in stainless steel top• Stainless steel body construction - no assembly required.• Thermostatic controls for precise food temperatures - one per well• Drains manifolded to a common gate valve• Stainless steel, full length plate shelf - 7" deep• Stainless steel ends• Full length, 8" wide NSF workboard• Units take food pans directly, wet/dry operation• Power cord• 6" high adjustable legs• Available for 120V, 208V, or 240 volt operation

Description:Electric operated, stainless steel open shelving base hot food table with 20 gauge stainless steel top, and individual die-stamped 12" x 20" top openings. Individual thermostatically controlled, electrically heated, sealed food wells. Wells are provided with drains and are manifolded to a gate valve. Unit totally prewired to junction box, power cord is supplied. 7" wide plate shelf & 8" wide NSF workboard. Unit on 6" high adjustable legs.

Specifications:UNIT TOP: Top to be one piece of die formed 20 gauge stainless steel with 1 5/8" square nosing. Top stamped with individual 12"x 20" die formed raised perimeter openings. Unit top fitted with compliment of 12"x 20"x 6 1/2" deep, electrically heated, sealed food wells, individual thermostatically controlled. Provided with 7" deep, removable 20 gauge stainless steel plate shelf, and 8" wide x 1/2" thick, full length NSF composition workboard.

FOOD WELLS: 12"x 20" x 6 1/2" deep electrically heated, sealed food wells, individually and thermostatically controlled. Wells are provided with drains and are manifolded to a gate valve located on the left side of the unit.

CONTROLS: Thermostatic controls for elements mounted on front of 7" deep removable stainless steel plate shelf. Connections to heating elements are located outside of heated zone to avoid wiring deterioration. Individual food wells wired to common junction box(es). Power cord is supplied.

UNIT BASE: Bottom shelf to be stainless steel with channel bracing. Body ends to be stainless steel. Legs to be 6" high with adjustable bullet foot. Legs mounted to full length channel frame assembly on bottom of body assembly.

model 3612 3613 3614 3615

Options & Accessories:Counter Protectors

Serving Shelves/Plexi Shields

Overshelves

Casters

Roll Covers

Adaptor Plates

Manual Fill Faucet

Stainless Steel Back

Voltage Other than Standard On 3-5 Well Only

(cord & plug not supplied as standard with 3 phase)

Randell Hot Food Table, Page 4PP SPEC0018 Rev. A

Revised 02/05

1055 Mendell Davis Drive, Jackson, MS 39272, 888-994-7636, unifiedbrands.netInformation contained in this document is known to be current and accurate at the time of printing/creation. Unified Brands recommends referencing our product line websites, unifiedbrands.net, for the most updated product information and specifications.

Models 3600

No. of No. of Bottom Shelf 120V - 750 Watt 208V - 865 Watt 240V - 1150 Watt Model L D H Wells Elements Material Sq. Ft. KW Amps NEMA KW Amps NEMA KW Amps NEMA Ship Wt.

3612 33" 30" 36" 2 2 S.S. 5.5 1.5 12.5 5-20P 1.73 8.32 6-15P 2.3 9.58 6-15P 116

3613 48" 30" 36" 3 3 S.S. 8.1 2.25 18.75 5-30P 2.6 12.48 6-20P 3.45 14.37 6-20P 174

3614 63" 30" 36" 4 4 S.S. 10.7 3 25 5-50P 3.46 16.64 6-30P 4.6 19.16 6-30P 232

3615 78" 30" 36" 5 5 S.S. 13.3 3.75 31.25 5-50P 4.33 20.8 6-30P 5.75 23.95 6-30P 290

29"

30"

31.5"

36"

1.5"

78" X 8" X .5"POLY CUTTING BOARD

OPEN

78"

33" X 8" X .5"POLY CUTTING BRD

OPEN

33"


OPEN

48"

J

WO

OF


OPEN

63"

5"

3"

2"12"

31.5"

10"

Item No. ___________________________

Project ___________________________

Quantity ___________________________

SHORT/BID SPECIFICATIONS:Broiler shall be a Montague Legend Heavy-Duty Range-Match Model: M UFLC- ____ R [Specify width]:

…a low-profile, countertop gas-fired unit with 19,000 BTU/hr stain-less steel tubular burners with individual controls, heating heavy-duty stainless steel radiant heat deflectors (radiants), with a full width debris screen under burners; two-position, reversible cast iron ULTRA-FLOW top grates with both flat (wide) and narrow ribbed side with grease troughs; a full width front grease trough and large capacity grease container located in cool zone; 6” (152mm) front/plate rail, 1” (25mm) high rear flue riser and 4” (102mm) nickel finish legs as standard; plus all the features listed and options/accessories checked:

BURNER/RADIANT SYSTEM FEATURES:•19,000BTU/hrstainlesssteeltubularburners•Individualmanualgasvalvesforzonedheatcontrol•Standingpilotforautomaticignition•Heavy-dutystainlesssteelradiantsglowredforinfraredbroiling•Removableself-cleaningradiants•Fullwidthdebrisscreenunderburners•Fullwidthflareupreducingremovabledriptray•Radiantsanddriptrayheatshieldsreduceflare-ups

TOP-GRATE FEATURES:•ReversibleULTRA-FLOWcastirongratesections•Ribbedsidefornarrowmarking,withsidegreasetroughs•Flatsideforbroilingfishandwidemarking•1”(25mm)ribbedgratespacingforconsistentgrillingresults•Two-positiongridframeforflator3”(76mm)raised-reargrilling•Slopedgratesandsidegrategreasetroughstoreduceflare-ups

STANDARD CONSTRUCTION FEATURES:•Satinfinishstainlesssteelfront&toptrimwith6”(152mm)deepfront

rail•Othersurfacespaintedblackwithelectrolyticzincundercoating•Fullwidthfrontgreasetroughforeasytransfer•Removablelargecapacitygreasecontainer•Stainlesssteel1”(25mm)rearflueriser(matchesheightofrangerisers)•4”(102mm)adjustablenickelfinishlegsstandard•1-1/4”NPTfrontgasmanifoldwith½uniononeachend

AGENCY APPROVALS •NSFListed•CSADesignCertifiedtoANSIZ83.11•CSA1.8•CEApprovedEN203-1

THE MONTAGUE COMPANY •1830StearmanAvenue,Hayward,CA94545•800345-1830•Fax:510785-3342•montaguecompany.com

HDB-1[Rev.1/13]

Heavy-Duty Gas Underfired Broilers — Radiant Style Range-Match Counter Models

UFLC-R SeriesMODEL GUIDE

Model No. Overall Width Grates Cooking Area

UFLC-18R 18”(457mm) 2 12”x24”(305x610mm)

UFLC-24R 24” (610mm) 3 18”x24”(457x610mm)

UFLC-30R 30”(762mm) 4 26”x24”(660x610mm)

UFLC-36R 36”(914mm) 5 32”x24”(812x610mm)

UFLC-48R 48”(1219mm) 7 44”x24”(1117x610mm)

UFLC-60R 60” (1524mm) 9 56”x24”(1422x610mm)

UFLC-72R 72”(1829mm) 11 68”x24”(1727x610mm)

Model UFLC-36R shown with optional equipment stand

1830StearmanAvenue,Hayward,CA94545 800345-1830•Fax:510785-3342 www.montaguecompany.com HDB-1[Rev.1/13]

1. Broilers must be installed in accordance with local codes or in their absence with the National Fuel Gas Code:ANSIZ223.1;NaturalFuelGasCode:CAN/CGA-B149.1orPropaneInstallationCode:CAN/CGA-B149.2,asapplicable.CompliancewithcodesistheresponsibilityoftheOwnerandInstaller.

2. An adequate ventilation system is required. Refer to National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 96, “StandardforVentilationandFireProtectionofCommercialCookingOperations.”

3. This appliance is intended for commercial use by professionally trained personnel. NOT intended for Residential Use.

4. Specify installation elevation: _____________ if above 2000 feet (610m). 5.GASINLETSIZE(AllModels):1-1/4”NPTfrontmanifoldwith1/2uniononeachendprovidedforbatterycon-

nection. A properly sized gas pressure regulator must be furnished by the Installer. With 1” rear inlets, a gas pressure regulator is provided and must be installed (by others) when unit is connected to gas supply.

6.Theincominggaslinepressureintotheregulatorshouldbe8”-14”w.c.fornaturalgas,and12”-14”w.c.for propane gas.

Specify Type of Gas: M Natural M PropaneShipping Weight

Shipping Class

Cube (Crated) ft3/m3

Manifold Pressure: 6.0”WC 10.0”WCModels: Burners BTU/hr (kW) BTU/hr (kW)

UFLC-18R 2 38,000 (11.1) 38,000 (11.1) 160lbs(74kg) 85 13/.4UFLC-24R 4 76,000 (22.3) 76,000 (22.3) 220 lbs (100 kg) 85 13/.4UFLC-30R 5 95,000 (27.8) 95,000 (27.8) 265 lbs (120 kg) 85 20/.6UFLC-36R 6 114,000 (33.4) 114,000 (33.4) 305lbs(138kg) 85 20/.6UFLC-48R 8 152,000 (44.5) 152,000 (44.5) 400lbs(181kg) 85 26/.7UFLC-60R 11 209,000 (61.2) 209,000 (61.2) 495 lbs (224 kg) 85 35/1UFLC-72R 13 247,000 (72.4) 247,000 (72.4) 590lbs(267kg) 85 38/1.1

Due to continuous product improvements, specifications are subject to change without notice.

General:M 42”(1067mm)unitdepth(Suffix-40)

[Same grid size]M EquipmentStand—24”highx30-5/8”deep

(610x778mm),withstainlesssteelfront,lowershelf&tubularlegswithbulletfeet

M Casters—setoffour/six5”(127mm)castersM Flex Connector Kit [1”] NPT:

M3’(914mm)longM4’(1219mm)longM 15”(381mm)HighBack[Matches18”(457mm)

range back]

Grates, Radiants, Plate Shelves, Splash Guards: M Seafood grates, cast iron M Roundrodgrates—6”(152mm)sections:

M Hard chrome MColdrolledsteelM Scraper/cleaner for round rod gratesM Castironradiants—inplaceofstainlesssteelM Wider Plate shelf:

M 9” (229mm) M11”(279mm)M PlateShelfCutouts[for11”(279mm)only]:

Specify: M1/6 pans or M 1/4 pans or M 1/9 pans number: __ ea.

M Removable splash guard, stainless steel

International Approvals:M CE-ConformiteEuropeeneIncludes Flame Failure Valve OptionM CanadianApproval

Finish:M Stainless steel left side panelM Stainless steel right side panelM Stainless steel back panel

Manifolds: [Left rear, with pressure regulator]: M 1” NPTManifold Cap: M left side M right sideStainless Manifold Cover: M left side M right side

Minimum Clearances

Noncombustible Construction

From Back Wall 0”

Left&RightSide 0”

For use in noncombustible locations only.

Item No. ___________________________

Project ___________________________

Quantity ___________________________

Dimensions in brackets are millimeters

Heavy-Duty Gas Underfired Broilers — Radiant Style Range-Match Counter Models

UFLC-R Series

OPTIONS GUIDE:

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS & SHIPPING INFORMATION

Garland Commercial Ranges Ltd.1177 Kamato Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1X4 CANADA

General Inquries 1-905-624-0260USA Sales, Parts and Service 1-800-424-2411 Canadian Sales 1-888-442-7526 Canada or USA Parts/Service 1-800-427-6668

X Series 36" Gas Restaurant Range

Item: ______________________________

Quantity: __________________________

Project: ____________________________

Approval: __________________________

Date: ______________________________


Models: X36-6R X36-6S X36-2G24R X36-2G24S

NOTE: Ranges supplied with casters must be installed with an approved restraining device.

Specifications:Gas restaurant series range with standard size Sunfire oven. 35-7/16" (900mm) wide with a 27" (686mm) deep work top surface. Stainless steel front, sides and 4"(102mm) wide front rail. 6" (152mm) legs with adjustable feet. Six robust 2 piece 30,000 Btuh/8.797 kW (Natural gas), cast open burners set in split cast iron ergonomic grates. Griddle or optional hot top with cast iron "H" style burners, 18,000 Btuh/5.27 kW (natural gas), in lieu of open burners. Porcelain oven bottom and door liner. Two position fixed rack guide w/one oven rack. Heavy duty oven door with "keep cool" door handle. Straight steel tube oven burner 33,000 Btuh/9.67 kW (natural gas) provides quality bake and good recovery . Oven thermostat ranges from Low to 500° F (260° C). Available with storage base in lieu of oven.

Model X36-6R

Standard Features:• Large 27" (686mm) work top surface • Stainless steel front and sides• Stainless steel 4" (102mm) plate rail • Stainless steel backguard w/

removable stainless steel shelf• 12" (305mm) section stamped drip

trays w/ dimpled bottom • Durable easy to read control knobs• Easy to clean 6" (152mm) steel

core, injection molded legs • Pressure regulator, 3/4" NPT Standard on Applicable Models:• Ergonomic split cast iron top ring

grates • 30,000 Btuh/ 8.79 kW 2 piece cast

iron "Q" style donut open burner • 5/8" (15mm) thick steel griddle

plate w/manual hi/lo valve control • 4-1/4" (108mm) wide grease trough • 18,000 Btuh/5.27 kW cast iron

"H" style griddle burner per 12"(305mm) width of griddle

• Griddle plates only available on right side of range

• Straight steel tube oven burner 33,000 Btuh/9.67 kW

• Standard size Sunfire oven w/ribbed porcelain oven bottom and door interior, aluminized top, sides and back

• Oven thermostat w/ Low to 500° F (260° C)

• Nickel plated oven rack with two fixed position oven rack guides

• Heavy duty oven door with keep-cool handle

• Open storagesa base in lieu of oven

Optional Features: Hot top 12" (305mm) plate, 5/8"

(15mm) thick in lieu of two open burners, manual valve controlled w/18,000 Btuh/5.27 kW cast iron burner; standard on left side

Low profile 9-3/8" (238mm) backguard stainless steel front and sides

Additional oven racks 6” (152mm) swivel casters (4), w/

front locking Celsius temperature dials

Garland Commercial Ranges Ltd.1177 Kamato Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1X4 CANADA

General Inquries 1-905-624-0260USA Sales, Parts and Service 1-800-424-2411 Canadian Sales 1-888-442-7526 Canada or USA Parts/Service 1-800-427-6668

ModelNumber

DescriptionTotal

BTU/Hr Natural

Shipping Information

Lbs. Kg Cu. Ft.

X36-6R Six Open Burners w/26" Oven 213,000 430 195 37X36-6S Six Open Burners w/Storage Base 180,000 310 141 37X36-2G24R 24" Griddle, Two Open Burners w/26" Oven 129,000 495 225 37X36-2G24S 24" Griddle, Two Open Burners w/Storage Base 96,000 375 170 37

Width Depth Height w/shelf

Oven Interior Combustible Wall Clearance Entry Clearances

Height Depth Width Sides Rear Crated Uncrated35-7/16"

(900mm)33-1/2"

(851mm)57"

(1448mm)13"

(330mm)22"

(559mm)26-1/4"

(667mm)14"

(356mm)6"

(152mm)37"

(940mm)36-1/2"

(927mm)

Burner Ratings (BTU/Hr/kW)

Gas Type Open Top Griddle/Hot Top Standard Oven

Natural 30,000/8.79 18,000/5.27 33,000/9.67Propane 26,000/7.61 18,000/5.27 29,000/8.50

Manifold Operating PressureNatural Propane4.5" WC 11 mbar

10" WC 25 mbar

34-1/2"[876mm]

1-1/2"[39mm]

23"[586mm]

3/4" N.P.T.REAR GASINLET

2-1/4"[57mm]

27-1/4"[692mm]

4"[102mm]

21"[534mm]

30"[763mm]

6"[152mm]

35-1/2"[900mm]

13-7/8"[352mm]ADD WHENDOOR OPEN 31-1/8"

[791mm]

12-1/8"[307mm]

18-3/8"[466mm]

39-3/8"[1000mm]LOW PROFILEBACKGUARD

51"[1296mm]

STD BACKGUARDW/HIGH SHELF


Form# X36 Series (10/23/14)

Gas input ratings shown for installations up to 2000 ft.,(610m) above sea level. Please specify altitudes over 2000 ft.Note: Installation clearance reductions are applicable only where local codes permit.This product is not approved for residential use.

6 Pan CapacityStainless SteelPressureless, Connectionless Steamer

Table TopSelf-ContainedElectric Heated

Short FormGroen Intek XS 6-pan connec-tionless countertop steamer unit is available as 208, 240 or 480 volt, single or three phase, 6, 8, 12, or 14kW (12 and 14kW available in three phase only) steam cooker with a pan capacity of 6 pans (2.5” deep 12” x 20”) or 4 pans (4” deep 12” x 20”). Unit must be capable of producing steam at 212°F with no water or drain connection required. Unit must be a NSF approved holding vessel. Unit is to have invertedconvection fan technology and includes a 2 year parts and labor warranty. Unit to be NSF and UL listed and manufac-tured in the U.S.A.

Intek Steamer model XS

Groen Intek, Page 1XSA

Created 12/10

Model Numbers XS-208-6-1 (208V, 6kW, 1-Phase)XS-208-8-1 (208V, 8kW, 1-Phase)XS-208-8-3 (208V, 8kW, 3-Phase)XS-208-12-3 (208V, 12kW, 3-Phase)XS-208-14-3 (208V, 14kW, 3-Phase)XS-240-6-1 (240V, 6kW, 1-Phase)XS-240-8-1 (240V, 8kW, 1-Phase)XS-240-8-3 (240V, 8kW, 3-Phase)XS-240-12-3 (240V, 12kW, 3-Phase)XS-240-14-3 (240V, 14kW, 3-Phase)XS-480-12-3 (480V, 12kW, 3-Phase)

DescriptionThe Intek XS connectionless countertop steamer unit has a pan capacity of 6 pans (2.5” deep 12” x 20”) or 4 pans (4” deep 12” x 20”). Unit must be capable of produc-ing steam at 212°F with no water or drain connection required. Unit is to have inverted convection fan technol-ogy and includes a 2 year parts and labor warranty. NSF listed as both steamer and holding cabinet. UL listed.

Construction• 14 gauge reinforced stainless steel cavity• Insulated cavity and double door panel• Heavy refrigeration style door handle with magnetic latch• Stainless steel wire racks positioned to support 2.5”, 4”, or 6” deep pans Operation• Inverted flow convection fan in cooking chamber• NSF approved holding cabinet• Open door while cooking• Heating element external to compartment and not exposed to water• 3 gallon capacity water reservoir

Options/Accessories Single Stand No Casters Single Stand w/Casters Double Stand No Casters Double Stand w/Casters Door Hinged Left Correction Package Auto Water Fill and Drain Line

Origin of ManufactureSteamer shall be designed and manufactured in the United States.

Model XS

ApplicationsPastaRiceVegetables (Fresh & Frozen)Seafood (Fresh & Frozen)PoultryPotatoesEggsMeatsReheat Cook-Chill &Prepared Foods

1055 Mendell Davis Drive, Jackson, MS 39272, 888-994-7636, unifiedbrands.net© 2009 Unified Brands. All Rights Reserved. Unified Brands is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Dover Corporation.

Model XS

Model No. No. of Pans

Voltage KW/hr NEMA WidthIN

DepthIN

HeightIN

Weight LBS

XS-208-6-1 6 208/60/1 6 L6-30P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-208-8-1 6 208/60/1 8 6-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-208-8-3 6 208/60/3 8 L15-30P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-208-12-3 6 208/60/3 12 15-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-208-14-3 6 208/60/3 14 15-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-240-6-1 6 240/60/1 6 L6-30P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-240-8-1 6 240/60/1 8 6-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-240-8-3 6 240/60/3 8 L15-30P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-240-12-3 6 240/60/3 12 15-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-240-14-3 6 240/60/3 14 15-50P 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

XS-480-12-3 6 480/60/3 12 L16-20 24" 23-2/5" 28-1/2" 170

H E A T E D H O L D I N G

P.O. Box 696 ■ Louisville, KY 40201 ■ Toll-free: 1-800-814-2028 ■ Local: 502-778-2791 ■ Quote & Order Fax: 1-800-444-0602

a division of ITW Food Equipment Group LLC

Item # C.S.I. Section 11420

F45414 (07/14)

VBP SERIESHOLDING & TRANSPORT CABINETS

UL listed. UL listed to Canadian safety standards. Classified by UL to NSF Std. #4.

SPECIFICATIONS

Vulcan Hart Model No. VBP heated holding and transport cabinets. Blower motor for gentle and even temperature distribution. Complete with 5" heavy duty casters (2 swivel with brakes and 2 rigid) (VBP5 has 3" casters). Control panel containing heating indicator light, analog thermometer, and full range thermostat for temperatures up to 190ºF (88ºC). Adjustable racking will hold 18" x 26" or 12" x 20" pans or a combination of both on 11⁄2" centers. Lip-load racking will hold 18" x 26" pans on 11⁄2" centers. Shelving will hold a variety of pan sizes. Complete with universal tray slides adjustable on 11⁄2" centers. Cabinet interior and exterior are both constructed out of 20 gauge stainless steel. Recessed side-mounted handles, magnetic action door latch, and full insulation; 11⁄2" in side walls and 2" in top. Integrated steel frame for maximum strength. Field reversible doors. Complete with rear mounted cord and plug: NEMA 5-15 for 120 volts and NEMA 6-15 for 208-240 volts. Lifetime warranty on heating elements. ENERGY STAR® qualified (except for model VBP18).

Units with adjustable racking:VBP5 (see reverse for capacities)VBP7 (see reverse for capacities)VBP13 (see reverse for capacities)VBP15 (see reverse for capacities)VBP18 (see reverse for capacities)

Units with lip-load racking:VBP7LL (Fifteen 18" x 26" x 1" sheet pans)VBP15LL (Thirty 18" x 26" x 1" sheet pans)

Units with shelves:VBP7SL (Three Shelves)VBP15SL (Six Shelves)

STANDARD FEATURES

■ Holding Capacity: • 18" x 26" sheet pans • 12" x 20" pans, or a combination of both on 11⁄2" centers • Other pan sizes on shelves

■ Blower motor for gentle and even temperature distribution ■ Dutch doors (VBP15 and VBP18) ■ 5" heavy duty casters (2 swivel with brakes and 2 rigid)

(3" on VBP5) ■ Recessed side mounted handles ■ Heating indicator light ■ Analog thermometer ■ Full range thermostat for temperatures up to 190°F (88°C) ■ Universal tray slides adjustable on 11⁄2" centers.

VBP15 & VBP13 ship with 10 pairs of tray slides. VBP7 & VBP5 ships with 5 pairs, VBP18 ships with 15 pairs.

■ Interior and the exterior are both constructed out of 20 gauge stainless steel

■ Fully insulated with 11⁄2" in side walls and 2" in top ■ Integrated steel frame for maximum strength ■ Magnetic action door latch ■ Field reversible doors ■ Rear mounted cord ■ Complete with cord and plug: NEMA 5-15 for 120 volts and

NEMA 6-15 for 208-240 volts ■ Lifetime warranty on the heating elements ■ ENERGY STAR® qualified (except for model VBP18)

OPTIONS

208/240 voltHumidity panFull perimeter bumperGlass Dutch doorsWire shelves to sit on tray slidesElectronic control with digital display (120V only)Additional tray slides

Model VBP15

(Except VBP18)

NOTE: In line with its policy to continually improve its products, Vulcan reserves the right to change materials and specifications without notice.

P.O. Box 696 ■ Louisville, KY 40201 ■ Toll-free: 1-800-814-2028 ■ Local: 502-778-2791 ■ Quote & Order Fax: 1-800-444-0602

a division of ITW Food Equipment Group LLC

H E A T E D H O L D I N G

F45414 (07/14)

MODEL

DIMENSIONS CAPACITY ELECTRICAL SHIPPING WEIGHTS

EXTERIOR 12" x 20" x 21⁄2" PANS

18" x 26" SHEET PANS VOLTS WATTS AMPS LBS KG

VBP5 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 301⁄2" H 10 5 120 1,000 8.3 173 79

VBP7 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 39" H 14 7 120 1,000 8.3 198 90

VBP7LL 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 39" H NA 15 120 1,000 8.3 198 90

VBP7SL 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 39" H Unit comes with 3 shelves 120 1,000 8.3 198 90

VBP13 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 593⁄4" H 26 13 120 1,200 10 270 123

VBP15 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 651⁄4" H 30 15 120 1,200 10 297 135

VBP15LL 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 651⁄4" H NA 30 120 1,200 10 297 135

VBP15SL 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 651⁄4" H Unit comes with 6 shelves 120 1,200 10 297 135

VBP18 271⁄4" W x 33" D x 731⁄2" H 36 18 120 1,500 12.5 337 153

*per compartmentOptional bumper adds 31⁄4" to the width and 15⁄8" to the depth.

VBP SERIESHOLDING & TRANSPORT CABINETS

VBP5 Front & Side Views VBP7 Front & Side Views

VBP13 Front & Side Views VBP15 & VBP18 Front & Side Views

All Models Top View

Drawings shown withoptional bumper

ITEM#

HATCO CORPORATION P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A.(800) 558-0607 • (414) 671-6350 • Fax (800) 543-7521 • Int’l. Fax (414) 671-3976www.hatcocorp.com • E-mail: [email protected] No. HDW Spec Sheet

DRAWER WARMERSModels HDW-1, -2, -3, -4 HDW-1N, -2N, -3N HDW-1B, -2B, -3B HDW-1BN, -2BN, -3BN

Hold everything from meat to vegetables to rolls in the Hatco Drawer Warmer. Each Drawer features adjustable sliding ventsand individual thermostatic controls to hold a wide variety of hot foods safely for peakserving periods.

FLEXIBILITYAvailable in 1-, 2-, 3-, and 4-drawer freestandingmodels built of rugged stainless steel withdurable nylon rollers, stainless steel slides, and heavy-duty hardware. Each drawer has a recessed on/off switch, thermostat,temperature monitor, and vent slides tocontrol humidity. Standard 203⁄4" x 123⁄4" x 6"(527 x 324 x 152 mm) pans that lift straight outof standard width units are supplied with eachdrawer. A larger food pan 20" x 15" x 5" (508 x 381 x 127 mm) with drawer frame isoptional. Also available as 1-, 2-, and 3-drawerbuilt-in units and narrow freestanding and built-in models.The insulated top and sides of the HatcoDrawer Warmer provide maximum energyefficiency and the heating elements arewarranted for two years.Freestanding units come with 6' (1829 mm) cordand plug. A 4' (1219 mm) flexible conduit isstandard with built-in units.An optional water/spillage pan and splashbaffle are available to create a humidifiedenvironment.

QUALITYThe following features assure the finestperformance for years to come:• Available in narrow and standard widths,built-in or freestanding models.

• Each drawer has a recessed individualthermostatic control, temperature monitor,and on-off switch.

• Heavy-duty drawer slides with nylon rollersand adjustable sliding vents on each drawer.

• Standard 203⁄4" x 123⁄4" x 6" (527 x 324 x 152 mm) pan supplied with eachdrawer lifts straight out of standard widthDrawer Warmers.

• Optional oversized drawer and pan 20" x 15" x 5" (508 x 381 x 127 mm) available.

• Optional heavy-duty casters available for portability.

• Completely insulated individual cavitiesprovide maximum energy efficiency.

• Two-year warranty on heating elements anddrawer rollers and slides.

METAL SHEATHED HEATING ELEMENTS GUARANTEEDAGAINST BURNOUT AND BREAKAGE FOR TWO YEARS.

Model HDW-3with optional casters

Model HDW-2 with optional stainless steel legs

Model HDW-3Bbuilt-in

Printed in U.S.A.October 2011

Model “W” Dimension “D” Dimension• “H” DimensionHDW-1B 281⁄4" (718 mm) 233⁄4" (603 mm) 101⁄8" (257 mm)

HDW-2B 281⁄4" (718 mm) 233⁄4" (603 mm) 201⁄4" (514 mm)

HDW-3B 281⁄4" (718 mm) 233⁄4" (603 mm) 303⁄8" (772 mm)

HDW-1BN 195⁄8" (498 mm) 281⁄8" (714 mm) 101⁄8" (257 mm)

HDW-2BN 195⁄8" (498 mm) 281⁄8" (714 mm) 201⁄4" (514 mm)

HDW-3BN 195⁄8" (498 mm) 281⁄8" (714 mm) 303⁄8" (772 mm)

Built-in Cutout Requirements

• Depth dimension includes 11⁄2" (38 mm) for conduit connector.

OPTIONS (NOT FOR RETROFIT)q Designer Drawer Front Colors: Warm Red, Black, Gray Granite, White Granite,Navy Blue, Hunter Green, Antique Copper

q ITC Electronic Control (All models except HDW-3N, -3BN), 120V only (requiredon all drawers)

q Oversized Drawer Frame and Pan 20" x 15" x 5" (508 x 381 x 127 mm) in lieu of Standard Drawer with Pan (Standard width models only)

q Biscuit Pan Drawer (Accommodates two 18" x 13" (457 x 330 mm) Half-sizeSheet Pans – not included) in lieu of Standard Drawer with Pan (Standardwidth models only)

q Chip Guard (Standard width models only)

ITEM#

PRODUCT SPECS - Drawer WarmerThe Drawer Warmers shall be a Hatco Model ... , freestanding or built-in asmanufactured by the Hatco Corporation, Milwaukee, WI 53234, U.S.A.With 24/7 parts and service assistance (U.S. and Canada only), the unitshall have ... drawer(s) and be rated at ... watts, ... amps. Freestanding modelshall be equipped with a cord and plug and the built-in model with 4' (1219 mm) flexible conduit.

The Drawer Warmer shall have a stainless steel exterior, interior, drawer slides,and assembly. Drawer rollers shall be durable nylon. The drawer assembly shallfully extend to allow removal of pans without tilting in standard width models.

The unit shall be insulated top and sides of cabinet with individual powerswitch, thermostat and temperature monitor for each drawer.

ACCESSORIESq 6" (152 mm) Stainless Steel Adjustable Legsq 2" (51 mm) Diameter Swivel Casters (1-, 2-, or 3-Drawer models) – Adds 21/2" (64 mm) to Height

q 3" (76 mm) Diameter Locking Casters (1-, 2-, or 3-Drawer models) – Adds 41/4" (108 mm) to Height

q 4" (102 mm) Diameter Locking Casters (1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-Drawer models) – Adds 51/4" (133 mm) to Height

q 5" (127 mm) Diameter Locking Casters (1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-Drawer models) – Adds 61/4" (159 mm) to Height

q Water/Spillage Pan (Splash Baffle recommended)q Splash Baffle (With Water/Spillage Pan creates humidified environment)q Stainless Steel Food Pans

SPECIFICATIONSFreestanding – Standard

Models Watts AmpsH No. of Drawers Shipping WeightHDW-1B 450 3.8 One 88 lbs. ( 40 kg)HDW-2B 900 7.5 Two 159 lbs. ( 72 kg)HDW-3B 1350 11.3 Three 223 lbs. (101 kg)

Models Watts AmpsH No. of Drawers Shipping WeightHDW-1N 450 3.8 One 97 lbs. ( 44 kg)HDW-2N 900 7.5 Two 168 lbs. ( 76 kg)HDW-3N 1350 11.3 Three 232 lbs. (105 kg)

Models Watts AmpsH No. of Drawers Shipping WeightHDW-1BN 450 3.8 One 88 lbs. ( 40 kg)HDW-2BN 900 7.5 Two 159 lbs. ( 72 kg)HDW-3BN 1350 11.3 Three 223 lbs. (101 kg)

Models Watts AmpsH No. of Drawers Shipping WeightHDW-1 450 3.8 One 97 lbs. ( 44 kg)HDW-2 900 7.5 Two 168 lbs. ( 76 kg)HDW-3 1350 11.3 Three 232 lbs. (105 kg)HDW-4 1800 15.0 Four 296 lbs. (134 kg)

s 1-, 2-, and 3-drawer freestanding units are standard with 4" (102 mm) legs; four drawerfreestanding units with 6" (152 mm) stainless steel legs. Accessory 6" (152 mm)stainless legs, or 2" (51 mm), 3" (76 mm), or 5" (127 mm) diameter casters availableon 1-, 2-, and 3-drawer units, or 4" (102 mm) diameter casters available on all units.

H Based on 120 volts.

Freestanding – Narrow

Built-in – Standard

Built-in – Narrow

DIMENSIONSFreestanding – (Without legs or casters)HDW-1: 291⁄2"W x 225⁄8"D x 11"H (749 x 575 x 279 mm).HDW-1N: 207⁄8"W x 27"D x 11"H (530 x 686 x 279 mm).HDW-2: 291⁄2"W x 225⁄8"D x 211⁄8"H (749 x 575 x 537 mm).HDW-2N: 207⁄8"W x 27"D x 211⁄8"H (530 x 686 x 537 mm).HDW-3: 291⁄2"W x 225⁄8"D x 311⁄4"H (749 x 575 x 794 mm).HDW-3N: 207⁄8"W x 27"D x 311⁄4"H (530 x 686 x 794 mm).HDW-4: 291⁄2"W x 225⁄8"D x 413⁄8"H (749 x 575 x 1051 mm).

Built-in – (Excluding front mounting flange)HDW-1B: 281⁄8"W x 223⁄8"D x 93⁄4"H (714 x 568 x 248 mm).HDW-1BN: 191⁄2"W x 263⁄4"D x 93⁄4"H (495 x 679 x 248 mm).HDW-2B: 281⁄8"W x 223⁄8"D x 20"H (714 x 568 x 508 mm).HDW-2BN: 191⁄2"W x 263⁄4"D x 20"H (495 x 679 x 508 mm).HDW-3B: 281⁄8"W x 223⁄8"D x 301⁄8"H (714 x 568 x 765 mm).HDW-3BN: 191⁄2"W x 263⁄4"D x 301⁄8"H (495 x 679 x 765 mm).

VOLTAGE120 volts, single phase, freestanding, 1-, 2-, 3-, and 4-drawer models use NEMA5-15P. 4-drawer model not available for Canada. 208 and 240 volts available,freestanding models use NEMA 6-15P. Export voltages available.

CORD LOCATIONBack of unit, lower left corner.

PLUG CONFIGURATIONS

291⁄2" (749 mm)Standard Models

207⁄8" (530 mm)Narrow Models

11"(279 mm)

211⁄8"(537 mm)

311⁄4"(794 mm)

413⁄8"(1051 mm)

FRONT VIEW

225⁄8" (575 mm)Standard Models

27" (686 mm)Narrow Models

SIDE VIEW

FOUR DRAWER

THREE DRAWER

TWO DRAWER

ONE DRAWER Location of Cord

FREESTANDING UNITS ONLY

DRAWER WARMERSModels HDW-1, -2, -3, -4 HDW-1N, -2N, -3N HDW-1B, -2B, -3B HDW-1BN, -2BN, -3BN

NEMA 6-15P CEE 7/7 SchukoNEMA 5-15P BS-1363

HATCO CORPORATION P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. • (800) 558-0607 • (414) 671-6350 Fax (800) 543-7521 • Int’l. Fax (414) 671-3976 • www.hatcocorp.com • E-mail: [email protected]

Form No. HDW Spec Sheet

Freestanding Models Built-In Models

Printed in U.S.A.October2011

Cutout

CutoutLocking Strip

LockingStrip

1" (25 mm) Min.Floor to Cutout

CabinetFace

W

H

LockingStrip

1/8" (3 mm)

7/8" (22 mm)

D

A Standex Company

MODELS: □ W-3Vi

PRODUCT: QUANTITY: ITEM #:

APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company · 729 Third Ave., Dallas, TX 75226 Rev. 11/29/11bd (800) 527-2100 · (214) 421-7366 · Fax (214) 565-0976 · www.apwwyott.com· [email protected]

X*PERT™ Series Classic Countertop

12” x 20” Warmer

Designed Smart

The W-3Vi warmer has an energy efficient design that keeps hot food at the perfect serving temperature.

The unique serpentine shaped heating element evenly distributes heat throughout the unit.

The warmer is provided with insulation to protect interior parts and countertops from heat build-up.

Designed to run either with water (best option) or dry (will not harm warmer).

Built Solid

Constructed with heavy-duty stainless steel for excellent durability.

Inside liner made with stainless steel.

Steel “element support” stabilizes heating elements and reflects heat toward food.

Reliability backed by APW Wyott’s Warranty All APW Wyott warming equipment is backed by a 1-year parts and labor warranty, including our “Enhanced Warranty” service that replaces new units with certain product issues through the convenience of direct/factory shipments.

Certified by the following agencies:

APW Wyott Design Features

22 qt. capacity

All Stainless steel well pan and housing

Superior element configuration

Heavy-duty wiring extends element life

Bottom-insulated

Infinite temperature control

Accepts all APW Wyott steam table pans and accessories .

See riverside side for product specifications


A Standex Company

MODELS: □ W-3Vi

PRODUCT: QUANTITY: ITEM #:

APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company · 729 Third Ave., Dallas, TX 75226 Rev. 11/29/11bd (800) 527-2100 · (214) 421-7366 · Fax (214) 565-0976 · www.apwwyott.com· [email protected]

X*PERT™ Series Classic Countertop

12” x 20” Warmer

Product Specifications Construction: Stainless steel well pan and housing; fiberglass insulation

Dimensions: 9 ¾”H x 14 1/16” W x 22 3/32” D (24.7 cm x 35.7 cm x 56.1 cm)

Electrical Information: Each unit is equipped with a 60” three wire grounded power cord which terminates with a standard three pronged male plug. The 120V unit uses a NEMA 5-15 plug.

Electrical Specifications: 120V, 1200 W, 10 Amps 240V, 1200W, 5 Amps 230V, 1100W, 4.8 Amps

Capacity: 22 qts (21L)

Shipping Information: 30 Lbs (10.9 kg) Freight Class: 92 ½ FOB: Arizona, 85621

*APW Wyott Reserves the right to modify specifications or discontinue models without incurring obligation.


9040

K-7

QD

-37D

.1

525 South Coldwater RoadWeidman, Michigan 48893-9683

Phone 1-800-621-8560 Fax 1-800-634-5369

SYM.DATEDESCRIPTIONBYAS BUILTNOTE: YOUR EQUIPMENT HAS NOW BEEN

THROUGH MANUFACTURING. ANY

ADDITIONAL CHANGES WILL RESULT IN

ADDITIONAL COST AND DELAY TO THE

SCHEDULED SHIP DATE

TO

AV

OID

LA

TE

SH

IPM

EN

T, D

EA

LER

SU

PP

LIE

D B

UY

OU

TS

SU

CH

A

S S

OU

P W

EL

LS, H

EA

T L

AM

PS

, WA

RM

ER

S E

TC

... M

US

T B

E

MA

RK

ED

WIT

H J

OB

NA

ME

AN

D/O

R R

AN

DE

LL

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G

FIL

E N

O.,

AN

D M

US

T B

E R

EC

EIV

ED

BY

RA

ND

ELL

MFG

. AT

LE

AS

T (

1) W

EE

K P

RIO

R T

O S

CH

ED

UL

ED

SH

IP D

AT

E.

IF T

HE

A

BO

VE

RE

QU

IRE

ME

NT

S A

RE

NO

T M

ET

, TH

IS J

OB

CO

ULD

SH

IP

WIT

HO

UT

TH

ES

E C

OM

PO

NE

NT

S I

NS

TA

LLE

D.

RA

ND

ELL

WIL

L O

NLY

INS

TA

LL U

L LI

ST

ED

CO

MP

ON

EN

TS

.

RA

ND

ELL

BU

ILD

TO

LER

AN

CE

= ±

1/8

" O

VE

RA

LL

ME

AS

UR

EM

EN

TA

LL 1

20V

- 15

A &

20A

CU

ST

OM

ER

GE

NE

RA

L U

SE

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

OU

TLE

TS

WIL

L B

E G

FI.

DR

OP

-INS

IN

TO

P E

XT

EN

SIO

NS

MA

Y N

OT

EX

CE

ED

27"

IN

DE

PT

H F

RO

M W

OR

K S

UR

FAC

ED

RO

P-IN

S I

N R

EF

RIG

ER

AT

OR

S M

AY

NO

T E

XC

EE

D 2

4" IN

D

EP

TH

FR

OM

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

Randell9040-7QD-37D.1Item#:205

Qdoba Mexican Grill - Generic 2012Avanti Restaurant Solutions

jbolton

Typewritten Text

jbolton

Typewritten Text

Item 206: NIGHT COVERS INCLUDED IN ITEM 205

jbolton

Typewritten Text

RachelR

Textbox

http://www.pdffactory.com

PROJECT NAME:

LOCATION:

ITEM NO:

QTY:

MODEL NO:

AIA NO:

SIS NO:

CSI SECTION: 11400

SHORT FORM: 9000-7 Back Mount Worktops, Model 9604-7 shown.

Worktops/UndercountersPPSPEC90007 RevA

Revised 02/13

AVAILABLE MODELS: 9402-7 9402F-7 9802-7 9802F-7 9302-7 9302F-7 9602-7 9604-7

STANDARD FEATURES: • Self-contained, removable, replaceable refrigeration

package that utilizes R-134a refrigerant, (R-404a in freezer models) both are “CFC free”

• “Front Breathing” (on legs/casters) refrigeration system, no side or back clearance required. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7.

• Stainless steel top, sides, and front• Fully adjustable shelves behind self-closing door

CABINET EXTERIOR: The top, sides, and front are stainless steel. Bottom and back of unit are corrosion resistant steel. Door opening frames are ABS and contain magnetic strip for positive seal of door gaskets. Freezer models with door frame heater to prevent gasket freezing. Units ship standard on (4) 6” high legs with adjustable bullet feet.

CABINET INTERIOR: Interior of cabinet is fully coved to meet N.S.F. standard #7. The Interior bottom, back, and top are anodized aluminum with coved corners for easy clean-up. The interior ends are ABS. Two adjustable powder coat finished shelves behind each door, adjustable on 1” increments. Unit insulated with a minimum of 2.5” of CFC free, foamed in place polyurethane.

Self-contained, refrigerator or freezer unit with stainless steel flat worktop and a 3” high backsplash. Back-mounted removable, replaceable, R-134a refrigeration. “Front Breathing” system, requires no side or back clearance. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7. Self-closing door(s), 6” high adjustable legs, and

cordset for 115V operation. Models range from 27” to 72”, and are 30” deep and 36” high.

WORKTOPS/UNDERCOUNTERSBACK MOUNT WORKTOP

DOORS: Stainless steel front with easy to grasp recessed handle, mounted on heavy duty concealed hinges. Hinges are all stainless steel with bronze pivot pin in nylon bushing, spring loaded to be self-closing. Doors with foamed in place insulation, press fit magnetic gaskets - (designed for installation & removal without tools), and deep draw ABS interior liner for maximum insulation value.

REFRIGERATION: CFC free, R-134a back-mounted refrigeration system to be self-contained with evaporator blower coil, compressor, thermostatic control, forced-air condensing coil and capillary tube contained in removable assembly. Condensate evaporator provided. Freezer utilizes CFC free, R-404a refrigerant, and automatic, self-defrosting system for blower coil. Units totally prewired and to be supplied with 8’ cordset (NEMA 5-15P) for 115V operation. “Front Breathing” refrigeration system, requires no side or back clearance. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7.

ORIGIN OF MANUFACTURE: Designed and manufactured in the United States.

OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES: Stainless steel back panel Refrigerated drawers Overshelves (double or single

tier) Casters Export voltages


9000-7

27"REFRIG18"18"

*

36"

27"REFRIG

60"

24"24"

39"

*

S/SEND

48"

36"

30"

27"

27"

24"REFRIG 24"REFRIG 24"REFRIG

72"

(4) 1" RUBBER BUM PER @ REAR

MUST HAVE 1" OF CLEARENCEIN THE REAR FOR PROPER AIR FLOW

9302F-7 & 9802F-7 Only

Model L D H Doors Storage Cu. Ft. Top HP Volt Amps NEMA Ship Wt.

9402-7 27” 30” 36” (1)27” 5.66 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 190

9402F-7 27” 30” 36” (1)27” 5.66 backsplash 1/3 115/60/1 6.8 5-15P 190

9802-7 36” 30” 36” (2)18” 7.87 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 220

9802F-7 36” 30” 36” (2)18” 7.87 backsplash 1/2 115/60/1 8.2 5-15P 220

9302-7 48” 30” 36” (2)24” 10.82 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 265

9302F-7 48” 30” 36” (2)24” 10.82 backsplash 1/2 115/60/1 8.2 5-15P 265

9602-7 60” 30” 36” (2)27” 13.77 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 300

9604-7 72” 30” 36” (3)24” 16.72 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 330

Drawings are to be viewed in the same order as the chart, one drawing to represent refrigerator and freezer units

NOTE: When ordering casters, 6” casters equal 35” height; 4” casters equal 33” height

PROJECT NAME:

LOCATION:

ITEM NO:

QTY:

MODEL NO:

AIA NO:

SIS NO:

CSI SECTION: 11400

9000-7 and 9412-32-7 Back Mount Salad Tops, Model 9412-32D-7 with non-standard cover and optional backsplash shown.

Prep TablesPPSPEC00009 RevA

Revised 10/13

AVAILABLE MODELS: 9401-7 9412-32-7 9412-32D-7 9801-7 9303-7 9304-7 9305-7 9601-7

STANDARD FEATURES: • Self-contained, removable, replaceable refrigeration package that utilizes “CFC free” R-134a refrigerant• Front Breathing / Down-Draft refrigeration system• Removable stainless steel hood style cover• Fully adjustable shelves behind self-closing doors

(model 9412-32D-7 has (2)drawers in leiu of doors)• Full length NSF approved composition cutting board• Stainless steel top, sides, and front• Hot gas Condensate evaporator

CABINET EXTERIOR: Constructed of all metal. The top, sides, and front are stainless steel. Cabinet top to beone piece die-formed 20 gauge stainless steel with 1 1/2”high square nosing. Top to have cutouts with raisedrims and recessed adaptor to hold 6” deep pans. Fully assembled and installed stainless steel roll cover that also provide shelf for light duty storage of items. Bottom & back of unit are corrosion resistant steel. Full length NSF cutting board provided. Door openings to be ABS and to contain magnetic strip for positive sealing of gaskets. Model 9412-32D-7 comes with (2) refrigerated drawers, each opening frame to be stainless steel with ABS breaker strips. Drawer fronts to be 24 gauge stainless steel with 16 gauge stainless handle, magnetic gasket, ABS interior liner and foamed in place insulation. Units ship standard on (4) 6” legs, except for models 9412-32-7 & 9412-32D-7 which ship standard on 2 1/2” high casters (front two with locks).

Range from 27” to 60” long models, with a work surface height of 36”. The models 9412-32-7 and 9412-32D-7 are 32.75” deep, while the others are 30” deep. Self-contained refrigerated salad top unit with back-mounted removable, replaceable, R-134a refrigeration system. “Front Breathing” system, requiring no side or back clearance. Top openings include sanitary raised rims and recessed adaptor to hold several 1/6 size pans.

PREPARATION TABLEBACK MOUNT SALAD TOP MODEL 9000-7

CABINET INTERIOR: Fully coved to meet N.S.F.standard #7. The Interior bottom, back, and top areanodized aluminum with coved corners for easyclean-up. The interior ends are ABS. Unit insulatedwith a minimum of 2.5” of CFC free, foamed in placepolyurethane. (Model 9412-32D-7 with two refrigerateddrawers below top. Each drawer contains two 12” x 20”x 6” deep polycarbonate pans- pans are removablewithout removing drawer tracks. Drawer tracks are 14gauge stainless steel with 1 5/16” stainless steel ballbearings, self-closing and removable).

DOORS: Stainless steel front with easy to grasprecessed handles, mounted on heavy duty concealedhinges. Hinges are all stainless steel with bronze pivotpin in nylon bushing, spring loaded to be self-closing.Door with foamed in place insulation, press fit magneticgaskets - (designed for installation & removal withouttools), and deep draw ABS interior liner for maximuminsulation value. (Model 9412-32D-7, has refrigerateddrawers in lieu of door).

REFRIGERATION: CFC free, R-134a backmounted refrigeration system to be self-contained withevaporator blower coil, compressor, thermostaticcontrol, forced-air condensing coil and capillary tubecontained in removable assembly. Condensateevaporator provided. Units totally prewired and to besupplied with 8’ cordset(NEMA 5-15P) for 115 Voperation. “Front Breathing” refrigeration system,requires no side or back clearance.

This equipment is intended for use in rooms havingan ambient temperature of 86˚F (30˚C) or less.

ORIGIN OF MANUFACTURE: Designed andmanufactured in the United States.

OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES: Stainless steel back panel Overshelves (double or single

tier) Backsplash Casters Drawers in leiu of doors


9000-7 & 9412-32-7

24"REFRIG24"REFRIG

5.125"

*

S/SEND

48" x 12" x 1/2 "WHITE POLY BOARD

24"REFRIG 24"REFRIG

*


48"

1.441" 1.441"

48"

1.375"15.68"

7.75"

43.75"

30"

36"

24"REFRIG24"REFRIG

*


1.375"

48"

8.593"

27"REFRIG.

27"

27" X 12" X .5"POLY BOARD

S/SEND

32"REFRIG.

32"REFRIG.

32"


1.625" 1.625"

32"REFRIG.


1.625"

32"

1.625"

46"

32.75"

36"

*18"

REFRIG.

18"

REFRIG.

36"

12.25"

27"REFRIG27"REFRIG

60"

60" X 12" X .5"POLY BOARD

1.625" 2.5"

2" 1.5"

Model L W H Doors Storage Cu. Ft. Pan Capacity HP Volt Amps NEMA Ship Wt.

9401-7 27” 30” 36” (1)27” 5.66 (3)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 175

9412-32D-7 32” 32.75” 36” (2)32” drawers - (2) 12”x20”x6” per drawer & (6) 1/3

1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 300

9412-32-7 32” 32.75” 36” (1)32” 8.62 (2) 12”x20” 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 252

9801-7 36” 30” 36” (2)18” 7.87 (4)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 245

9303-7 48” 30” 36” (2) 24” 10.82 (4)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 280

9304-7 48” 30” 36” (2) 24” 10.82 (5)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 280

9305-7 48” 30” 36” (2) 24” 10.82 (6)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 280

9601-7 60” 30” 36” (2) 27” 13.77 (7)1/3 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 300



PROJECT NAME:

LOCATION:

ITEM NO:

QTY:

MODEL NO:

AIA NO:

SIS NO:

CSI SECTION: 11400

SHORT FORM: 9000-7 Back Mount Worktops, Model 9604-7 shown.

Worktops/UndercountersPPSPEC90007 RevA

Revised 02/13

AVAILABLE MODELS: 9402-7 9402F-7 9802-7 9802F-7 9302-7 9302F-7 9602-7 9604-7

STANDARD FEATURES: • Self-contained, removable, replaceable refrigeration

package that utilizes R-134a refrigerant, (R-404a in freezer models) both are “CFC free”

• “Front Breathing” (on legs/casters) refrigeration system, no side or back clearance required. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7.

• Stainless steel top, sides, and front• Fully adjustable shelves behind self-closing door

CABINET EXTERIOR: The top, sides, and front are stainless steel. Bottom and back of unit are corrosion resistant steel. Door opening frames are ABS and contain magnetic strip for positive seal of door gaskets. Freezer models with door frame heater to prevent gasket freezing. Units ship standard on (4) 6” high legs with adjustable bullet feet.

CABINET INTERIOR: Interior of cabinet is fully coved to meet N.S.F. standard #7. The Interior bottom, back, and top are anodized aluminum with coved corners for easy clean-up. The interior ends are ABS. Two adjustable powder coat finished shelves behind each door, adjustable on 1” increments. Unit insulated with a minimum of 2.5” of CFC free, foamed in place polyurethane.

Self-contained, refrigerator or freezer unit with stainless steel flat worktop and a 3” high backsplash. Back-mounted removable, replaceable, R-134a refrigeration. “Front Breathing” system, requires no side or back clearance. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7. Self-closing door(s), 6” high adjustable legs, and

cordset for 115V operation. Models range from 27” to 72”, and are 30” deep and 36” high.

WORKTOPS/UNDERCOUNTERSBACK MOUNT WORKTOP

DOORS: Stainless steel front with easy to grasp recessed handle, mounted on heavy duty concealed hinges. Hinges are all stainless steel with bronze pivot pin in nylon bushing, spring loaded to be self-closing. Doors with foamed in place insulation, press fit magnetic gaskets - (designed for installation & removal without tools), and deep draw ABS interior liner for maximum insulation value.

REFRIGERATION: CFC free, R-134a back-mounted refrigeration system to be self-contained with evaporator blower coil, compressor, thermostatic control, forced-air condensing coil and capillary tube contained in removable assembly. Condensate evaporator provided. Freezer utilizes CFC free, R-404a refrigerant, and automatic, self-defrosting system for blower coil. Units totally prewired and to be supplied with 8’ cordset (NEMA 5-15P) for 115V operation. “Front Breathing” refrigeration system, requires no side or back clearance. Integrated rubber bumpers provide 1” rear clearance on models 9802F-7 and 9302F-7.

ORIGIN OF MANUFACTURE: Designed and manufactured in the United States.

OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES: Stainless steel back panel Refrigerated drawers Overshelves (double or single

tier) Casters Export voltages


9000-7

27"REFRIG18"18"

*

36"

27"REFRIG

60"

24"24"

39"

*

S/SEND

48"

36"

30"

27"

27"

24"REFRIG 24"REFRIG 24"REFRIG

72"

(4) 1" RUBBER BUM PER @ REAR

MUST HAVE 1" OF CLEARENCEIN THE REAR FOR PROPER AIR FLOW

9302F-7 & 9802F-7 Only

Model L D H Doors Storage Cu. Ft. Top HP Volt Amps NEMA Ship Wt.

9402-7 27” 30” 36” (1)27” 5.66 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 190

9402F-7 27” 30” 36” (1)27” 5.66 backsplash 1/3 115/60/1 6.8 5-15P 190

9802-7 36” 30” 36” (2)18” 7.87 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 220

9802F-7 36” 30” 36” (2)18” 7.87 backsplash 1/2 115/60/1 8.2 5-15P 220

9302-7 48” 30” 36” (2)24” 10.82 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 265

9302F-7 48” 30” 36” (2)24” 10.82 backsplash 1/2 115/60/1 8.2 5-15P 265

9602-7 60” 30” 36” (2)27” 13.77 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 300

9604-7 72” 30” 36” (3)24” 16.72 backsplash 1/4 115/60/1 5.5 5-15P 330



2110 South 26th Street

PO Box 1720

Manitowoc, WI 54221-1720 USA

Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589

www.manitowocice.com

Indigo Series i-450 Ice Machine on B-400 Bin

Dice 7⁄8" x 7⁄8" x 7⁄8"(2.22 x 2.22 x 2.22 cm)

Half Dice 3⁄8" x 11⁄8" x 7⁄8"(.95 x 2.86 x 2.22 cm)

Ice Shape

Indigo™ Series 450 Ice Cube Machine

Indigo™ Series 450 Ice C

ube Machine

Model: ID-0452A IY-0454A ID-0453W IY-0455W

YEAR YEAR

COMPRESSORICE MAKER EVAPORATOR

PARTS AND LABORYEAR PARTS

3 YEAR LABOR

Designed for operators who know that ice is critical to their business, the Indigo™ Series ice machine's preventative diagnostics continually monitor itself for reliable ice production. Improvements in cleanability and programmability make your ice machine easy to own and less expensive to operate.

• Space-Saving Design – Up to 450 lbs. (204 kgs.) daily ice production and only 30" (76.20 cm) wide.

• Intelligent Diagnostics – provide 24 hour preventative maintenance and diagnostic feedback for trouble free operation.

• Acoustical Ice Sensing Probe – for reliable operation in challenging water conditions.

• EasyRead Display – communicates operating status, cleaning reminders, and asset information through a blue illuminated display.

• Programmable Ice Production – by On/Off Time, Ice Volume or Bin Level (with accessory bin level control) further improves energy efficiency and savings.

• Easy to Clean Foodzone – Hinged front door swings out for easy access. Removable water-trough, distribution tube, curtain, and sensing probes for fast and efficient cleaning. Select components made with AlphaSan® antimicrobial.

• DuraTech™ Exterior – provides superior corrosion resistance. Stainless finish with innovative clear-coat resists fingerprints and dirt.

• Available LuminIce™ Growth Inhibitor controls the growth of bacteria and yeast within the foodzone.

Specifi cations BTU Per Hour: 5,400 (average) 6,300 (peak)

Refrigerant:R-404A CFC-free

Operating Limits:• Ambient Temperature Range:

35˚ to 110˚F (1.7˚ to 43.3˚C)Water Temperature Range:35˚ to 90˚F (1.7˚ to 32.2˚C)

• Water Pressure Ice Maker Water In:Min. 20 psi (137.9 kPA)Max. 80 psi (551.1 kPA)

Ice Machine Electric 115/60/1 standard.(208-230/60/1 and 230/50/1 also available)

Minimum circuit ampacity: Air-cooled: 13.2Water-cooled: 12.5

Maximum fuse size: 20 amps 1ph


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


A Electrical Entrance (2) Options

3/8" (0.95 cm) F.P.T. Water Condenser Inlet(water-cooled units) 1/2" (1.27 cm) F.P.T. Water Condenser Outlet(water-cooled units)

B

C

1/2" (1.27 cm) Auxillary Base Drain Socket3/8" (0.95 cm) F.P.T. Ice Making Water Inlet

1/2" (1.27 cm) F.P.T. Ice Making Water Drain 3/4" (1.91 cm) Bin Drain

D

E

F

G

B

A

C

D

EF

G

21.50"(54.6 cm)

24.50" (62.23 cm)

34.00" (86.30 cm)30.00" (76.20 cm)

32.00"(81.30 cm)

6.00"(15.24 cm)

i-450 on B-400Storage Bin

4768

B ©

2014

Man

itow

oc 2

/14

Con

tinui

ng p

rodu

ct im

prov

emen

t may

nec

essi

tate

cha

nge

of s

peci

ficat

ions

with

out n

otic

e.

Installation Note Minimum installation clearance:

Top/sides: 8" (20.32 cm); Back is 5" (12.7 cm)

ModelIce

Shape

Ice Production 24 Hours

Power UsagekWh/100 lbs.@90°Air/70°F

Water Usage / 100 lbs.

45.4 kgs. of IceENERGY

STAR®70°Air/ 50°F Water 90°Air/ 70°F Water 1 Ph Potable Water

AIR-COOLED ID-0452A

dice 420 lbs. 316 lbs6.36

20 Gal.★

191 kgs. 143 kg 75.7 L

IY-0454Ahalf-dice 450 lbs. 335 lbs

5.9720 Gal.

★204 kgs. 152 kg 75.7 L

WATER-COO

LED ID-0453W

dice 430 lbs. 360 lbs4.70

20 Gal.NA

195 kgs. 163 kg 75.7 L

IY-0455Whalf-dice 450 lbs. 360 lbs

4.7020 Gal.

NA204 kgs. 163 kg 75.7 L

* Water-cooled Condenser Water Usage / 100 lbs. /45.4 kgs. Of Ice: 169 gal/640 L. * Water-cooled models are excluded from ENERGY STAR qualification.

Specifi cations

iAuCS®schedules and performs routine ice machine cleaning automatically.

AccessoriesLuminIce™Growth Inhibitorreduces yeast and bacteria growth for a cleaner ice machine.

Bin Level ControlAllows ice bin level to be automatically set. Built-in LED light illuminates bin.

Arctic Pure® Water FiltersReduces sediment and chlorine odors for better tasting ice.

Space-Saving Designs

Height includes adjustable bin legs 6.00" to 8.00", (15.24 to 20.32 cm) set at 6.00" (15.24 cm).

i-450 i-450 B-400 B-570Height 59.50" 71.50" 151.13 cm 181.61 cmWidth 30.00" 30.00" 76.20 cm 76.20 cmDepth 34.00" 34.00" 86.30 cm 86.30 cmBin 290 lbs. 430 lbs.Storage 131.7 kgs. 195.2 kgs.

Order ice storage bin separately.


ube Machine


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


Top Air Discharge Kit FOR INDIGO® ICE MACHINES

Top Air Discharge Kit

FOR IN

DIG

O IC

E MA

CH

INES

5378

©20

14 M

anito

woc

8/1

4 C

ontin

uing

pro

duct

impr

ovem

ent m

ay n

eces

sita

te c

hang

e of

spe

cific

atio

ns w

ithou

t not

ice.

Standard Features:• Transfers air discharge from the sides of the

machine to the top by having the louvered panel on the top of the machine rather than the sides

• Re-directs the hot air from the ice machine toward the ceiling rather than directly into the working kitchen environment

• Ideal for locations where space on side of the machine is less than 8" for Indigo Series 450-1106 or 12" for Indigo Series 322, 522, and 1200

• Top air discharge kit is available for Indigo Series 322, 522, 450, 500, 606, 906, and 1106, and 1200

• No hardware needed

Ice Machine Height Width Kit

Indigo 322 or 522 21.5" 22" K-00438

Indigo 450, 500, 606 21.5" 30" K-00379

Indigo 906 26.5" 30" K-00439

Indigo 1106 or 1200 29.5" 30" K-00449

Ice Machine

Minimum Top Clearance

Requirements

Minimum Back Clearance

Requirements

Indigo 450, 500, 606, 906, 1106,1200 8" 5"

Indigo 322 or 522 12" 5"

Kits K-00379 K-00438 K-00439 K-00449

Kit includes:

A) Two solid stainless steel side panels

B) One louvered stainless steel top

A

A

B

Installation Instructions Disconnect electric power to the ice machine (and dispenser if applicable) at the electric switch box before proceeding.

1. Open front door

2. Remove top panel

3. Remove louvered left and right side panels

4. Install new solid left and right side panels

5. Install louvered top panel

6. Secure front door

7. Apply power


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


Ice Storage Bins

Ice Storage Bins

Bin Leg Options 4" (10.16 cm), 6" (15.24 cm) and 12" (30.48 cm) adjustable legs in painted and stainless steel and 2.5" (6.35 cm), and 7.625" (19.37cm) casters available for most models. Contact factory for model number and order information.

Warranty Bin & Accessories: 3 Year Parts & Labor.

Model B-170 B-320 B-400 B-420 B-570 B-970 C-730

®

Ice Machine Deflectors Required

i450, i500, i606, i906, i1000, i1200 K-00347

i1400, i1800 K-00349

i1470c, i1870c, i2170cK-00383 for side-by-side ice machines. K-00382 for one ice machine.

S3070C, S3300 K-00391

30.00"29.50"

25.00"

50.00"

34.00"

22.00"

46.00"

31.50" 42.00"

38.00"

34.00"

22.00"

50.00"

34.00"30.00"

38.00"

34.00"30.00"

50.00"

34.00" 48.00"

B-170150 lbs. (68 kgs)

B-570430 lbs. (195 kgs)

B-970710 lbs. (323 kgs)

B-320210 lbs. (95 kgs)

B-400290 lbs. (132 kgs)

B-420310 lbs. (141 kgs)

C-730560 lbs. (254 kgs)

B-Style.75" (1.90 cm) Bin drain

C-Style.75" (1.90 cm) Bin drain


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


Bin Model

CapacityFits S-Series Ice Cube Machine Indicated Dimensions

300 322 422 450 500 606 906 1000 1200 1400 1470C 1800 1870C 2170

Height Width Depth

lbs. kgs. in. cm. in. cm. in. cm.

B-170 150 68 • 3 3 • • 25 63.50 30 76.20 29.50 74.92

B-320 210 95 • • 38 96.52 22 55.88 34 86.36

B-400 290 132 • 3 3 • • • • • • 38 96.52 30 76.20 34 86.36

B-420 310 141 • • 50 127 22 55.88 34 86.36

B-570 430 195 • 3 3 • • • • • • 50 127 30 76.20 34 86.36

B-970 710 323 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 • 4 • 4 4 50 127 48 121.92 34 86.36

Bin Model

CapacityFits I -Series Ice Cube Machine Indicated Dimensions

i320 i420

i300i450i500

i606i906

i1000i1200

i1400i1800

i1470Ci1870Ci2170C

Height Width Depth

lbs. kgs. in. cm. in. cm. in. cm.

C-730S 560 254 6 5 5 7 46 116.84 42 106.68 31.50 80.01

B-StyleSoft durometer trim around opening helps silence bin door closing. Convenient stay-open design keeps bin door out of the way while scooping ice. Internal scoop holder stays above ice line for easy access and better sanitation. DuraTech™ stainless finish exterior is durable, corrosion resistant and attractive.

C-StyleDuraTech™ stainless finish exterior is durable, corrosion-resistant and attractive. Bin door, although rectangular, is gray ABS to match ice machine trim color. C-Style bin does not include scoop holder, bin door design, or rounded corner enhancements included I Series with B-Style design. Bin leg is bullet design, adjustable from 6.00" to 7.75" (15.24 cm to 19.685 cm) and painted black. Bin liner is one-piece (seamless) “rotocast” polyethylene. Liner won’t rust, dent, chip, crack or discolor.

1 K-00369 adapter required.




5 4 C-730 includes K-00023 adapter to mount 30" ice machine.



One set of legs included. Adjustable from 6.00" to 7.75" (15.24 to 20.32 cm). Included with bin.

Storage capacity is based on 80% of total volume x 30 lb/ft3 average density of ice.

Gray painted 6.00" (15.24 cm) bullet legs included, adjustable from 6.00" to 7.00" (15.24 to 17.78 cm).

Storage capacity is based on 80% of total volume x 30 lb/ft3 average density of ice.

Ice Storage Bins27

18H

©20

14 M

anito

woc

4/1

4 C

ontin

uing

pro

duct

impr

ovem

ent m

ay n

eces

sita

te c

hang

e of

spe

cific

atio

ns w

ithou

t not

ice.

12

-1/2

”

9-3

/4”

HS

-14

16

D8.8

1W

all

Mount H

and S

ink w

/Fauce

t &

Str

ain

er

Ord

er

No

De

sc

rip

tio

nW

eig

ht

lbs/c

ase

Pack/

case

HS

-1615W

9.6

1

HS

-1615S

S1

41

Ord

er

No

Wa

ll M

ou

nt

Ha

nd

Sin

k w

/We

lde

d S

pla

sh

Gu

ard

s

Descri

pti

on

Weig

ht

lbs/c

ase

Pack/

case

Sta

nd

ard

Wa

ll M

ou

nt

Ha

nd

Sin

k

40

- 1

2-1

/4”

2-1

/4”

1-7

/8"

2-1

/4”

2-1

/4”

HS

-141

6D

AA

-410

GA

A-1

41G

AA

-410

GA

A-1

41

40

HA

ND

SIN

K

40 Hand Sink

8-3

/4”

11”

ww

w.G

SW

-US

A.c

om

8"203mm

12"305mm

121mm4 3/4"

2 3/8"61mm

of 2


Scale:

Model No.

Item No.


02/11/13

DMH

B-0231

1Sheet:


8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet w/ Eterna Cartridge, Lever Handles, 12" Swing Nozzle w/ Stream Regulator Outlet & 1/2" NPT


JHBDHLApprovedDrawn Checked

1:4


Date:Female Inlets


Job Name__________________________Date_________



Contractor_______________________________________


Indexes

Female Inlets

Stream Regulator12" Swing Nozzle w/

Outlet

062X

Eterna Cartridges &Lever Handles w/ Colored Coded

Ø 2" [51mm]Flanges w/1/2" NPT

Adjustable From7 3/4" to 8 1/4"

[197mm to 210mm]

3 9/16"91mm

12 7/16"315mm

Mounting Surface

7 1/2"190mm


1 062X 12" Swing Nozzle w/ B-PT Stream Regulator Outlet

2 001048-45 Nozzle Tip Washer3 B-PT Stream Regulator Outlet4 001661-45 Red Index-HW5 005960-40 Eterna Cartridges, RTC6 009538-45 Swivel Washer7 011429-45 Swivel Sleeves (2)8 001074-45 O-Ring9 000922-45 Lever Handle Screw

10 001660-45 Blue Index-CW11 001638-45 Lever Handle12 005959-40 Eterna Cartridges, LTC13 00AA 1/2" NPT Female Eccentric Flange14 001019-45 Coupling Nut Washer

2Sheet:

Model No.

Item No.



B-0231

of

2 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088Travelers Rest, SC 29690

ApprovedDrawn Checked

NTS

2

Date:Female Inlets DMH

02/11/13Scale:


DHL JHB8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet w/ Eterna Cartridge, Lever Handles, 12" Swing Nozzle w/ Stream Regulator Outlet & 1/2" NPT

8

12

4

10

9

11

14

1

23 5

6

7

13

[69mm]2 11/16"

12 1/4"±1/4"[312mm]

180°60°

Heat ResistantPlastic Grip (Shown

Twist Handle w/

in Open Position)

Adapter Converts 2" NPT Male to 1 1/2" NPT Male. Remove Adapter When 2" NPT Male Thread is Needed.

5 3/4"[147mm]

ORIENTATION

CLOSED

OPENED

HANDLE

LOCKED

Sheet: 1 of


Scale:

Model No.

Item No.

T&S BRASS AND BRONZE WORKS, INC.Travelers Rest, SC 29690

REG. #A2601ISO #9001

03/19/09

KJG

Travelers Rest, SC: 800-476-4103

Rotary Waste Valve w/ Twist Handle, 3" Sink Opening, 2" NPT Male Outlet & 1 1/2" NPT Male Adapter

www.tsbrass.com


1:4

2 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088 B-3940

Simi Valley, CA: 800-423-0150 Fax: 864-834-3518

Date:


Job Name__________________________Date_________



Contractor_______________________________________


2

RemovableSnap-In Strainer

4 3/16" [106mm][106mm]

2of2

Model No.

Item No.


Travelers Rest, SC: 800-476-4103 Fax: 864-834-3518

REG. #A2601ISO #9001

B-3940

Simi Valley, CA: 800-423-0150



www.tsbrass.com

1:4Date:2" NPT Male Outlet & 1 1/2" NPT Male Adapter

KJG

03/19/09Scale:


DHL JHBRotary Waste Valve w/ Twist Handle, 3" Sink Opening,

Sheet:

ITEM NO. SALES NO. DESCRIPTION1 010389-45 O-Ring, Plunger 2 010390-45 Ferrule, Coupling Nut3 010391-45 Nut, Coupling For Twist Drain4 010381-45 Gasket, 3" Face Flange 5 015306-45 Flange, 3" Face 6 010385-45 Strainer, 3" Snap-in 7 010388-45 Plunger, Twist Drain

8 010393-45 Handle Asm, Rotary Waste Valve Twist

9 B-3945 Adapter, 2" NPT x 1 1/2" NPT

9

Coupling Nut is Not Used.PN# 012640-45

Cap When Overflow Tube

2

Washers, O-Rings &Gaskets are included in

Parts Kit B-39K

6

5

4

7

1

3

Also Furnished w/ Sealing

8

2 3/8"61mm

33 3/4"858mm

14 1/16"357mm4 3/16"

107mm

004RFinger Hook

3/8" NPT x 18" Riser

Spring Check EternaCartridges &Lever Handles w/Color Coded Indexes

2" [51mm]Flanges w/1/2" NPT Female Inlets

EasyInstallLock Nut & Bushing

Flex Hose, Overhead Spring & Spray Valve Assembly Not Shownfor Clarity

8"203mm

44" Flex Hose w/ Overhead Spring & Spray Valve Assembly

MountingSurface

B-0107Spray Valve1.42 GPM

Adjustable From7 3/4" to 8 1/4"

[197mm to 210mm]

6" WallBracket


Scale:

Model No.

Item No.


REG. #A2601ISO #9001

07/14/11

DMH

B-0133-B

EasyInstall Pre-Rinse Unit:8" c/c Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, 1/2" NPT Female Inlets, 6" WallBracket, 18" Riser, Overhead Spring, 44" Flex Hose & B-0107 Spray Valve


Date:

1:8


Job Name__________________________Date_________



Contractor_______________________________________


CheckedDrawn Approved

JRM JHB


Sheet: 1 of 2

EPAct 2005 Compliant

8

9

17

20

21

14

123

4

7

5

3

6

2

10

16

18

24 15

12

22

19

13

11

2


1 B-0107 Spray Valve Assembly w/ Hold Down Ring & Washer

2 010476-45 #27 Washer3 000907-45 Spray Valve Hold Down Ring4 002987-40 Grip Handle Assembly5 001014-45 Washer, B-0100 Hose Barrel6 B-0044-H2A 44" SS Flex Hose Less Handle7 000888-45 EasyInstall Overhead Spring8 000821-40 Spring Body9 004R Finger Hook Assembly

10 000369-40 3/8" NPT x 18" Long Riser11 B-0109-01 6" Wall Bracket

12 EZ-K EasyInstall Kit: Bushing, O-Ring,Lock Washer & Loctite 222

13 001065-45 O-Ring14 014200-45 Star Washer, Anti-Rotation15 002711-40 Cold Eterna w/ Spring Check,

Handle, Index & Screw16 000922-45 Lever Handle Screw17 001660-45 Blue Index-CW18 001638-45 Lever Handle19 012442-40 Cold Eterna w/ Spring Check20 001019-45 Coupling Nut Washer 21 00AA Flange Assembly22 012443-40 Hot Eterna w/ Spring Check23 001661-45 Red Index-HW24 002712-40 Hot Eterna w/ Spring Check,

Handle, Index & Screw

Model No.

Item No.



REG. #A2601ISO #9001

B-0133-B



NTSDate:

EasyInstall Pre-Rinse Unit:8" c/c Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, 1/2" NPT Female Inlets, 6" WallBracket, 18" Riser, Overhead Spring, 44" Flex Hose & B-0107 Spray Valve

DMH

07/14/11Scale:


JRM JHB

2of2Sheet:

14 5/16"364mm

12"305mm

8 1/2"216mm

Stream Regulator Outlet

Lever Handle

12" Swing Nozzle w/

OutletFemale

Cartridge &1/4 Turn Eterna

3/8" NPT

062X

3/8" NPTMale Inlet

4 15/16"125mm

4 13/16"122mm

3 5/8"

92mm

11 1/4"285mm

Closed

FullyOpen

90°

1 of 2


Scale:

Model No.

Item No.


09/27/12

DMH

Sheet:

w/ Stream Regulator Outlet

B-0156

Add-On Faucet w/ 1/4 Turn Eterna Cartridge & 12" Swing Nozzle

Travelers Rest, SC 296902 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088



Date:

1:4



Job Name__________________________Date_________



Contractor_______________________________________

The Add-On Faucet is an Addition to Pre-Rinse Units 1.and is Installed in Outlets of Base Mixing Faucets of Units Before Fitting Riser Pipes

Lever Handle Controls Water On-Off Thru Nozzle Only. 2.Pressure is Always "On" in the Riser Pipe (Controlled by Base Mixing Faucet)


1 062X 12" Swing Nozzle w/ Stream Regulator2 B-PT Stream Regulator3 001048-45 Nozzle Tip Washer4 009538-45 Swivel Washer5 011429-45 Swivel Sleeves (2)6 001074-45 O-Ring7 000358-40 Nipple, 3/8" NPT x 3"8 007947-40 1/4 Turn Eterna Cartridge, RTC 9 001638-45 Lever Handle

10 000922-45 Lever Handle Screw

Sheet:

Model No.

Item No.



B-0156

2



NTSDate:


w/ Stream Regulator Outlet DMH

09/27/12Scale:


DHL JHB

2of

Add-On Faucet w/ 1/4 Turn Eterna Cartridge & 12" Swing Nozzle

8

3

2

4

6

710 9

5

1

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington Street Wilkes-Barre, PA 18705 www.metro.com

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________ Wire

Shelvin

g10

.01

*MicroBAN® and the MicroBAN® symbol are registered trademarks of the Microban Products company, Huntersville, Nc.

SUPEr ErEcTA SHELF®

WirE SHELviNg• Unique Design: The open wire design of these shelves

minimizes dust accumulation and allows free circulation of air, greater visibility of stored items and greater light penetration.

• Durable Construction: Super Erecta shelves and posts are constructed of heavy-gauge carbon steel or Type 304 stainless steel.

• Choice of Finishes: Super Erecta Brite™ and chrome-plated for dry storage; Metroseal 3™ with Microban® antimicrobial product protection and stainless steel for corrosive environments; and attractive epoxy color options for merchandising applications.

• Versatile: Super Erecta Shelf® wire shelving can adapt to your changing needs. By using various accessories, hundreds of shelving configurations become possible.

• Fast, Secure Assembly: SiteSelect™ Posts have a double groove visual guide feature every 8" (203mm), circular grooves at 1" (25mm) increments, and are numbered at 2" (50mm) intervals. A patented, tapered split sleeve snaps together around each post. Tapered openings in the shelf corners slide over the tapered split sleeves providing a positive lock. Shelf is assembled in minutes without the use of any special tools.

• Adjustability: Shelves can be adjusted at 1" (25mm) intervals along the entire length of the post.

• Shelf Ribs: run front to back, allowing you to slide items on and off shelves smoothly.

• Shelf Accessibility: Shelves can be loaded/unloaded easily from all sides This open construction allows maximum use of storage cube.

• Adjustable Feet: Bolt levelers compensate for surface irregularities.

Note: Stainless stationary posts are equipped with stainless steel leveling feet.



WirE SHELviNg

Wire Shelves• Metroseal 3: Metro’s proprietary epoxy coating contains Microban®

antimicrobial product protection. Microban antimicrobial protects the epoxy coating from bacteria, mold, mildew, and fungus that cause odors, stains, and product degradation.

• See spec sheet 10.14 for epoxy color options.• Plastic split sleeves are included with each shelf

replacements are available: cat. No. 9985 (bag of 4)• Aluminum split sleeves are recommended for abusive mobile applications

and autoclave applications. cat. No. 9986Z (bag of 4 with zinc c-rings) cat. No. 9986S (bag of 4 with stainless steel c-rings)

• Load capacity (evenly distributed) per shelf Depths: 14" to 24" (355 to 610mm) 800 ibs. (363kg) for lengths of 18" to 48" (457 to 1219mm) 600 ibs. (272kg) for lengths of 54" (1370mm) or longer

• Load capacity (evenly distributed) per unit. Stationary shelving units have a maximum load capacity (evenly distributed) of 2,000 ibs. (907kg) Mobile units have a maximum capacity of three times the caster load rating up to but not exceeding 1,000 ibs. (453kg) total. consult the Metro catalog for caster load ratings

• SUPEr ErEcTA SHELF meets government Specifications MiL-S-40144E.Aluminum Split Sleeve

Split Sleeve

Approx. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Nominal Width/Length Pkd. Wt. Super Erecta Brite chrome Metroseal 3 with Microban® Stainless (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

1424Br 1424Nc 1424NK3 1424NS 14x24 355x610 6 2.7 1430 Br 1430Nc 1430NK3 1430NS 14x30 355x760 7 3.2 1436Br 1436Nc 1436NK3 1436NS 14x36 355x914 8 3.6 1442Br 1442Nc 1442NK3 1442NS 14x42 355x1066 91/2 4.3 1448Br 1448Nc 1448NK3 1448NS 14x48 355x1219 101/2 4.7 1460Br 1460Nc 1460NK3 1460NS 14x60 355x1524 14 6.3 1472Br 1472Nc 1472NK3 1472NS 14x72 355x1829 17 7.7 1824Br 1824Nc 1824NK3 1824NS 18x24 457x610 7 3.2 1830Br 1830Nc 1830NK3 1830NS 18x30 457x760 8 3.6 1836Br 1836Nc 1836NK3 1836NS 18x36 457x914 91/2 4.3 1842Br 1842Nc 1842NK3 1842NS 18x42 457x1066 11 5.0 1848Br 1848Nc 1848NK3 1848NS 18x48 457x1219 12 5.4 1854Br 1854Nc 1854NK3 1854NS 18x54 457x1370 141/2 6.6 1860Br 1860Nc 1860NK3 1860NS 18x60 457x1524 17 7.7 1872Br 1872Nc 1872NK3 1872NS 18x72 457x1829 20 9.1 2124Br 2124Nc 2124NK3 2124NS 21x24 530x610 8 3.6 2130Br 2130Nc 2130NK3 2130NS 21x30 530x760 9 4.1 2136Br 2136Nc 2136NK3 2136NS 21x36 530x914 11 5.0 2142Br 2142Nc 2142NK3 2142NS 21x42 530x1066 12 5.4 2148Br 2148Nc 2148NK3 2148NS 21x48 530x1219 14 6.4 2154Br 2154Nc 2154NK3 2154NS 21x54 530x1370 16 7.3 2160Br 2160Nc 2160NK3 2160NS 21x60 530x1524 18 8.2 2172Br 2172Nc 2172NK3 2172NS 21x72 530x1829 24 10.9 2424Br 2424Nc 2424NK3 2424NS 24x24 610x610 9 4.1 2430Br 2430Nc 2430NK3 2430NS 24x30 610x760 11 5.0 2436Br 2436Nc 2436NK3 2436NS 24x36 610x914 13 5.9 2442Br 2442Nc 2442NK3 2442NS 24x42 610x1066 15 6.8 2448Br 2448Nc 2448NK3 2448NS 24x48 610x1219 16 7.3 2454Br 2454Nc 2454NK3 2454NS 24x54 610x1370 19 8.6 2460Br 2460Nc 2460NK3 2460NS 24x60 610x1524 21 9.5 2472Br 2472Nc 2472NK3 2472NS 24x72 610x1829 26 11.8

Note: 14” (355mm) deep units.Free-standing units: Foot plates should be used and secured to the floor.Mobile units: maximum allowable post height is 54” (1370mm).


WirE SHELviNg

SiteSelect™ PostsStationary PostsStationary posts are equipped with a leveling bolt to account for uneven floors.

• Height includes leveling bolt (completely tightened) and post cap Leveling bolt can be adjusted 1/2" (13mm).

• Foot plates may be ordered separately and installed in place of leveling foot.

• replacement leveling bolts Zinc cat. No. rPF04-004 Stainless Steel cat. No. rPF04-004c

• replacement post cap for standard posts Black cat. No. rPc06-035

Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

7P 73/8 187 1/2 0.3 13P 13PK3 13PS 143/8 365 1 0.5 27P 27PS 283/8 720 13/4 0.75 33P 33PK3 33PS 343/8 873 2 0.9 54P 54PK3 54PS 547/16 1382 3 1.4 63P 63PK3 63PS 627/16 1585 31/2 1.6 74P 74PK3 74PS 741/2 1892 4 1.8 86P 86PK3 86PS 861/2 2197 5 2.3 *96P 961/2 2450 51/2 2.5

*96P should not be used on units less than 24" (610mm) deep. consult Metro Engineering for alternate recommendations.

Mobile Posts (For use with Stem casters)• Height includes post cap. Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

27UP 27UPS 273/4 704 13/4 0.75 33UP 33UPK3 33UPS 333/4 857 2 0.9 54UP 54UPK3 54UPS 5313/16 1366 3 1.4 63UP 63UPK3 63UPS 6113/16 1570 31/2 1.6 70UPK3 693/4 1771 33/4 1.7 74UP 74UPK3 74UPS 737/8 1876 4 1.8 86UP 86UPK3 86UPS 857/8 2181 41/2 2.0

Staked Posts (For use with Truck Dollies)• Each post connects to the truck dolly through the stem receptacle. The

stem receptacle is staked into the bottom of the post to ensure a durable connection in abusive mobile applications.

• Each includes a leveling/connecting bolt. Approx. Model No. Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

54P-STKD 54PS-STKD 547/16 1382 3 1.4 63P-STKD 63PS-STKD 627/16 1585 31/2 1.6 74P-STKD 74PS-STKD 741/2 1892 4 1.8

Swedged Posts (For use with Stem casters in cart Wash Applications)• Each post has an aluminum cap swedged into the top of the post. Approx. Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

33UPS-SW 333/4 857 2 0.9 54UPS-SW 5313/16 1366 3 1.4 63UPS-SW 6113/16 1570 31/2 1.6

SiteSelect Posts feature double grooves every 8" (203mm) to aid assembly.

Special Length PostsSpecial length cut posts are available. consult your Metro representative for more information.


WirE SHELviNg

Wir

e S

helv

ing

10

.01

L02-006 Printed in U.S.A. rev. 11/08

information and specifications are subject to change without notice. Please confirm at time of order.

copyright © 2008 interMetro industries corp.

Super Wide Shelving• High-density Storage: Super Wide™ shelves have a greater storage

area for holding large quantities of supplies, especially large, bulky objects, providing maximum storage in minimum space.

• Load Capacity (evenly distributed) per shelf: Depths: 30" and 36" (760 and 914mm)

600 lbs. (272kg) for lengths 48" (1219mm) or shorter.

400 lbs. (181kg) for lengths 54" (1370mm) or longer. Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Nominal Width/Length Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

3036Nc 3036NK3 3036NS 30x36 760x914 15 6.8 3048Nc 3048NK3 3048NS 30x48 760x1219 21 9.5 3060Nc 3060NK3 3060NS 30x60 760x1524 261/2 11.8 3072Nc 3072NK3 3072NS 30x72 760x1829 31 14.0 3636Nc 3636NK3 3636NS 36x36 910x914 18 8.2 3648Nc 3648NK3 3648NS 36x48 910x1219 23 10.4 3660Nc 3660NK3 3660NS 36x60 910x1524 29 13.1 3672Nc 3672NK3 3672NS 36x72 910x1829 341/2 15.4

Foot Plates• Use to bolt units to the floor, or when a broader, more stable foot is desired. Foot plates

also help to protect floors by distributing the point load of the shelving unit across a larger contact point.

• Foot plates (completely tightened) add 1/8" (3mm) to the specified heights of each stationary post on the table. Zinc cat. No. 9993Z Stainless Steel cat. No. 9993S

“S’’ Hook• Used to add on shelving units with only two posts required. order two per shelf level.

cat. No. 9995Z

Job ________________________________________________Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington Street, Wilkes-Barre, PA 18705 Phone: 570-825-2741 Fax: 570-825-2852

All Metro Catalog Sheets are available on our Web Site: www.metro.com

For Product information:U.S. and canada: 1.800.433.2232

Latin America: 1.561.333.3824 Europe: +31.76.587.7550

Asia/Pacific: +65.6567.8003 Middle East/Africa: +971.4.811.8286

10.0

1

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington StreetWilkes-Barre, PA 18705www.metro.com

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________ Super E

recta

Shelf

® Post-Typ

e &

Dire

ct W

all M

ounts

10.4

0

SUPER ERECTA SHELF®

POST-TYPE ANDDIRECT WALL MOUNTS• Ideal for Storing items conveniently overhead or

above work surfaces.

• Versatile: Can accommodate Super Erecta wire and solid shelves, Super Erecta Pro, MetroMax Q, and MetroMax i shelves.Note: For MetroMax i shelves, order (1) M9997-4adapter kit per shelf.

• Single and Double Supports: Double support used for mounting adjacent shelves; single supports at the ends of the shelving tier. Available in nickel chrome, Metroseal 3 or Type 304 stainless steel.

Post-Type Mounts• Versatile: Metro’s post-type mounting system

can meet your exact needs for wall shelving. Posts and supports are available to hold anything from a single small shelf to many tiers of shelving running continuously along a wall.

• Fast, Secure Assembly: Post has rolled,circular grooves along its entire height at1" (25mm) intervals. Tapered, plasticsplit-sleeve locks around any groove, and matching taper in opening on shelf support provides secure positioning.

• Adjustable: Shelf supports and shelves can be positioned or repositioned on the post in1" (25mm) increments.

• For Easy Ordering: “End Unit” and “Mid Unit” models are available to meet a wide range of wall-shelving requirements. Just add shelves.

Direct Mounts• Convenient, single storage level.

• Two-Piece: Support is held by mounting plate, which attaches directly to the wall.

• Conserve Space: Back of shelf is within a fraction of an inch from the wall.

Double Shelf Post Type

Double

Single

Direct Mount

Job ________________________________________________Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington Street, Wilkes-Barre, PA 18705Phone: 570-825-2741 • Fax: 570-825-2852For Product Information:U.S. and Canada: 1-800-992-1776Outside U.S. and Canada: www.metro.com/contactus


SUPER ERECTA SHELF®

POST-TYPE AND DIRECT WALL MOUNTS

Super

Ere

cta

Shelf

® P

ost

-Typ

e &

Dir

ect

Wall M

ounts

10.4

0

L02-021Printed in U.S.A. Rev. 4/11

Information and specifi cations are subject to change without notice. Please confi rm at time of order.

Copyright © 2011 InterMetro Industries Corp.

Post Type Wall Mounts — Preconfi gured Models. Just add shelves.Post-type wall mounts are available in preconfi gured “End Units” and “Mid Units,” complete with all needed components except wall bolts or screws, which must be selected according to type of wall.* Components are chrome-plated.

“End Unit” consists of two posts with brackets, and two single supports for each shelf.

“Mid Unit” consists of one post with brackets and a double support for each tier.

Guide Single unit (1) End Unit — Two units connected end-to-end (1) End Unit (1) Mid Unit Three units connected end-to-end (1) End Unit (2) Mid Units Four units connected end-to-end (1) End Unit (3) Mid Units Five units connected end-to-end (1) End Unit (4) Mid Units

To Order By ComponentsPosts & Brackets — Two end brackets (BES), are supplied with each of these double-footed posts. One intermediate bracket (BCS) is supplied with 33PDF posts and two are supplied with 54PDF and 63PDF posts.Posts and brackets can be used to mount12" (305mm) cantilever shelves (sheet #10.06) rather than shelf supports.BCS brackets can also be used to attach freestanding shelving to wall.

Posts & Brackets Post Approx. Height Model No. Model No. Model No. Pkd. Wt. (in.) (mm) Description Plated Metroseal 3 Stainless (lbs.) (kg)

137/8 350 Post for 1 tier 13PDF 13PDFK3 13PDFS 1.25 0.6 335/8 854 Post for 2 tiers 33PDF 33PDFK3 33PDFS 2.75 1.2 54 1370 Post for 3 or more tiers 54PDF 54PDFK3 54PDFS 5.0 2.3 62 1573 Post for 4 or more tiers 63PDF 63PDFK3 63PDFS 6.0 2.7 End Bracket BES BESK3 SBES 0.5 0.2 Intermediate Bracket BCS BCSK3 SBCS 0.5 0.2

Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Number Post 14" (460mm) Shelf Width 18" (457mm) Shelf Width 21" (533mm) Shelf Width 24" (610mm) Shelf Width of Tiers Number End Unit Mid Unit End Unit Mid Unit End Unit Mid Unit End Unit Mid Unit

1 Shelf 13PDF SW21C AW21C SW31C AW31C SW41C AW41C SW51C AW51C 2 Shelf 33PDF SW23C AW23C SW33C AW33C SW43C AW43C SW53C AW53C 3 Shelf 54PDF SW25C AW25C SW35C AW35C SW45C AW45C SW55C AW55C 4 Shelf 63PDF SW26C AW26C SW36C AW36C SW46C AW46C SW56C AW56C

Order shelves from sheets #10.01, 10.20, 10.80, 9.20, 9.21. For MetroMax i shelves, order one M9997-4 adapter kit per shelf.

BES

BCS

BES

Direct Wall Mounts — Each consists of one shelf support and mounting plate, with two caps. Use single support at shelf ends; double support for adjoining shelves. Select wall bolts or screws according to type of wall.**User should determine that wall material and method of mounting are suitable to support the shelves and their contents.

Direct Wall Mounts SINGLE DOUBLE Shelf Width Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. (in.) (mm) Chrome Metroseal 3 Stainless Chrome Metroseal 3 Stainless

14 360 1WD14C 1WD14K3 1WD14S 2WD14C 2WD14K3 2WD14S 18 457 1WD18C 1WD18K3 1WD18S 2WD18C 2WD18K3 2WD18S 21 533 1WD21C 1WD21K3 1WD21S 2WD21C 2WD21K3 2WD21S 24 610 1WD24C 1WD24K3 1WD24S 2WD24C 2WD24K3 2WD24S

Load Rating: 200 lbs. (91kg) per system.

“End Unit”

Shelf Supports — Post Mounting SINGLE DOUBLE Shelf Width Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. (in.) (mm) Chrome Metroseal 3 Stainless Chrome Metroseal 3 Stainless

14 360 1WS14C 1WS14K3 1WS14S 2WS14C 2WS14K3 2WS14S 18 457 1WS18C 1WS18K3 1WS18S 2WS18C 2WS18K3 2WS18S 21 533 1WS21C — 1WS21S 2WS21C — 2WS21S 24 610 1WS24C 1WS24K3 1WS24S 2WS24C 2WS24K3 2WS24S

Order shelves from sheets #10.01, 10.20, 10.80, 9.20, 9.21For MetroMax i shelves, order one M9997-4 adapter kit per shelf.Load Rating: 250 lbs. (113kg) per system.

“Mid Unit”

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington Street Wilkes-Barre, PA 18705 www.metro.com

Item # ______________________________________________

Job ________________________________________________ Wire

Shelvin

g10

.01



WirE SHELviNg• Unique Design: The open wire design of these shelves

minimizes dust accumulation and allows free circulation of air, greater visibility of stored items and greater light penetration.

• Durable Construction: Super Erecta shelves and posts are constructed of heavy-gauge carbon steel or Type 304 stainless steel.

• Choice of Finishes: Super Erecta Brite™ and chrome-plated for dry storage; Metroseal 3™ with Microban® antimicrobial product protection and stainless steel for corrosive environments; and attractive epoxy color options for merchandising applications.

• Versatile: Super Erecta Shelf® wire shelving can adapt to your changing needs. By using various accessories, hundreds of shelving configurations become possible.

• Fast, Secure Assembly: SiteSelect™ Posts have a double groove visual guide feature every 8" (203mm), circular grooves at 1" (25mm) increments, and are numbered at 2" (50mm) intervals. A patented, tapered split sleeve snaps together around each post. Tapered openings in the shelf corners slide over the tapered split sleeves providing a positive lock. Shelf is assembled in minutes without the use of any special tools.

• Adjustability: Shelves can be adjusted at 1" (25mm) intervals along the entire length of the post.

• Shelf Ribs: run front to back, allowing you to slide items on and off shelves smoothly.

• Shelf Accessibility: Shelves can be loaded/unloaded easily from all sides This open construction allows maximum use of storage cube.

• Adjustable Feet: Bolt levelers compensate for surface irregularities.

Note: Stainless stationary posts are equipped with stainless steel leveling feet.



WirE SHELviNg

Wire Shelves• Metroseal 3: Metro’s proprietary epoxy coating contains Microban®

antimicrobial product protection. Microban antimicrobial protects the epoxy coating from bacteria, mold, mildew, and fungus that cause odors, stains, and product degradation.

• See spec sheet 10.14 for epoxy color options.• Plastic split sleeves are included with each shelf

replacements are available: cat. No. 9985 (bag of 4)• Aluminum split sleeves are recommended for abusive mobile applications

and autoclave applications. cat. No. 9986Z (bag of 4 with zinc c-rings) cat. No. 9986S (bag of 4 with stainless steel c-rings)

• Load capacity (evenly distributed) per shelf Depths: 14" to 24" (355 to 610mm) 800 ibs. (363kg) for lengths of 18" to 48" (457 to 1219mm) 600 ibs. (272kg) for lengths of 54" (1370mm) or longer

• Load capacity (evenly distributed) per unit. Stationary shelving units have a maximum load capacity (evenly distributed) of 2,000 ibs. (907kg) Mobile units have a maximum capacity of three times the caster load rating up to but not exceeding 1,000 ibs. (453kg) total. consult the Metro catalog for caster load ratings

• SUPEr ErEcTA SHELF meets government Specifications MiL-S-40144E.Aluminum Split Sleeve

Split Sleeve

Approx. Model No. Model No. Model No. Model No. Nominal Width/Length Pkd. Wt. Super Erecta Brite chrome Metroseal 3 with Microban® Stainless (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

1424Br 1424Nc 1424NK3 1424NS 14x24 355x610 6 2.7 1430 Br 1430Nc 1430NK3 1430NS 14x30 355x760 7 3.2 1436Br 1436Nc 1436NK3 1436NS 14x36 355x914 8 3.6 1442Br 1442Nc 1442NK3 1442NS 14x42 355x1066 91/2 4.3 1448Br 1448Nc 1448NK3 1448NS 14x48 355x1219 101/2 4.7 1460Br 1460Nc 1460NK3 1460NS 14x60 355x1524 14 6.3 1472Br 1472Nc 1472NK3 1472NS 14x72 355x1829 17 7.7 1824Br 1824Nc 1824NK3 1824NS 18x24 457x610 7 3.2 1830Br 1830Nc 1830NK3 1830NS 18x30 457x760 8 3.6 1836Br 1836Nc 1836NK3 1836NS 18x36 457x914 91/2 4.3 1842Br 1842Nc 1842NK3 1842NS 18x42 457x1066 11 5.0 1848Br 1848Nc 1848NK3 1848NS 18x48 457x1219 12 5.4 1854Br 1854Nc 1854NK3 1854NS 18x54 457x1370 141/2 6.6 1860Br 1860Nc 1860NK3 1860NS 18x60 457x1524 17 7.7 1872Br 1872Nc 1872NK3 1872NS 18x72 457x1829 20 9.1 2124Br 2124Nc 2124NK3 2124NS 21x24 530x610 8 3.6 2130Br 2130Nc 2130NK3 2130NS 21x30 530x760 9 4.1 2136Br 2136Nc 2136NK3 2136NS 21x36 530x914 11 5.0 2142Br 2142Nc 2142NK3 2142NS 21x42 530x1066 12 5.4 2148Br 2148Nc 2148NK3 2148NS 21x48 530x1219 14 6.4 2154Br 2154Nc 2154NK3 2154NS 21x54 530x1370 16 7.3 2160Br 2160Nc 2160NK3 2160NS 21x60 530x1524 18 8.2 2172Br 2172Nc 2172NK3 2172NS 21x72 530x1829 24 10.9 2424Br 2424Nc 2424NK3 2424NS 24x24 610x610 9 4.1 2430Br 2430Nc 2430NK3 2430NS 24x30 610x760 11 5.0 2436Br 2436Nc 2436NK3 2436NS 24x36 610x914 13 5.9 2442Br 2442Nc 2442NK3 2442NS 24x42 610x1066 15 6.8 2448Br 2448Nc 2448NK3 2448NS 24x48 610x1219 16 7.3 2454Br 2454Nc 2454NK3 2454NS 24x54 610x1370 19 8.6 2460Br 2460Nc 2460NK3 2460NS 24x60 610x1524 21 9.5 2472Br 2472Nc 2472NK3 2472NS 24x72 610x1829 26 11.8

Note: 14” (355mm) deep units.Free-standing units: Foot plates should be used and secured to the floor.Mobile units: maximum allowable post height is 54” (1370mm).


WirE SHELviNg

SiteSelect™ PostsStationary PostsStationary posts are equipped with a leveling bolt to account for uneven floors.

• Height includes leveling bolt (completely tightened) and post cap Leveling bolt can be adjusted 1/2" (13mm).

• Foot plates may be ordered separately and installed in place of leveling foot.

• replacement leveling bolts Zinc cat. No. rPF04-004 Stainless Steel cat. No. rPF04-004c

• replacement post cap for standard posts Black cat. No. rPc06-035

Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

7P 73/8 187 1/2 0.3 13P 13PK3 13PS 143/8 365 1 0.5 27P 27PS 283/8 720 13/4 0.75 33P 33PK3 33PS 343/8 873 2 0.9 54P 54PK3 54PS 547/16 1382 3 1.4 63P 63PK3 63PS 627/16 1585 31/2 1.6 74P 74PK3 74PS 741/2 1892 4 1.8 86P 86PK3 86PS 861/2 2197 5 2.3 *96P 961/2 2450 51/2 2.5

*96P should not be used on units less than 24" (610mm) deep. consult Metro Engineering for alternate recommendations.

Mobile Posts (For use with Stem casters)• Height includes post cap. Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

27UP 27UPS 273/4 704 13/4 0.75 33UP 33UPK3 33UPS 333/4 857 2 0.9 54UP 54UPK3 54UPS 5313/16 1366 3 1.4 63UP 63UPK3 63UPS 6113/16 1570 31/2 1.6 70UPK3 693/4 1771 33/4 1.7 74UP 74UPK3 74UPS 737/8 1876 4 1.8 86UP 86UPK3 86UPS 857/8 2181 41/2 2.0

Staked Posts (For use with Truck Dollies)• Each post connects to the truck dolly through the stem receptacle. The

stem receptacle is staked into the bottom of the post to ensure a durable connection in abusive mobile applications.

• Each includes a leveling/connecting bolt. Approx. Model No. Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. chrome Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

54P-STKD 54PS-STKD 547/16 1382 3 1.4 63P-STKD 63PS-STKD 627/16 1585 31/2 1.6 74P-STKD 74PS-STKD 741/2 1892 4 1.8

Swedged Posts (For use with Stem casters in cart Wash Applications)• Each post has an aluminum cap swedged into the top of the post. Approx. Model No. Height Pkd. Wt. Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

33UPS-SW 333/4 857 2 0.9 54UPS-SW 5313/16 1366 3 1.4 63UPS-SW 6113/16 1570 31/2 1.6

SiteSelect Posts feature double grooves every 8" (203mm) to aid assembly.

Special Length PostsSpecial length cut posts are available. consult your Metro representative for more information.


WirE SHELviNg

Wir

e S

helv

ing

10

.01

L02-006 Printed in U.S.A. rev. 11/08

information and specifications are subject to change without notice. Please confirm at time of order.

copyright © 2008 interMetro industries corp.

Super Wide Shelving• High-density Storage: Super Wide™ shelves have a greater storage

area for holding large quantities of supplies, especially large, bulky objects, providing maximum storage in minimum space.

• Load Capacity (evenly distributed) per shelf: Depths: 30" and 36" (760 and 914mm)

600 lbs. (272kg) for lengths 48" (1219mm) or shorter.

400 lbs. (181kg) for lengths 54" (1370mm) or longer. Model No. Approx. Model No. Metroseal 3 Model No. Nominal Width/Length Pkd. Wt. chrome with Microban Stainless Steel (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg)

3036Nc 3036NK3 3036NS 30x36 760x914 15 6.8 3048Nc 3048NK3 3048NS 30x48 760x1219 21 9.5 3060Nc 3060NK3 3060NS 30x60 760x1524 261/2 11.8 3072Nc 3072NK3 3072NS 30x72 760x1829 31 14.0 3636Nc 3636NK3 3636NS 36x36 910x914 18 8.2 3648Nc 3648NK3 3648NS 36x48 910x1219 23 10.4 3660Nc 3660NK3 3660NS 36x60 910x1524 29 13.1 3672Nc 3672NK3 3672NS 36x72 910x1829 341/2 15.4

Foot Plates• Use to bolt units to the floor, or when a broader, more stable foot is desired. Foot plates

also help to protect floors by distributing the point load of the shelving unit across a larger contact point.

• Foot plates (completely tightened) add 1/8" (3mm) to the specified heights of each stationary post on the table. Zinc cat. No. 9993Z Stainless Steel cat. No. 9993S

“S’’ Hook• Used to add on shelving units with only two posts required. order two per shelf level.

cat. No. 9995Z

Job ________________________________________________Job ________________________________________________

InterMetro Industries CorporationNorth Washington Street, Wilkes-Barre, PA 18705 Phone: 570-825-2741 Fax: 570-825-2852


For Product information:U.S. and canada: 1.800.433.2232

Latin America: 1.561.333.3824 Europe: +31.76.587.7550

Asia/Pacific: +65.6567.8003 Middle East/Africa: +971.4.811.8286

10.0

1


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


Indigo Series i-522 Ice Machine on B-420 Bin

Dice 7⁄8" x 7⁄8" x 7⁄8"(2.22 x 2.22 x 2.22 cm)

Half Dice 3⁄8" x 11⁄8" x 7⁄8"(.95 x 2.86 x 2.22 cm)

Ice ShapeRegular 11⁄8" x 11⁄8" x 7⁄8"(2.86 x 2.86 x 2.22 cm)

Indigo™ Series 522 Ice Cube Machine


ube Machine

Model: IR-0520A ID-0522A IY-0524A IR-0521W ID-0523W IY-0525W

YEAR YEAR

COMPRESSORICE MAKER EVAPORATOR

PARTS AND LABORYEAR PARTS

3 YEAR LABOR

Designed for operators who know that ice is critical to their business, the Indigo™ Series ice machine's preventative diagnostics continually monitor itself for reliable ice production. Improvements in cleanability and programmability make your ice machine easy to own and less expensive to operate.

• Space-Saving Design – Up to 485 lbs. (220 kgs.) daily ice production and only 22" (55.88 cm) wide.

• Intelligent Diagnostics – provide 24 hour preventative maintenance and diagnostic feedback for trouble free operation.

• Acoustical Ice Sensing Probe – for reliable operation in challenging water conditions.

• EasyRead Display – communicates operating status, cleaning reminders, and asset information through a blue illuminated display.

• Programmable Ice Production – by On/Off Time, Ice Volume or Bin Level (with accessory bin level control) further improves energy efficiency and savings.

• Easy to Clean Foodzone – Hinged front door swings out for easy access. Removable water-trough, distribution tube, curtain, and sensing probes for fast and efficient cleaning. Select components made with AlphaSan® antimicrobial.

• DuraTech™ Exterior – provides superior corrosion resistance. Stainless finish with innovative clear-coat resists fingerprints and dirt.

• Available LuminIce™ Growth Inhibitor controls the growth of bacteria and yeast within the foodzone.

Specifi cations BTU Per Hour: 5,300 (average) 6,100 (peak)

Refrigerant:R-404A CFC-free

Operating Limits:• Ambient Temperature Range:

35˚ to 110˚F (1.7˚ to 43.3˚C)Water Temperature Range:35˚ to 90˚F (1.7˚ to 32.2˚C)

• Water Pressure Ice Maker Water In:Min. 20 psi (137.9 kPA)Max. 80 psi (551.1 kPA)

Ice Machine Electric 115/60/1 standard.(208-230/60/1 and 230/50/1also available)

Minimum circuit ampacity: Air-cooled: 14.4 1phWater-cooled: 13.5 1ph

Maximum fuse size: Air-cooled: 20 1phWater-cooled: 20 1ph


PO Box 1720


Tel: 1.920.682.0161

Fax: 1.920.683.7589


B

A

C

D

EF

G

A Electrical Entrance (2) Options

3/8" (0.95 cm) F.P.T. Water Condenser Inlet(water-cooled units) 1/2" (1.27 cm) F.P.T. Water Condenser Outlet(water-cooled units)

B

C

1/2" (1.27 cm) Auxillary Base Drain Socket3/8" (0.95 cm) F.P.T. Ice Making Water Inlet 1/2" (1.27 cm) F.P.T. Ice Making Water Drain 3/4" (1.91 cm) Bin Drain

DEFG

21.50"(54.6 cm)

24.50" (62.23 cm)

34.00" (86.30 cm)

22.00" (55.88 cm)

44.00"(111.7 cm)

6.00"(15.24 cm)

i-522 on B-420 bin Storage Bin

4776

F ©

2014

Man

itow

oc 2

/14

Cont

inui

ng p

rodu

ct im

prov

emen

t may

nec

essi

tate

cha

nge

of s

peci

ficat

ions

with

out n

otic

e.

Installation Note Minimum installation clearance:

Top/sides: 12" (30.50 cm)Back: 5" (12.7 cm)

Space-Saving Designs

Height includes adjustable bin legs 6.00" to 8.00", (15.24 to 20.32 cm) set at 6.00" (15.24 cm).

* K-00141 bin adapter required.

i-522 i-522 B-420 B-400*Height 71.50" 59.50" 181.61 cm 151.13 cmWidth 22.00" 30.00" 55.88 cm 76.20 cmDepth 34.00" 34.00" 86.30 cm 86.30 cmBin 310 lbs. 290 lbs. Storage 140.7 kgs. 131.7 kgs.

ModelIce

Shape

Ice Production 24 Hours Power UsagekWh/100 lbs.@90°Air/70°F

Water Usage / 100 lbs.45.4 kgs. of Ice

ENERGYSTAR®70°Air/ 50°F Water 90°Air/ 70°F Water Potable Water

AIR-COOLED

IR-0520Aregular 415 lbs. 290 lbs.

7.2323.8 Gal.

188 kgs. 132 kgs. 90.1 L

ID-0522Adice 475 lbs. 335 lbs.

6.6423.8 Gal.

215 kgs. 152 kgs. 90.1 L

IY-0524Ahalf-dice 485 lbs. 360 lbs.

6.4523.8 Gal.

220 kgs. 163 kgs. 90.1 L

WATER-COO

LED

IR-0521Wregular 395 lbs. 350 lbs.

5.1923.8 Gal.

NA179 kgs. 159 kgs. 90.1 L

ID-0523Wdice 460 lbs. 375 lbs.

5.0923.8 Gal.

NA209 kgs. 170 kgs. 90.1 L

IY-0525Whalf-dice 480 lbs. 395 lbs.

4.8723.8 Gal.

NA218 kgs. 179 kgs. 90.1 L

* Water-cooled Condenser Water Usage / 100 lbs. /45.4 kgs. Of Ice: 190 gal/ 719 L. * Water-cooled models are excluded from ENERGY STAR qualification.

Order ice storage bin separately.

Specifications

AuCS®schedules and performs routine ice machine cleaning automatically.

AccessoriesLuminIce™ Growth Inhibitorreduces yeast and bacteria growth for a cleaner ice machine.

Bin Level ControlAllows ice bin level to be automatically set. Built-in LED light illuminates bin.

Arctic Pure® Water FiltersReduces sediment and chlorine odors for better tasting ice.


ube Machine

Foun

tain

Mac

hine

App

licat

ion

•Improvestasteandreducesodor

•Lowpressuredrop

•Sanitaryquickreplacem

ent

SelectoScientificInc.

3980LakefieldCourt,Suwanee,GA30024USA

Phone:6784750799

|8006354017Fax:6784759126

|8008117682

www.selectoinc.comEmail:Custom

[email protected]

Ver.

1.1

Cart

ridg

e Sp

ecif

icat

ion

& P

erfo

rman

ce D

ata:

7gpm

14”x9”x23”

18lbs

0.5

5psi,7gpm

,60psi

15,000gal,3.7gpm

75,000gal,7gpm

40°F-100°F

Flowrate

Maximum

Dimensions

ShippingWeight

MicronRating

InitialΔP,Flowrate

Chloraminereduction,FlowRate(gpm

)Chlorinereduction,Flowrate(gpm

)TemperatureRating

SM

F IC

614

Sys

tem

Par

t N

o. 8

0-61

40

Rep

lace

men

t Ca

rtri

dge

No.

108

-014

FilterM

edia

Housing

Head

Hollowcarbon

Polypropylene

Proprietaryreinforcednylon

Mat

eria

ls o

f co

nstr

ucti

on:

SMFIC6214hasbeentestedandcertifiedbyNSFInternational

againstNSF/ANSIStd.42&Std.53.Donotusewithwaterthatis

microbiologicallyunsafeorofunknownquality

RachelR

Textbox

RachelR

Textbox

Must add turn down on front to support middle.

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 21 13 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment revisions to for the following building systems:

1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping and automatic sprinklers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications prepared

according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design sprinkler system revisions and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 175-psig minimum working-

pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide sufficient copies of product data and shop drawings for review by the Post Fire Department,

AAFES Headquarters and Contracting Officer. Six (6) Copies are required for the review plus however many are required by the contractor.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Piping seismic restraints. 4. Sprinklers and escutcheons.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations.

D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: QFPA shall indicate and interpret test results for compliance

with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and UFC 3-600-01. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced licensed State of North Carolina sprinkler contractor who has designed and installed fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this project in New York and obtained design approval and inspection approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Working plans and calculations shall be prepared by a NICET Level III

designer, overseen by a qualified professional fire protection engineer (QFPE) as defined by UFC 3-600-01. QFPE shall witness tests and sign test reports required by UFC 3-600-01 and NFPA-13.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.


D. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the

following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

F. Military Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the

following: 1. Unified Facilities Criteria UFC-3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Sprinklers: a. Badger Fire Protection, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. e. Grinnell Corp. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Corp. h. Viking Corp.

2.02 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.03 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Type F; Schedule 40 in NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Type F; Schedule 10 in NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2.04 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. D. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. E. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11. F. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. G. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or

ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.


2.05 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Mechanical – General Provisions" for pipe-flange gasket materials and

welding filler metals.

2.06 SPRINKLERS A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for applications except residential. B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: "Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise

indicated or required by application. C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:

1. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon. 2. Upright sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Upright – bronze. 2. Recessed – factory painted white.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Painted white steel, two piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.

F. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wet-Pipe Sprinklers: Use the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and grooved joints.

3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-

end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry piping.

B. Dissimilar-Piping-Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings compatible with both

piping materials. Use dielectric fittings if both piping materials are metal. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.

3.04 PIPING INSTALLATION


A. Locations and Arrangements: 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities

having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes. C. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. D. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to NFPA 13

for sprinkler piping. E. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage. F. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct rigid

piping joints, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:

1. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers. 3.06 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles., if possible B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical panels.

3.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

3.08 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Preliminary Tests: 1. Flush, hydrostatically test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System

Acceptance" Chapter. 2. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to

demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 3. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Formal Test and Inspection: 1. Do not submit a request for formal test and inspection until the preliminary test and

corrections are completed and approved. Submit a written request for formal inspection at least 7 days prior to inspection date. An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by the Contractor and make additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. (The


Government will furnish water for the test.) Base fire chief and inspector’s will witness formal tests and approved systems before they are accepted.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post GENERAL PROVISION - PLUMBING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 05 10 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 05 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDES

A. General administrative and procedural requirements for the plumbing installations.

B. Related Sections:

1. General Provisions of the contract, including the Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specification sections.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent they are applicable.

1. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: (a) International Building Code, 2015.

(b) National Electrical Code, 2014. (c) International Plumbing Code, 2015. (d) International Mechanical Code, 2015. (e) Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970. (f) For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National Fire

Protection Association.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance

with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: (1) AGA American Gas Association. (2) ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (3) ANSI American National Standards Institute (4) ASE Association of Safety Engineers (5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineer (6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (7) AWWA American Water Works Association (8) EPA Environmental Protection Agency (9) FS Federal Specifications (10) IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (11) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (12) MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American (13) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (14) NFPA National Fire Protection Association (15) NSC National Safety Council (16) NSF National Sanitation Foundation (17) SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry (18) UL Underwriters Laboratories (19) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.04 DEFINITIONS


A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.

B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual

unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended

use.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data. B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the

manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Architect/Engineer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.06 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified. B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required

to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.07 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or

different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from

Architect/Engineer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.08 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid

interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights

occur, or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all

interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases,


partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. Architect/Engineer will reconcile conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.

1.09 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

1.10 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed

as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and the

exact location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide the Architect/Engineer with three

copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back. Manual shall include roster of all Owner training session attendees. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals. Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Architect/Engineer designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Closeout procedures for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 01.


B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior

and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate addenda, approved substitutions, change orders, actual

equipment and materials used.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing.

Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. C. Coordinate deliveries of plumbing materials and equipment to minimize construction site

congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.

B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.

C. Refer to the Division 08: Access Doors and Frames.

3.02 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.03 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:


(1) Coordinate plumbing equipment and materials installation with other building components.

(2) Verify all dimensions by field measurements. (3) Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for

plumbing installation. (4) Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. (5) Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of plumbing materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

(6) Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of plumbing equipment and materials.

(7) Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing services and overhead equipment to provide maximum headroom possible.

(8) Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

(9) Coordinate the installation of plumbing materials and equipment above ceiling with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.

(10) Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surface. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

(11) Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

(12) Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

(13) Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.

(14) Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed expose in finished spaces.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Refer to Section 01 14 50 for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 26 for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment,

components, and materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and

patching. E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of

plumbing installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is

necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.


G. Perform cuttings, fittings, and patching of plumbing equipment and materials required to:

1 Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Upon written instruction from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Architect/Engineer’s representative observation of concealed work.

H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.05 CLEANING A. Refer to the Division 01 for general requirements for final cleaning.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 05 12 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 05 12 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDES

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Grout. 4. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 5. Painting and finishing.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Transition Fittings.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


1.05 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate locations and size requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers

specified.

2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2. Comply with LEED requirements.

2.04 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.


1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.07 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Install piping to avoid running above electrical panels.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.


e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.

N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 . b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe

or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.02 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

3.03 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment. 2. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.04 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 05 23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Bronze ball valves.

B. Bronze swing check valves.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections

only. 2. Division 22 Section “Facility Water Distribution Piping” for general-duty and specialty

valves for site construction piping.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.



A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corporation.


j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.03 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.


D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Throttling Service: Ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3.05 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: solder ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Bronze full port two piece ball valves.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 05 29 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General administrative and procedural requirements for the plumbing installations.

B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.02 WORK INCLUDES A. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

B. Trapeze pipe hangers.

C. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

D. Fastener systems.

E. Pipe positioning systems.

F. Equipment supports.

G. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Welding certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.


B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .

2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.03 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.


B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

J. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


3.02 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.03 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.04 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated or epoxy coated pipe hangers and attachments for copper piping and tubing.


G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post PLUMBING INSULATION FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 07 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Insulation of plumbing piping, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Adhesives. 3. Sealants. 4. Factory-applied jackets. 5. Field-applied PVC fitting covers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop


Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.07 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the

following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. RBX Corporation. d. Halstead.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the

following: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.02 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LCC. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. d. RBX Corporation. e. Halstead.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Johns-Manville. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

2.03 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.

2.04 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.05 FIELD-APPLIED FITTING COVERS

A. PVC Fitting Covers: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Covers shall not exceed ASTM E-84 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed rating. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


a. Johns Manville. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto PVC Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

2.06 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. 3M.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300

deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.


M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.04 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.


6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.06 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.07 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.08 FINISHES

A. Exterior Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.09 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.010 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.


B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drain and Vent Piping above ceilings: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: ½ inch thick.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post DOMESTIC WATER PIPING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 11 16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Piping. 2. Fittings.

B. Water Test Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Contracting Officer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption

of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Contracting Officer’s written

permission.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.03 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install domestic water piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain, and plumb.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.


K. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

L. Install piping to avoid running above electric panels.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:


1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 6 feet.

3.05 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and


allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.07 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.09 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.


B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); cast- or wrought- copper

solder-joint fittings joints.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 13 16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building including the following: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.02 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,

and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer: 1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Section 01 14 50 – Cutting and Patching for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.

B. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and


reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

D. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

E. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 2-1/2” and smaller: 2 percent downward in direction

of flow. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 3” to 6”: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 8” and larger: 1/2 percent downward in direction of

flow. 4. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

F. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

G. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing”.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.


3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,

and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 13 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Cleanouts.

B. Floor drains and floor sinks.

C. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.


1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.02 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Hub Drains: 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,

cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include deep seal P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps: 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.


B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Install floor sinks square with walls. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-

inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

F. Assemble open hub drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, where indicated.

H. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

I. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FACILITY NATURAL- GAS PIPING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 16 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 16 13 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Natural gas piping including the following: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to natural gas utilization equipment in or on building including line and equipment regulators, gas valves, and specialties.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves, pressure regulators and service meter to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site survey, research base utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.


d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground.

2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 2. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 3. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 4. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.


5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.


4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.

2.06 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,

plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.03 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

3.04 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment connection locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.


M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: 1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be

installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.06 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators.


2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.08 CONNECTIONS

A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.09 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat. d. Color: Gray.

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe NPS 2” and smaller: Malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe NPS 2-1/2” and larger: Wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be bronze plug valve.

B. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 22 42 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 22 42 13 COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Faucets for lavatories, showers and sinks.

B. Fixture supports.

C. Lavatories.

D. Kitchen sinks.

E. Owner-furnished fixtures.

F. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and

specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 4. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 5. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 8. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.


11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Schedule: See schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 AAFES FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT A Provide rough-ins and final connections to all Exchange furnished equipment including shut off

valves, piping, traps, etc. necessary to connect up equipment after it has be installed in place. B. Install all faucets, sinks drains, tailpieces, overflows, traps, etc. furnished loose with all Ex-

change furnished equipment. C. All exposed piping readily visible for Exchange furnished equipment shall be chrome plated red

brass pipe and fittings. Braces for support of exposed piping shall be chrome plated. D. Pending installation of Exchange furnished equipment, all service lines shall be suitably

capped, plugged and protected. All water lines shall be valved.


E. Furnish vacuum breakers, pressure regulators solenoid valves, traps, piping, etc. as required for installation of equipment.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

E. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

L. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

M. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22.


P. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22.

Q. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.04 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post MECHANICAL – GENERAL PROVISIONS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 01 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 01 00 MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDES

A. General Provisions of the contract, including the following, shall apply to Division 23 Specification Sections: Solicitation Documents and Division 00 and Division 01 of the specifications.

B. The Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials,

equipment, transportation, construction plant, and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Wherever the words "the Contractor" or "this Contractor" appears in this Division, they refer to the Contractor for the work specified in that Section. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and shall be responsible for ascertaining to what extent other Drawings and Sections affect the Work herein specified.

1.02 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS

A. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: 1. 2015 International Building Code. 2. 2014 National Electrical Code. 3. 2015 International Plumbing Code. 4. 2015 International Mechanical Code. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970 6. Ft. Drum, NY Regulations. 7. Life Safety Code, N.F.P.A. No. 101. 8. For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National

Fire Protection Association.

B. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: 1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 2. ADC Air Diffusion Council 3. AGA American Gas Association. 4. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 5. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ASE Association of Safety Engineers 8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineer 9. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. AWWA American Water Works Association 11. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 12. FS Federal Specifications 13. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 14. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 15. MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American 16. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 17. NSC National Safety Council 18. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 19. SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry 20. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National


Association 21. UL Underwriters Laboratories 22. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 23. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 24. NEC National Electric Code (NFPA 70).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.

B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual

unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for

intended use.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data.

B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Contracting Officer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.05 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified.

B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as

required to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.06 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from

Architect/Engineer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.07 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event


that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights

occur, or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to

avoid all interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns.

1.08 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

1.09 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and

the exact location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts

list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals.

Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with

embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Owner designated representative to ensure that he understands their


function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.11 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. See Division 01 for red lining of all documents during construction to reflect "as-built" conditions.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 05 94 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 05 94 AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Contractor provide: 1. Test, adjust and balance of air systems as indicated on the drawings. 2. Any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers as required

for correct balance of the system as recommended by TAB Agency, at no cost to AAFES.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Heating, ventilating, air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous operation to accomplish the testing, adjusting and balancing work specified. Complete air balancing prior to piping systems balancing.

B. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing when outside conditions approximate design

conditions for heating and cooling functions or when the system is operating at design capacity.

C. The Architect's Representative will be present during testing and balancing to verify that

specified procedures are followed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Employ only qualified personnel to perform testing and balancing work.

B. Submit evidence that the personnel who will perform the testing and balancing of the project systems are qualified personnel for review and approval by the Architect prior to performing the work.

C. Submit a list of completed projects successfully tested and balanced by the submitted

qualified personnel for review and approval, by the Architect, prior to performing the work.

D. When the Contractor does not have qualified personnel on his staff he shall employ them from other firms or subcontract the work to a test and balance firm for this type of work.

E. Perform all corrective measures caused by faulty installation. Retest, readjust and rebalance

systems until satisfactory results are achieved. 1.05 DEFINITION

A. Qualified personnel are: 1. Personnel who have been certified by one of the following organizations.

a. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council. b. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Illinois Chapter.


1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Data Sheet on each item of testing equipment for Architect's approval. Include name of device, manufacturer's name, model number, latest date of calibration, and correction factors.

B. Submit a report containing all test data and other related information recorded during testing

and balancing, placed on appropriate forms for Architect's review and approval. Reports shall certify that the methods used and results achieved are as specified.

1.07 REVERIFICATION

A. During Substantial Completion Inspection, a percentage (not more than 5%) of the recorded data will be subject to reverification by the Architect/Engineer. Take instrument readings as directed. Test points will be in normally accessible locations and randomly selected by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR BALANCE INSTRUMENTS: (Ranges shown are guides. Actual ranges used are subject to

Architect's approval)

A. Velometer with probes and pitot tube.

B. Rotating vane anemometer.

C. ASHRAE Standard pitot tubes, stainless steel 5/16 in. outside diameter, lengths 18" and 36".

D. Magnehelic differential air pressure gages, 0 to 0.5", 0 to 1.0" and 0 to 5.0" water pressure ranges, each arranged as a portable unit for use with a standard Pitot tube.

E. Combination inclined-vertical portable manometer, range 0 to 5.0" water.

F. Portable type hook gage, range 0 to 12" water.

G. Portable flexible U-tube manometer, magnetic mounting clips, range 0 to 18" water.

H. Static pressure probe for induction Unit.

I. Conical or pyramidal shaped hood.

2. 02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Insertion thermometers, with graduations at 0.5 F.

B. Sling psychrometer.

C. Tachometer, centrifugal type.

D. Revolution counter.

E. Clamp-On volt-ammeter.

F. Portable recorders for temperature and humidity.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 AIR SYSTEMS: Test, adjust and balance systems in accord with the following:

A. Preliminary: 1. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested, including

air terminals. Inspect all system components for proper installation and operation. 2. Use manufacturers' ratings for all equipment to make calculations except where field

test shows ratings to be impractical. 3. Verify that all instruments are accurately calibrated and maintained. 4. Install clean filters.

B. Central System:

1. Test, adjust and record supply fan RPM to design requirements within the limits of mechanical equipment provided.

2. Test and record motor voltage and running amperes including motor nameplate data and starter heater ratings.

3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts, determine and record cfm at fans and adjust fans to design cfm.

4. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge. 5. Test and adjust system for design outside air, cfm. 6. Test and adjust systems for design recirculated air, cfm.

C. Distribution: Adjust zones or branch ducts to proper design cfm, supply and return.

D. Air Terminals:

1. Identify each air terminal from reports as to location and determine required flow reading.

2. Test and adjust each air terminal to within 10% of design requirement. 3. Test procedure on air terminals shall include comparison of specified fpm velocity

and observed velocity, adjustment of terminal, and comparison of specified cfm and observed cfm after adjustment.

4. Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts to extend design and equipment permits.

E. Verification:

1. Prepare summation of readings of observed cfm for each system, compare with specified cfm and verify that duct losses are within specified allowable range. Determine coil and filter static pressure drops.

2. Verify design cfm at fans as described in 3.01.B.3 above. 3.02 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The ventilating contractor shall set and adjust automatically operated devices to achieve specified sequence of operations.

B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list those controls

requiring adjustment by the contractor. 3.03 REPORT SUBMITTAL

A. Fill in test results on appropriate forms.

B. Submit three certified copies of test reports to the Architect for approval.


C. Include in report a list of instruments used and last date of calibration.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post MECHANICAL INSULATION FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 07 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 07 00 MECHANICAL INSULATION



1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. External insulation of ductwork, where indicated and specified.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Division 1 requirements.

B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, and accessories.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating

of 50 or less.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass Fiber:

a. Certain Teed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. c. Johns-Manville. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation.

2.02 GLASS FIBER

A. Materials: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.

B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft


paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.

C. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum, at 75 deg F. mean temperature.

D. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and follow up service.

1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

2.03 JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E

96. 2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D

781. 2.04 SEALING COMPOUNDS

A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Mix insulating cements contacting stainless-steel surfaces with demineralized water. 1. Follow cement manufacturers printed instructions for mixing and portions.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each mechanical system.

B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that

do no corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating

temperatures below 60 deg. F.

D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturers printed instructions.

E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.

F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.


G. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal

with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.

I. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturers recommended coverage-per-gallon rate.

J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

K. Item Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following

systems, materials, and equipment. 1. Metal ducts with duct liner. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 4. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes. 5. Vibration control devices. 6. Testing laboratory labels and stamps. 7. Nameplates and data plates. 8. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems. 9. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, plug valves, and flow regulators.

3.03 DUCT INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as follows: 1. Smaller Than 24 Inches: Bonding adhesive applied in 6 inch wide transverse strips

on 12 inch centers. 2. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding

adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 3. Overlap joints 3 inches. 4. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound.

3.04 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems: 1. Interior concealed rigid supply air ductwork.

3.05 DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. INTERIOR CONCEALED RIGID HVAC SUPPLY OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS

THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- MATERIAL FORM IN BARRIER APPLIED

INCHES REQ’D JACKET

Glass Fiber Blanket 2 Yes None

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post METAL DUCTWORK FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 31 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Sheet metal ductwork for air distribution systems including accessories.


A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,

Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter

1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". Comply with NFPA-96 for installation of exhaust hood ductwork.

B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of

SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products in accord with Division 01.


A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary

to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

B. Black Steel: Exhaust hood ductwork shall be constructed of 16 gage black steel with all joints welded liquid-tight.


2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree

change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable

for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type

applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized

steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft. lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards".

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers.

D. Fabricate hood exhaust ductwork in compliance with NFPA-96 and International Mechanical

Code. All joints shall be welded liquid tight. All elbows shall be radiused unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately


at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match

shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.

C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

D. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space

between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.

E. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

F. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards.

3.03 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution

devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

C. Test hood exhaust ductwork in compliance with International Mechanical Code and local AHJ

requirements.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 33 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 33 00

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. Ductwork accessories.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standards 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" and 555S "Standard For Safety-Leakage Rated Dampers For Use In Smoke Control Systems."

4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accord with Division 01.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each

type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the

following: 1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Nailor. 3. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.


4. Arrow Louver and Damper. 5. Greenheck. 6. National Controlled Air. 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 8. Leader.

2.02 DUCT HARDWARE

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated,

duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of

shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the

following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2. Young Regulator Co. 3. Duro Dyne Corp.

2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one

of the following: 1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.

2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Flexaust (The) Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket

enclosing 1-1/2 inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.

1. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.

2. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

C. Pressure Rating: 6 inch wg positive, ½ inch wg negative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of

ductwork accessories properly with other work.

C. Install manual damper at each branch duct take-off.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action. 1. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23, Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing".

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FANS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 34 23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 34 23 FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. All materials, equipment, tools, labor, etc. required to complete the installation of the fans as shown on the drawings and as specified.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories; and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Maintenance data for fans, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in

Division 01.


A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code."

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07.


B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. Cook (Loren) Co. 2. Greenheck Fan Corp.

2.02 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation

at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1. Fan Shafts: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than

70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor: 1.4.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan

cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median like "Rating Life" (AFBMA L) of 200,000 calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venture inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball

bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast iron, adjustable pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.


2. Bird Screens: Removable, ½ inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall

sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated galvanized steel curbs with internal insulation. 5. Exhaust Hood Fans: Provide UL-762 listed fans with accessories scheduled and as

required for compliance with NFPA-96.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 23. 1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with stainless steel hardware.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air handling units for service and

maintenance.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 26. 2. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National

Electrical Code. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 37 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 37 13 AIR OUTLET AND INLET



1.02 WORK INCLUDES

A. All grilles, registers, and diffusers.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".

3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual".

4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test

Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seat: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A

"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,

number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration

ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 37 13 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Units are scheduled on the drawings.

B. Finish Compatibility: Provide with border styles that are compatible with adjacent finish systems. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of finish systems which will contain each type of air device.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air devices of one of the

following: 1. Krueger. 2. Price. 3. Titus.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to

interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 38 15 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 38 15

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide: 1. Complete Food Service Ventilating systems including canopy, filters, lights,

ductwork, extinguishing systems, and control panels for exhaust fans. 2. Extinguishing systems shall be factory installed.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA:

a. 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 96: Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-

Laden Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment. c. 17A: Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems.

2. National Sanitary Foundation, NSF: a. Seal of approval.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL: a. UL listed and labeled components.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit layout of entire extinguishing system including nozzles, piping, and fused links.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Exhaust Hoods: 1. Captiveaire.

B. Extinguishing System:

1. Ansul. 2.02 CANOPY HOODS:

A. Construction:

1. 18 gauge stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Canopy internal supports consisting of angles and channels to reinforce and


prevent vibration and fatigue. 3. Canopy fabricated as one piece and shipped as one piece.

B. Filter:

1. Canopy filter housing of same material as canopy liner, complete with UL classified extractor type aluminum grease filters full length.

2. Filter shall provide constant pressure drop. 3. Filter housing shall terminate at bottom with pitched drip tray full length of canopy

and shall be equipped with grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning. 4. Filter shall be large enough for air to strike it at all temperatures.

C. Lights:

1. Vapor-proof lights with plastic coated glass lens spaced on 3 foot centers, where scheduled and wired to J-box on top of canopy; provide bulb for fixture.

D. Extinguishing System:

1. System shall protect range hoods, exhaust ducts, filters and appliances. 2. Automatic operation initiated by fusible metallic links with temperature ratings in

accordance with below referenced installation manual. 3. Piping:

a. Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40; black steel; chrome-sleeved where exposed.

b. Fittings: Malleable-iron, ductile-iron, steel or cast-iron; of standard weight.

c. Pipe reamed and cleaned before assembly and after assembly.

4. Provide manual release station, located as indicated on drawings, for each extinguishing system. Provide permanent plastic laminate tag at each pull station, clearly indicating hood served.

5. Provide set of dry contacts for contacts for fire alarm system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which exhaust hoods are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF HOODS

A. Install hoods and extinguishing systems as indicated on Drawings and in accord with NFPA 96 and 17A.

B. Provide all miscellaneous framing, anchors, and brackets necessary to properly support

hoods.

C. Install piping and extinguishing systems in compliance with manufacturers requirements and recommendations.


A. Start-Up:

1. Provide start-up supervision. 2. Provide instruction to AAFES Personnel on system operation. 3. Provide field certification by system manufacturer.


4. Provide acceptance test observed by Fire Department personnel. Test extinguishing system in conjunction with fire alarm tests. Contractor to provide all material and labor to conduct the test(s).

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion - Fort Bragg North Post Packaged, Outdoor, Heating and Cooling Make-Up Air-Conditioners FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 23 74 33 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 | PWBA 170704

SECTION 23 74 33

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, HEATING AND COOLING MAKEUP AIR CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cooling and heating rooftop replacement-air units.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation and wiring diagrams.

C. Startup service reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.

E. Warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components listed below that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date

of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from

date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CABINET

A. Exterior Casing: Galvanized steel with baked-enamel paint finish with lifting lugs and knockouts for electrical and piping connections.

B. Base Rails: Galvanized-steel rails for mounting on roof curb.

C. Service Doors: Hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets.

D. Internal Insulation: Fibrous-glass duct lining complying with ASTM C 1071, Type II. 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment to casing without damaging liner and without causing air leakage when applied as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet designed for self-drainage. Fabricate pans with slopes to preclude buildup of microbial slime.


2.02 SUPPLY-AIR FAN

A. Fan: centrifugal; statically and dynamically balanced, galvanized or coated steel, mounted on solid-steel shaft with self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings or pillow-block bearings rated L50 for 200,000 hours and having external grease fittings.

B. Motor: Open dripproof single-speed motor.

C. Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly with minimum 1.4 service factor, or direct drive with variable speed drive for air balancing.

D. Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted in fan casing with elastomeric or spring isolators.

2.03 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. Compressors: Scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and over-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. EER and COP: Meet or exceed minimum EER and COP values as defined by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Refrigerant: R-410A.

E. Refrigeration System Specialties: 1. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 2. Refrigerant dryer. 3. High-pressure switch. 4. Low-pressure switch. 5. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 6. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 7. Operating charge of refrigerant. 8. Refrigerant Hot Gas Reheat Coil.

F. Capacity Control: Variable speed compressor for capacity control with continuous dehumidification on a single compressor.

G. Refrigerant Coils: Evaporator and condenser coils shall be designed, tested, fabricated, and rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33. Coils shall be leak tested under water with air at 315 psig (2170 kPa). 1. Capacity Reduction: Circuit coils for interwoven. 2. Tubes: Copper. 3. Fins: Aluminum. 4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond. 5. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints. 6. Source Quality Control: Test to 450 psig (3105 kPa), and to 300 psig (2070 kPa) underwater.

H. Condenser Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by motor.

I. Safety Controls: 1. Compressor motor and outside-coil fan motor low ambient lockout. 2. Overcurrent protection for compressor motor and outside-coil fan motors.


2.04 INDIRECT-FIRED GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," and ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces." 1. AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of AGA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel with a minimum thermal efficiency of 80 percent. 1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.

C. Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

E. Safety Controls: 1. Gas Control Valve: Off, high, low. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot

solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.05 OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE DAMPERS

A. Dampers: Low Leakage.

B. Damper Operators: Electric.

C. Outdoor-Air Intake Hoods: Galvanized steel, with bird screen and finish to match cabinet.

2.06 FILTERS

A. Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Disposable Panel Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, pre-filters and 4-inch (100 mm) thick final filters, factory-fabricated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames, with a minimum efficiency report value of MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1. 1. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 2. Frame: Galvanized steel.

2.07 CONTROLS

A. Packaged unitary controls to provide space temperature and humidity control via remote sensors. Supply fan shall be interlocked with exhaust hood exhaust fan.

2.08 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.09 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with specifications, provide make-up air units by one of the following: 1. Trane 2. AAON 3. Daikin


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Burner Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas

Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union, pressure regulator, and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ductwork." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply ducts to rooftop replacement-air units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Ductwork Accessories."

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.02 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 2. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 3. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. 4. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 5. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 6. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 7. Inspect operation of power vents. 8. Purge gas line. 9. Verify bearing lubrication. 10. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 11. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 12. Start unit. 13. Start refrigeration system when outdoor-air temperature is within normal operating limits. 14. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including response to smoke

detectors by fan controls and fire alarm. 15. Operate unit for run-in period. 16. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust burner for peak

efficiency: a. Measure gas pressure at manifold. b. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and

when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. 17. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 18. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke. 19. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

20. Verify operational sequence of controls.

B. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension.


C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare written report of the results of startup services.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop replacement-air units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Starting of Systems."

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-00-60 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 00 60

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior demolition, removal and abandonment of interior electrical systems, including communications and special systems including fire alarm and telephone.

B. Cleaning and repair of existing equipment to remain.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 01 - Selective Demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Contracting Officer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

E. Contractor shall verify and or test ballasts, transformers, and other devices or equipment to be removed do not contain and PCB or other hazardous materials requiring special disposal. Contractor is responsible for all testing and disposal costs.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with Food Court Manager. Provide duration of outage a minimum of 14 days in advance. Outage shall only occur during non-customer hours. Outage can occur two hours after closing and be restored a minimum of two hours before opening of next business day.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during all phases of construction.

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-00-60 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Contracting Officer at least 10 working days before disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Outages shall only occur during non-customer hours.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Notify Store Manager and local fire department at least 7 days before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Store Manager at least 7 days before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Outage shall only occur during non-customer hours. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish existing electrical work under provisions of Division 01, and this Section.

B. Remove existing installations to accommodate requirements for new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply or next active device to remain.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work.

J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

END OF SECTION 26 00 60

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 19

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable type.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years documented experience.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,

as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.


C. Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.

1.09 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2. E. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation:

1. 208/120 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green. 2. 480/277 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, gray, green.

2.02 METAL CLAD (MC) CABLE INSTALLATIONS

A. Type MC cable installation shall be in accordance with the following: No more than six (6) total current-carrying conductors in multiple MC cable runs shall be bundled together into a single MC cable hanger dedicated “POWER”. Wireway or ladder type tray with dual supports may also be used to support MC cable with fill as allowed by the NEC. Neutrals shall be counted as current-carrying conductors. Do not utilize communications tray for branch circuit supports.

B. MC cable shall be run parallel or perpendicular to walls. No diagonal runs shall be permitted. C. Maintain a clearance of a least 6 inches from hot water and other high-temperature pipes and

telecommunications conduits, 12 inches from unshielded twisted-pair telecommunications cables and 18” above accessible ceiling tiles.

D. The arrangement of MC cables and fastening methods shall be subject to the approval of the A/E.

Securely support all MC cable with cable hangers, individual spring steel support clips, steel trapeze hangers, threaded rods or dedicated No. 8 AWG drop wires. Cable supports shall be fastened to concrete slabs, beams, joists or other structural members of the building. Do not support MC cable on hung ceilings or on ceiling support wires.

E. Support MC cable every 4 feet and within 1 foot of every box, fitting, or cable termination. F. All MC cables, passing through fire-rated walls or electrical/telecommunications room wall shall be

provided with a UL listed, fire-rated penetration assembly. G. Install cable to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using UL listed

materials and methods. H. All MC cables shall be run concealed in walls or above ceilings. It shall not be used in poured

concrete walls, floors, or roofs; CMU walls; in earth; or where subject to physical damage. I. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral, and ground.


1. 120/208 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green. 2. 277/480 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, gray, green.

J. Cables run down walls shall terminate in junction box before making equipment connection in

liquid tight whip. K. MC cable installation shall only be used for 20A and 30A branch circuits. L. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG regardless of use. See Section 16111. M. Provide anti-short bushings at all termination points to prevent wire contact with sharp metal. N. MC cables shall be run horizontally above ceilings and vertically in wall voids. No horizontal runs

with-in wall voids shall be allowed. O. MC cables shall only be utilized once in the space being served. Branch circuits shall leave the

panel in conduit. Conduit shall run to the area space being served before terminating in a junction box and continuing one in MC cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.03 WIRING METHODS A. Use wiring methods indicated. B. All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.

3.04 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. C. Use solid conductors for #12 and smaller, stranded #10 and larger. D. Use stranded conductors for power circuits. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits.


H. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet.

I. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt

branch circuits with homeruns longer than 200 feet. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. M. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. N. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise. O. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

P. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps,

8 AWG and smaller. Q. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10

AWG and smaller. R. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each

conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.

3.06 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS A. Perform tests after cables have been installed in raceways, but before connection to lugs. Notify

Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to cable tests. B. Measure resistance line-to-ground using a commercial meggar tester. Apply 1000 volts DC to

cables 2 AWG and larger and record DC insulation resistance for each circuit conductor. Minimum acceptable level is 50 megohms.

C. Record test results and include in O and M manual.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-26 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Rod electrode.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.07 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Procedures for submittals. B. Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with


1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet.

2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Burndy or approved equal. B. Material: Bronze.

2.03 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Cadweld or approved equal.

2.04 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation. B. Size: As required by NEC.

2.05 GROUND BUSHING/LUG

A. Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degree C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth, well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a conduit connector as required by the NEC.


A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install rod electrodes at exterior of building. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve

specified resistance to ground. B. Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in

foundation footing. Bond steel together using tie wires so there is a minimum of 40 feet of continuous bar to which to bond grounding electrode conductor.

C. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.


D. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

E. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid bare #8AWG

between all ground terminal strips.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Maximum acceptable resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post SUPPORTING DEVICES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-29 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 29

SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors and

preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall

fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.02 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal.

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post SUPPORTING DEVICES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-29 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

B. Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8”square.) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation",

NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables. C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch

off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in

hollow partitions.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post CONDUIT FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-33 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 33

CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetallic conduit. F. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. Fittings and conduit bodies.


A. Division 07 – Roofing Penetrations. B. Division 26 – Boxes.

C. Division 26 – Grounding and Bonding.

D. Division 26 – Supporting Devices.

E. Division 26 – Electrical Identification.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following standards: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable

Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NECA "Standard of Installation." 6. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40% of

conduit cross sectional area.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.


1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record

documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as required to

complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

2. Within Five Feet Inside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

3. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit. D. Wet and Damp Interior Locations Above Floor Slab: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Use wet and/or damp location fittings. E. Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions): 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.


2.02 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded connections.

2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match

conduit. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.

2.07 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. C. Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables. Arrange

supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity space at the level of structural roof joists.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide

space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits.


F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Division 26. DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK.

G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary

supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit under slab directly from point-to-point where possible. Avoid conduit crossovers

where possible. M. Do not install conduit in floor slab on grade or floor slab above grade. Run conduits 1-1/2” and

below on grade at bottom of gravel sub-base. Conduits larger than 1-1/2” shall be trenched in below grade so top of conduit is at top of grade.

N. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104

degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic

conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 10 minutes, minimum. Use only an approved hotbox bender to make bends in nonmetallic conduit.

S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet

locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between boxes (no more than two 90-

degree bends for conduits containing telephone cables, fire alarm cables, intrusions system cables, local area network (LAN) cables, etc.). Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.

U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided copper bonding jumpers.

W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long and

nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Division 26. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Division 26.


AA. Where conduits for telephone cables, cash register cables, etc. are stubbed from wall boxes or cabinets to above accessible ceilings, turn conduits out of wall approximately 12 inches above accessible ceiling. Coordinate location with other trades. Provide bushing on end of conduit to prevent signal cable contact with sharp metal. Provide tag on end of conduit indicating type and location of utilization outlet (example: TELEPHONE - BREAK ROOM).

BB. In interior locations, turn nonmetallic conduits through floor slab using rigid steel elbows.

Continue raceway above floor slab using metallic conduit. CC. Paint exposed conduits to match adjacent surface. DD. Where conduits enter boxes and cabinets, provide bushings with plastic insulated throat for

conduits 1 inch and larger. EE. Seismic Bracing: provide seismic bracing for suspended conduits 2” or larger and trapeze

hangers at interval of 20 feet or less. Bracing shall consist of 1-5/8" square channel both parallel and perpendicular to conduit and fastened to roof joist at 45-degree angle relative to vertical.

FF. MC cable shall only be acceptable for use on this project per 26 05 19.

3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods under the provisions of Division 07. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with

pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post BOXES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-34 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 34

BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record

documents.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;

include male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.

Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141.


D. Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with the

wall. The cast aluminum receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-1/2” from wall surface. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is weathertight in use per NEC 410-57b. Hubbell WP-700, or equal.

2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in 26 05 35. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless-steel cover screws.


A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. F. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust

box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. G. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in 26 27 26. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling

access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. L. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and

backsplashes. M. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. N. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,

manual starters, interval timers, thermostats, and similar devices. Align wall mounted boxes for receptacles, telephone jacks, local area network outlets, and the like. Where such devices are shown in close proximity on plans, locate adjacent outlets with no more than 4-inch space between adjacent boxes.

O. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms, mezzanines, and electrical

closets. P. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, locate flush mounting boxes in masonry wall to require

cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.


Q. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. R. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness. After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.

S. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. T. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. U. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. V. DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF DECK. W. Support boxes independently of conduit. X. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

Provide metal barrier plates between gangs to separate line voltage from low voltage systems and where voltage between adjacent light switches exceeds 300 volts.

Y. Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Z. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, interiors of walk-in refrigeration

equipment, and wet locations. Provide vapor seals at conduit entrances to these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound.

AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box

in other locations. Z. Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight runs. AA. Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible permanent ink

marker on outside face of cover.

3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box and

proper operation of equipment.

A.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.05 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. D. Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp objects.

Remove all sharp objects.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-35 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 35

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Furnish two of each key. Cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed to same key as panel boards.


Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-35 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

A. Hoffman B. Square D C. General Electric

2.02 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 inside, or 3R where exposed to weather or moisture, steel

enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. Covers in damp and wet

locations shall have continuous gasket. C. Provide removable interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;

finish with white enamel. Provide standoff devices for separation of equipment mounting panel from enclosure.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.03 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide white enamel finished metal backboard for mounting terminal blocks or other

devices. C. Fronts: Steel, Flush type with door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch

circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. E. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each

corner under the provisions Division 26. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.02 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-53 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 05 53

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

Screw on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed. B. Locations: 1. Each New lighting and appliance panelboard. 2. Each New breaker in distribution panel. 3. Each safety switch not in sight of utilization equipment. Indicate correct fuse size

in fusible switches. 4. Each automatic motor starter. Indicate correct fuse size for combination starters

and drives. 5. Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled. 6. Transformers. 7. Where more than two switches are located adjacent to each other or where

switches control loads not in same space. 8. Where noted on plans. C. Letter Size:

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-05-53 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

1. Use 1/8-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety switches, motor starters, and relays.

2. Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

2.02 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes,

outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control

schematics.

2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system

that conduit serves. B. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 4. Comm/Data: Blue

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.02 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09910. D. Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs. E. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 4. Comm/Data: Blue

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-22-00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 22 00

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Two-winding transformers.


A. Division 03 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for supporting foundations and pads. B. Division 26 – Raceways.

C. Division 26 – Grounding and Bonding.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications. B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and

accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and

sound level. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of transformers in project record documents.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy

canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided

for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. 5. Cooper. B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled, copper winding dry type

transformers, ratings as indicated. C. Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. D. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. E. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: 1. 1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 80 degrees C rise. 2. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 80 degrees C rise. F. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at

full load. G. Winding Taps: 1. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity

taps on primary winding. 2. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20. H. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. I. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers

300 kVA and larger.


J. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.

K. Mounting: 1. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. L. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded. M. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. N. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. O. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated

allowable temperature rise.

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.


A. Set transformers plumb and level. Hold transformers minimum of 6 inches from walls. B. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Division 26 conduit, 2 feet minimum length,

for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

C. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished

by the manufacturer. D. Mount floor-mounted transformers on concrete pads. Provide 6” high pad with 6” x 6”

continuous wire mesh at vertical center of pad. Extend pad 6” beyond front and sides of transformer. Provide 1-inch x 45-degree chamfer at front and side edges.

E. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated. F. Provide seismic restraints. Provide lateral and longitudinal bracing using 1-5/8" square

steel channel. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Division 26. H. Provide 4” thick concrete equipment pad for all floor mounted transformers. Pad shall be

6” larger than width and depth on all sides.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.

3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.


3.04 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of transformer according to

manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post PANELBOARDS FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-24016 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Distribution panelboards. B. Branch circuit panelboards.


A. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding. B. Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

C. Section 26 43 13 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS).

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment

(published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Arrange circuit breakers in panels same as shown on plans.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project

record documents. C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts

and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with


1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.

1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.

C. Service Conditions: 1. Temperature: 100 degrees F. 2. Altitude: 1000 feet. D. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.

E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards.

Provide higher ratings where indicated. Series rating not allowed. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous

magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment branch circuits. Provide circuit breakers UL listed SWD for NO-OFF control of lighting or other loads.

G. Provide handle locks for certain breakers. H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, type 3R for exterior locations.


I. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

J. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.

2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;

provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208-volt

panelboards. Provide higher ratings where indicated. Series rating not allowed. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,

with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, type 3R for exterior locations. G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified,

all cabinets shall be of same dimensions. H. Cabinet Front: With concealed trim clamps, door in door type hinge, metal directory frame, and

flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. I. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.


A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than

4 inches above floor and with handle of top circuit breaker no more than 6'-6" above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect

circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide screw-on type engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53.


G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Stub spare conduits out of wall minimum 6" below roof joist in areas with exposed roof structure. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.

I. Do not splice conductors in panelboard cabinets. J. Land only one conductor to each circuit breaker. Where multiple conductors are used, splice in

junction box before entering panelboard.

K. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid, bare, #8AWG between all ground terminal strips.

L. Provide and install arc flash warning signs per NEC 110.16. M. Rigidly mount surface mounted panels to Unistrut supports spanning a minimum of two studs.

Panel shall be supported at a minimum of two locations vertically. Provide similar installation at masonry construction. Toggle bolts shall not be used.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit

breakers.

3.03 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of panelboards.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post WIRING DEVICES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-27 26 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers.

1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.



1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E.


B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch. Provide single pole,

double pole, three-way, four-way, pilot light, or momentary contact type as indicated. C. Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red lens. E. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. F. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may choose

multiple colors throughout project.

2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy duty, specification grade receptacle. In barber shop and beauty

shop waiting area, provide safety type receptacles which shall discourage insertion of foreign object into receptacle by small children.

C. Device Body: Nylon. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet

regulatory requirements. Devices shall utilize “Lock Out” technology to ensure outlet can not be used if ground fault protection fails. Device shall have status LED.

G. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may choose

multiple colors throughout project. 2.03 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon in all areas except food prep. Devices in food prep shall be

stainless steel. Manufacturer same as device manufacturer. Color to match device.

B. Exterior Wall Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with the wall. The cast aluminum receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-1/2” from wall surface. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is “Weatherproof in use”. The enclosure shall be UL Listed. Provide Hubbell WP-700, or equal.


A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.


C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring

devices.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. After connecting wires to GFCI receptacles, wrap terminals with four layers of electrician’s tape. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal when using solid

conductors. Provide crimp on lugs for terminations when using stranded conductors. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above

accessible ceilings. J. Provide ½” black on clear adhesive label tape on each device coverplate centered between the

top of the cover and the device indicating panel and branch circuit. This label will be controlled when multiple light switches are located next to each other (i.e. A-21).

3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 34 to obtain mounting heights

indicated on drawings.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Clean installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post Fuses FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26 28 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 16477

FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including

time-current curves.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.

B. Record actual fuse sizes.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and

indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Class L: Bussman Hi-Cap or approved equal.

B. Class RK1: Bussman Low-Peak or approved equal. 2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post Fuses FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26 28 13 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

C. Switches Larger than 600 amperes: UL Class L (time delay).

D. Switches 600 amperes or Smaller: UL Class RK1 (time delay). PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26 43 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Contractor provide:

1. SPD units mounted integral to main distribution panel. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) G. Federal Information Processing Standards, Pub 94 (FIPS) H. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits, Category C I. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits. J. UL 1449, Current Edition – Surge Protective Devices K. UL 1283 L. NEMA LS-1, Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices M. NEC Article 285

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section Division 01, provide:

1. Shop drawings and product data sheets indication physical and electrical characteristics in accordance with Division 1.

2. UL1449 file card copies. 3. Third party test results verifying label ratings.

1.5 WARRANTY


A. Warrant all equipment for ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.


A. Liebert.

B. Current Technology.

C. EFI Electronics.

D. United Power.

E. Leviton.

F. Square D.

G. Seimens ITE.

H. G.E. 2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. SPD Types 1. Distribution Panel and Motor Control Center: SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 4

intended for Type 1 or Type 2 applications, verifiable at UL.com, without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls.

B. Nominal System Operating Voltages

1. 208Y/120 VAC, 3-phase, 4 wire, plus ground for panelboard units.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltages (MCOV)

1. 125% of nominal system operating voltage.

D. Operating Frequency

1. 60 Hertz.

E. Seven (7) Protection Modes on Grounded Wye System

1. L-G, L-N and N-G (L = Line, N = Neutral, and G = Ground).

F. The SPD shall be UL Tested and labeled as a complete assembly to a symmetrical fault current

rating greater than or equal to the rating of the connected panel, in accordance with NEC Article 285, without the requirement of a dedicated breaker feeder to obtain the fault current withstand rating.

G. The Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) shall be tested with the integral disconnect in accordance with

UL-1449, Third Edition. The UL VPR values shall not exceed the following (including disconnect). If the device is remote mounted it shall be fed by a circuit breaker and the UL VPR rating shall include the breaker in series with the SPD.


H. Maximum UL 1449 Voltage Surge (Category C1)

System Voltage L-N, L-G, N-G Modes 208Y/120 VAC 800V

I. Protection and Filtering Elements:

1. The SPD shall have a maximum surge current rating of:

Branch Panel 100 kA per mode. Devices that derive a maximum surge current rating by adding test results of individual components are not acceptable. Test documentation of kA rating shall be required. Devices must be rated per mode, not per PHASE per NEMA.

2. The SPD device repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing a 1.2x50ms, 20kV

open circuit voltage, 8x20ms, 10kA short circuit Category C3 test waveform (as defined by ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992) at one minute intervals. A failure is defined as either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at the specified surge current. The service entrance device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 20,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%. Downstream devices shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%.

3. The SPD device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 surges using a 10x1000ms impulse (1kV, 4kA for 277/480V devices, .5kV, 2kA for 120/208V devices), confirmed by an independent nationally recognized test lab (R&B Labs).

4. Systems using selenium, gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes in surge current path are not acceptable.

5. The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for all voltage configurations shall be 125% of nominal or greater.

6. The fusing system shall be capable of allowing the rated maximum surge current to pass through without fuse operation. Systems utilizing a fusing system that opens below the maximum surge current level are unacceptable. The fusing system shall be included in the surge current testing.

J. The SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of – 50dB at

100kHz. K. The SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n).

L. Overcurrent Protection:

1. Fuses rated for 200 KAIC (integral fused disconnect).

M. Diagnostic Monitoring:

1. Fuse monitoring. 2. MOV monitoring. 3. Green/red indicator lights for each phase. Red light indicating damaged phase. 4. Form C contacts for remote annunciation of unit status. 5. Press-to-test diagnostics to verify operational integrity of monitoring system. 6. Surge event counter and audible alarm. 7. Remote status monitor.

N. Serviceability:


1. SPD system module(s) must be field replaceable by qualified individuals or licensed Electricians.

O. Equipment Mounting:

1. Main Distribution Panel SPD – The SPD shall include an integral disconnect switch which has been tested to the surge current rating of the SPD and match or exceed the fault current rating of the board per NEC 285. The Disconnect must switch the phases and neutral. Use of circuit breakers for disconnect mean is not acceptable due to impedance and the requirement for neutral disconnect. The SPD shall be mounted integral to the equipment.

2. Branch panel SPD – the SPD shall be direct bus to bus connected. Use of a breaker to feed an integral device shall not be acceptable.


A. Install SPD units per manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Verify SPD unit ratings with service rating and voltage characteristics, and with Electrical Requirements section of this specification. Ensure proper system configuration and coordination prior to ordering any equipment.

C. Do not drill or tap equipment bus bars. Use suitable bolted bus connectors.

D. Connect separately mounted SPD units to equipment with input conductors that are as short and

straight as practically possible. Twist input conductors to reduce inductance.

E. Provide source breaker or fused disconnect switch for SPD units sized in accordance with SPD manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Ground equipment and SPD units per manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and Section 26 05 26.

G. Provide mounting brackets, bus bar, breaker stabs, and filler pieces for unused spaces.


A. Perform SPD unit tests according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide verification of test results to Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide services of manufacturer's factory trained Engineer for length of time required to:

1. Coordinate installation. 2. Conduct functional tests on all equipment and field test listed herein. 3. Provide training during normal working hours to AAFES's personnel in operation, testing,

adjusting, and maintenance. 4. Submit written report to Architect/Engineer and AAFES stating results of tests conducted and

listing personnel trained. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque value recommendations and UL 486A and B.


C. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

D. Clean interior and exterior of enclosure.

END OF SECTION 26 43 13

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post INTERIOR LUMINAIRES FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-51 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Ballasts. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps -

Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple

Supply Type). D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard

product of the manufacturer. Provide ballast information for each fixture. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittal: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. C. Warranty for normal ballasts, exit signs, and emergency standby ballasts.




1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall submit

complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks prior to bidding. Engineers’ evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior approval will be returned to contractor without comment.

2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Universal Ballast or prior approved equal. B. Unless otherwise noted, programmed start fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type

for use with T8 fluorescent lamps. Ballasts shall have a total harmonic distortion of 10% or less, minimum ballast factor of 0.87 and a minimum power factor of 0.95. Where noted on plans, provide high output ballasts having a ballast factor of 1.15 or medium output ballast having a ballast factor of 1.0. Maximum input wattage for normal ballast factor ballasts shall be as follows:

120V 1. One lamp: 28 watts. 2. Two lamps: 50 watts. 3. Three lamps: 78 watts. 4. Four lamps: 103 watts. C. Certify fluorescent ballast design by Certified Ballast Manufacturer, Inc.

2.03 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal. B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of

fluorescent luminaire or for remote mounting. C. Ratings: Unless noted otherwise ballasts to power one F30 lamp: 1400 lumens. Ballasts to power

two F30 lamps: 3000 lumens. Provide ballast canister for two lamp ballast for remote mounting above luminaire per manufacturer recommendations. Contractor to provide wire and conduit between ballast and luminaire.

D. Battery: Sealed pure lead type, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty.


E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an assembled luminaire.

F. Input Current Ratings: 1450 – 3500 Lumen = 280mA. 900 – 1400 Lumen = 55mA.

2.04 LAMPS A. Lamp Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Wattmiser Series or prior approved equal. B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. C. Unless otherwise noted 4 foot fluorescent lamps shall be low-mercury premium grade T8 type

instant start type rated 30 watts maximum, 2750 lumens minimum, 3500 degrees Kelvin, rendering index (CRI) of 85 or greater. Lamps shall pass federal TCLP criteria (low mercury).

D. Metal halide lamps shall have a constant color temperature of 3000 degrees Kelvin, shall be pulse

and have CRI = 85. E. Lamps of each type shall be by one manufacturer. F. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA’s to toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall

yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested per NEMA LL1 standards. G. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-pin low mercury, CRI 80 (min), 3500 deg K, average rated life of

10,000 hours unless otherwise noted. 1. 26W: T4 double or triple tube rated 1800 initial lumens (min). 2. 42W: T4 triple tube rated 3200 initial lumens (min).


A. Support recessed luminaires independent of ceiling framing. For recessed fluorescent

luminaires, provide four hanger wires fastened at corners of luminaires and at structural joists. Provide two hanger wires for recessed downlights. Supports wires shall be same type and gauge as ceiling support wires.

B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. C. Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and

with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. G. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 34 using flexible

conduit. In exposed grid ceiling areas, use premanufactured wiring systems at contractor’s option.

H. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire.


I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and

operation.

3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaries as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.

3.04 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prior to final acceptance, relamp luminaires that have failed lamps.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post TESTING FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 26-60 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 26 60 00

TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide: 1. Testing of electrical components and systems:

a. Insulation resistance test. b. Grounding electrode test. c. Continuity test. d. Voltage test. e. Phase relationship verification. f. Fire alarm acceptance test.

2. Test reports. 3. Correction of defective components or systems. 4. Retest of corrected components, systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer. 1. Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include:

a. Project Number. b. Project title and location. c. Test performed. d. Date performed. e. Test equipment used. f. Contractor's name, address and telephone number. g. Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than Contractor. h. Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):

1. Performing test. 2. Observing test.

i. Statement verifying each test. j. Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested. k. Test results. l. Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.

2. For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,

"Electrical Test Reports". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all electrical work is complete and ready for testing.

B. Disconnect all devices or equipment that might be damaged by application of test voltages, voltage of reversed phase sequence or other test procedures.

3.02 TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance.


3.03 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS

A. Resistance measured; line-to-ground.

B. Perform testing on the following items: Min. Acceptance

Item Tested Voltage of Test Resistance in Megohms 1. No. 2 and larger

cables (600V) 1000V 50 2. Motors 500V 5 3. Switchboard and Panelboard Buses 1000V 25

3.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODE TEST: Measure and record ground resistance from system neutral connection at

service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Maximum acceptable resistance: 10 ohms. When resistance exceeds 10 ohms drive and bond another ground rod, one ground rod length away and repeat test.

3.05 CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and

connections. 3.06 VOLTAGE TESTS

A. Make and record voltage tests and recorded at the following listed points. Conduct tests under normal load conditions. 1. New main distribution panel. 2. Terminals of all motors.

3.07 PHASE RELATIONSHIP

A. Examine connections to equipment for proper phase relationships. Verify proper motor rotation. 3.08 FIRE ALARM ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Have the fire alarm acceptance test performed by the Alarm Company Representative and Installing Contractor in the presence of the Base Fire Chief's Representative.

B. Acceptance Test Procedures:

EXPECTED INDICATION ON PANEL/RECEIVING STATION PREMISES AND REMOTE STATION 1. Normal Power to Panel (Normal) 2. Disconnect Power to Panel (Trouble) 3. Activate Detection Device (Alarm) 4. Silence Alarm Signaling Devices (Trouble) 5. Return Normal Power to Panel & Reset Panel (Normal) 6. Place Each Function Switch in an Abnormal Position (Trouble) 7. Remove supervised Devices from System (During

this portion of testing, ensure proper wire has been used and devices are properly installed.)

8. Return Supervised Device to System (Normal) 9. Disconnect Normal Power to Panel (Trouble) 10. Activate Detector(s) for each Zone (Alarm) 11. Inspect all Horns Zone Indication, and Auxiliary Devices (Working List) 12. Silence Horns (Alarm/Trouble) 13. Reset System (Trouble) 14. Return Normal Power to System (Normal) 15. Place Panel in Alarm Condition. Disconnect Primary

Power Source for a Minimum of 15 Seconds and Return to Normal Power. (The above transfer procedure shall not


cause a loss of an alarm condition at Receiving Station.)

3.09 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS

A. When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.

B. When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or equipment. Test

repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.

END OF SECTION

Food Conversion – Fort Bragg North Post FIRE ALARM FORT BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA 28 31 11 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0530-17-000013 I PWBA 170704

SECTION 28 31 11 FIRE ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Fire protection systems are life-safety systems and will therefore be designed, installed, tested, and expected to perform as such.

B. This Section includes fire alarm systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

E. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, Contracting Officer, or Owners insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be Base fire chief.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. All references shall be of the latest edition.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 4. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems 5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards: 1. UL 864 Control Panels. 2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC). 4. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 5. UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling. 6. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

D. Building Codes: 1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code

E. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.

F. Military Unified Facilities Criteria: 1. UFC 3-600-01


2. UFC 3-601-02

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Extend existing Honeywell zoned fire alarm control panel to areas of new work.

B. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection devices for over ten years.

C. The system as specified shall be reviewed, fully tested and approved by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

D. In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with a single supplier for fire alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and testing.

E. The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of trades.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: All submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The contractor shall include the following information in submittals. 1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Registered Fire Protection Engineer.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device zone List: Coordinate final system programming with owner and base fire department.

4. System riser diagram with device zones, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.

6. Batteries: Size calculations. 7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each

detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturers written recommendations.

8. Elevation Details: Details shall be provided showing mounting of wall and ceiling devices. Where exposed or pocketed ceilings are involved, specific dimensioned details of detector and notification devices shall be provided.

9. Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided. 10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.

Show size and route of cable and conduits. CADD files for floor plans may be obtained through General Contractor from the Architect/Engineer. Allow for minimum two-week return.


C. Cut Sheets, Calculations, and other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections. 1. Detection Devices 2. Audio/Visual Devices 3. System Components, Modules and Relays 4. Voltage Calculations (summary of results shall also be on plans) 5. Compatibility Listings (matrix, table, or info showing device compatibility) 6. Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and

UFC 3-600-02 7. Designer and installer qualifications

D. Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture representation shall be provided.

E. Field quality-control test reports. Contractor shall test 100% of existing fire alarm system to document its status prior to beginning work. Test existing system with store manager and fire department representative present. Testing shall be done during non-customer hours. Schedule testing a minimum of two weeks in advance. Provide written documentation of test results noting any issues found. Submit report to A/E for review with owner. Any issues found during testing shall be considered not in contract unless otherwise directed. Alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. Tester shall provide spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Contracting Officer for review.

H. Documentation: 1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to

NFPA 72 to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to

NFPA 72 to Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. (a) Typed hard copies on paper to Owner.

I. A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including those to the engineer, owner, and local AHJ’s.

J. Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the Contracting Officer.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Qualifications: 1. The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the

State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer upon request.

2. The contractor shall employ on staff a registered Fire Protection Engineer. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee the system installation. This individual will be held accountable for system oversight, code compliance, and quality of installation. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Qualified individual shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

3. At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight anytime fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

4. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a Registered Fire Protection Engineer with proven and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes. Plans not prepared by the Registered Fire Protection Engineer shall not be approved. Design documents shall bear a seal of the engineer.

5. The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this specification shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Existing FACP: b. Honeywell.

2. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

3. Audible and Visual Signals: a. Gentex Corporation. b. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company. c. Wheelock, Inc.


2.02 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description: 1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

B. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when

tested according to UL 268A.

2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted

in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied

detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 8. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 9. Relay for Equipment Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan control or power circuit. 10. Combination remote status LED and magnetic test switch mounted flush in ceiling directly

below device. In exposed ceiling areas, remote mount status LED adjacent to nearest exterior exit next to manual pull station. Label devices to match HVAC schedule.

2.03 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. Color shall be white.

1. Visible Alarm Devices. Unless otherwise noted, provide separate Xenon strobes for fire alarm and mass notification in a single ceiling mounting assembly. Fire alarm strobe shall be clear polycarbonate with “FIRE” engraved in 1” high letters on lens. Provide RED devices.

2.04 REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and magnetic test stations when detector is above accessible ceiling, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the duct smoke detector, smoke detector, or valve is located. For water-flow


switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.05 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Plenum rated twisted, shielded pair, No. 14 AWG.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Plenum rated solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is fully operational, tested and documented for existing status before making changes or connections to existing fire alarm system.

B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct. Provide 36” square access hatch with operable door and latch per architectural specifications for all devices located above inaccessible ceilings.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. Label device to match HVAC schedule.

E. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

F. No portion of a fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been approved and stamped by the Contracting Officer and the local AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage. 1. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the construction cleanup of all trades

is complete per NFPA 72. Any smoke detector that has been installed prior to the construction cleanup of all trades and without prior written approval of the engineer and local AHJ shall be marked in a permanent manner that will identify it from re-use and shall be replaced prior to commissioning of the system and/or turning over to the owner. Such detectors shall be replaced at the sole expense of the installing contractor. Subject to approval of the engineer and local AHJ this may exclude services, which do not create air-born particles such as telephone/network services, and modular furniture installation.

2. Orange shipping covers, rubber gloves, tape, or other devices shall not be used to bypass these basic requirements.


3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following: 1. NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 26 Section “Raceways and Boxes.” 1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm

system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

2. Devices shall be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and calculations. Changes must be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire routing may require new calculations.

3. Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4" EMT Type. 4. Paint all fire alarm conduit and boxes red. See Division 26, Identification.

C. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, power booster panels shall not be fed from a separate notification power booster panel (daisy chained).

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification”.

B. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

C. All initiating devices shall have permanent making indicated zone in FACP.

3.05 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.


A. Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing:


1. This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing contractor that shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ testing is scheduled.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any system devices are installed or energized.

3. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. Tester shall provide typed spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

5. Duct smoke detectors shall not be installed or in-place when the HVAC systems are first turned on. All HVAC systems shall be run sufficiently to remove loose dust and debris. Failure to protect detectors may result in detector replacement per this specification.

6. Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings, and carpeting are in place.

7. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

8. Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and installed in a quality manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.

9. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of Magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is Strictly Prohibited.

10. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

11. Air velocity readings shall be taken and recorded for each HVAC related smoke detector.

12. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests available.

13. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests: a. Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance. c. Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes. d. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air

duct smoke detector sampling assemblies. e. Calibrated decibel meter.

B. At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented. 1. Turn each sprinkler system flow valve two full turns and verify proper supervisory

alarm at the FACP. 2. Verify activation of all flow switches under approved flowing conditions. 3. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 1. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 2. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal

actuates. 3. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.


4. Check presence and audibility of tone throughout building spaces. This includes measuring dBA levels.

5. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the Walk Test feature.

6. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

7. Each notification circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. Any circuit that measures less than 16 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for guidance.

8. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and the owner. Testing shall be scheduled with all parties minimum 10 working days in advance. 1. This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has

been completed and is in compliance with applicable requirements. 2. A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting

this testing. 3. The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the

manufacturers required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA 72. If this specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.

4. A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

5. The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

6. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is strictly prohibited

7. New detectors that show to be dirty through system sensitivity testing shall be replaced.

8. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following: a. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the

systems subsequence operation: 1) Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits. 2) Primary and Battery power disconnected. 3) End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.

b. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed.

Audibility and visual levels meet required standards. c. A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every

occupiable space (throughout) per NFPA 72. This includes storage rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable space.


d. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and any remote annunciator.

e. System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble, correct address, facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.

f. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this specification.

3.08 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings, and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands. 4. Provide a copy of the FACP system programming on a CD-ROM.

B. A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in O & M package. 3.09 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. The installation contractor shall familiarize the owner and/or owner representative with location of all fire alarm panels, modules, devices, wire routing, and plan cabinet contents.

B. The installation contractor shall furnish training as follows: 1. A simplified training manual on system operation unique to the system shall be

prepared and presented to the owner. This manual shall cover key items and day-to-day operation. Such manual shall be presented in a professional and legible format such as that provided through use of a Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Word.

2. The owner shall be provided with at least 3 hard-copies and an electronic PDF format that can be edited through commonly available software.

3. The training program shall be presented such that the owner can readily train new staff over the life of the system.

4. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. This shall include emphasis that alarms shall not be silenced until after a complete and thorough investigation has been conducted. If there is a hazard, then only the fire department is authorized to silence an alarm.

5. Sequence of operation for all interconnected systems. 6. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions

from the system control panel. 7. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 4 hours but shall be

sufficient to cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two such training sessions to cover day and night shift managers.

END OF SECTION

FOOD CONVERSION - Exchange

Documents

Transcript of FOOD CONVERSION - Exchange